Systems Manual Simatic ET200S.pdf

8/15/2019 Systems Manual Simatic ET200S.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/systems-manual-simatic-et200spdf 1/664

SIMATIC ET 200S Distributed I/O System ET200S

______________ ______________ ______________ ______________ ______________ ______________ ______________ ______________ ______________ ______________ ______________ ______________ ______________ ______________

______________ ______________ ______________ ______________

______________

______________

Preface

Product overview 1Brief Instructions onComm issioning ET 200S 2

Configuration options 3

Installation 4

Wiring and Assembling 5Comm issioning andDiagnostics 6Gene ral technicalspecifications 7

Interface mo dules 8

Terminal modules 9

Power modules 10

Digital Electronic M odules 11

Analog electronic modules 12

4 IQ SE NSE 13

RESERVE modules 14

Order numbers A

Dimension drawings BAddress spac e of the inputsand outputs C

Response Times DDetermining the LeakageResistance of an ET 200SStation

E

Special Measures forInterference Free Operation F

SIMATIC

Distributed I/O System ET 200S

Operating Instructions

Edition 07/2005EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

The following supplement is part of this documentation:

No. Designation Drawing number Edition

1 Product information A5E00352937-02 01/20052 Product information A5E00583609-01 07/2005



afety Guidelines

This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to preventdamage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alertsymbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below aregraded according to the degree of danger.

Danger

indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

Warning

indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

Caution

with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

Caution

without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.

Noticeindicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken intoaccount.

If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger willbe used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating toproperty damage.

Qualified PersonnelThe device/system may only be set up and used in conjunction with this documentation. Commissioning andoperation of a device/system may only be performed by qualified personnel . Within the context of the safety notesin this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, ground andlabel devices, systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards.

Prescribed U sageNote the following:

Warning

This device may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical description and only inconnection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have been approved or recommendedby Siemens. Correct, reliable operation of the product requires proper transport, storage, positioning andassembly as well as careful operation and maintenance.

TrademarksAll names identified by ® are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in thispublication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the

owner.Disclaimer o f Liability

We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and softwaredescribed. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, theinformation in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequenteditions.

Siemens AGAutomation and DrivesPostfach 48 4890437 NÜRNBERGGERMANY

Order No.: EWA-4NEB 780602402-14Edition 09/2005

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005.Technical data subject to change



Distributed I/O System ET200SOperating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14 iii

Preface

Purpose of the manualThe information in this manual enables you to operate the distributed I/O system ET 200S onthe PROFIBUS DP as DP-Slave:• As a DP slave on PROFIBUS DP• As a PROFINET IO device on PROFINET

Required level of knowledgeKnowledge of the field of automation engineering is required to understand the manual.

Scope of the manualThis manual applies to the components of the ET 200S distributed I/O system specified inthe appendix.The manual contains a description of the components that were valid at the time the manualwas published. We reserve the right to enclose a Product Information bulletin containingup-to-date information regarding new components and new versions of components.

Changes since the previous versionThe following changes/additions have been made since the previous version of the manual:• Function enhancement for interface module IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE• Function enhancement for interface module IM151-3 PN

ApprovalsSee "Standards, certifications, and approvals."

CE certificationSee "Standards, certifications, and approvals."

Labeling for Australia (C-tick mark)See "Standards, certifications, and approvals."



Preface

Distributed I/O System ET200Siv Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

StandardsSee "Standards, certifications, and approvals."

Position in the information landscapeThe following table shows an overview of the contents of the handbooks for the ET 200S:

Manual Contents

ET 200S Distributed I/O System • Installing and wiring of ET 200S• Commissioning and diagnostics of ET 200S• Technical specifications of IM151-1, digital, and analog

electronic modules• Order numbers for ET 200S

ET 200S Motor StartersFail-Safe Motor StartersSafety-Integrated SIGUARD System

• Installing and wiring of motor starters• Commissioning and diagnostics of motor starters• Technical specifications of motor starters• Fail-safe motor starters• Safety-integrated SIGUARD system• Order numbers for motor starters

PROFINET System Description • Basic principles of PROFINET• Network components and structures• Data exchange and communication• PROFINET engineering

From PROFIBUS DP to PROFINET IO • Differences• Blocks• System status lists• Diagnostics

ET 200S IM151-7 CPU Interface Module and Instruction List • Addressing of IM151-7 CPU• ET 200S with IM151-7 CPU in the PROFIBUS network• Commissioning and diagnostics of IM151-7 CPU• Technical specifications of the IM151-7 CPU

ET 200S FC Frequency Converter operating instructions • Installation• Commissioning• Open- and closed-loop control techniques• Protection and monitoring functions• Technical specifications

ET 200S FC Frequency Converter list manual • Parameter list•

Function diagrams• Alarm and fault messages

Positioning ET 200S • 1STEP 5V/204kHz• 1POS INC/Digital• 1POS SSI/Digital• 1POS INC/Analog• 1POS SSI/Analog

Technological functions ET 200S • 1COUNT 24V/100kHz• 1COUNT 5V/500kHz• 1SSI• 2PULSE



Preface

Distributed I/O System ET200SOperating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14 v

Manual Contents

Serial Interface Module ET 200S • 1SI 3964/ASCII• 1SI MODBUS/USS

Fail-safe modules • 4/8 F-DI DC24V PROFIsafe• 4 F-DO DC24/2A PROFIsafe

SIWAREX CS • Measurement of weight and power valuesThe manuals are available on the Internet in the languages German, English, French, Spanish and Italian(see Service & Support on the Internet).

GuideYou can quickly access specific information in the manual by using the following aids:• At the start of the manual you will find a complete table of contents and a list of the

figures and tables that appear in the manual.• An overview of the contents of each section is indicated on the left of each page

throughout the manual.• Following the appendices, you will find a glossary in which important technical terms used

in the manual are defined.• At the end of the manual you will find a comprehensive index enabling rapid access to the

information you are looking for.

Special noteIn addition to this manual, you will also need the manual for the DP master or PROFINET IO

controller you are using (see appendix).

Note

This manual contains a detailed listing of the contents of the ET 200S manuals (reference in"See also"). We recommend that you begin by orienting yourself to the manuals (andportions thereof) that are most relevant to solving your task.

Recycling and disposalDue to the fact that it is low in contaminants, the ET 200S is recyclable. Contact a certifiedelectronic-waste disposal company to recycle and dispose of your old equipment in anenvironment-friendly manner.

SIMAT IC Technical Support, Contact Persons and TrainingYou will find information on this in the product information on the intranet athttp://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/19293011

http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19293011





Preface

Distributed I/O System ET200Svi Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

See alsoModule order numbers (Page A-1) Order numbers for connecting cables for 4 IQ-SENSE electronic module (Page A-9)

Order numbers for ET 200S spare parts (Page A-8) Order numbers for ET 200S network components (Page A-7) Order numbers for ET 200S accessories (Page A-6) Standards, certifications, and approvals (Page 7-1) Order numbers for manuals (Page A-9)



Distributed I/O System ET200SOperating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14 vii

Table of contentsPre face ..................................................................................................................................................... .iii

1 Prod uct ove rview .................................................................................................................................... 1-1

1.1 What are distributed I/O systems?............................................................................................. 1-1 1.2 What is PROFINET IO? ............................................................................................................. 1-3 1.3 What is the ET 200S distributed I/O system?............................................................................ 1-4

1.4 Guide to the ET 200S manuals................................................................................................ 1-10 2 Brief Instruction s on Com missioning ET 200 S ........................................................................................ 2-1

2.1 Commissioning on PROFIBUS DP............................................................................................ 2-1 2.1.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................ 2-1 2.1.2 Example: Installing ET 200S...................................................................................................... 2-3 2.1.3 Example: Wiring and assembling ET 200S ............................................................................... 2-4 2.1.4 Example: Configuring ET 200S in SIMATIC Manager...............................................................2-5 2.1.5 Example: Creating a user program............................................................................................ 2-6 2.1.6 Example: Switching on ET 200S................................................................................................ 2-6 2.1.7 Example: Evaluating diagnostic messages ............................................................................... 2-7 2.2 Commissioning on PROFINET IO ........................................................................................... 2-10 2.2.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................................. 2-10 2.2.2 Example: Installing and wiring ET 200S .................................................................................. 2-12 2.2.3 Example: Configuring ET 200S in SIMATIC Manager.............................................................2-13 2.2.4 Example: Assigning device names for the IO device............................................................... 2-14 2.2.5 Example: Creating a user program.......................................................................................... 2-14 2.2.6 Example: Switching on ET 200S.............................................................................................. 2-15 2.2.7 Example: Evaluating diagnostic messages ............................................................................. 2-16

3 Co nfigura tion options .............................................................................................................................. 3-1

3.1 Precisely Modular System ......................................................................................................... 3-1 3.2 ET 200S Power Supply.............................................................................................................. 3-3 3.3 Placing power modules and connecting them to common potential.......................................... 3-4

3.4 Configuration options for the interface modules ........................................................................ 3-6 3.5 Configuration options between the terminal modules and electronic modules ......................... 3-9 3.5.1 Electronic modules and applications ......................................................................................... 3-9 3.5.2 Identifying the proper terminal module for a power module ....................................................3-14 3.5.3 Configuration example: Terminal modules for power modules ............................................... 3-16 3.5.4 Identifying the proper terminal module for an electronic module.............................................3-19 3.5.5 Configuration example: Terminal modules for electronic modules..........................................3-20 3.6 Direct data exchange on PROFIBUS DP ................................................................................ 3-23 3.7 Isochronous operation on PROFIBUS DP............................................................................... 3-25 3.7.1 Cycle Synchronization on the PROFIBUS DP - Basics........................................................... 3-25 3.7.2 Parameterizing Cycle Synchronization .................................................................................... 3-26 3.7.3 Fault correction during isochronous operation on PROFIBUS DP.......................................... 3-29



Table of contents

Distributed I/O System ET200Sviii Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

3.8 Option handling on PROFIBUS DP ......................................................................................... 3-30 3.8.1 Basic principles of option handling on PROFIBUS DP............................................................3-303.8.2 Principle of operation of option handling..................................................................................3-30 3.8.3 Requirements for option handling ............................................................................................ 3-32 3.8.4 Example: Use of RESERVE modules...................................................................................... 3-33 3.8.5 Assigning parameters for option handling................................................................................ 3-34 3.8.6 Controlling and monitoring options ..........................................................................................3-35 3.8.7 Fault correction during option handling.................................................................................... 3-37 3.9 Identification data ..................................................................................................................... 3-38 3.10 Use of the ET 200S in a redundant system ............................................................................. 3-41 3.11 Limitations on the number of modules that can be connected/maximum configuration.......... 3-43

4 Installation .............................................................................................................................................. 4-1

4.1 Basic principles of installation .................................................................................................... 4-1 4.2 Mounting the interface module................................................................................................... 4-4

4.3 Mounting the TM-P and TM-E terminal modules .......................................................................4-64.4 Replacing the terminal box on the terminal module................................................................... 4-94.5 Mounting the terminating module............................................................................................. 4-11 4.6 Mounting the shield connection ............................................................................................... 4-13 4.7 Applying slot number plates and color-coding plates .............................................................. 4-154.8 Setting the PROFIBUS address............................................................................................... 4-17

5 Wiring and Asse mb ling ........................................................................................................................... 5-1

5.1 General rules and regulations for operating the ET 200S ......................................................... 5-15.2 Operating the ET 200S on a grounded incoming supply ........................................................... 5-3 5.3 Electrical configuration of the ET 200S...................................................................................... 5-6 5.4 Wiring the ET 200S .................................................................................................................... 5-7 5.4.1 Wiring rules for ET 200S............................................................................................................ 5-7 5.4.2 Wiring a terminal module with screw terminals..........................................................................5-7 5.4.3 Wiring a terminal module with spring terminals .........................................................................5-8 5.4.4 Wiring terminal modules with Fast Connect............................................................................... 5-9 5.4.5 Wiring terminal modules........................................................................................................... 5-12 5.4.6 Terminal assignment of terminal module with inserted power module....................................5-15 5.4.7 Terminal assignment of terminal module with inserted electronic module ..............................5-16 5.4.8 Wiring the IM151-1 BASIC, IM151-1 STANDARD, and IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE

interface modules..................................................................................................................... 5-17 5.4.9 Wiring IM151-3 PN interface module .......................................................................................5-19

5.4.10 Wiring the IM151-1 FO STANDARD interface module ............................................................5-205.5 Inserting and identifying electronic modules............................................................................ 5-25 5.5.1 Inserting and identifying electronic modules ............................................................................ 5-25 5.5.2 Removing and inserting electronic modules ............................................................................ 5-28 5.6 Assigning a device name for the IO device.............................................................................. 5-30

6 Comm issioning and Diagnostics ............................................................................................................. 6-1

6.1 Safety tests prior to commissioning ........................................................................................... 6-1 6.2 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFIBUS DP.................................................................. 6-1 6.2.1 Basic principles of project design for the ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP...................................... 6-1 6.2.2 Configuring ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP ................................................................................... 6-3



Table of contents

Distributed I/O System ET200SOperating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14 ix

6.2.2.1 Integrating the GSD file in your configuration software .............................................................6-3 6.2.2.2 Grouping modules for configuration........................................................................................... 6-4 6.2.2.3 Grouping of digital input modules .............................................................................................. 6-6 6.2.2.4 Grouping of digital output modules ............................................................................................ 6-7 6.2.2.5 Grouping of motor starters ......................................................................................................... 6-8 6.2.2.6 Example of a project design....................................................................................................... 6-8 6.2.3 Commissioning and startup of ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP.................................................... 6-10 6.2.3.1 Commissioning ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP........................................................................... 6-10 6.2.3.2 Startup of the ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP.............................................................................. 6-11 6.2.4 Diagnostics using LED display................................................................................................. 6-13 6.2.4.1 LED displays on the interface module ..................................................................................... 6-13 6.2.4.2 LED displays on the power module ......................................................................................... 6-15 6.2.4.3 LED displays on digital electronic modules ............................................................................. 6-16 6.2.4.4 LED displays on analog electronic modules ............................................................................ 6-17 6.2.4.5 LED displays on the 1COUNT 24V/100kHz electronic module ...............................................6-18 6.2.4.6 LED displays on the 1COUNT 5V/500kHz electronic module .................................................6-19 6.2.4.7 LED displays on the 1SSI electronic module........................................................................... 6-20 6.2.4.8 LED displays on the STEP 5V/204kHz electronic module ...................................................... 6-21 6.2.4.9 LED displays on the 2PULSE electronic module..................................................................... 6-22 6.2.4.10 LED displays on the 1POS INC/Digital, 1POS SSI/Digital, 1POS INC/Analog, and

1POS SSI/Analog electronic modules ..................................................................................... 6-23 6.2.4.11 LED displays on the 1SI 3964/ASCII and 1SI Modbus/USS serial interface module.............. 6-25 6.2.4.12 LED displays on the 4 IQ-SENSE electronic module .............................................................. 6-26 6.2.5 Diagnostic messages of the electronic modules...................................................................... 6-27 6.2.6 Evaluating interrupts by ET 200S ............................................................................................ 6-27 6.2.7 Diagnostics with STEP 5 and STEP 7 ..................................................................................... 6-29 6.2.7.1 Reading out the diagnostics..................................................................................................... 6-29 6.2.7.2 Structure of the slave diagnostics ............................................................................................ 6-32 6.2.7.3 Station statuses 1 to 3 ............................................................................................................. 6-34 6.2.7.4 Master PROFIBUS address..................................................................................................... 6-35 6.2.7.5 Manufacturer ID ....................................................................................................................... 6-36 6.2.7.6 Identifier-related diagnostics .................................................................................................... 6-36 6.2.7.7 Module status........................................................................................................................... 6-37 6.2.7.8 Channel-specific diagnostics ................................................................................................... 6-40 6.2.7.9 Interrupts.................................................................................................................................. 6-49 6.2.7.10 Incorrect configuration states of ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP................................................. 6-57 6.3 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFINET IO ................................................................. 6-59 6.3.1 Configuring ET 200S on PROFIBUS IO ..................................................................................6-59 6.3.1.1 Basic principles of configuration for the ET 200S on PROFINET IO.......................................6-59 6.3.1.2 Integrating the GSD file in your configuration software ...........................................................6-59 6.3.1.3 Combine modules for the configuration ................................................................................... 6-60 6.3.2 Commissioning and startup of ET 200S on PROFINET IO ..................................................... 6-61 6.3.3 Diagnostics using LED display................................................................................................. 6-63 6.3.4 Diagnostic messages of the electronic modules...................................................................... 6-65 6.3.5 Evaluating interrupts of ET 200S ............................................................................................. 6-66 6.3.6 Differences in the replacement value behavior........................................................................ 6-67 6.3.7 Diagnostics with STEP 7.......................................................................................................... 6-68 6.3.7.1 Reading out the diagnostics..................................................................................................... 6-68 6.3.7.2 Channel diagnostics................................................................................................................. 6-68 6.3.7.3 Incorrect configuration states of ET 200S on PROFINET IO ..................................................6-72 6.3.7.4 Interruption of the ET 200S backplane bus ............................................................................. 6-72 6.3.7.5 Failure of the load voltage of the power module...................................................................... 6-75 6.3.7.6 STOP of IO controller and recovery of IO device .................................................................... 6-75



Table of contents

Distributed I/O System ET200Sx Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

7 Genera l techn ical spec ifications ............................................................................................................. 7-1

7.1 Standards, certifications, and approvals .................................................................................... 7-1 7.2 Electromagnetic compatibility .................................................................................................... 7-6

7.3 Transport and storage conditions .............................................................................................. 7-8 7.4 Mechanical and climatic environmental conditions.................................................................... 7-87.5 Specifications for dielectric tests, protection class, degree of protection, and rated

voltage of the ET 200S............................................................................................................. 7-117.6 Variations in general technical specifications for the ET 200S FC frequency converter ......... 7-12

8 Interface mo dule s ................................................................................................................................... 8-1

8.1 Parameters for interface modules.............................................................................................. 8-1 8.1.1 Parameters for the IM151-1 BASIC interface module ............................................................... 8-18.1.2 Parameters for interface module IM151-1 STANDARD, IM151-1 FO STANDARD and

IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE ..........................................................................................................8-2 8.1.3 Parameters for the IM151-3 PN interface module ..................................................................... 8-38.2 Parameter description for the interface modules ....................................................................... 8-48.2.1 DP interrupt mode ...................................................................................................................... 8-4 8.2.2 Bus length .................................................................................................................................. 8-4 8.2.3 Operation at Preset <> Actual Configuration ............................................................................. 8-4 8.2.4 Option handling, general ............................................................................................................ 8-5 8.2.5 Option handling: slots 2 to 63..................................................................................................... 8-5 8.2.6 Diagnostic interrupt .................................................................................................................... 8-5 8.2.7 Hardware interrupt ..................................................................................................................... 8-6 8.2.8 Insert/remove-module interrupt.................................................................................................. 8-6 8.2.9 Analog-value format ................................................................................................................... 8-6 8.2.10 Interference frequency suppression........................................................................................... 8-6 8.2.11 Reference junction input ............................................................................................................ 8-7

8.2.12 Reference junction input ............................................................................................................ 8-7 8.2.13 Synchronize DP slave with DP cycle ......................................................................................... 8-7 8.2.14 Time Ti (read in process values)................................................................................................ 8-7 8.2.15 Time To (output process values) ............................................................................................... 8-8 8.3 IM151-1 BASIC interface module (6ES7151-1CA00-0AB0)......................................................8-9 8.4 IM151-1 STANDARD interface module (6ES7151-1AA04-0AB0)...........................................8-12 8.5 IM151-1 FO STANDARD interface module (6ES7151-1AB03-0AB0).....................................8-16 8.6 Interface module IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE (6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0)....................................8-20 8.7 Interface module IM151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0)..........................................................8-248.7.1 Features of the IM151-3 PN interface module......................................................................... 8-24 8.7.2 SNMP....................................................................................................................................... 8-28 8.7.3 SIMATIC Micro Memory Card for IM151-3 PN ........................................................................8-288.7.4 Updating the firmware of the IM151-3 PN................................................................................8-30

9 Term inal mo dule s ................................................................................................................................... 9-1

9.1 Assignment of terminal modules to power modules and electronic modules ............................ 9-1 9.2 TM-P15S23-A1, TM-P15C23-A1, and TM-P15N23-A1 terminal modules

(6ES7193-4CCx0-0AA0)............................................................................................................ 9-4 9.3 TM-P15S23-A0, TM-P15C23-A0, and TM-P15N23-A0 terminal modules

(6ES7193-4CDx0-0AA0)............................................................................................................ 9-6 9.4 TM-P15S22-01, TM-P15C22-01, and TM-P15N22-01 terminal modules

(6ES7193-4CEx0-0AA0)............................................................................................................ 9-8



Table of contents

Distributed I/O System ET200SOperating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14 xi

9.5 TM-P30S44-A0 and TM-P30C44-A0 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CKx0-0AA0) ..................9-109.6 TM-PF30S47-F1 terminal module (for PM-D F 24 VDC) (3RK1 903-3AA00) .........................9-139.7 TM-E15S26-A1, TM-E15C26-A1, and TM-E15N26-A1 universal terminal modules

(6ES7193-4CAx0-0AA0)..........................................................................................................9-15 9.8 TM-E15S24-A1, TM-E15C24-A1, and TM-E15N24-A1 terminal modules

(6ES7193-4CAx0-0AA0)..........................................................................................................9-18 9.9 TM-E15S24-01, TM-E15C24-01, and TM-E15N24-01 terminal modules

(6ES7193-4CBx0-0AA0).......................................................................................................... 9-20 9.10 TM-E15S23-01, TM-E15C23-01, and TM-E15N23-01 terminal modules

(6ES7193-4CBx0-0AA0).......................................................................................................... 9-22 9.11 TM-E15S24-AT and TM-E15C24-AT terminal modules (6ES7193-4CLx0-0AA0) ..................9-24 9.12 TM-E30S44-01 and TM-E30C44-01 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CGx0-0AA0) ..................9-279.13 TM-E30S46-A1 and TM-E30C46-A1 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CFx0-0AA0) ..................9-29

10 Pow er mo dule s ..................................................................................................................................... 10-110.1 Parameters for power modules................................................................................................ 10-110.2 PM-E 24 VDC power module (6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0) ..........................................................10-210.3 PM-E 24-48 VDC power module (6ES7138-4CA50-0AA0).....................................................10-510.4 PM-E 24-48 VDC, 24-230 VAC power module (6ES7138-4CB10-0AB0) ...............................10-8

11 Digital Electro nic Mo dule s .................................................................................................................... 11-1

11.1 Parameters for digital electronic modules................................................................................ 11-111.1.1 Parameters for digital input modules ....................................................................................... 11-111.1.2 Parameters for 4DI NAMUR .................................................................................................... 11-311.1.3 Parameters for digital output modules ..................................................................................... 11-411.2 Parameter description for the digital electronic modules......................................................... 11-511.2.1 Hardware interrupt ................................................................................................................... 11-511.2.2 Input delay................................................................................................................................ 11-511.2.3 Trigger for hardware interrupt, rising edge .............................................................................. 11-511.2.4 Pulse stretching........................................................................................................................ 11-511.2.5 Chatter monitoring ................................................................................................................... 11-711.3 2DI 24 VDC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BB01-0AA0). .......................................11-911.4 4DI 24 VDC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD01-0AA0)......................................11-1311.5 4DI 24 VDC/SRC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD51-0AA0) .............................11-1711.6 2DI 24 VDC High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0)......................11-21

11.7 4DI 24 VDC High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD01-0AB0) .....................11-2511.8 4DI 24-48 VUC High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7131-4CD00-0AB0) ................11-2911.9 4DI NAMUR digital electronic module (6ES7131-4RD00-0AB0)...........................................11-3311.10 2DI 120 VAC Standard digital electronic module (6ES7131-4EB00-0AB0) ..........................11-4111.11 2DI 230 VAC Standard digital electronic module (6ES7131-4FB00-0AB0) ..........................11-4511.12 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB01-0AA0).................11-4911.13 4DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BD01-0AA0) ................11-5411.14 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0) ..........11-5911.15 2DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB31-0AA0)....................11-64



Table of contents

Distributed I/O System ET200Sxii Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

11.16 4DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BD31-0AA0)....................11-6911.17 2DO 24 VDC/2 A High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB31-0AB0)..............11-7411.18 Digital electronic module 2DO 24 to 230 VAC (6ES7132-4FB00-0AB0)...............................11-79

11.19 2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A digital electronic module(6ES7132-4HB01-0AB0)........................................................................................................ 11-8411.20 2RO NO/NC 24-48 VDC/5 A 24-230 VAC/5 A digital electronic module

(6ES7132-4HB10-0AB0)........................................................................................................ 11-9012 Ana log electronic mo dule s.................................................................................................................... 12-1

12.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................................. 12-112.2 Analog value representation .................................................................................................... 12-112.2.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................. 12-112.2.2 Analog value representation for measuring ranges with SIMATIC S7 .................................... 12-212.2.3 Measuring ranges of the analog input modules in SIMATIC S7 format for voltage,

current, and resistance-type sensors....................................................................................... 12-4

12.2.4 Measuring ranges of the analog input modules in SIMATIC S7 format for resistancethermometer............................................................................................................................. 12-612.2.5 Measuring ranges of the analog input modules in SIMATIC S7 format for thermocouples.....12-912.2.6 Output ranges of the analog output modules in SIMATIC S7 format for voltage

and current ............................................................................................................................. 12-1212.3 Fundamentals of analog value processing ............................................................................ 12-1312.3.1 Connecting measuring sensors ............................................................................................. 12-1312.3.2 Connecting thermocouples .................................................................................................... 12-1812.3.3 Connecting unused channels of analog input modules ......................................................... 12-2312.4 Behavior of the analog modules during operation and in the event of problems................... 12-2412.4.1 Influence of supply voltage and operating state on analog input and output values ............. 12-2412.4.2 Effect of the value range for the analog input ........................................................................ 12-25

12.4.3 Effect of the value range for the analog output ...................................................................... 12-2512.4.4 Use of the shield connection .................................................................................................. 12-2612.5 Parameters for analog electronic modules ............................................................................ 12-2612.5.1 Parameters for analog electronic modules 2AI U ST, 2AI I 2WIRE ST,

4AI I 2WIRE ST, and 2AI I 4WIRE ST ...................................................................................12-2612.5.2 Parameters for analog electronic modules 2AI U HF and 2AI I 2/4WIRE HF........................12-2712.5.3 Parameters for analog electronic modules 2AI U High Speed, 2AI I 2WIRE High Speed,

and 2AI I 4WIRE High Speed................................................................................................. 12-2812.5.4 Parameters for analog electronic modules 2AI RTD ST, 2AI TC ST,

and 2AI TC HF ....................................................................................................................... 12-2912.5.5 Parameters for 2AI RTD High Feature analog electronic module ......................................... 12-3112.5.6 Parameters for analog electronic modules 2AO U ST, 2AO U HF and 2AO I ST,

2AO I HF ................................................................................................................................ 12-3412.5.7 Parameter description for the analog electronic modules...................................................... 12-3512.6 2AI U Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4FB01-0AB0) .....................................12-3712.7 2AI U High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4LB00-0AB0) ...............................12-4112.8 2AI U High Speed analog electronic module (6ES7134-4FB51-0AB0).................................12-4612.9 2AI I 2WIRE Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB01-0AB0)..........................12-5012.10 Analog electronic module 4AI I 2WIRE ST (6ES7134-4GD00-0AB0) ...................................12-5412.11 2AI I 2WIRE High Speed analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB51-0AB0) .....................12-5712.12 2AI I 4WIRE Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB11-0AB0)..........................12-6112.13 2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4MB00-0AB0) ................12-65



Table of contents

Distributed I/O System ET200SOperating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14 xiii

12.14 2AI I 4WIRE High Speed analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB61-0AB0) .....................12-69 12.15 2AI RTD Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4JB50-0AB0).................................12-73 12.16 2AI RTD High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4NB51-0AB0) .........................12-77

12.17 2AI TC Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4JB00-0AB0) ...................................12-85 12.18 2AI TC High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4NB01-0AB0) ............................12-91 12.19 2AO U Standard analog electronic module (6ES7135-4FB01-0AB0) ...................................12-95 12.20 2AO U High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7135-4LB01-0AB0) .............................12-99 12.21 2AO I Standard analog electronic module (6ES7135-4GB01-0AB0) ..................................12-102 12.22 2AO I High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7135-4MB01-0AB0)............................12-106

13 4 IQ-SEN SE ......................................................................................................................................... 13-1

13.1 Features of 4 IQ-SENSE.......................................................................................................... 13-1 13.2 Parameters for the 4 IQ-SENSE.............................................................................................. 13-3 13.2.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................. 13-3 13.2.2 Group diagnostics parameter................................................................................................... 13-4 13.2.3 Synchronization group parameter............................................................................................ 13-4 13.2.4 Sensor type parameter ............................................................................................................ 13-6 13.2.5 Switching hysteresis parameter ............................................................................................... 13-7 13.2.6 Time functions and time value parameters.............................................................................. 13-8 13.2.7 Teach-in disable parameter ..................................................................................................... 13-8 13.3 Control and feedback interface (PIQ/PII).................. ............................................................... 13-9 13.3.1 Fundamentals of the control and feedback interface (PIQ/PII)................................................ 13-9 13.3.2 Standard................................................................................................................................. 13-10 13.3.3 Enhanced............................................................................................................................... 13-11 13.4 Technical specifications ......................................................................................................... 13-15

14 RESERVE mo dule s .............................................................................................................................. 14-1

14.1 RESERVE modules ................................................................................................................. 14-1

A Ord er num bers ...................................................................................................................................... .A-1

A.1 Module order numbers............................................................................................................... A-1 A.2 Order numbers for ET 200S accessories .................................................................................. A-6 A.3 Order numbers for ET 200S network components .................................................................... A-7 A.4 Order numbers for ET 200S spare parts ................................................................................... A-8 A.5 Order numbers for connecting cables for 4 IQ-SENSE electronic module................................A-9

A.6 Order numbers for manuals ....................................................................................................... A-9 B Dim ens ion draw ings .............................................................................................................................. .B-1

B.1 Minimum clearances for mounting, wiring, and heat dissipation ...............................................B-1 B.2 Interface modules ...................................................................................................................... B-2 B.3 Terminal modules (screw-type/spring terminals) with an electronic module inserted ...............B-3 B.4 Terminal modules (Fast Connect) with an electronic module inserted...................................... B-7 B.5 Terminating module ................................................................................................................. B-10 B.6 Shield connection..................................................................................................................... B-10



Table of contents

Distributed I/O System ET200Sxiv Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

C Add ress space of the inputs and outp uts ............................................................................................... .C-1

C.1 Address space of the inputs and outputs................................................................................... C-1

D Response Time s .................................................................................................................................... .D-1

D.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................... D-1D.2 Response times at the DP master ............................................................................................. D-1D.3 Response times for the ET 200S ............................................................................................... D-2D.4 Response times for the digital input modules ............................................................................ D-6D.5 Response times for the digital output modules .......................................................................... D-7D.6 Response times for analog input modules................................................................................. D-7D.7 Response times for analog output modules............................................................................... D-8D.8 Response times for a 4 IQ-SENSE electronic module ............................................................ D-10D.9 Response times for technological modules ............................................................................. D-10D.10 Response times of PROFINET IO ........................................................................................... D-10

E De termining the Leakage Resistance of an ET 200 S Station ................................................................. E-1

F Spe cial Measure s for Interfere nce -Free Op eration ................................................................................. F-1

Glos sary ..................................................................................................................................... Glossary-1

Index............................................................................................................................................... . Index-1

Tables

Table 1-1 ET 200S components................................................................................................................. 1-6

Table 1-2 Features and benefits of ET 200S ............................................................................................. 1-9 Table 2-1 Configuration table in HW Config for PROFIBUS DP................................................................2-5Table 2-2 Configuration table in HW config for PROFINET IO ................................................................2-13 Table 3-1 Configuration examples for ET 200S ......................................................................................... 3-1 Table 3-2 Power supply of the ET 200S..................................................................................................... 3-3 Table 3-3 Interface modules and the applications for which they are suited ............................................. 3-6 Table 3-4 Electronic modules and the applications for which they are suitable ........................................ 3-9 Table 3-5 TM-P terminal modules and the power modules for which they are suitable .......................... 3-11 Table 3-6 TM-E terminal modules and the electronic modules for which they are suitable..................... 3-12 Table 3-7 Terminal modules for power modules...................................................................................... 3-16 Table 3-8 Terminal modules for electronic modules ................................................................................ 3-20 Table 3-9 Control interface....................................................................................................................... 3-36 Table 3-10 Feedback interface................................................................................................................... 3-36 Table 3-11 Fault correction during option handling.................................................................................... 3-37 Table 3-12 Structure of DS 248 for ET 200S ............................................................................................. 3-38 Table 3-13 Basic structure of data records with identification data............................................................ 3-39 Table 3-14 Identification data ..................................................................................................................... 3-39



Table of contents

Distributed I/O System ET200SOperating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14 xv

Table 3-15 Parameter length in bytes ........................................................................................................ 3-44Table 3-16 Maximum configuration per voltage group............................................................................... 3-45Table 4-1 Mounting dimensions ................................................................................................................. 4-2

Table 5-1 Removing and inserting electronic modules ............................................................................ 5-28Table 6-1 Configuration table and address space ..................................................................................... 6-9Table 6-2 Software requirements for commissioning on PROFIBUS DP ................................................ 6-10Table 6-3 Status and error displays of the IM151-1 BASIC/ IM151-1 STANDARD/ IM151-1 FO

STANDARD/ IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE..................................................................................6-14 Table 6-4 Reading out the diagnostics with STEP 7 and STEP 5 on PROFIBUS DP ............................ 6-30 Table 6-5 Structure of station status 1 (Byte 0) ....................................................................................... 6-34 Table 6-6 Structure of station status 2 (Byte 1) ....................................................................................... 6-35 Table 6-7 Structure of station status 3 (Byte 2) ....................................................................................... 6-35

Table 6-8 Structure of the manufacturer ID (Bytes 4, 5) .......................................................................... 6-36 Table 6-9 Power module error types........................................................................................................ 6-42 Table 6-10 Digital electronic module error types ....................................................................................... 6-42 Table 6-11 Analog input module error types.............................................................................................. 6-44 Table 6-12 Analog output module error types............................................................................................ 6-45 Table 6-13 1SSI error types ....................................................................................................................... 6-45 Table 6-14 1COUNT 24V/100kHz error types ........................................................................................... 6-46 Table 6-15 1COUNT 5V/500kHz error types ............................................................................................. 6-46 Table 6-16 1STEP 5V/204kHz error types................................................................................................. 6-46 Table 6-17 2PULSE error types ................................................................................................................. 6-47 Table 6-18 1POS INC/Digital, 1POS SSI/Digital, 1POS INC/Analog, 1POS SSI/Analog error types .......6-47 Table 6-19 1SI 3964/ASCII, 1SI Modbus/USS error types ........................................................................ 6-48 Table 6-20 4 IQ-SENSE error types........................................................................................................... 6-48 Table 6-21 Software requirements for commissioning on PROFINET IO .................................................6-61 Table 6-22 Status and error displays of IM151-3 PN................................................................................. 6-64 Table 6-23 Reading out the diagnostics with STEP 7................................................................................ 6-68 Table 7-1 Use in industrial environment..................................................................................................... 7-5

Table 7-2 Variations in general technical specifications for the ET 200S FC frequency converter ......... 7-12 Table 8-1 Parameters for the IM151-1 BASIC interface module ............................................................... 8-1 Table 8-2 Parameters for interface module IM151-1 STANDARD, IM151-1 FO STANDARD and

IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE ..........................................................................................................8-2 Table 8-3 Parameters for the IM151-3 PN interface module ..................................................................... 8-3 Table 8-4 Terminal assignment of the IM151-1 BASIC interface module..................................................8-9 Table 8-5 Terminal assignment of the IM151-1 STANDARD interface module.......................................8-13 Table 8-6 Terminal assignment of the interface module IM151-1 FO STANDARD.................................8-17 Table 8-7 Terminal assignment of the IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE interface module................................8-21



Table of contents

Distributed I/O System ET200Sxvi Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Table 8-8 Terminal assignment of the IM151-3 PN interface module...................................................... 8-26Table 8-9 Available SIMATIC Micro Memory Cards ................................................................................8-29 Table 9-1 Assignment of TM-P terminal modules and power modules ..................................................... 9-1

Table 9-2 Assignment of TM-E terminal modules and electronic modules................................................ 9-2Table 9-3 Terminal assignment of the TM-P15S23-A1, TM-P15C23-A1, and TM-P15N23-A1

terminal modules........................................................................................................................ 9-4 Table 9-4 Terminal assignment of the TM-P15S23-A0, TM-P15C23-A0, and TM-P15N23-A0

terminal modules........................................................................................................................ 9-6Table 9-5 Terminal assignment of the TM-P15S22-01, TM-P15C22-01, and TM-P15N22-01

terminal modules........................................................................................................................ 9-8 Table 9-6 Terminal assignment of the TM-P30S44-A0 and TM-P30C44-A0 terminal module................9-11Table 9-7 Terminal assignment of the TM-PF30S47-F1 terminal module ............................................... 9-13Table 9-8 Terminal assignment of the TM-E15S26-A1, TM-E15C26-A1, and TM-E15N26-A1

terminal modules with the 4-channel digital electronic modules.............................................. 9-16 Table 9-9 Terminal assignment of the TM-E15S24-A1, TM-E15C24-A1, and TM-E15N24-A1

terminal modules...................................................................................................................... 9-18 Table 9-10 Terminal assignment of the TM-E15S24-01, TM-E15C24-01, and TM-E15N24-01

terminal modules...................................................................................................................... 9-20 Table 9-11 Terminal assignment of the TM-E15S23-01, TM-E15C23-01, and TM-E15N23-01

terminal modules...................................................................................................................... 9-22Table 9-12 Terminal assignment of the TM-E15S24-AT and TM-E15C24-AT terminal module ...............9-25Table 9-13 Terminal assignment of the TM-E30S44-01 and TM-E30C44-01 terminal module.................9-27Table 9-14 Terminal assignment of the terminal module ........................................................................... 9-30Table 10-1 Parameters for power modules................................................................................................ 10-1Table 10-2 Terminal assignment of the PM-E 24 VDC power module ...................................................... 10-2Table 10-3 Terminal assignment of the PM-E 24-48 VDC power module .................................................10-6Table 10-4 Terminal assignment of the PM-E 24-48 VDC, 24-230 VAC power module ...........................10-9Table 11-1 Parameters for digital input modules ....................................................................................... 11-2Table 11-2 Parameters for 4DI NAMUR..................................................................................................... 11-3Table 11-3 Parameters for digital output modules ..................................................................................... 11-4Table 11-4 Terminal assignment of the 2DI 24 VDC Standard.................................................................. 11-9

Table 11-5 Terminal assignment of the 4DI 24 VDC Standard................................................................ 11-13Table 11-6 Terminal assignment of the 4DI 24 VDC/SRC Standard ....................................................... 11-17Table 11-7 Terminal assignment of the 2DI 24 VDC High Feature ......................................................... 11-21Table 11-8 Terminal assignment of the 4DI 24 VDC High Feature ......................................................... 11-25Table 11-9 Terminal assignment of the 4DI 24-48 VUC High Feature .................................................... 11-29Table 11-10 Terminal assignment of NAMUR sensors and sensors to IEC 60947-5-6 ............................ 11-33Table 11-11 Terminal assignment of NAMUR changeover contact or sensor to IEC 60947-5-6 .............. 11-34Table 11-12 Terminal assignment of a single, closed contact with 10 kΩ

(mechanical normally open contact) ...................................................................................... 11-34



Table of contents

Distributed I/O System ET200SOperating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14 xvii

Table 11-13 Terminal assignment of a closed changeover contact with 10 kΩ(mechanical changeover contact).......................................................................................... 11-35

Table 11-14 Terminal assignment of an open single contact (mechanical normally opencontact with single contact).................................................................................................... 11-35

Table 11-15 Terminal assignment of an open changeover contact (mechanical changeovercontact) .................................................................................................................................. 11-36

Table 11-16 Diagnosis for changeover contacts........................................................................................ 11-40Table 11-17 Terminal assignment of the 2DI 120 VAC Standard.............................................................. 11-41Table 11-18 Terminal assignment of the 2DI 230 VAC Standard.............................................................. 11-45Table 11-19 Terminal assignment of the 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard .................................................... 11-49Table 11-20 Terminal assignment of the 4DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard .................................................... 11-54Table 11-21 Terminal assignment of the 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature .............................................. 11-59Table 11-22 Terminal assignment of the 2DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard ....................................................... 11-64

Table 11-23 Terminal assignment of the 4DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard ....................................................... 11-69Table 11-24 Terminal assignment of the 2DO 24 VDC/2 A High Feature ................................................. 11-74Table 11-25 Terminal assignment of the 2DO 24-230 VAC ...................................................................... 11-79Table 11-26 Terminal assignment of the 2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A (as of

Version 2) ............................................................................................................................... 11-85Table 11-27 Switching capacity and lifetime of the relay contacts ............................................................ 11-89Table 11-28 Terminal assignment of the 2RO NO/NC 24-48 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A.........................11-90Table 11-29 Switching capacity and lifetime of the contacts ..................................................................... 11-94Table 12-1 Measured values in the case of a wire break depending on diagnostic being enabled .......... 12-2Table 12-2 Analog value representation (SIMATIC S7 format) ................................................................. 12-2Table 12-3 Measured-value resolution of the analog values (SIMATIC S7 format) .................................. 12-3Table 12-4 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges ±80 mV, ±2.5 V, ±5 V, and ±10 V ............................ 12-4Table 12-5 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges 1 to 5 V, 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA ..............................12-4Table 12-6 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range ± 20 mA ......................................................................12-5Table 12-7 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges 150 Ω, 300 Ω, 600 Ω, 3000 Ω ..................................12-5Table 12-8 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges Pt 100, 200, 500, 1000 Standard in °C and °F......... 12-6Table 12-9 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges Pt 100, 200, 500, 1000 Climatic in °C and °F........... 12-6

Table 12-10 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges Ni 100, 200, 500, 1000 Standard in °C and °F......... 12-7Table 12-11 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges Ni 100, 200, 500, 1000 Climatic in °C and °F...........12-7Table 12-12 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges Cu 10 Standard in °C und °F.................................... 12-8Table 12-13 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges Cu 10 Climatic in °C und °F......................................12-8Table 12-14 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type B in °C and °F.................................................... 12-9Table 12-15 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type C in °C and °F ................................................... 12-9Table 12-16 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type E in °C and °F.................................................. 12-10Table 12-17 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type J in °C and °F .................................................. 12-10Table 12-18 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type K in °C and °F..................................................12-10



Table of contents

Distributed I/O System ET200Sxviii Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Table 12-19 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type L in °C and °F ..................................................12-11Table 12-20 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type N in °C and °F..................................................12-11Table 12-21 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type R, S in °C and °F ............................................. 12-11

Table 12-22 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type T in °C and °F..................................................12-12Table 12-23 SIMATIC S7 format: Output ranges ± 5 V; ± 10 V; ± 20 mA .................................................12-12Table 12-24 SIMATIC S7 format: Output ranges 1 to 5V; 4 to 20mA ........................................................12-13Table 12-25 Compensation of the reference junction temperature............................................................ 12-18Table 12-26 Reference junction parameters .............................................................................................. 12-21Table 12-27 How the analog input/output values depend on the operating mode of the PLC

(CPU of the DP master) and the supply voltage L +.............................................................. 12-24Table 12-28 Behavior of the analog modules depending on the position of the analog input value

in the value range................................................................................................................... 12-25 Table 12-29 Behavior of the analog modules depending on the position of the analog output

value in the value range......................................................................................................... 12-25Table 12-30 Parameters for analog input modules U, I Standard.............................................................. 12-26Table 12-31 Parameters for analog electronic modules U, I High Feature................................................ 12-27Table 12-32 Parameters for analog input modules U, I High Speed ......................................................... 12-28Table 12-33 Parameters for analog input modules RTD, TC..................................................................... 12-29Table 12-34 Parameters for 2AI RTD High Feature analog electronic module ......................................... 12-31Table 12-35 Parameters for analog output modules U, I ........................................................................... 12-34Table 12-36 Terminal assignment of the 2AI U Standard .......................................................................... 12-38

Table 12-37 Terminal assignment of the 2AI U High Feature.................................................................... 12-42Table 12-38 Terminal assignment of the 2AI U High Speed...................................................................... 12-46Table 12-39 Terminal assignment of the 2AI I 2WIRE Standard ............................................................... 12-50Table 12-40 Terminal assignment of the 4AI I 2WIRE ST ......................................................................... 12-54Table 12-41 Terminal assignment of the 2AI I 2WIRE High Speed........................................................... 12-57Table 12-42 Terminal assignment of the 2AI I 4WIRE Standard ............................................................... 12-62Table 12-43 Terminal assignment of the 2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature......................................................12-65Table 12-44 Terminal assignment of the 2AI I 4WIRE High Speed........................................................... 12-70Table 12-45 Terminal assignment of the 2AI RTD Standard ..................................................................... 12-74

Table 12-46 Terminal assignment of the 2AI RTD High Feature............................................................... 12-78Table 12-47 Terminal assignment of the 2AI TC Standard........................................................................ 12-86Table 12-48 Terminal assignment of the 2AI TC High Feature.................................................................. 12-91Table 12-49 Terminal assignment of the 2AO U Standard ........................................................................ 12-96Table 12-50 Terminal assignment of the 2AO U High Feature .................................................................. 12-99Table 12-51 Terminal assignment of the 2AO I Standard........................................................................ 12-103Table 12-52 Terminal assignment of the 2AO I High Feature ................................................................. 12-107Table 13-1 Parameters for the 4 IQ-SENSE.............................................................................................. 13-3Table 13-2 Diffuse sensor .......................................................................................................................... 13-6



Table of contents

Distributed I/O System ET200SOperating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14 xix

Table 13-3 Reflex sensor ........................................................................................................................... 13-6Table 13-4 Standard feedback interface .................................................................................................. 13-10Table 13-5 Enhanced feedback interface ................................................................................................ 13-11

Table 13-6 Enhanced control interface .................................................................................................... 13-12Table 13-7 Terminal assignment of the 4 IQ-SENSE .............................................................................. 13-15Table A-1 Interface module order numbers................................................................................................ A-1Table A-2 Terminal module order numbers................................................................................................ A-2Table A-3 Power module order numbers.................................................................................................... A-3Table A-4 Digital electronic module order numbers ................................................................................... A-3Table A-5 Analog electronic module order numbers .................................................................................. A-4Table A-6 Process-related module order numbers .................................................................................... A-5Table A-7 Reserve module order numbers ................................................................................................ A-5Table A-8 ET 200S accessories order numbers ........................................................................................ A-6Table A-9 Network components (PROFIBUS DP) for ET 200S order numbers ........................................A-7Table A-10 Network components (PROFINET IO) for ET 200S order numbers..........................................A-8Table A-11 Fuse for digital input module and power module ....................................................................... A-8Table A-12 Connecting cable for 4 IQ-SENSE electronic module ............................................................... A-9Table A-13 ET 200S documentation packages or manuals ......................................................................... A-9Table A-14 STEP 7 and SIMATIC S7 manuals .......................................................................................... A-10Table A-15 STEP 7 and SIMATIC S7 manuals .......................................................................................... A-11

Table A-16 Technical Guide to PROFIBUS DP and SIMATIC S7 .............................................................A-11Table C-1 Address spaces of the inputs and outputs of the ET 200S........................................................ C-1Table C-2 PII feedback interface and PIQ control interface ....................................................................... C-2



Table of contents

Distributed I/O System ET200Sxx Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14



Distributed I/O System ET200SOperating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14 1-1

Product overview 11.1 1.1What are distributed I/O systems?

Distributed I/O System – Range of Application

When a system is set up, it is common for the inputs to and outputs from the process to beincorporated centrally in the automation system.If the inputs/outputs are located at greater distances from the automation system, the wiringcan become very extensive and complex, and electromagnetic interferences can impairreliability.Distributed I/O systems are suited for these types of installations:• The controller CPU is located centrally.• The I/O systems (inputs and outputs) operate decentrally on-site.• The powerful PROFIBUS DP with its high data transmission rates ensures smooth

communication between the controller CPU and the I/O systems.

What is PROFIBUS DP?PROFIBUS DP is an open bus system based on IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1 with the"DP" transmission protocol (DP stands for distributed peripherals).Physically, PROFIBUS DP is either an electrical network based on a shielded two-wire lineor an optical network based on a fiber-optic cable.The "DP" transmission protocol enables a rapid, cyclic exchange of data between thecontroller CPU and the distributed I/O systems.

What is a DP m aster and what are DP slaves?The DP master links the controller CPU with the distributed I/O systems. The DP masterexchanges data with the distributed I/O systems via PROFIBUS DP and monitors thePROFIBUS DP.The distributed I/O systems (= DP slaves) prepare the sensor and actuator data on-site sothat they can be transmitted to the controller CPU via PROFIBUS DP.



Product overview1.1 What are distributed I/O systems?

Distributed I/O System ET200S1-2 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Which devices can be connected to PROFIBUS DP?An extremely wide range of devices can be connected on the PROFIBUS DP as a DP

master or as DP slaves, provided their behavior complies with IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1CP 3/1 . The devices that can be used include the following:• SIMATIC S5• SIMATIC S7/M7/C7• SIMATIC programming device or PC• SIMATIC HMI (operator panel (OP), operator station (OS), and text display (TD) operator

control and monitoring devices)• Devices from other manufacturers

Structure of a PROFIBU S DP networkThe figure below illustrates a typical PROFIBUS DP network structure. The DP masters areintegrated in the relevant device. For example, the S7-400 has a PROFIBUS DP interfaceand the IM 308-C master interface module is inserted in an S5-115U. The DP slaves are thedistributed I/O systems, which are connected to the DP masters by means ofPROFIBUS DP.

Figure 1-1 Typical PROFIBUS DP network structure



Product overview1.2 What is PROFINET IO?


1.2 1.2What is PRO FINET IO?

DefinitionPROFINET IO is the open transmission system with realtime functionality defined inaccordance with the PROFINET standard. The standard defines a vendor-neutralcommunication, automation, and engineering model.An industrial-grade connection system is available for cabling of PROFINET components.• PROFINET departs from the hierarchical master-slave principle of PROFIBUS. A

provider-consumer principle is used instead. During configuration, the user specifieswhich modules of an IO device are subscribed to by an IO controller.

• The quantity frameworks are extended in accordance with the options available onPROFINET IO. Parameter limits are not exceeded during configuration.

• The transmission rate is 100 Mbits/s.• The user view during configuration is largely the same as that on the PROFIBUS DP

(STEP 7 → HW Config is used for configuration).

Structure of a PROFINE T IO networkThe figure below illustrates a typical PROFINET IO network structure. PROFIBUS slaves, ifpresent, can be integrated by means of an IE/PB link.

Figure 1-2 Typical structure of a PROFINET IO network



Product overview1.3 What is the ET 200S distributed I/O system?


1.3 1.3What is the ET 200S d istributed I/O system?

DefinitionThe ET 200S distributed I/O system is a discretely modular, highly flexible DP slave withIP 20 degree of protection.

Area of applicationYou can insert practically any number of I/O modules in practically any combination directlynext to the interface module that transfers the data to the DP master. This means you canadjust the configuration to suit your on-site requirements.Independent from the interface module, an ET 200S can consist of up to 63 modules such as

power modules, peripheral modules and motor starters.The ability to integrate motor starters (switching and protecting of any three-phase load up to7.5 kW) ensures that the ET 200S can be adapted quickly to suit almost any process-relateduse of your machine.The fail-safe modules of the ET 200S enable you to read in and output data in a fail-safemanner up to Safety Category 4 (EN 954-1).

Terminal modules and electronic modulesThe ET 200S distributed I/O system is connected as follows:• To PROFIBUS DP by means of a cable connector for PROFIBUS DP at the IM151-1

interface module• To PROFINET IO by means of a cable connector for PROFINET IO at the IM151-3 PN

interface moduleEvery ET 200S peripheral system is a• A DP slave on the PROFIBUS DP• An IO device on the PROFINET IO





ViewThe figure below shows an example configuration of an ET 200S.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

8

910

① ET 200S IM151-1 interface module② PM-E power module for electronic modules③ Electronic modules④ Power module for PM-D motor starters⑤ Direct starter⑥ Reversing starter⑦ Terminating module⑧ Power bus⑨ TM-E terminal modules for electronic modules⑩ TM-P terminal modules for power modules





ET 200S componentsThe following table provides an overview of the most important components of the ET 200S:

Table 1-1 ET 200S components

Component Function Image

Mounting rail ...is the mounting rail for the ET200S. You install the ET 200S on themounting rail.

Interface module• IM151-1 BASIC• IM151-1 STANDARD• IM151-1 HIGH

FEATURE

With RS 485 interface:

• IM151-1 FOSTANDARD

...connects the ET 200S to the DPmaster and prepares the data for theassembled electronic modules andmotor starters.

With fiber-optic cable interface:

Interface module• IM151-3 PN

... ...connects the ET 200S to thePROFINET IO controllers andprepares the data for the assembledelectronic modules and motorstarters.

with PROFINET interface:





Component Function ImageTerminal module ...carries the wiring and

accommodates the power andelectronic modules. Terminalmodules are available in the followingvariants:• For power modules• For electronic modules• With screw terminal• With spring terminal• With Fast Connect (quick

connection method, no strippingrequired)

Power module ...monitors the voltage for allelectronic modules in the voltagegroup. The following power modulesare available:• For a 24 VDC infeed with

diagnostics• For a 24 VDC to 48 VDC infeed

with diagnostics• For a 24 VDC to 48 VDC, 24 VAC

to 230 VAC infeed withdiagnostics and fuse

Electronic module ...is inserted onto the terminal moduleand determines the function:• Digital input modules with 24

VDC, 120/230 VAC, and NAMUR• Digital output modules with 24

VDC and 120/230 VAC• Relay modules• Analog input modules with

voltage, current, and resistancemeasurement; thermoresistor;and thermocouples

• Analog output modules for voltageand current

• Technology modules• Fail-safe modules• RESERVE

Terminating module ...terminates the ET 200S and can beused as a mount for 6 reserve fuses(5 mm x 20 mm).





Component Function ImageShield connection ...is used for connecting cable

shields.

Labeling sheet (DIN A4,perforated, film)

...for machine labeling or printing• 80 strips per labeling sheet

Slot number labels ...are used for identifying the slots onthe terminal module. 1 2

6 2

6 3

Color coding labels ...enable customer- andcountry-specific coding of theterminals on the terminal module

PROFIBUS cable withbus connector

... connects nodes of aPROFIBUS DP configuration to eachother.

Fiber optic duplex cablewith simplex plug (in theplug adaptor forIM151-1 FO STANDARD)

... connects nodes of aPROFIBUS DP configuration to eachother.

PROFINET connectoraccording to thespecifications in thePROFINET InstallationGuide and the IndustrialEthernet FC installationinstructions

... connects nodes of a PROFINET IOconfiguration to each other.





Features and benefits of ET 200SThe table below presents the features and benefits of ET 200S.

Table 1-2 Features and benefits of ET 200S

Features Benefits

Structure Discretely modular design• 1/2/4-channel electronic modules• Power modules• Integrated motor starters

• Function-oriented, cost-optimized stationdesign

• Significant reduction in effort for configurationand documentation

• Space savings due to the ability to stringmodules together in any order

Extensive range of electronic modules Broad area of application

Communication capable, system-integratedmotor starter: Direct and oscillating starter up to7.5 kW

PLC inputs and outputs, terminal blocks, circuitbreakers, and contactors in a plug-in modulesave space and the effort involved in wiring

Permanent wiring due to the separation ofmechanical and electronic components

• Prewiring possible• Module replacement during operation of the

ET 200S ("hot swapping")Individual connection of power modules tocommon potential

• Individual formation of voltage groups(identifiable by color coding of the TM-Pterminal modules for power modules)

• Simple load interruptionRobust design for harsh industrial conditions (5 gvibration resistance)

High operational reliability when mounted directlyon the machine, high availability

Connection system Integrated voltage buses Reduced effort required for wiringPower bus up to 50 A for motor starters Minimization of wiring in 400 V rangeScrew terminals, spring terminals, and FastConnect

A change in terminal connection method is notnecessary

• 2- and 3-conductor connection or• 2-, 3- and 4-conductor connection

Optimal selection on grounds of space and cost

Fast Connect • Connection method with no stripping required• Time savings during wiring

Replaceable terminal box in the terminal module No need to remove the terminal module in theevent of terminal damage

Automatic coding of the I/O modules Quick and reliable module replacementLarge label Adequate space for clear identificationHigh data transfer rate of up to 12 Mbits/s on thePROFIBUS DP and 100 Mbit/s on thePROFINET IO

Short reaction times

Integrated safety functionsFor motor starters up to safety category4 according to EN 954-1

Savings on time-consuming safety engineering

Fail-safe modules For detecting and outputting fail-safe signals viaPROFIBUS (PROFIsafe) up to Safety Category 4(EN 954-1)



Product overview1.4 Guide to the ET 200S manuals


1.4 1.4Guide to the ET 200S m anuals

Required m anuals for various configurationsThe components of ET 200S are described in various manuals. These manuals are part ofvarious documentation packages. The table below shows possible configuration variants ofthe ET 200S and the manuals in the documentation packages that are required for eachvariant.

ET 200S consists of the following compo nents: You will need the information contained in thefollowing manuals:

Distributed I/O System ET 200S

ET 200S Distributed I/O System +Technological Functions ET 200S

ET 200S Distributed I/O System +Positioning ET 200S

ET 200S Distributed I/O System +ET 200S Serial Interface Module

ET 200S Distributed I/O System +IM151-7 CPU Interface Module

ET 200S Distributed I/O System +PROFINET System documentation



Product overview1.4 Guide to the ET 200S manuals


ET 200S consists of the following compo nents: You will need the information contained in thefollowing manuals:

DS DS

I M 1 5 1 - 1

P M - E

2 D O

2 A O

P M - D

ET 200S Distributed I/O System +ET 200S Motor StartersFail-Safe Motor Starters Safety-Integrated SIGUARD System

ET 200S Distributed I/O System +ET 200S Distributed I/O System Fail-SafeModules

ET 200S Distributed I/O System +ET 200S Distributed I/O System Fail-SafeModules +

ET 200S Motor StartersFail-Safe Motor Starters Safety-Integrated SIGUARD System

ET 200S FC Frequency Converteroperating instructions +ET 200S FC Frequency Converterlist manual ET 200S Distributed I/O System

+ET 200S FC Frequency Converteroperating instructions +ET 200S FC Frequency Converterlist manual

1 ICU24F for fail-safe frequency converter






Brief Instructions on C ommissioning ET 200S 22.1 2.1Com missioning on PROFIBU S DP

2.1.1 Introduction

IntroductionUsing the following simple examples, you will learn how to place the ET 200S into operationon the PROFIBUS DP step by step:• ET 200S assembling and wiring up• Configuring ET 200S in the SIMATIC manager• Creating a user program• Switching on ET 200S• Evaluating diagnostic messages:

– Removing and inserting of modules – Switching off the load voltage on the power module – Wire break in the actuator wiring on the digital output module

Requirements• You have assembled an S7 station consisting of a power supply component and a DP

master (e. g. CPU 315-2 DP). A CPU 315-2 DP was used as a DP master for thisexample. Every other DP master (Norm IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1) is naturally alsousable.

• STEP 7 (starting V5.0 with ServicePack 3) is completely installed on you PG. You haveSTEP 7 knowledge.

• The programming device must be connected at the DP master.



Brief Instructions on Commissioning ET 200S2.1 Commissioning on PROFIBUS DP


Required componentsThe following graphic shows you which ET 200S components you require for the example on

the PROFIBUS DP:

Figure 2-1 Components for the example on PROFIBUS DP

Order numbers for example configuration on the PRO FIBUS D P

Quan tity Ordering data Order numb er

1 × Standard profile rails 35 mm (e. g. length 483 mm) 6ES5 710-8MA111 × IM151-1 STANDARD interface module and terminating module, 1 unit 6ES7151-1AA04-0AB02 × Fast Connect Terminal Module TM-P15N23-A1, 1 piece 6ES7193-4CC70-0AA02 × Fast Connect Terminal Module TM-E15N24-A1, 5 pieces 6ES7193-4CA70-0AA02 × PM-E 24 VDC, 1 unit 6ES7138-4CA01-0AB01 × 2DI DC24V HF, 5 pieces 6ES7131-4BB01-0AB01 × 2DO DC24V/0,5A HF, 5 pieces 6ES7132-4BB01-0AB01 × Bus connector 6ES7972-0BA12-0XA0





2.1.2 Exam ple: Installing ET 200S

Procedure1. Mount the rail (35 mm x 7.5 mm or 15 mm) with a length of at least 210 mm on a

stationary base.2. Install the various modules on the rail beginning on the left (hook on, swing in, move to

the left). Adhere to the following sequence: – IM151-1 STANDARD interface module – TM-P15S23-A1 terminal module – 4 x TM-E15S24-A1 terminal module – TM-P15S23-A1 terminal module

– 4 x TM-E15S24-A1 terminal module – Terminating module

3. Set PROFIBUS address 3 on the IM 151-1 STANDARD interface module.Set PROFIBUS Address 3:

*) Intended for future enhancements. Switch must be in OFF position.





2.1.3 Exam ple: Wiring and assem bling ET 200S

Procedure1. Wire the ET 200S as shown below:

1 2 3

① 24 VDC electronic power supply② 24 VDC sensor supply voltage group 1③ 24 VDC load supply voltage group 2

1. Use the PROFIBUS bus connector to connect the DP master with the ET 200S. ThePROFIBUS DP interface is located on the IM 151-1 STANDARD interface module.

2. Insert the power and electronic modules into the terminal modules.3. Switch on the power supply for the DP master.

4. Observe the status LEDs on the DP master.CPU 315-2 DP:

– DC 5 V → lights up – SF DP → off – BUSF → flashes





2.1.4 Example: Configuring ET 200S in SIMATIC Manager

Procedure1. Start SIMATIC Manager, and create a new project with a DP master

(e.g., CPU315-2 DP). Create OB1 and OB82 for the project.2. Create the PROFIBUS subnet.3. Connect the PROFIBUS subnet with the DP master in HW Config.4. Take the ET 200S from the hardware catalog and put it on the PROFIBUS.5. Set PROFIBUS address 3 for ET 200S.6. Drag the individual ET 200S modules from the hardware catalog to the configuration

table.

7. Select the electronic modules in the configuration table, and click the "Pack addresses"button.

Table 2-1 Configuration table in HW Config for PROFIBUS DP

Module/DP identifier

Order number I address Q address Comment

1 6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0 PM-E DC24V Power module2 6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0 2DI DC24V 0 Byte 0.0 and 0.13 6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0 2DI DC24V Byte 0.2 and 0.34 6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0 2DI DC24V Byte 0.4 and 0.5

5 6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0 2DI DC24V Bits 0.6 and 0.76 6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0 PM-E DC24V Power module7 6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0 2DO DC24V 0 Byte 0.0 and 0.18 6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0 2DO DC24V Byte 0.2 and 0.39 6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0 2DO DC24V Byte 0.4 and 0.5

10 6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0 2DO DC24V Bits 0.6 and 0.7

1. Set the following parameters: – In the DP slave properties dialog box for ET 200S:

Enable startup for set- <> actual configuration: enable – In the DP slave properties dialog box for the PM-E 24 VDC, Module/DP ID 1

(in the configuration table)Diagnostics: Missing load induced stress

– In the DP slave properties dialog box for 2 DO 24 VDC, Module/DP ID 7(in the configuration table)Diagnostics: Wire failure A0

2. Save the configuration.





2.1.5 Exam ple: Creating a user program

Procedure1. Create the user program in the LAD/STL/FBD editor in OB1.

Example 1: Reading in an input and controlling an output:

STL

A I 0.0 If input byte 0.0 and

A M 2.0 memory bit 2.0 are set, then

S Q 0.0 set output byte 0.0

Example 2: Transferring an input byte to an output byte:

STL

L PIB 0 Load I/O input byte 0 in the accumulator

(bytes 0.0 to 0.7)

T PQB 0 Transfer the accumulator content to

I/O output byte 0 (byte 0.0 to 0.7)

1. Save the project in SIMATIC Manager.2. Download the configuration to the DP master.

2.1.6 Exam ple: Switching on ET 200S

Procedure1. Switch on all of the power supplies on the ET 200S.2. Observe the status LEDs on the DP master and ET 200S.

– CPU 315-2 DP:DC 5 V: lights upSF DP: offBUSF: off

– ET 200S:SF: offBF: offON: lights up





2.1.7 Exam ple: Evaluating diagnostic mess ages

IntroductionIn this example, you generate diagnostic messages by provoking errors in the ET 200S. Inthe event of an error, OB82 is started. You evaluate the start information in OB82.Tip: Call SFC13 in OB82, and evaluate the diagnostic frame.

Rem oving and inserting the 2 D I 24 VDC High Feature digital electronic module1. Remove the 2 DI 24 VDC High Feature electronic module from the terminal module

during operation.2. Observe the status LEDs on the IM 151-1 STANDARD interface module:

– SF: lights up → a diagnostic message is pending. – BF: off – ON: lights upResult: The ET 200S continues to run error-free.

3. Evaluate the diagnostic message:Result: – Station status 1 (Byte 0): Bit 3 is set → external diagnostic – Identifier-related diagnostic data: Byte 7.1 is set → Slot 2 – Module status: Byte 19.2/19.3: 11B → no module

4. Reinsert the removed electronic module into the terminal module.Result: – Status LED on the IM 151-1 STANDARD interface module:

SF: offBF: offON: lights up

– The diagnostic message is deleted.





Switching off load voltage on the pow er module1. Switch off the load voltage on the PM-E 24 VDC (slot 1).

2. Observe the status LEDs.IM 151 STANDARD interface module:

– SF: lights upPower module:

– PWR: off → No load voltage available on the power module – SF: lights up → a diagnostic message is pending.I/O modules in the voltage group:

– LEDs: light up3. Evaluate the diagnostics.

Result: – Station status 1 (Byte 0): Bit 3 is set → external diagnostics – Identifier-related diagnostic data: Byte 7.0 is set → Slot 1 – Channel-specific diagnostics:

Byte 35.0 to 35.5: 000000B → Slot 1Byte 37.0 to 37.4: 10001B → sensor or load voltage missing

4. Switch on the load voltage on the power module again, and reevaluate the diagnostics.Result:

– Status LED on the IM 151-1 STANDARD interface module:SF: off

– Status LEDs on the power module:PWR: onSF: off

– Status LEDs on the I/O modules:LEDs: off






Simulating a w ire break in the actuator wiring1. Remove the cable from terminal 1 on the 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A; High Feature electronic

module (slot 7)2. Observe the status LEDs:

IM151-1 STANDARD interface module: – SF: lights up2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature electronic module: – SF: lights up → a diagnostic message is pending – 1: off → output is not activated

3. Evaluate the diagnostic message:Result:

– Station status 1 (Byte 0): Bit 3 is set → external diagnostics – Identifier-related diagnostic data: Byte 7.6 is set → Slot 7 – Channel-specific diagnostics:

Byte 35.0 to 35.5: 000110B → Slot 7Byte 36.0 to 35.5: 000000B → Channel 0Byte 37.0 to 37.4: 00110B → Wire break

4. Reattach the cable to the actuator to terminal 1, and reevaluate the diagnostics: – Status LED on the IM 151-1 STANDARD interface module:

SF: off – Status LEDs on the 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature electronic module:

SF: off1: off/on


See alsoReading out the diagnostics (Page 6-29)



Brief Instructions on Commissioning ET 200S2.2 Commissioning on PROFINET IO


2.2 2.2Com missioning on PROFINET IO

2.2.1 Introduction

IntroductionThe following simple example teaches you step-by-step how to commission the ET 200S onPROFINET IO:• Installing and wiring of ET 200S• Configuring with STEP 7 using the GSD file• Transferring device names to the IO device• Integrating into the user program• Switching on the ET 200S• Evaluating the interrupts and diagnostics:

– Removing and inserting of modules – Switching off the load voltage on the power module – Wire break in the actuator wiring on the digital output module

Requirements• You have set up an S7 station consisting of a power supply module and an IO controller

(e.g., CPU 317-2 PN/DP). A CPU 317-2 PN/DP was used as the IO controller in thisexample.

• STEP 7 (V5.3 Service Pack 1 or higher) is fully installed on your programming device(PG). You are familiar withSTEP 7 .

• The PG is connected to the PROFINET IO.





Required componentsThe figure below illustrates the ET 200S components needed for the example on

PROFINET IO:

Figure 2-2 Components for the example on PROFINET IO

Order numbers for the example configuration on PRO FINET IO

Quan tity Ordering data Order numb er

1 × Standard mounting rail, 35 mm (e.g., length of 483 mm) 6ES5 710-8MA111 × IM151-3 PN interface module and terminating module, 1 unit 6ES7151-3AA10-0AB01 × SIMATIC Micro Memory Card (e. g. 64k) 6ES7953-8LF11-0AA02 × TM-P15N23-A1 Fast Connect terminal module, 1 unit 6ES7193-4CC70-0AA02 × TM-E15N24-A1 Fast Connect terminal module, 5 units 6ES7193-4CA70-0AA02 × PM-E 24 VDC, 1 unit 6ES7138-4CA01-0AA01 × 2DI DC24V HF, 5 pieces 6ES7131-4BB01-0AB01 × 2DO DC24V/0.5A HF, 5 pieces 6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0

PROFINET connector (according to the specifications in the PROFINETInstallation Guide )Appropriate installation cables:• FC Standard Cable• FC Trailing Cable• FC Marine Cable

6XV1 840-2AH106XV1 840-3AH106XV1 840-4AH10





2.2.2 Exam ple: Installing and wiring ET 200S

Installing the mounting rail1. Mount the rail (35 mm x 7.5 mm or 15 mm) with a length of at least 210 mm on a

stationary base.2. Start from the left with the installation of the individual modules on the profile rail (hook in

- swivel in - slide to left). Adhere to the following sequence: – IM151-3 PN interface module – TM-P15N23-A1 terminal module – 4 x TM-E15N24-A1 terminal module – TM-P15N23-A1 terminal module

– 4 x TM-E15N24-A1 terminal module – Terminating module

Wiring and assembling ET 200S1. Wire the ET 200S as shown below:

1 2 3

① 24 VDC electronic power supply② 24 VDC sensor supply voltage group 1③ 24 VDC voltage group 2





1. Use the PROFINET connector to connect the ET 200S (IO device) to the IO controller viaa switch. The PROFINET interface is located on the IM 151-3 PN interface module.

2. Insert the power and electronic modules into the terminal modules.3. Switch on the power supply for the IO controller.4. Observe the status LEDs on the IO controller.

CPU 317-2 PN/DP: – DC 5 V → lights up – SF → off – BF2 → flashes

2.2.3 Example: Configuring ET 200S in SIMATIC Manager

Procedure1. Start SIMATIC Manager, and create a new project with an IO controller

(e.g., CPU 317-2 PN/DP). Create OB1, OB82, and OB83 for the project.2. Open the "Properties - Ethernet Interfaces" window in the HW config and apply a subnet

e. g. Ethernet(1).3. Take the IM151-3 PN from the ET 200S catalog of the hardware catalog and insert it on

Ethernet(1):PROFINET IO System (100).4. Drag the individual ET 200S modules from the hardware catalog to the configuration

table.

Table 2-2 Configuration table in HW config for PROFINET IO

Module Order number I address Q address Comment

0 6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0 IM151-3 PN1 6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0 PM-E DC24V Power module2 6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0 2DI DC24V 0 Byte 0.0 and 0.13 6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0 2DI DC24V 1 Byte 1.0 and 1.14 6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0 2DI DC24V 2 Byte 2.0 and 2.15 6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0 2DI DC24V 3 Byte 3.0 and 3.16 6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0 PM-E DC24V Power module7 6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0 2DO DC24V 0 Byte 0.0 and 0.18 6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0 2DO DC24V 1 Byte 1.0 and 1.19 6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0 2DO DC24V 2 Byte 2.0 and 2.1

10 6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0 2DO DC24V 3 Byte 3.0 and 3.1





1. Set the following parameters: – In the IO device properties dialog for the PM-E 24 VDC,

Module 1 (in the configuration table)Diagnostics: Missing load induced stress – In the IO device properties dialog for the 2 DO 24 VDC,

Module 7 (in the configuration table)Diagnostics: Wire failure A0

2. Compile and save the configuration.

2.2.4 Exam ple: Assigning device name s for the IO device

Procedure1. Insert the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card in the IM151-3 PN.2. Switch on the power supply for the IM151-3 PN interface module.3. Open the "Properties - IM151-3 PN" window in the HW config and enter the device name

for the IO device there.4. An online PROFINET connection from the PG to the IO device via a switch is required for

transferring the name to the IM151-3 PN interface module.The device name is transferred to the IM151-3 PN using "PLC > Ethernet > AssignDevice Name." To do so, activate the "Assign name" button in the "Assign device name"

window. The device name is stored on the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card in the interfacemodule IM151-3 PN.Once the name is assigned, it appears in the window.

2.2.5 Exam ple: Creating a user program

Procedure1. Create the user program in the LAD/STL/FBD editor in OB1.

Example 1: Reading in an input and controlling an output:

STL

A I 0.0 If input byte 0.0 and

A M 2.0 memory bit 2.0 are set, then

S Q 0.0 set output byte 0.0





Example 2: Transferring an input byte to an output byte:

STLL PIB 0 Load I/O input byte 0 in the accumulator

(bytes 0.0 to 0.7)

T PQB 0 Transfer the accumulator content to

I/O output byte 0 (byte 0.0 to 0.7)

1. Save the project in SIMATIC Manager.2. Download the configuration to the IO controller.

2.2.6 Exam ple: Sw itching on ET 200S

Procedure1. Switch on all of the power supplies on the ET 200S.2. Observe the status LEDs on the IO controller, ET 200S, and switch.

– CPU 317-2 PN/DP:DC 5 V: lights upSF: offBF2: off

LINK: lights up – ET 200S:

SF: offBF: offON: lights upLINK: lights up

– Switch:LINK: lights up100MB: lights up





2.2.7 Exam ple: Evaluating diagnostic mess ages

IntroductionIn this example, you generate diagnostic messages by provoking errors in the ET 200S.In the event of an error, OB83 is started. You evaluate the start information in OB83.Hint: Call up the SFB 52 within the OB 83 and evaluate the diagnostic telegram.

Procedure1. Remove the 2 DI 24 VDC High Feature electronic module from the terminal module

(e.g., from slot 2) during operation.2. Observe the status LEDs on the IM 151-3 PN interface module:

– SF: lights up → diagnostic message present. – BF: off – ON: lights upResult: The ET 200S continues to run without fault.

3. In the event of a remove interrupt, OB83 is started. Start SFB 52 in OB83. Evaluate theE002H diagnostic data record.

Byte Contents Meaning

Header information

0 and 1 8104 H Data record with discrepancies between the preset and actualconfigurations2 and 3 0014 H 20 bytes follow4 and 5 0100 H Version 1.06 and 7 0001 H 0001H if the preset configuration deviates from the actual

configurationIO device header information

8 and 9 0000 H steady10 and 11 0000 H steady12 and 13 0001 H Number of slots in which there is a discrepancy between the preset

configuration and the actual configuration

Configuration data o f slots 14 and 15 0002 H Slot number of the slot with a discrepancy between the preset and

actual configurations16 to 19 XXXXXXXXH Identification of the inserted module

20 and 21 0000 H No module inserted22 and 23 0000 H Number of submodule slots with a discrepancy between the preset

and actual configurations. Because the content is 0000 H, noadditional submodule data follow.





1. Reinsert the removed electronic module into the terminal module.Result:

– Status LEDs on the IM151-3 PN interface module:SF: offBF: offON: lights up

– Once the module is inserted, diagnostic data record E002 H no longer indicates adiscrepancy between the preset and actual configurations for any slot.

Switching off load voltage on the pow er module1. Switch off the load voltage on the PM-E 24 VDC (slot 1).

2. Observe the status LEDs.IM 151-3 PN interface module: – SF: lights upPower module: – PWR: off → Load voltage on power module not present – SF: lights up → diagnostic message present.I/O modules in the voltage group: – LEDs: light up

3. Evaluate diagnostic data record C00A H.Hint: Call up the SFB 52 within the OB 81 or OB82 and evaluate the diagnostic telegram.

Byte Contents Mean ing

Header information 0 and 1 0010 H Data record with channel diagnostics2 and 3 0012 H 18 bytes follow4 and 5 0100 H Version 1.0

Channel diagnostic data 6 and 7 0001 H Slot 18 and 9 0001 H Submodule slot 1

10 and 11 8000 H Error on submodule12 08H Incoming fault13 00H Reserved

14 and 15 8000 H Submodule diagnostic is pendingChann el diagnostic data record 0 with detailed information on the fault

16 and 17 0000 H Channel 018 08H Arriving fault19 01H Data type: 1 Bit

20 and 21 0011 H Sensor or load voltage missing





1. Switch on the load voltage on the power module again, and reevaluate the diagnostics.Result:

– Status LEDs on the IM151-3 PN interface module:SF: off

– Status LEDs on the power module:PWR: onSF: off

– Status LEDs on the I/O modules:LEDs: off

– The diagnostic is deleted.

Simulating a w ire break in the actuator wiring1. Remove the cable from terminal 1 on the 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A; High Feature electronic

module (slot 7)2. Observe the status LEDs:

IM151-3 PN interface module: – SF: lights up2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature electronic module:

– SF: lights up → diagnostic message present. – 1: 1: off → output is not activated

3. Evaluate diagnostic data record C00A H:

Byte Contents Meaning

Header information 0 and 1 0010 H Data record with channel diagnostics2 and 3 0012 H 18 bytes follow4 and 5 0100 H Version 1.0

Channel diagnostic data 6 and 7 0007 H Slot 78 and 9 0001 H Submodule slot 1

10 and 11 8000 H Error on submodule12 08H Incoming fault13 00H Reserved

14 and 15 8000 H Submodule diagnostic is pendingChann el diagnostic data record 0 with detailed information on the fault

16 and 17 0000 H Channel 018 48H Incoming fault at an output19 01H Data type: 1 Bit

20 and 21 0006 H Wire break





1. Reattach the cable to the actuator to terminal 1, and reevaluate the diagnostics: – Status LEDs on the IM151-3 PN interface module:

SF: off – Status LEDs on the 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature electronic module:

SF: off1: off/on

– The diagnostic is deleted.








Configuration options 33.1 3.1Precisely Modular System

Principle

In describing the ET 200S as a discretely modular system, we mean you can adapt theET 200S configuration to meet the exact requirements of your application.The table below shows you a number of examples of ET 200S distributed I/O systemconfigurations:

Table 3-1 Configuration examples for ET 200S

Example Structure

ET 200S with• Digital electronic modules• Analog electronic modules• Technology modules



Configuration options3.1 Precisely Modular System


Example StructureET 200S with motor starters

ET 200S with• Electronic modules• Motor starters



Configuration options3.2 ET 200S Power Supply


3.2 3.2ET 200S Pow er Supply

OverviewPower is supplied to the ET 200S:• With 24 VDC at the interface module (see table below).

Table 3-2 Power supply of the ET 200S

Powe r supply Configuration (example)

24 VDCat the interface module



Configuration options3.3 Placing power modules and connecting them to common potential


3.3 3.3Placing power modules and connecting them to common potential

Placing and Connecting to Comm on PotentialWith ET 200S, you can choose where to position the power modules. Each TM-P terminalmodule (for a power module) that you install in the ET 200S opens a new voltage group. Allsensor and load supplies of the downstream electronic modules/motor starters are fed fromthis TM-P terminal module (for a power module). If you place an additional TM-P terminalmodule after an electronic module/motor starter, you interrupt the voltage buses (P1/P2) andsimultaneously open a new voltage group. This enables sensor and load supplies to beindividually connected to common potential.

AUX (iliary) Rail (AUX 1)

A TM-P terminal module (for a power module) enables you to connect an additional potential(up to the maximum rated load voltage of the module), which you can apply by means of theAUX(iliary) bus. You can set the AUX(iliary) bus individually:• As a protective conductor bar• For additionally required voltage

Placing power modules and connecting them to com mon potential

1 2 3

456

7

55

89

① Voltage group 1 ⑧ Supply voltage 2② Voltage group 2 ⑨ Supply voltage 1③ Voltage group 3 ⑩ Additionally required voltage④ Termination Protective conductor⑤ Power module P1/P2 power buses⑥ Interface module AUX bus⑦ Supply voltage 3



Configuration options3.3 Placing power modules and connecting them to common potential


Warning

If you connect the AUX1 bus to common potential independently of the P1/P2 buses(different voltages), there is no safe electrical separation between the AUX1 bus and theP1/P2 buses.

Connecting different potentials to the AUX1 bus

NoteIf you apply different potentials to the AUX1 bus within an ET 200S station, you mustseparate the voltage groups by means of a power module with the TM-P15S23-A0 terminalmodule.



Configuration options3.4 Configuration options for the interface modules


3.4 3.4Configuration options for the interface modules

Which Interface Module M atches Your Application:

Table 3-3 Interface modules and the applications for which they are suited

Applications Interface modu le• Connecting the PROFIBUS DP via an RS 485

interface• Operation as a DPV0 slave• Direct data exchange• ET 200S Power Supply Bus Length: not relevant• Number of modules: max. 12

Transfer rates:9.6; 19.2; 45.45; 93.75; 187.5; 500kBaud, 1.5 ; 3; 6; 12 Mbit/s

IM151-1 BASIC

• Connecting the PROFIBUS DP via an RS 485interface

• Operation as a DPV0 slave• Direct data exchange• ET 200S bus length: max. 2 m (can be

parameterized)• Number of modules: max. 63• Option handling and status byte for power

modulesIn addition, for 6ES7151-1AA04-0AB0 or higher:• Operation as a DPV1 slave

– Acyclic data traffic (read/write data record) – Diagnostic interrupts – Hardware interrupts – Insert/remove module interrupts

• Firmware update via PROFIBUS DP• Identification data

Transfer rates:9.6; 19.2; 45.45; 93.,75; 187.5;500 kBaud, 1.5 ; 3; 6; 12 Mbit/s

IM151-1 STANDARD

• Connecting the PROFIBUS DP via fiber-opticcable

• Operation as a DPV0 slave• Direct data exchange• ET 200S bus length: max. 2 m (can be

parameterized)• Number of modules: max. 63• Option handling and status byte for power

modulesIn addition, for 6ES7151-1AB03-0AB0 or higher:• Operation as a DPV1 slave

– Acyclic data traffic (read/write data record) – Diagnostic interrupts – Hardware interrupts – Insert/remove module interrupts


Transfer rates:9.6; 19.2; 45.45; 93.75; 187.5; 500kBaud, 1.5 ; 12 Mbit/s

IM 151-1 FO STANDARD





Applications Interface mod ule• Connecting the PROFIBUS DP via an RS 485

interface• Direct data exchange• Security-oriented I-slave-slave-communication

via PROFIBUS DP• Use of fail-safe modules• Clocking as of 1.5 Mbps• Firmware update via PROFIBUS DP using HW

Config• Operation as a DPV0 slave

– Noncyclical data traffic (dataset read/write):Class 2 services (e.g. firmware update)

• Operation as a DPV1 slave – Acyclic data traffic (read/write data record) – Diagnostic interrupts – Hardware interrupts – Insert/remove module interrupts

• Number of modules: max. 63after 6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0 additional:• ET 200S bus length: max. 2 m (can be

parameterized)• Identification Data• Option handling and status byte for power

module• Security-oriented I-slave-slave-communication

for fault-secure modules• Operation as DPV1-slave on the Y-switching

Transfer rates:

9.6; 19.2; 45.45; 93.75; 187.5; 500kBaud, 1.5 ; 3; 6; 12 Mbit/s

IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE

• Connection of the PROFINET IO via RJ45connector

• Operation as an IO device – Diagnostic interrupts – Hardware interrupts – Insert/remove module interrupts

• ET 200S bus length: max. 2 m• Number of modules: max. 63• Status byte for power modulesafter 6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0 additional:• Summary of modules within a byte (packing)• Slot granular replacement value behavior• Data sets for I/O devices

Transfer rate:100 Mbit/sAutosensing

IM151-3 PN





Rules for setting up a fiber-optic cable network with IM151-1 FO S TAND ARDFor fiber-optic cable networks containing nodes with integrated fiber-optic cable interfaces,

note the following:• The fiber-optic cable network can only be set up as a line segment.• If you remove the fiber-optic cable from an integrated fiber-optic cable interface, or the

supply voltage to the IM151-1 FO STANDARD interface module fails, all the downstreamnodes are no longer accessible.

Exam ple configuration of a fiber-optic cable network with IM151-1 FO STAN DAR DThe figure below presents an example of how to set up a fiber-optic cable network with theET 200S and the IM151-1 FO STANDARD interface module.

1

2

3

① S7-400H automation system with IM 467 FO as the DP master② ET 200S Distributed I/O with IM151-1 FO STANDARD③ Fiber-optic duplex cable

Rules for setup of a PROFINE T networkYou can find information about setting up and starting up PROFINET in thePROFINETsystem documentation .



Configuration options3.5 Configuration options between the terminal modules and electronic modules


3.5 3.5Configuration options between the terminal modules and e lectronicmodules

3.5.1 Electronic modu les and applications

Use of electronic modules

Table 3-4 Electronic modules and the applications for which they are suitable

Applications Electronic modu le

24 VDC 2DI 24 VDC Standard2DI 24 VDC High Feature4DI 24 VDC Standard4DI 24 VDC High Feature4DI 24 VDC/SRC Standard

•

Evaluating switches, proximityswitches (BEROs), sensors, andencoders

UC 24 to 48V 4DI 24 to 48 VUC High Feature• Evaluating NAMUR sensors• Evaluating wired, unwired

mechanical sensors

4 input channels 4DI NAMUR

120 VAC 2DI 120 VAC Standard• Evaluating switches, proximityswitches (BEROs), sensors, andencoders 230 VAC 2DI 230 VAC Standard

24 VDC up to 0.5 A 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature4DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard

24 VDC up to 2 A 2DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard2DO 24 VDC/2 A High Feature4DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard

120/230 VAC up to 1 A 2DO 24 to 230 VAC/1 AUp to 120 VDC/230 VAC up to 5 A 2RO NO 24 to 120 VDC/5 A 24 to 230

VAC/5 A

• Switching solenoid valves, DC andAC contactors, indicator lights,actuators

Up to 48 VDC/230 VAC up to 5 A 2RO NO/NC 24 to 48 VDC/5 A 24 to 230VAC/5 A

• Measuring voltages ±10 V/ ± 5 V/ 1 to 5 V 2AI U Standard• Measuring voltages with high

resolution±10 V/ ± 5 V/ 1 to 5 V 2AI U High Feature

• Time-critical measuring of voltages ± 10V/ ± 5V/ ± 2.5V/ 1 to 5V 2AI U High Speed• Measuring currents with two-wire

measuring transducers4 to 20 mA 2AI I 2WIRE Standard

4AI I 2WIRE Standard• Time-critical measuring of currents

with two-wire measuringtransducers

4 to 20 mA0 to 20 mA

2AI I 2WIRE High Speed

• Measuring currents with four-wiremeasuring transducers

± 20 mA/ 4 to 20 mA 2AI I 4WIRE Standard





Applications Electronic modu le• Measuring currents with two-wire,

four-wire measuring transducersand high resolution

± 20 mA/ 4 to 20 mA 2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature

• Time-critical measuring of currentswith four-wire measuringtransducers

4 to 20 mA0 to 20 mA± 20 mA

2AI I 4WIRE High Speed

• Measuring temperatures withthermoresistors and resistors

• Measuring reference junctiontemperatures in thermocoupleapplications

Pt100/ Ni100 150 Ω/300 Ω/600 Ω 2AI RTD Standard

• Measuring temperatures withthermoresistors and resistors

• Measuring reference junction

temperatures in thermocoupleapplications• High degree of accuracy• Temperature coefficient can be

assigned

Pt100/ Ni100/ Pt 200/ Ni 120/ Pt500/ Ni 500/ Pt 1000/ Ni 1000 150Ω/ 300 Ω/ 600 Ω/ PTC

2AI RTD High Feature

• Measuring temperatures withthermocouples and voltages

Type E/N/J/K/L/S/R/B/T± 80 mV

2AI TC Standard

• Measuring temperatures withthermocouples and voltages

• Internal reference junction inconnection with TM-E15S24-AT

Type E/N/J/K/L/S/R/B/T/C± 80 mV

2AI TC High Feature

• Outputting of voltages ± 10 V/ 1 to 5 V 2AO U Standard•

Outputting of voltages with highresolution ± 10 V/ 1 to 5 V 2AO U High Feature• Outputting of currents ±20 mA/ 4 to 20 V 2AO I Standard• Outputting of currents with high

resolution± 20 mA/ 4 to 20 V 2AO I High Feature

• Photoelectric proximity switch Reflex sensor and diffuse sensorwith IQ-SENSE

4 IQ-SENSE

24 V signals up to 100 kHz 1COUNT 24V/100kHz• Counting of pulses, measurementof frequency, rotational speed, orperiod duration by means ofincremental encoders

5 V signals up to 500 kHz 1COUNT 5V/500kHz

• Detecting and evaluating of pathswith absolute encoders (SSI)

• Simple positioning tasks

Absolute encoder: 13 Bit/ 21 Bit/ 25Bit

1SSI

• Control of stepper motor powersections

• Positioning of stepper motors

5 V pulses up to 204 kHz 1STEP 5V/204kHz

• Outputting of pulses in 4 differentoperating modes

Minimum pulse duration of 200 µs 2PULSE

Drive controlled by means of digitaloutputs: backwards, forwards, rapidtraverse/creep speed

1POS INC/Digital• Controlled positioning, incrementalencoder 5 V differential signals

Drive triggered via analog output±10V

1POS INC/Analog





Applications Electronic modu le

Drive controlled by means of digital

outputs: backwards, forwards, rapidtraverse/creep speed

1POS SSI/Digital• Controlled positioning, SSI encoder

Drive triggered via analog output±10V

1POS SSI/Analog

ASCII and 3964(R) protocol 1SI 3964/ASCII• RS-232C/RS-422/RS-485 serialdata transmission Protocol mode and USS 1SI Modbus/USS

• Reservation of a slot for anyelectronic module

Width 15 mmWidth 30 mm

RESERVE

Use of electronic modules on terminal modulesYou can combine the terminal modules in the ET 200S configuration.

Table 3-5 TM-P terminal modules and the power modules for which they are suitable

Power modules TM-P terminal modules for power modules

Screw terminal 15S23-A1 15S23-A0 15S22-01 30S44-A0 F30S47-F0

Order number6ES7-193

...4CC20-0AA0 ...4CD20-0AA0 ...4CE00-0AA0 ...4CK20-0AA0 3RK1903-3AA00

Spring terminal 15C23-A1 15C23-A0 15C 22-01 30C44-A0

Order number6ES7-193

...4CC30-0AA0 ...4CD30-0AA0 ...4CE10-0AA0 ...4CK30-0AA0 ---

Fast Connect 15N23-A1 15N23-A0 15N22-01

Order number6ES7-193 ...4CC70-0AA0 ...4CD70-0AA0 ...4CE60-0AA0

--- ---

PM-E 24 VDC PM E 24-48 VDC PM-E 24 to 48 VDC/24 to 230 VAC

PM-E F pm 24 VDCPROFIsafe*

PM-E F pp 24 VDCPROFIsafe*

PM-D F 24 VDCPROFISafe

* see manual ET 200S Fault-Secure Modules





Table 3-6 TM-E terminal modules and the electronic modules for which they are suitable

Electronic modu les TM-E terminal modu les for electronic modu les

Screw terminal 15S26-A1 15S24-A1 15S24-01 15S23-01 15S24-AT 30S44-01 30S46-A1Order number6ES7193

...4CA40-0AA0

...4CA20-0AA0

...4CB20-0AA0

...4CB00-0AA0

...4CL20-0AA0

...4CG20-0AA0

...4CF40-0AA0

Spring terminal 15C26-A1 15C24-A1 15C24-01 15C23-01 15C24-AT 30C44-01 30C46-A1

Order number6ES7193

...4CA50-0AA0

...4CA30-0AA0

...4CB30-0AA0

...4CB10-0AA0

...4CL30-0AA0

...4CG30-0AA0

...4CF50-0AA0

Fast Connect 15N26-A1 15N24-A1 15N24-01 15N23-01

Order number6ES7193

...4CA80-0AA0

...4CA70-0AA0

...4CB70-0AA0

...4CB60-0AA0

--- --- ---

2DI 24 VDC Standard2DI 24 VDC High Feature4DI 24 VDC Standard4DI 24 VDC High Feature4DI 24 VDC/SRC Standard

4DI UC24..48V HF 4DI NAMUR 2DI 120 VAC Standard 2DI 230 VAC Standard 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 AStandard2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A HighFeature

4DO 24 VDC/0.5 AStandard

2DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard2DO 24 VDC/2 A HighFeature4DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard

2DO 24-230 VAC/2 A 2RO NO 24 to 120 VDC/5A 24 to 230 VAC/5 A2RO NO/NC 24 to 48VDC/5 A 24 to 230 VAC/5A

2AI U Standard2AI U High Feature2AI U High Speed

2AI I 2WIRE Standard2AI I 2WIRE High Speed

4AI I 2WIRE Standard 2AI I 2/4WIRE HighFeature

2AI I 4WIRE Standard2AI I 4WIRE High Speed

2AI RTD Standard






Screw terminal 15S26-A1 15S24-A1 15S24-01 15S23-01 15S24-AT 30S44-01 30S46-A1

Order number6ES7193 ...4CA40-0AA0 ...4CA20-0AA0 ...4CB20-0AA0 ...4CB00-0AA0 ...4CL20-0AA0 ...4CG20-0AA0 ...4CF40-0AA0 Spring terminal 15C26-A1 15C24-A1 15C24-01 15C23-01 15C24-AT 30C44-01 30C46-A1

Order number6ES7193

...4CA50-0AA0

...4CA30-0AA0

...4CB30-0AA0

...4CB10-0AA0

...4CL30-0AA0

...4CG30-0AA0

...4CF50-0AA0


Order number6ES7193

...4CA80-0AA0

...4CA70-0AA0

...4CB70-0AA0

...4CB60-0AA0

--- --- ---

2AI RTD High Feature 2AI TC Standard 2AI TC High Feature 2AO U Standard2AO U High Feature

2AO I Standard2AO I High Feature

4 IQ-SENSE 1COUNT 24V/100kHz 1COUNT 5V/500kHz 1SSI 1STEP 5V/204kHz 2PULSE 1POS INC/Digital

1POS SSI/Digital 1POS INC/Analog 1POS SSI/Analog 1SI 3964/ASCII 1SI Modbus/USS 4/8 F-DI 24 VDCPROFIsafe*

4 F-DO 24 VDC/2 APROFIsafe*

RESERVE(width 15 mm)

RESERVE(width 30 mm)

* see ET 200S Fail-Safe Modules manual





3.5.2 Identifying the proper terminal modu le for a power module

Applicability of power m odulesThe table below indicates which power modules you can use with the various electronicmodules:

Powe r modu les Electronic modu les

PM-E 24 VDC Can be used with all electronic modules except the 2DI 120 VAC Standard, 2DI 230 VACStandard, and 2DO 120/230 VAC.

PM-E 24 to 48 VDC Can be used with all electronic modules except the 2DI 120 VAC Standard, 2DI 230 VACStandard, and 2DO 120/230 VAC.

PM-E 24 to 48 VDC/ 24 to230 VAC

Can be used with all electronic modules.

PM-E F pm 24 VDCPROFIsafePM-E F pp 24 VDCPROFIsafePM-E F 24 VDC PROFIsafe

For the fail-safe modules.See ET 200S Distributed I/O System Fail-Safe Modules manual







3.5.3 Configuration exam ple: Terminal modules for power modu les

IntroductionThe table below indicates options for using terminal modules for power modules:

Table 3-7 Terminal modules for power modules

Terminal modu le Configuration

TM-P15S22-01TM-P15C22-01TM-P15N22-01

TM-P15S23-A1TM-P15C23-A1TM-P15N23-A1





Terminal modu le ConfigurationTM-P15S23-A0

TM-P15C23-A0TM-P15N23-A0

TM-P30S44-A0TM-P30C44-A0





Terminal modu le ConfigurationTM-PF30S47-F1





3.5.4 Identifying the proper terminal modu le for an electronic modu le

Procedure

Figure 3-2 Selecting terminal modules for electronic modules





3.5.5 Configuration exam ple: Terminal modu les for electronic modu les

IntroductionThe table below indicates options for using terminal modules for electronic modules:

Table 3-8 Terminal modules for electronic modules

Terminal modu les Configuration

TM-E15S26-A1TM-E15C26-A1TM-E15N26-A1

TM-E15S24-A1TM-E15C24-A1TM-E15N24-A1






TM-E15S24-01

TM-E15C24-01TM-E15N24-01

TM-E15S23-01TM-E15C23-01TM-E15N23-01

TM-E15S24-ATTM-E15C24-AT






TM-E30S44-01

TM-E30C44-01

TM-E30S46-A1TM-E30C46-A1



Configuration options3.6 Direct data exchange on PROFIBUS DP


3.6 3.6Direct data exchange on PROFIBUS DP

IntroductionThe ET 200S can be used as the sender (publisher) for direct data exchange(data exchange broadcast). The DP master you are using must, of course, also supportdirect data exchange. You will find information on this in the description of the DP master.

PrincipleDirect data exchange (data exchange broadcast) is characterized by the fact thatPROFIBUS DP nodes "listen in" on which data a DP slave is returning to its DP master. Thismechanism enables the node that is "listening in" (receiver / subscriber) to directly accesschanges to the input data of remote DP slaves.During configuration inSTEP 7 , you use the respective I/O input addresses to specify theaddress area of the receiver where the sender's data are to be placed.

Example: Direct data exchange with IM151-1 HIGH FEATUREThe figure below gives an example of the direct data exchange relationships you canconfigure with an ET 200S as the sender and the nodes that can "listen in" as possiblereceivers.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

88

9

① CPU 31x-2 ⑥ DP slave② DP master system 1 ⑦ CPU 31x-2 as DP slave③ CPU 31x-2 as DP master 1 ⑧ ET 200S④ DP master system 2 ⑨ PROFIBUS⑤ CPU 31x-2 as DP master 2



Configuration options3.6 Direct data exchange on PROFIBUS DP


Note

The IM 151-1 High Feature differentiates the Security-oriented I-slave-slave-communicationvia PROFIBUS DP for the fault-secure modules after 6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0. You can findthe description of this function in the manualS7 Distributed Safety Configuration andProgramming .



Configuration options3.7 Isochronous operation on PROFIBUS DP


3.7 3.7Isochronous operation on PR OFIBUS DP

3.7.1 Cycle Synchronization on the PR OFIB US DP - Basics

FeaturesReproducible response times (i.e., of equal length) are achieved in SIMATIC with anequidistant DP bus cycle, synchronization of the user program on the DP bus cycle, and theisochronous transfer of I/O data to the I/O modules. The isochronous portions of the userprogram are processed synchronously with the DP bus cycle by means of synchronous cycleinterrupts (OB61 to OB64). The I/O data are transferred at defined and constant(isochronous) intervals via the backplane bus of the DP slave to the I/O modules and

switched through isochronously up to the "terminal."In other words, isochronous operation results in the synchronization of all of the hithertofree-running single cycles. These include the user program in the CPU, the DP cycle on thePROFIBUS subnet, the cycle in the DP slave, and, finally, the cycle in the I/O modules of theDP slaves.The maximum jitter for the IM151-1 amounts to 10 µs. The jitter of the periphery devices ofthe ET 200S cannot be accounted for due to the existing diversity.

Requirements• The cycle synchronization is possible with the IM 151-1 HIGH FEATURE with modules,

that support cycle synchronization. You can see whether a module supports cyclesynchronization in the device description or HW config. Other modules in the ET 200Ssetup are possible. However, these do not support cycle synchronization.

• The transmission rate of the PROFIBUS DP is at least 1.5 Mbps (shorter equidistancetimes can be achieved with higher transmission rates).

• The maximum equidistance cycle is 32 ms.• The equidistance master (Class 1) must be a class 1 DP master. In other words, a

programming device or PC cannot be an equidistance master.• In equidistant operation, only one DP master (Class 1) can be active on the

PROFIBUS DP. Programming devices or PCs (Class 2) can also be connected.• The cycle synchronization can only then be activated on the ET 200S if the equidistant

bus cycle on the DP master system was activated.• Isochronous operation (equidistance) of the ET 200S is not guaranteed during removal or

insertion of electronic modules.If asynchronous results like "Switch on power module" or "Read/Write data set" are tocause no cycle injury, a sufficiently large gap between To and Ti must be ensured, i.e.Tdp is to be increased.

• In equidistant operation, the ET 200S requires a startup time of approximately 150 DPcycles to ensure isochronous operation right through to the terminals.

• The bus length must amount to less than 1 m.





Optimizing the equidistant time• The longest delays for the digital input/output modules (assignable in the case of inputs)

are the critical factor in determining the length of the equidistant DP cycle. Hint: Payattention to equal input delay of all digital modules in the ET 200S-Station for cyclesynchronization.

• The shorter the input delays you set for the HIGH FEATURE digital input modules, theshorter the equidistance times that can be achieved. Hint: For the digital input modulesHIGH FEATURE, set at least one input delay of 0.1 ms.

• The processing time of the modules should be taken into account in the case of modulesthat support isochronous operation.

• The minimum equidistance time is dependent on the number of modules in the ET 200S.Hint: Use at least 4-channel digital input modules HIGH FEATURE to reduce the numberof modules.

Lower equidistance times can be achieved if you distribute the modules of an ET 200S(with a high module count) between two ET 200S stations.• The equidistance time is reduced if you increase the transmission rate.

Hint: Set the highest possible baud rate.

3.7.2 Param eterizing Cycle Synchronization

Procedure

1. CPU settings:"Object properties" of the CPU > Register "Cycle synchronization alarms"

– CPU - Set cycle synchronization alarm – Select the DP master system used – Select the desired subprocess image – Recommended delay time:

accept the standard settings of the default value.

OB 61: 1 1 ms3.00025

Memory Interrupts Time Interrupts Cyclic Interrupts Diagnostics / Clock Protection

General Startup Clock-Synchr. Interrupts Cycle / Clock Flag Remanence

PriorityDP Master-System No.

Subprocess Image(s)(e.g.: 1.4) Time Delay

Default Figure 3-3 Dialog box cycle synchronization alarms





2. DP master system settings:DP master "Object properties" > "General" tab > "Properties" button > "Parameter" tab >

"Properties" button > "Network settings" tab > "Options" button – Activate equidistance on the DP master system – Set the length of the equidistance DP cycle (max. 32 ms) – Set "Times Ti and To for all DP slaves equal" (causes a synchronization of the I/O

data of the various DP slaves) – Times Ti and To can be set separately.

Recommendation: accept the standard settings Ti and To.

8.000 ms ms0.125

00

3.5000 ms ms0.0625

3.5000 ms ms0.0625

Equidistance Network Station Cables

Activate equidistant bus cycle

Optimize DP cycle (and poss. Ti, To): Recalculate

Number of PGs/OPs/TDs etc. on PROFIBUS

Configured: Total:

Equidistant DP cycle:

(min = 6.000 ms; max. = 32.000 ms)

Graduation:

Details ...

Synchronization of Slaves

Times Ti an To identical for all slaves (if not: setting in Properties - Slaves)

Time Ti (read in process values):(min = 3.4375 ms; max = 3.5625 ms)

Time To (output process values):(min = 0.8125 ms; max = 3.5625 ms)

Graduation:

Graduation:

Figure 3-4 Dialog box options

Note

The "recalculate" button enables you to recalculate a value for the equidistant DP cyclefrom STEP 7 that takes the current PROFIBUS DP configuration into account. This valueis then automatically entered in the fields "Equidistant DP cycle", Time Ti (...)" and "TimeTo (...)".





3. DP slave settings:DP slave "Object properties" > "Cycle synchronization" tab

– Activate "Synchronize DP slave to equidistant DP cycle". – Enter times Ti and To (if "Times Ti and To for all DP slave equal" was not set on the

DP master). Recommendation: Accept the standard settings for Ti and To. – Select the devices to be configured and assign in the "Addresses" tab the subprocess

image defined in the CPU.

Figure 3-5 DP slave properties dialog box

Note

If you click on "Cycle synchronization" in the "Edit" menu, a configuration overview of thecycle synchronized devices is displayed.

4. Create user program: – Creation of the OB 61. – At the start of the OB 61, the SFC 126 has to call up the inputs to update the

subprocess image. – At the end of the OB 61, the SFC 127 has to call up the outputs to update the

subprocess image. – The subprocess image to be used is the one in the CPU parameterized subprocess

image ("Cycle synchronization alarms" tab).





3.7.3 Fault correction during isochronous operation on PRO FIBUS DP

Diagnostics

Event Cause Action

Station failure of the ET 200S Faulty isochronous operation(10 or more clock failures orclock violations).

Check the parameterassignment.

The obtainable equidistancetimes are too long.

The input delays of the HIGHFEATURE digital input modulesare not optimally set.

Decrease the input delay of theHIGH FEATURE digital inputmodules.

No isochronous signaldetection/output

Wrong process image partitionused.

Neg. RET_VAL in the case ofSFCs 126/127

Check whether the sameprocess image partition was

used in the user program ofOB61 (or up to OB64) whenSFCs 126/127 are called and inthe configuration of the DPmaster/DP slave.

Further informationYou can find further information to the cycle synchronization in the STEP 7 Online Help andin the manual Cycle synchronicity .



Configuration options3.8 Option handling on PROFIBUS DP


3.8 3.8Option handling on PROFIBUS DP

3.8.1 Basic principles of option handling on PRO FIBUS DP

PrincipleOption handling enables you to set up the ET 200S for future expansions (options). Optionhandling means that you install, wire, configure, and program the planned maximumconfiguration of the ET 200S. The electronic modules required for this are merely replacedwith inexpensive RESERVE modules, which you can easily replace later with the plannedelectronic modules.This means that the ET 200S can be completely prewired ("master cabling") because theRESERVE module is not connected to the terminals of the terminal module and therefore isnot connected to the process.The RESERVE modules for future expansion at the right-hand end of the station areoptional. In this case, preparatory installation and wiring are possible but not required.

See alsoRemoving and inserting electronic modules (Page 5-28)

3.8.2 Principle of operation of option handling

PrincipleWith option handling, the configuration of slots 2 to 63 of the ET 200S is checked. If thecheck is enabled for a slot, the RESERVE module (option) or a configured electronic modulecan occupy this slot without a diagnostic being signaled. If the check is disabled, only theconfigured electronic module can be located in this slot. Any other module will trigger adiagnostic. You can also control the configuration of slots 2 to 63 and monitor theconfiguration of slots 1 to 63 using the control and feedback interface in the process inputimage (PII) and process output image (PIQ).





Figure 3-6 Principle of operation of option handling





3.8.3 Requiremen ts for option handling

RequirementsThe following is required for option handling:• Interface module IM 151-1 STANDARD (after 6ES7151-1AA03-0AB0), IM 151-1 FO

STANDARD (after 6ES7151-1AB02-0AB0) or IM 151-1 HIGH FEATURE(6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0).

• For configuration, the GSD file (see table below)

DPV0 operation DPV0/DPV1 operation DPV0/DPV1operation

SI02806A.GSx SI02806B.GSx SI03806A.GSx SI03806B.GSx SI0280E0.GSx

As of 07/2003 (V1.0 or higher) after date 08/2005(after V2.0)

6ES7151-1AA03-0AB0 X – – – –6ES7151-1AB02-0AB0 – X – – –6ES7151-1AA04-0AB0 X – X – –6ES7151-1AB03-0AB0 – X – X –6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0 – – – – X

Note

You do not require a GSD file for option handling in STEP 7 if you are using both of thefollowing:• IM 151-1 STANDARD / FO

– after STEP 7 V5.3 Service Pack 3 and – The current HW update for the interface and power modules. Link the HW Update in

the HW Config via the "Tools > install HW updates" menu command. You candownload the HW updates on the Internet at Customer Support.

• IM 151-1 HIGH FEATURE – after STEP 7 V5.3 Service Pack 3

You can find the options handling description in the STEP 7 Online Help.

• PM-E 24 to 48 VDC or PM-E 24 to 48 VDC/24 to 230 VAC power moduleOne of these power modules must be included in the configuration at least once.

• RESERVE modules as a substitute for the future electronic modules

Note

If the actual configuration of an ET 200S station does not match the preset configuration,a diagnostic is signaled if the check for the relevant slots is not enabled for optionhandling.





3.8.4 Example: Use of RESE RVE modules

Configuration variants

Figure 3-7 Example of the use of the RESERVE modules





3.8.5 Assigning parameters for option handling

IntroductionIn STEP 7 or COM PROFIBUS, you parameterize the desired electronic module that youwould like to use for future applications e.g. 4DI HF on the RESERVE module slots(or the expansions on the right end of the station):• Drag the electronic module to the configuration table• Assign the parameters

Procedure1. Drag a PM-E 24 to 48 VDC or PM-E 24 to 48 VDC/24 to 230 VAC power module with one

of the following entries to the configuration table: – ...O (option handling) or – ...SO (status byte + option handling)

Note

Entry of the power module with the ending ...O or ...SO can only be made once in theET 200S configuration!

2. Assign parameters to the interface module as follows:Interface modu le Param eters Setting Description

Option handling,general

Enable Option handling is enabled for theentire ET 200S.

IM 151-1STANDARDorIM 151-1 FOSTANDARDorIM 151-1 HIGHFEATURE

Option handling: Slot2 to 63

Enable (all slots onwhich RESERVEmodules can belocated)

There are RESERVE modules ora configured electronic module onthe slot. A diagnostic is notsignaled.

Note

For the parameterization "Operation for set < > actual installation" blocked,• The ET 200S does not start up if a module is missing or if an incorrect module is inserted.

The diagnostic "No module" or "Incorrect module" is signaled.• The ET 200S starts up if you enable option handling for the slot of an inserted RESERVE

module. A diagnostic is not signaled.





Substitute valuesIf you have assigned an electronic module for the RESERVE module, the following substitute

values are signaled:• Digital input modules: 0• Analog input modules: 7FFFH • Function module: 0

3.8.6 Controlling and monitoring options

Introduction

You can use the control interface (PIQ) and feedback interface (PII) to control and monitoroptions by means of the user program.Recommendation: Before you work with the optional enhancements of the ET 200S, checkvia the feedback interface (see table further below) whether all configured electronicmodules are plugged in.

Note

The use of SFCs 14/15 enables consistent accesses to the control and feedback interface.

PrincipleThe control and feedback interface is in the process output and input image of the PM-E 24to 48 VDC or PM-E 24 to 48 VDC/24 to 230 VAC power modules. It is only available if youhave selected the entries ending in ...O or ...SO for the relevant power module in theconfiguration software.There is one bit for each slot of the electronic or RESERVE modules of the ET 200S.• Control interface: Slot 2 to 63• Feedback interface: Slot 1 to 63

Figure 3-8 Control interface (PIQ) and feedback interface (PII)





Control interface PIQ (AB x to AB x+7 ):You can use these bytes (8 bytes) to control the diagnostic behavior of the slots that you

enabled for option handling in HW Config.Only the bits of the slots you enabled for option handling during parameter assignment areevaluated (they are marked with "0").

Table 3-9 Control interface

Slot Value of the bit Respon se

0 Parameter assignment for option handling applies. RESERVEmodules are permitted:• The station is engaged in data exchange.• A diagnostic is not signaled.• The SF LED on the interface module is off.

2 to 63

1 Parameter assignment for option handling is cancelled.RESERVE modules are not accepted on this slot:• The station is engaged in data exchange.• The diagnostic "Incorrect module" is signaled.• The SF LED on the interface module lights up.

Feedback interface PII (EB x to EB x+7):The feedback interface (8 bytes) tells you which module is actually on each slot.

All slots are reported. This includes slots that you have not enabled for option handling.

Table 3-10 Feedback interface

Slot Value of the bit Respon se

0 The RESERVE module, an incorrect module, or a removedmodule is on the slot.

1 to 63

1 The configured module is on the slot.





3.8.7 Fault correction during option handling

Fault correction during option handling

Table 3-11 Fault correction during option handling

Event Cause Action

There are multiple entries ofpower modules ending in ...O or...SO in the ET 200Sconfiguration.

Check and correct theconfiguration in HW Config.

ET 200S does not start up;configuration error

There is no power module entryending in ...O or ...SO in theET 200S configuration.

Use a power module entryending in ...O or ...SO in HWConfig.





Configuration options3.9 Identification data


1. The portion of the identification data assigned to the respective index is located under theassociated data record number (see table on identification data below). –

All data records with identification data have a length of 64 bytes. – The data records are structured according to the principle shown in the table below.

Table 3-13 Basic structure of data records with identification data

Content Length (bytes) Coding (hex)

Header information SSL 2 F1 11Index 2 00 0xLength of identification data 2 00 38Number of blocks with identification data 2 00 01

Identification data Index 2 00 0xIdentification data for the respective index (see tablebelow)

54

The identification data are assigned to the indices corresponding to the table below.The data structures in data records 231 to 234 correspond to the specifications ofPROFIBUS Guideline - Order No. 3.502, Version 1.1, May 2003.

Table 3-14 Identification data

Identification data Access Default setting Explanation

Identification data 0: Index 1 (data record 231) MANUFACTUREROR_ID Read (2 bytes) 2A hex (=42 dec) The name of the manufacturer is stored

here. (42 dec = SIEMENS AG)ORDER_ID Read (20 bytes) Dependent on the

moduleOrder number of the module

SERIAL_NUMBER Read (16 bytes) Not relevantHARDWARE_REVISION Read (2 bytes) Not relevantSWSOFTWARE_REVISION Read (4 bytes) Firmware version Provides information on the firmware

version of the module.REVISIONS_COUNTER Read (2 bytes) - Provides information on the assigned

changes on the module.

PROFILE_ID Read (2 bytes) F600 hex Generic devicePROFILE_SPECIFIC_TYPE

Read (2 bytes) 0005 hex On interface modules

IM_VERSION Read (2 bytes) 0101 hex Provides information on the version of theidentification data (0101 hex = Version 1.1)

IM_SUPPORTED Read (2 bytes) 000E hex Provides information on the availableidentification data (Index 2 to 4)

Maintenance D ata 1: Index 2 (data record 232) TAG_FUNCTION Read/write (32

bytes)- Enter a system-wide unique identifier for

the module here.TAG_LOCATION Read/write (22

bytes)- Enter the installation location of the module

here.



Configuration options3.9 Identification data


Identification data Access Default setting Explanation

Maintenance D ata 2: Index 3 (Data set 233)

INSTALLATION_DATE Read/write (16bytes) - Enter the installation date of the modulehere.RESERVED Read/write (38

bytes)- Reserved

Maintenance D ata 3: Index 4 (Data set 234) DESCRIPTOR Read/write (54

bytes)- Enter a comment on the module here.



Configuration options3.10 Use of the ET 200S in a redundant system


3.10 3.10Use of the ET 200S in a redundant system

PropertiesThe ET 200S is integrated in a redundant DP system as DPV0 or DPV1 slave via the Yswitching.

Requirements

DPV0 DPV1• Possible with all interface modules• after STEP 7 V5.3 SP3•

GSD file

• IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE after(6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0)

• STEP 7 V5.3 SP3

Figure 3-9 ET 200S and the Y switching



Configuration options3.10 Use of the ET 200S in a redundant system


Procedure1. Configuration of the redundant DP system (redundant DP master, PROFIBUS DP,

slaves)2. Configure the ET 200S with STEP 7

ReferenceYou can find further information in the documentation for Y switching (manual or productinformation).



Configuration options3.11 Limitations on the number of modules that can be connected/maximum configuration


3.11 3.11Limitations on the num ber of modu les that can beconnected/maximum configuration

Principle• Number of modules:

– ET 200S with IM151-1 BASIC: max. 12 modules. – ET 200S with IM151-1 STANDARD; IM151-1 FO STANDARD; IM151-1 HIGH

FEATURE: max. 63 modules.

Note

Reduction of the maximum num ber of connectable peripheral modulesFor every utilized 2D0 AC24 230V module in an ET 200S, the number of connectableperipheral modules in this station is reduced by one module.This applies to IM151-1 STANDARD, IM151-1 FO STANDARD and IM151-1 HIGHFEATURE.

This includes power modules, electronic modules, RESERVE modules, and motorstarters.

• Bus length of the ET 200S:

– max. 2 m: for IM151-1 BASIC. – max. 2 m (can be parameterized): for IM151-1 STANDARD; IM151-1 FO STANDARD;

IM 151-1 HIGH FEATURE• Parameter length:

– for PROFIBUS DP: Independent from the DP master used (max. 244 byte)For IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE after 6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0 the possibility exists foroperation on a S7-CPU in configuration after STEP 7 V5.3 SP3 , IM151-1 HIGHFEATURE after 6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0 to operate with more that 244 byte parameterdata. A configuration per GSD file does not offer this possibility. Also see the notebelow.

– for PROFINET IO: not relevant for maximum upgrade.





Table 3-15 Parameter length in bytes

Modu le Parame ter length Modu le Parame ter length

IM151-1 BASIC 19 bytesIM151-1 STANDARDIM151-1 FO STANDARD

27 bytes2AI I 2WIRE Standard4AI I 2WIRE Standard

4 bytes7 bytes

IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE6 27 bytes56 byte 1

2AI I 2WIRE High Speed 12 byte(4 byte 3)

2AI I 4WIRE Standard2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature

4 bytesPM-E 24 VDCPM-E 24 to 48 VDCPM-E 24 to 48 VDC/24 to230 VAC

3 bytes

2AI I 4WIRE High Speed 12 byte(4 byte 4)

2AI RTD Standard 4 bytes2DI 24 VDC High Feature4DI 24 VDC High Feature

3 bytes3 bytes 2AI RTD High Feature 7 byte

(4 byte 2)2DI 24 VDC Standard4DI 24 VDC Standard4DI 24 VDC/SRC Standard

1 byte 2AI TC Standard2AI TC High Feature

4 bytes

4DI NAMUR 12 bytes2DI 120 VAC Standard 3 bytes

2AO U Standard2AO U High Feature

7 bytes

2DI 230 VAC Standard 3 bytes2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A HighFeature

3 bytes2AO I Standard2AO I High Feature

7 bytes

1COUNT 24V/100kHz 16 bytes2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard4DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard

1 byte

1COUNT 5V/500kHz 16 bytes2DO 24 VDC/2 A HighFeature

3 bytes 1SSI 8 bytes

1STEP 5V/204kHz 7 bytes2DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard4DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard

1 byte2PULSE 16 bytes

2DO 24 to 230 VAC/1 A 3 bytes2RO NO 24 to 120 VDC/5 A24 to 230 VAC/5 A

3 bytes1POS INC/Digital1POS SSI/Digital1POS INC/Analog1POS SSI/Analog

16 bytes

2AI U Standard2AI U High Feature

4 bytes 1SI 3964/ASCII1SI Modbus/USS

4/8 bytes

2AI U High Speed 12 byte(4 byte 5)

4 IQ-SENSE 16 bytes

Motor starter STANDARD 3 bytesRESERVE ---Motor starter HIGHFEATURE

12 bytes

1) Cycle synchronization is activated2) for application as 2AI RTD ST3) for application as 6ES7134-4GB50-0AB04) for application as 6ES7134-4FB50-0AB05) for application as 6ES7134-4GB60-0AB06) is not relevant after 6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0





NoteWith the IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE (6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0) you have the possibility toconfigure more than 244 byte parameter data in STEP 7 in DPV1 mode. Due to the higherparameter length, an increase in the startup time is to be expected.

• Address space:

On PROFIBUS DP (depends on the DP master) – The IM151-1 BASIC interface module supports a maximum of 88 input bytes or 88

output bytes.

– Interface module IM151-1 STANDARD and IM151-1 FO STANDARD supportedA maximum of 128 input bytes or 128 output bytes (6ES7151-1AA03-0AB0 or higherand 6ES7151-1AB02-0AB0 or higher)A maximum of 244 input bytes or 244 output bytes (6ES7151-1AA04-0AB0 or higherand 6ES7151-1AB03-0AB0 or higher)

– The IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE interface module supports a maximum of 244 inputbytes or 244 output bytes.

On PROFINET IO – The IM151-3 PN interface module supports a maximum of 256 input bytes and 256

output bytes.• Power module: Maximum expansion per potential group

Table 3-16 Maximum configuration per voltage group

Power modules Maximumcurrent-carrying capacity

Connectable modules

PM-E 24 VDC powermodule

10 A

PM-E 24 to 48 VDC powermodule

10 A

PM-E 24 to 48 VDC/24 to230 VAC power module

10A (DC 24V)8A (AC 120/230V)

The number of modules that can beconnected depends on the total current of allthe modules in this voltage group. This mustnot exceed 10 A in total. The total current isgoverned in large part by the digital outputmodules:• 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard• 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature• 4DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard• 4DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature• 2DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard• 2DO 24 VDC/2 A High Feature• 4DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard• 4DO 24 VDC/2 A High Feature• 2DO 24-230 VAC/2 A





• Number of identifiers: per module one identifier (max. 63 identifiers)• You can use the ET 200S with DP masters with diagnostic frame lengths of 32 bytes

because the length of the diagnostic frame can be assigned for all of the interfacemodules.

See alsoStructure of the slave diagnostics (Page 6-32) Parameters for the IM151-1 BASIC interface module(Page 8-1) Parameters for interface module IM151-1 STANDARD, IM151-1 FO STANDARD andIM151-1 HIGH FEATURE(Page 8-2) Parameters for the IM151-3 PN interface module (Page 8-3)




Installation 44.1 4.1Basic principles of installation

WarningOpen components

Modules of an ET 200S are open components. That is, you must set up the ET 200S inhousings, cabinets, or electrical rooms that are accessible only by means of a key or tool.Only trained and authorized personnel should be allowed access to the housings, cabinets,or electrical rooms.

Simple installationThe ET 200S distributed I/O system is designed for simple installation.

Installation rules• The ET 200S distributed I/O system starts with an interface module.• A power module comes after the interface module or at the beginning of each voltage

group.• After a power module come digital, analog, technology, or RESERVE modules.• The ET 200S distributed I/O system ends with the terminating module.• The maximum configuration of the distributed I/O system is as follows:

– IM151-1 BASIC: max. 13 modules (including interface module). The bus length is notrelevant.

– IM151-1 STANDARD / IM151-1 FO STANDARD / IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE: max. 64modules (including interface module) or max 2 m bus length.

Mounting positionPreferably, the ET 200S is mounted horizontally on a vertical wall. Any other installationposition is also possible; however, there are limitations with regard to ambient temperature.



Installation4.1 Basic principles of installation


Mounting railThe distributed I/O system ET 200S is installed on a galvanized profile rail according to

EN 50022 (35 x 7.5 mm or 35 x 15 mm).

Note

If the ET 200S distributed I/O system is exposed to elevated vibratory and shock loads, werecommend that you screw the rail to the mounting surface at intervals of approximately 200mm.To prevent the ET 200S distributed I/O system from slipping sideways, we recommend thatyou apply a mechanical hold-down (for example, with grounding terminal, 8WA2 011-1PH20)at both ends of the device.If you install the rail on grounded, zinc-plated mounting plates, there is no need to ground

the rail separately.

Mounting dimensions

Table 4-1 Mounting dimensions

Dimensions

Mountingwidth

• Interface module: 45 mm• Terminal module with electronics modules: 15 mm or 30 mm• Terminator module: 7.5 mm

Mountingheight

• Interface module: 119.5 mm• Electronic module with terminal module:

– 3-stepped with screw or spring clamp: 119.5 mm – 3-stepped with Fast Connect: 143 mm – 3-stepped with screw or spring clamp: 151.5 mm – 3-stepped with Fast Connect and shielding plate: 175 mm – 4-stepped with screw or spring clamp: 132 mm – 4-stepped with Fast Connect: 164 mm – 4-stepped with screw or spring clamp and shielding plate: 164 mm – 4-stepped with Fast Connect and shielding plate: 196 mm – 6-stepped with screw or spring clamp: 157 mm – 6-stepped with Fast Connect: 204 mm – 6-stepped with screw or spring clamp and shielding plate: 189 mm – 6-stepped with Fast Connect and shielding plate: 236 mm – 7-stepped with screw clamp: 196.5 mm

Mountingdepth

• ET 200S on profile rail with 7.5 mm depth: 75 mm• ET 200S on profile rail with 15 mm depth: 82.5 mm



Installation4.1 Basic principles of installation


Minimum clearances for mounting, wiring, and h eat dissipationWhen the ET 200S is installed in an enclosure, the distance to the enclosure cover or front

door should be at least 2 mm.

Figure 4-1 Minimum clearances

NoteCompatibility to the successor device of a IM151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0)

Allow for an additional 15 mm space on the left side for the installation in the IM151-3 PN

(6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0). You device is thus compatible to the 15 mm wide successordevice.



Installation4.2 Mounting the interface module


4.2 4.2Mou nting the interface module

Introduction• The interface module connects the ET 200S with the PROFIBUS DP.• The interface module exchanges data between the higher-level controller and the I/O

modules.

Requirements• The mounting rail is installed.• All terminal modules are installed to the right of the interface module. The maximum

configuration of the ET 200S distributed I/O system is 12/63 modules (including powermodules, I/O modules, reserve modules, and motor starters).

Required tool3-mm screwdriver

Mounting the interface module1. Hook the interface module onto the rail.2. Pivot the interface module backwards until you hear the locking mechanism engage.

2

1

Figure 4-2 Mounting the interface module



Installation4.2 Mounting the interface module


Rem oving the interface moduleThe interface module is wired, and the terminal modules are on the right:

1. Switch off the supply voltage on the interface module.2. Disconnect the wiring and the bus connector on the interface module.3. Use a screwdriver to push the locking mechanism on the interface module downward

until it stops, and move the interface module to the left.Note: The locking mechanism is beneath the interface module.

4. With the locking mechanism depressed, pivot the interface module so that it comes offthe mounting rail.



Installation4.3 Mounting the TM-P and TM-E terminal modules


4.3 4.3Mounting the TM-P and TM-E terminal modules

Introduction• The terminal modules accommodate the I/O modules and power modules.• The terminal modules can be prewired (without I/O modules).• All terminal modules are mounted on the right of the interface module.

Requirements• The mounting rail is installed.


Mounting the terminal module1. Hook the terminal module onto the mounting rail.2. Pivot the terminal module backwards until you hear the locking mechanism engage.3. Move the terminal module to the left until you hear it latch onto the previous interface

module (if already mounted) or the terminal module.

1

2

3

Figure 4-3 Mounting the terminal module





Rem oving the terminal moduleThe terminal module is wired, and there are other terminal modules on the right and left.

A particular terminal module within the ET 200S distributed I/O system can only be removedwhen there is a distance of approximately 8 mm to the adjacent terminal modules(you achieve this distance by moving the adjacent modules).1. Switch off the supply voltage on the terminal module and, if applicable, the power

module.2. Disconnect the wiring on the terminal module.3. Removal from the right:

Use a screwdriver to push the locking mechanism on the previous terminalmodule/interface module (on the left) downward until it stops, and move the terminalmodule to the right.

Removal from the left:Use a screwdriver to push the locking mechanism on the terminal module downward untilit stops, and move the terminal module to the left.Note: The locking mechanism is beneath the terminal module.

4. With the locking mechanism depressed, pivot the terminal module so that it comes off themounting rail.Removing the terminal module (from the right)

1

3

4

3

① Locking mechanism





NoteIt is not necessary to remove the terminal module in order to replace the terminal box.

See alsoReplacing the terminal box on the terminal module (Page 4-9)



Installation4.4 Replacing the terminal box on the terminal module


4.4 4.4Replacing the terminal box on the terminal module

IntroductionThe terminal box is part of the terminal module. If necessary, you can replace the terminalbox. It is not necessary to remove the terminal module.

Requirements• The terminal module is installed, wired, and assembled with an electronic module.

Required tool

3-mm screwdriver

Procedure1. Switch off the supply voltage on the terminal module and, if applicable, the power

module.2. Disconnect the wiring on the terminal module.3. Simultaneously press the upper and lower release buttons of the electronic module, and

remove it from the terminal module.4. Insert the screwdriver from below at an angle into the small opening underneath the slot

number plate, and at the same time pull the terminal box downward until it stops. Thenpull the terminal box upward and out of the terminal module.

5. Replace the terminal box, and insert the new one into the terminal module from above(see figure). Then push the terminal box upward until it snaps into place.

6. Insert the electronic module in the terminal module.7. Wire the terminal module.8. Switch on the supply voltage on the terminal module and, if applicable, the power

module.



Installation4.4 Replacing the terminal box on the terminal module


Replacing the terminal box on the terminal module:

4

4

1

① Slot number plate



Installation4.5 Mounting the terminating module


4.5 4.5Mounting the terminating module

IntroductionThe terminating module on the right end of the ET 200S terminates the ET 200S distributedI/O system. If you have not inserted a terminating module, the ET 200S is not ready foroperation.

RequirementsThe last terminal module must be installed.

Mounting the terminating module1. Hook the terminating module onto the mounting rail to the right of the last terminal

module.2. Pivot the terminating module backwards onto the mounting rail.3. Move the terminating module to the left until you hear it latch onto the last terminal

module.

1

2

3

Figure 4-4 Mounting the terminating module



Installation4.5 Mounting the terminating module


Rem oving the terminating module1. Use a screwdriver to push the locking mechanism on the last terminal module downward

until it stops, and move the terminating module to the right.2. Pivot the terminating module so that it comes off the mounting rail.

Note

If• the terminating module of the ET 200S is removed and remounted under voltage, or• the ET 200S backplane bus is interrupted during operation, e.g., at a terminal module,

and then restored to function,the complete power supply of the ET 200S must be switched off and on again in order to

achieve a defined station status.



Installation4.6 Mounting the shield connection


4.6 4.6Mounting the shield connection

Introduction• The shield connection is needed for applying cable shields (e.g., analog electronic

modules, 1COUNT 24V/100kHz electronic module, and 1SSI electronic module).• You mount the shield connection on the terminal module.• The shield connection consists of a shield connection element, a power bus (3 x 10 mm),

a shield clamp, and a grounding terminal.

Requirements• The terminal modules are installed.

Required tool• 3-mm screwdriver• Metal-cutting saw

Procedure1. Push the shield connection element onto the first terminal module from below.2. Push the shield contact element onto the last terminal module from below.

In order to maintain the stability of the power bus between two shield connectionelements during installation, you must insert an additional shield connection element afterevery sixth terminal module (given a width of 15 mm).

3. Saw off a piece of power bus of the appropriate size. The length of the power bus shouldbe equal to the distance between the shield connection elements + 45 mm.

4. Press the power bus onto the shield connection element. The power bus must be sized insuch a way that it projects from the shield contact element by 15 mm on the left or right,depending on the mounting direction.

5. Attach the shield terminals to the power bus (between the shield connection elements).6. Attach the grounding terminal to the projecting power bus.

Mounting the shield connection:



Installation4.6 Mounting the shield connection


1

2

3

4

① Shield terminals② Shield connection elements③ Grounding terminal④ Power bus



Installation4.7 Applying slot number plates and color-coding plates


4.7 4.7Applying slot number plates and color-coding plates

Introduction• The slot number plates identify the individual I/O modules with a slot (1 to 63).• The color-coding plates enable an individual color coding of the terminals in accordance

with company or national conventions. The color-coding plates are available in white, red,blue, brown, yellow, yellow-green, and turquoise. Each terminal on the terminal modulecan be provided with a color-coding plate.

• The slot number plates and color-coding plates are applied to the terminal modules. – Position of the slot number plate: below the coding element on the terminal module. – Position of the color-coding plates: directly next to each terminal on the terminal box.

Requirements• The terminal modules are installed.• There must not be any electronic modules inserted when you apply the slot number

plates.• The terminal modules should not be wired when you apply the color-coding plates.

Required tool3-mm screwdriver (for removal only)

Applying slot numbe r plates and color-coding platesApplying slot number plates: 1. Break off the slot number plate (1 to 63) from the strip.2. Use your finger to press the slot number plate onto the terminal module.

Applying color-coding plates: 1. You can twist off the color-coding plates directly from the strip onto the opening provided

for them next to the terminal2. Use your finger to press the color-coding plates onto the terminal module.



Installation4.7 Applying slot number plates and color-coding plates


Applying slot number plates and color-coding plates:

1

2

2

22

① Slot number plate② Color-coding plates

Rem oving slot number plates and color-coding platesRemoving slot number plate: 1. Detach the electronic module from the terminal module.2. Lift the slot number plate from its holder.

Removing color-coding plates: Use a screwdriver to lift the color-coding plates from their holders.



Installation4.8 Setting the PROFIBUS address


4.8 4.8Setting the PRO FIBUS address

IntroductionThe PROFIBUS address is used to specify the address of the ET 200S distributed I/Osystem on the PROFIBUS DP.• The PROFIBUS DP address for the ET 200S is set on the interface module by means of

DIP switches. The DIP switches are on the front of the interface module, protected by asliding window.

• The permitted PROFIBUS DP addresses are 1 to 125.• Each address can be assigned only once on the PROFIBUS DP.

RequirementsAddress setting is not yet assigned on PROFIBUS DP.


Setting the PROFIBUS DP address1. Slide the window on the interface module upward.2. Use a screwdriver to set the desired PROFIBUS DP address via the DIP switch.3. Close the window.

Figure 4-5 Setting the PROFIBUS address



Installation4.8 Setting the PROFIBUS address


Changing the PROFIBUS DP addressYou change the PROFIBUS DP address in exactly the same way as you set it. A change in

the PROFIBUS DP address is applicable to the ET 200S after a power on at the interfacemodule.




Wiring and Assembling 55.1 5.1General rules and regulations for operating the ET 200S

Introduction

When operating the ET 200S distributed I/O system as part of a plant or system, specialrules and regulations have to be followed depending on the field of application.This chapter provides an overview of the most important rules you have to observe whenintegrating the ET 200S distributed I/O system in a plant or system.

Specific applicationNote the safety and accident prevention regulations that apply to specific applications(for example, machine protection guidelines).

Eme rgency stop devicesEmergency stop devices as defined in IEC 204 (corresponds to DIN VDE 113) must remaineffective in all operating modes of the plant or system.

Startup of the system after certain eventsThe following table identifies situations you must pay attention to when the system starts upafter the occurrence of certain events.

If ... The n ...

Startup follows a power dip or a powerfailureStartup of the ET 200S follows aninterruption of the bus communication

Dangerous operating states must not occur. Ifnecessary, force an emergency stop!

Startup follows unlocking of the emergencystop device

There must not be an uncontrolled or undefinedstartup.



Wiring and Assembling5.1 General rules and regulations for operating the ET 200S


Line voltageThe following table identifies requirements to be observed for the line voltage.

With ... Requ irements

Stationary plants or systems without all-pole linevoltage disconnect switch

There must be a line voltage disconnect switch ora fuse in the building installation.

Load power supplies, power supply modules The set rated voltage range must correspond tothe local line voltage.

All circuits of the ET 200S distributed I/O system Any fluctuation/deviation of the line voltage fromthe rated value must be within the permittedtolerances

24 VDC supplyThe following table identifies requirements you must observe for the 24 VDC supply.

With ... Requirem ents ...

Buildings Outdoor lightningprotection

24 VDC supply lines, signal lines Indoor lightningprotection

Take lightning protectionprecautions(for example, lightning protectionelements)

24 VDC supply Safe (electrical) isolation of extra-low voltage

Protection against outside electrical influencesThe following table identifies requirements you must observe to provide protection againstelectrical influences or faults.

With ... Requirem ents ...

All plants or systems in which the ET 200Sis integrated

The plant or system must be connected to a protectiveconductor for dissipation of electromagneticinterferences.

Supply, signal, and bus lines The wiring arrangement and installation must becorrect.

Signal and bus lines Any wire or conductor break must not result inundefined states of the plant or system.

See alsoMechanical and climatic environmental conditions(Page 7-8)



Wiring and Assembling5.2 Operating the ET 200S on a grounded incoming supply


5.2 5.2Operating the ET 200S on a grounded incoming supply

IntroductionIn this section, you will find information on the overall configuration of an ET 200S distributedI/O system on a grounded incoming supply (TN-S system). The specific subjects discussedare:• Disconnecting devices, short-circuit protection, and overload protection in accordance

with DIN VDE 0100 and DIN VDE 0113• Load voltage supplies and load circuits.

Grounded incoming supply

In grounded incoming supplies, the neutral conductor of the supply line is grounded. A mereground fault between a live conductor and ground or a grounded section of the plant causesthe protective devices to trip.

Safety isolationSafety isolation is required for:• Modules that must be supplied with ≤60 VDC or ≤25 VAC• 24 VDC load circuits

Configuring the ET 200S with ungrounded reference potentialAfter M151-1 BASIC (6ES7151-1CA00-0AB0), IM151-1 STANDARD(6ES7151-1AA02-0AB0), IM151-1 FO STANDARD (6ES7151-1AB01-0AB0), IM151-1 HIGHFEATURE (6ES7151-1BA00-0AB0) and IM151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0) the ground Mof the power supply rated voltage of the IM151-x to the profile rail (ground wire) via an RCcombination and thus a ground-free installation is possible.For dissipation of interference currents, the ground of the IM151-x is internally linked via anRC combination (R = 10 MΩ / C = 22 nF) with the profile rail (ground wire). High-frequencyinterference currents are thus dissipated, and static charge is prevented.





Com ponents and protective measuresVarious components and protective measures are required for the installation of an overall

plant. The types of components and the degree to which the protective measures aremandatory depend on the DIN VDE regulation that applies to your plant setup. The followingtable refers to the figure below.

Compare ... Refer to figure DIN VDE 0100 DIN VDE 0113

Disconnecting device for controller,sensors, and actuators

① ... Part 460:Main switch

... Part 1:Disconnector

Short-circuit and overload protection:Group-wise for sensors and actuators

②

③

... Part 725:Single-pole protection ofcircuits

... Part 1:• Fuse for grounded

secondary electric circuit:unipolar

• otherwise: fuse all poles

Load power supply for AC loadcircuits with more than fiveelectromagnetic devices

②

③

Isolation by transformerrecommended

Isolation by transformerrecommended





ET 200S in the overall configurationThe figure below shows the ET 200S distributed I/O system in the overall configuration

(load voltage supply and grounding concept) with incoming supply from a TN-S system.Low-voltage distribution e.g.TN-S system (3 x 400 V)

FG: Functional ground to divert noisedirectly to the DIN rail by means of aspring contact

Shield contact for fastening cableshields

Ground bus

Mounting rail

Load circuit400 VAC for motor starters

VDC load circuit for electronic modules andmotor starters

120 VAC/230 VAC load circuit for AC modules

3

3

FG FG FG FG FG FG FG FG

1

2

2

2

2

PE (AUX1)

L1L2L3N

AC

DC

PE

AC

DC1L+

1M

ET 200S

AC

AC

Figure 5-1 Operate ET 200S with grounded ground



Wiring and Assembling5.3 Electrical configuration of the ET 200S


5.3 5.3Electrical configuration of the E T 200S

IsolationIn the ET 200S, isolation exists between:• The load circuits/process and all other circuit components of the ET 200S• The PROFIBUS DP interface in the interface module and all other circuit components• The PROFINET interface in the IM151-3 PN interface module and all other circuit

componentsThe figure below shows the voltage ratios for ET 200S with IM151-1. Only the primarycomponents are shown in the figure.

Figure 5-2 Voltage ratios for ET 200S with IM151-1





Wiring and Assembling5.4 Wiring the ET 200S


Procedure1. Strip 11 mm of insulation from the wires.

2. Insert the individual wires into the terminal.3. Screw the ends of the individual wires onto the terminal module (torque of 0.4 to 0.7 Nm).

5.4.3 Wiring a terminal modu le with spring terminals

IntroductionIn terminal modules with spring terminals, the individual wires are affixed by inserting theminto the terminal.

RequirementsFollow the wiring rules.


Procedure

1. Strip 11 mm of insulation from the wires.2. Insert the screwdriver in the upper (round) opening of the terminal.3. Insert the wire into the lower (square) opening of the terminal to the end stop.4. Release the terminal by pressing with the screwdriver into the opening.5. Push the wire into the released spring terminal, and pull the screwdriver out.





Figure 5-3 Wiring the spring terminal

5.4.4 Wiring terminal modules with Fast Connec t

Introduction• In the case of terminal modules with Fast Connect, the individual wires are attached

using a quick connection method that requires no stripping.• Fast Connect is a connection method that requires no wire preparation

(i.e., the wire insulation does not have to be stripped).• Each terminal of the terminal module with Fast Connect has a test opening

(for measuring the voltage, for example). The test opening is suitable for probes with amaximum diameter of Ø 1.5 mm.

• End sleeves are not permitted.• Diagram of the Fast Connect terminal module





1

2

3

4

① Opening for measuring, checking: max. Ø 1.5 mm② Opening for 1 wire: 0.5 ... 1.5 mm2 ③ Locking mechanism open (the wire can be inserted)④ Locking mechanism closed (the cable is connected)

RequirementsFollow the wiring rules.


Connectable wiresYou can connect solid and flexible wires with PVC insulation with a wire cross-section of0.5 mm2 to 1.5 mm2 (max. external diameter of 3.2 mm). If the conductor cross-section is thesame, they can be connected fifty times. You can find a list of the tested wires at:http://www.idc2.de

UL-compliant cables and connections Wiring range for insulating piercing connection 22 -16 AWG solid/stranded PVC insulatedconductors, UL style no. 1015 only.

Wiring terminal modules with Fast Connect1. Insert the unstripped wire into the round opening to the end stop (the insulation and

conductor must form a flat surface).2. Insert the screwdriver into the opening above the locking mechanism to the end stop .3. Press the screw driver downward until the locking mechanism reaches its end position.

http://www.idc2.de/

http://www.idc2.de/

http://www.idc2.de/





Figure 5-4 Wiring terminal modules with Fast Connect

Result: The wire is connected.

Note

If you want to reconnect a wire that was connected previously, you must first cut it off.

Releasing the wiring from the terminal module with Fast Connect1. Insert the screw driver into the opening below the locking mechanism to the end stop.2. Using the screwdriver, lift and press the locking mechanism upward.3. The wiring is released: Remove the wire.

Figure 5-5 Releasing the wiring from the terminal module with Fast Connect





Rem oving any conductor remnants (if necessary)To remove any conductor remnants (insulation), you can remove disassemble the locking

mechanism from the terminal module (see Step 3). To do this, the locking mechanism mustbe open (upper position). You can only insert the locking mechanism in the upper position(see Step 4).1. Insert the screwdriver in the opening below the locking mechanism (the tip of the

screwdriver is on the lip of the locking mechanism).2. Press the screwdriver downward until you lift the locking mechanism from the terminal

module.3. Remove the locking mechanism from the terminal module. Remove any remnants of the

conductor from the locking mechanism.4. Use your fingers to press the locking mechanism back into the opening. Attention: Put the

locking mechanism into the correct position or you could damage the terminal point.

Figure 5-6 Disassembling the locking mechanism from the terminal module

5.4.5 Wiring terminal modu les

IntroductionThe ET 200S distributed I/O system incorporates terminal modules both for power modulesand for electronic modules:• In the case of the terminal modules for power modules, you connect the supply/load

voltage for the respective voltage group.• Terminal modules for electronic modules connect the ET 200S with the process.• In the case of the terminal modules for electronic modules, you can connect cable shields

by means of a shield connection.

Requirements• You must wire the terminal modules with the supply/load voltage switched off at the

power module and the load voltage switched off at the electronic module.• Follow the wiring rules.






Wiring terminal modules for power modulesWire the terminal module in accordance with the terminal assignment.

Wiring terminal modules for digital, analog, and technology m odulesWire the terminal module in accordance with the terminal assignment.

Connecting cable shields

We recommend that you use the shield connection to connect cable shields (in the case ofanalog electronic modules, the 1COUNT 24V/100kHz electronic module and the 1SSIelectronic module, for example).1. Remove the insulation material from the area around the shield clamp, and clamp the

cable shield into the shield clamp (above the power bus). The shield clamp is suitable forone cable with a maximum diameter of Ø 8 mm or two cables with a maximum diameterof Ø 4 mm each.

2. Tighten the shield clamp (approximately 0.5 Nm)3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 if you want to connect additional cable shields.4. Strip the insulation from the ground wire (from 6 to 25 mm2), and insert it into the

grounding terminal (below the power bus). Tighten the grounding terminal

(2 Nm to 2.5 Nm).5. Attach the other end to the ground bus.





Connecting cable shields:

1

2

34

5

① Shield clamp② Insulation material removed③ Cable to the sensor④ Cable to the ground bus⑤ Grounding terminal

NoteTo stabilize the shield connection, you must mount and screw in at least one shield clampover the shield connection element.





5.4.6 Terminal assignmen t of terminal modu le with inserted powe r mod ule

Terminal assignmentThe terminal assignment of the terminal module depends on which power module isinserted.

TM-P15S23-A1 and powermodule

TM-P15S23-A0 and powermodule

TM-P15S22-01 and powermodule

AUX1 bus (PE)implemented. Connection toterminals A4 and A8.

AUX1 bus (PE) interrupted.Connection to terminals A4and A8.

AUX1 bus implemented. Noconnection to the terminalsof the terminal module.

TM-P30S44-A0 and power module TM-PF30S47-F0 and PM-D F24 VDC*

AUX1 bus (PE) interrupted.Connection to terminals A4 and A8.

AUX1 bus implemented. Noconnection to the terminals ofthe terminal module.

*: for terminal assignment, see ET 200S Fail-Safe Modules manual





5.4.7 Terminal assignment of terminal modu le with inserted electronic modu le

Terminal assignmentThe terminal assignment of the terminal module depends on which electronic module isinserted. For information on technology modules, refer to the Technological Functions manual.

TM-E15S26-A1 and electronicmodule/technology module

TM-E15S24-A1 andelectronic module

TM-E15S23-01 andelectronic module

AUX1 bus (PE) implemented.Connection to terminals A4, A8and A3, A7.

AUX1 bus (PE)implemented. Connectionto terminals A4 and A8.

AUX1 bus implemented.No connection to theterminals.

TM-E15S24-01 and electronicmodule/technology module

TM-E15S24-AT and 2AI TCHigh Feature

AUX1 bus (PE) implemented. Noconnection to terminals 4 and 8.

AUX1 bus (PE) implemented.No connection to the terminalsof the terminal module.





TM-E30S44-01 and technologymodule

TM-E30S46-A1 and fail-safemodule*

AUX1 bus (PE) implemented. Noconnection to terminals 4 and 8 or12 and 16.

AUX1 bus (PE) implemented.Connection to terminals A4, A8and A3, A7 or A12, A16 and A11and A15.

*: for terminal assignment, see ET 200S Fail-Safe Modules manual

5.4.8 Wiring the IM151-1 BASIC, IM151-1 STAND ARD, and IM151-1 HIGH FEATU REinterface m odules

IntroductionThe supply voltage and the bus connector (RS 485) are connected at the IM151-1 BASIC,IM151-1 STANDARD, and IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE interface modules.

Requirements• Wire the interface module with the supply voltage switched off.• Follow the wiring rules.






Procedure1. Connecting the supply voltage:

– Strip the insulation from the wires for the supply voltage of the interface module. – Secure the individual wires in the screw terminal.

2. Connecting PROFIBUS DP: – Insert the bus connector onto the PROFIBUS DP connection. – Tighten the screws of the bus connector.

Wiring IM151-1 BASIC, IM151-1 STANDARD, and IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE:

1

2

3

① Labeling strip② Supply voltage (1L+, 2L+, 1M, 2M)③ PROFIBUS DP

See alsoWiring rules for ET 200S(Page 5-7)





5.4.9 Wiring IM151-3 PN interface modu le

IntroductionThe supply voltage and the bus connector are connected at the IM151-3 PN interfacemodule.


Required tool• 3-mm screwdriver• Industrial Ethernet Fast Connect stripping tool (6GK1 901-1GA00) (stripping tool for

Industrial Ethernet Fast Connect installation cables)

Required accessories• PROFINET connector (according to the specifications in the PROFINET Installation

Guide )• Industrial Ethernet Fast Connect installation cables

The following are suitable:

Fast Connect standard cable 6XV1 840-2AH10Fast Connect trailing cable 6XV1 840-3AH10Fast Connect marine cable 6XV1 840-4AH10

Installing bus connectorInstall the PROFINET connector according to the specifications in the PROFINET InstallationGuide .

Procedure1. Connecting the supply voltage:


2. Connecting PROFINET: – Insert the bus connector onto the PROFINET connection.





Wiring IM151-3 PN:

1

2

3

ET 200S

① PROFINET② Labeling strip③ Supply voltage (1L+, 2L+, 1M, 2M)


5.4.10 Wiring the IM151-1 FO STAND ARD interface module

IntroductionThe supply voltage and the fiber-optic cable are connected at the IM151-1 FO STANDARDinterface module via a simplex connector.







Required accessories• Package with simplex connectors and polishing sets (6GK1901-0FB00-0AA0)• Package with plug adapters (6ES7195-1BE00-0XA0)• Fiber optic duplex cable see catalog IK PI

Installing simplex connectors

Note

The fiber optic cable may have the following maximum length:• PROFIBUS plastic fiber optic standard cable 50 m

• PROFIBUS PCF fiber optic standard cable 300 m

1. Remove approximately 30 cm of the jacket of the fiber-optic duplex cable.2. Attach the fiber optic duplex cable with the associated simplex plugs. You can find

detailed installation instructions in theSIMATIC NET- PROFIBUS Networks manual.Hint: Do not click the 2 simplex plugs closed individually, click them closed together sothat they a complete a "duplex plug". In this manner you will achieve a better hold in theplug adapter.IMPORTANT: The smoothed and polished surface of the plastic fibers must be absolutelyflat and even. Likewise, the plastic jacket must not protrude or be cut unevenly. Every

irregularity causes strong attenuation of the light signal over the fiber-optic cable!3. Place the simplex connectors into the plug adapter for the IM151-1 FO STANDARD

interface module and the fiber-optic cable into the designated cable ducts. Snap the plugadapter closed until you can hear clearly that the side panels have engaged.When inserting the plug in the plug adaptor, pay attention to the correct position:Transmitter always up and receiver always down!





1

2

345

① Plug adapter for IM151-1 FO STANDARD② Snap the two simplex connectors closed together such that you get a "duplex connector."③ Hint: Cut the lower wire approx. 10 mm shorter than the upper wire to achieve a better

arrangement of the wiring.④ Maximum 30-mm bending radius⑤ Fiber-optic duplex cable

Bending radius for the fiber-optic cableWhen placing the fiber-optic duplex core into the plug adapter and routing the cable, be surenot to exceed the permissible bending radius of 30 mm. Refer also to the installationguidelines for fiber-optic cable in theET 200 Distributed I/O System or SIMATIC NET -PROFIBUS Networks manual.

Reusing fiber-optic cable

Note

If you insert previously used fiber-optic cable into the plug adapter, you must shorten bothfiber-optic cores by the amount of the curved lengths and reinstall the simplex connectors.This will prevent any attenuation losses caused by rebent, heavily stressed portions of thefiber-optic duplex core.





Wiring the IM151-1 FO STANDARD interface module1. Connecting the supply voltage:


2. Connecting PROFIBUS DP: – Insert the fiber-optic cable with the mounted plug adapters into the

IM151-1 FO STANDARD interface module. – Fold the protruding plug grip upward.

Pay attention to the correct position: The transmitter fiber optic cable is inserted into thereceiver female connector and the receiver fiber optic cable in the transmitter femaleconnector of the fiber optic cable interface of the IM151-1 FO STANDARD.If the IM151-1 FO STANDARD interface module is the last node of the fiber-optic cablenetwork, the unoccupied fiber-optic cable interface must be blanked off (blanking pluginserted in IM151-1 FO STANDARD, as supplied).

Caution

Do not look directly into the opening of the optical transmit diodes. The emitted light beamcould damage your eyes.





Wiring up IM151-1 FO STANDARD:

1 2

3

4

5

6

7

ET 200S

① Transmitter ⑤ Supply voltage (1L+, 2L+, 1M, 2M)② Grip ⑥ Labeling strip③ Simplex connector ⑦ PROFIBUS DP (fiber-optic cable)④ Receiver




Wiring and Assembling5.5 Inserting and identifying electronic modules


5.5 5.5Inserting and identifying electronic m odules

5.5.1 Inserting and identifying electronic modu les

Introduction• The electronic modules are inserted in the terminal modules.• A labeling strip allows you to identify the electronic modules.• Electronic modules are:

– Self-coding

– Type-codedThe first time you insert an electronic module, a coding key engages on the terminalmodule. This mechanically prevents the wrong electronic module from being inserted.

RequirementsFollow the rules below for inserting electronic modules.

Procedure1. Insert the electronic module into the terminal module until you hear it snap into place.

2. For identification purposes, pull the labeling strip upward out of the electronic module.3. Then reinsert the labeling strip back into the electronic module.

2

3

1

Figure 5-7 Inserting and identifying electronic modules





Rem oving electronic modules1. Simultaneously press the two release buttons on the top and bottom of the electronic

module.2. Pull the electronic module forward out of the terminal module.

Figure 5-8 Removing electronic modules

Implementing an electronic module type changeYou have already removed the electronic module:1. Use a screwdriver to remove the coding key from the terminal module.2. Reinsert the coding key onto the used electronic module.3. Insert the new electronic module (type change) into the terminal module until you hear it

snap into place.4. Label the new electronic module.Removing the coding key





1

① Coding key

Warning

Changes to the code element can result in dangerous plant conditions.

Replacing a d efective electronic moduleYou have already removed the electronic module:1. Remove the coding key from the underside of the new electronic module.2. Insert the new electronic module (same type) into the terminal module until you hear it

snap into place.3. Label the new electronic module.

See also

Incorrect configuration states of ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP(Page 6-57) Electronic modules and applications (Page 3-9)





5.5.2 Rem oving and inserting electronic modu les

IntroductionET 200S supports the removal and insertion of modules during operation (RUN mode). TheET 200S remains in RUN mode when an electronic module is removed. The protectiveconductor connections of the ET 200S are not interrupted.

Rules• You cannot remove and insert modules during operation unless the corresponding

parameters have been assigned.• You can remove and insert modules during operation with IM151-1 BASIC,

IM151-1 STANDARD (6ES7151-1AA01-0AB0 or higher), IM151-1 FO STANDARD,IM151-1 FO STANDARD, IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE, and IM151-3 PN interface modules.

• Ifone module is missing (gap) and the ET 200S is powered up, the station will not startup.

• The removal and insertion of modules affects the isochronous operation (equidistance).• When replacing more than one module, make sure that only one gap occurs.

PrincipleThe following table indicates which modules you can remove and insert under whichconditions:

Table 5-1 Removing and inserting electronic modules

Modules Removing andinserting

Conditions

Interface module No ---Power modules Yes The load voltage must be switched off!Digital electronic modules (input) Yes ---Digital electronic modules (output) Yes The load voltage must be switched off by

means of an external switch/fuse!Analog electronic modules Yes ---4 IQ-SENSE Yes The sensors can also be replaced during

operation. The electronic module thenassigns parameters automatically tothese sensors.





Modules Removing andinserting

Conditions

1COUNT 24V/100kHz1COUNT 5V/500kHz1SSI1STEP 5V/204kHz2PULSE1POS INC/Digital1POS SSI/Digital1POS INC/Analog1POS SSI/Analog

Yes The load voltage must be switched off bymeans of an external switch/fuse!

1SI 3964/ASCII Yes ---1SI Modbus/USS Yes ---

RESERVE Yes ---

See alsoIncorrect configuration states of ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP(Page 6-57) Incorrect configuration states of ET 200S on PROFINET IO(Page 6-72)



Wiring and Assembling5.6 Assigning a device name for the IO device


5.6 5.6Assigning a device nam e for the IO device

IntroductionEach PROFINET device has a factory-assigned unique device identification (MAC address).For the configuration and in the startup, every ET 200S IO device is addressed with itsdevice name.For detailed information on addressing in PROFINET IO, refer to thePROFINET SystemDescription .

Assigning a device name1. Insert an empty SIMATIC Micro Memory Card in the IM151-3 PN.2. Switch on the power supply for the IM151-3 PN interface module.3. Open the "Properties - IM151-3 PN" window in the HW config and enter the device name

for the IO device there. You can choose any arbitrary device name except for "NONAME"(independent of upper/lower case)

Figure 5-9 Assigning a device name in HW Config





– An online PROFINET connection from the PG to the IO device via a switch is requiredfor assigning the name to the IM151-3 PN interface module.

4. Transfer the device name to the IM151-3 PN using "PLC > Ethernet > Assign DeviceName."

Figure 5-10 Transferring a device name online to the IM151-3 PN





– Click the "Assign name" button in the "Assign device name" window. The device nameis stored on the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card in the interface module IM151-3 PN.

Figure 5-11 "Assign device name" window before name assignment

– Once the name is assigned, it appears in the window.





Figure 5-12 "Assign device name" window after name assignment

Forwarding the device name w hen the interface module is replacedThe IO device device name is stored on the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card.For the transfer of the device name when exchanging the interface module IM151-3 PN, pullthe SIMATIC Micro Memory Card out of the "old" IM151-3 PN and insert it in the "new one".The IO device adopts the device name from the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card afterswitching the power supply off/on. Then, the station is addressable again and functions thesame as before the exchange.

Station flash testIf you are using multiple IO devices, multiple IO devices are also indicated in the "Assigndevice name" dialog. In this case, you should compare the MAC address of the device withthe indicated MAC address and select the proper IO device.The identification of IO devices in a system is facilitated by a station flash test. The flash testis activated as follows:1. In the "Assign device name" dialog, select one of the indicated IO devices.2. Select a flash duration.3. Click the "Flash on" button.The LINK LED on the selected IO device flashes (open the flaps on the front cover of theIM151-3 PN!)






Com missioning and Diagnostics 66.1 6.1Safety tests prior to com missioning

Running tests

Note

You must ensure the safety of your system. Before undertaking the final commissioning ofyour system, you should perform a complete function test and the necessary safety tests.Provision should be made in the tests for all possible foreseeable errors. In this way, you canavoid exposing your personnel or property to danger during operation.

6.2 6.2Com missioning and diagnostics on PR OFIBUS DP

6.2.1 Basic principles of project design for the ET 200S on PRO FIBU S DP

IntroductionProject design involves configuring and assigning parameters to the ET 200S.• Configuring: Systematic ordering of the individual ET 200S modules (setup).• Parameterizing: Determining the ET 200S parameters with the configuration software.



Commissioning and Diagnostics6.2 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFIBUS DP


NoteThe ET 200S is included in the hardware catalog of HW Config:• IM151-1 BASIC: after STEP 7 V5.2• IM151-1 STANDARD: after STEP 7 V5.0 with Service Pack 3• IM151-1 FO STANDARD: after STEP 7 V5.1 with Service Pack 1• IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE: after STEP 7 V5.1 with Service Pack 3You will not need a GSD file. Advantages:• Simplified summary of the devices (via the "Pack addresses" button in HW config)• Validity checking of parameters

You can find further information about the procedure in the STEP 7 Online Help.

DPV1 operationIf you are using IM151-1 STANDARD (6ES7151-1AA04-0AB0 or higher) or IM151-1 FOSTANDARD (6ES7151-1AB03-0AB0 or higher) in DPV1 mode on an S7 CPU that does notsupport an insert/remove module interrupt, you must not enable the "Operation at preset <>actual configuration" parameter in STEP 7. Otherwise, the removal of a module (modulefailure) always results in a station failure (OB86).If it is imperative that you enable "Operation at preset <> actual configuration", you musteither select DPV0 mode or configure IM151-1/FO STANDARD using the GSD file (under"Additional field devices - I/O" in the STEP 7 hardware catalog). "Operation at preset <>actual configuration" is then possible even when the insert/remove module interrupt isdisabled.However, the S7-CPU does not register an insertion or removal (module failure). You candetect such events only by cyclically reading the diagnostic frame and evaluating the modulestatus.

Configuring by means of the G SD fileYou configure the ET 200S distributed I/O system using the GSD file. The ET 200S is linkedas norm slave in your system via the GSD file. You can download the GSD file on theInternet at the following address:• http://www.ad.siemens.de/csi_e/gsd The following GSD files are available:• IM151-1 BASIC: "SIEM80F3.GSx"• IM151-1 STANDARD:

– up to 6ES7151-1AA02-0AB0: "SIEM806A.GSx" – after 6ES7151-1AA03-0AB0: "SI03806A.GSx"

• IM151-1 FO STANDARD: "SI03806B.GSx"• IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE:

– up to 6ES7151-1BA00-0AB0: "SI0180E0.GSx" – after 6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0: "SI0280E0.GSx"

http://www.ad.siemens.de/csi_e/gsd








6.2.2.2 Grouping modules for configuration

IntroductionThe ET 200S has a maximum address area of:• IM151-1 BASIC: up to 88 byte for inputs and 88 byte for outputs.• IM151-1 STANDARD (up to 6ES7151-1AA03-0AB0), IM151-1 FO STANDARD (up to

6ES7151-1AB02-0AB0): up to 128 byte for inputs and 128 byte for outputs.• IM151-1 STANDARD (after 6ES7151-1AA04-0AB0), IM151-1 FO STANDARD (after

6ES7151-1AB03-0AB0), IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE: up to 244 byte for inputs and 244byte for outputs.

To better utilize the available address space of the DP master and reduce data exchangebetween the ET 200S and the DP master, you can group several electronic modules/loadfeeders within one byte in the input or output area of the process image. This is achieved bythe systematic arrangement and designation of the ET 200S electronic modules/motorstarters.A listing of the address space requirements for the individual modules is located in theappendix.You can group the following module types within a byte:• Digital input modules• Digital output modules• Motor starters (direct starters and reversing starters)

Procedure1. Integrate the GSD file in your configuration software.

Result: You can identify combinable devices in the hardware catalog of your configurationsoftware by double availability. The devices differ only by a "*" in the name.

2. Configure the ET 200S setup, adhering to the following rules: – The modules that you can group within a byte must be of the same module type (see

above). – Interface module IM151-1 STAN DARD , 6ES7151-1AA00-0AB0 w ith creation state 1

to 4: The devices that are combinable within a byte must be connected directly next toone another. Only power modules are permitted between the electronic modules.Power modules do not open a new byte.

– After Interface module IM151-1 BASIC; IM151-1 STAND ARD, 6ES715 1-1AA00-0AB0with creation state 5, 6ES7151-1AA01-0AB0; IM151-1 FO STANDAR D an dIM151-1 HIGH FEATURE: Optional other devices may be connected betweencombinable devices.

– There can be a total of no more than 8 channels (1 byte).





NoteIn STEP 7 applications, if you combine the modules for IM151-1 STANDARD,IM 151-1 FO STANDARD or IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE in the DPV1 mode:• No insert/remove module interrupts (OB83) are triggered for these modules. In this

case, you can recognize that a module has been removed by evaluating the modulestatus in the diagnostic frame in the cyclic user program.

• Each grouped module then receives its own diagnostic address.

3. Select the module designation without "*" from the hardware catalog of your configurationsoftware.

Result: You open a byte and store the first device there.4. Select the module designation with "*" from the hardware catalog of your configuration

software.Result: You store other devices in the opened byte until all bits are occupied.

5. If a byte is filled, you must configure a module again (that is, open a new byte without "*").

Note

Configuration via the GS D file: The configuration software does not check the correctcombination of the devices. If you configure more than 8 channels in a byte, the modules

that exceed the byte limit are reported as improperly configured in the diagnostics.Module status → 10B: incorrect module; invalid reference dataThese modules are not addressed.

See alsoAddress space of the inputs and outputs (Page C-1)





6.2.2.3 Grouping of digital input modules

PrincipleThe figure below illustrates schematically the grouping of digital input modules.

Figure 6-1 Grouping of digital input modules within a byte





6.2.2.4 Grouping of digital output modules

PrincipleThe figure below illustrates schematically the grouping of digital output modules.

Figure 6-2 Grouping of digital output modules within a byte





6.2.2.5 Grouping of motor starters

PrincipleThe figure below illustrates schematically the grouping of motor starters.

Figure 6-3 Grouping of motor starters within a byte

6.2.2.6 Examp le of a project design

Introduction

The following example describes how to design an ET 200S configuration:

Configuration of ET 200SAn example design of an ET 200S configuration is shown in the following figure:

Figure 6-4 Configuration of ET 200S





Configuration table and a ddress spaceThe user is free to select the byte addresses of the inputs and outputs (if the configuration

software supports this). The bit addresses result automatically from the sequence of thegrouped modules.The table below shows which modules have been grouped and the corresponding addressspace.

Table 6-1 Configuration table and address space

I/O addresslot Modu le Grouping

Inputs Outputs

1 6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0 PM-E DC24V --- --- ---2 6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0 2DI DC24V 0.0 to 0.13 6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0* 2DI DC24V

Yes0.2 to 0.3

4 6ES7134-4FB01-0AB0 2AI U No 1 to 45 6ES7135-4GB01-0AB0 2AO I No 0 to 36 6ES7131-4BD01-0AA0* 4DI DC24V Yes 0.4 to 0.77 6ES7132-4BD01-0AA0 4DO DC24V 4.0 to 4.38 6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0* 2DO DC24V 4.4 to 4.59 6ES7132-4HB01-0AB0* 2DO Rel.

Yes

4.6 to 4.710 6ES7134-4FB01-0AB0 2AI U No 5 to 811 6ES7135-4GB01-0AB0 2AO I No 5 to 812 6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0 PM-E DC24V --- --- ---13 6ES7132-4BB30-0AB0 2DO 24 VDC Yes 9.0 to 9.114 6ES7132-4BB30-0AB0* 2DO 24 VDC Yes 9.2 to 9.315 6ES7138-4CA00-0AA0 PM-E AC230 --- --- ---16 6ES7132-4FB00-0AB0* 2DO 230 V Yes 9.4 to 9.517 6ES7132-4FB00-0AB0* 2DO 230 V Yes 9.6 to 9.718 3RK1903-0BA00 PM-D --- --- ---19 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA0 DS 9.0 to 9.3 10.0 to 10.320 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA0 *DS

Yes9.4 to 9.7 10.4 to 10.7

21 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA0 DS Yes 10.0 to 10.3 11.0 to 11.3

No grouping If you do not want to group digital input modules, digital output modules, or motor starterswithin a byte when configuring the ET 200S distributed I/O system, use only those moduledesignations without "*" from the hardware catalog of your configuration software.Each individual electronic module/motor starter will then occupy one byte in the input oroutput area of the process image.





6.2.3 Comm issioning and startup of ET 200S on PRO FIBUS DP

6.2.3.1 Comm issioning ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP

Software requirementsThe table below contains the software requirements for commissioning on PROFIBUS DP.

Table 6-2 Software requirements for commissioning on PROFIBUS DP

Configuration softwareused

Version Notes

STEP 7 Version 5.0 Service

Pack 3 or higher

You are using HW Config. With Service Pack 3 or higher, the

ET 200S is included in the hardware catalog.COM PROFIBUS Version 5.1, Service

Pack 2, Hotfix 1 orhigher

You have integrated the GSD file of ET 200S in COM PROFIBUS .

Configuration software fora different DP master

You need the GSD file of ET 200S.

Requirements for comm issioningThe following additional requirements must be satisfied for commissioning the ET 200S onPROFIBUS DP:• DP slave is installed• PROFIBUS address is set on the DP slave• DP slave is wired• DP slave is configured (configured and parameters assigned)• Supply voltage for the DP master is switched on (see manual for the DP master)• DP master is switched to RUN mode (see manual for the DP master)

ProcedureTo commission the DP slave, proceed as follows:

1. Switch on the supply voltage for the DP slave.2. If necessary, switch on the supply voltage for the load.

See alsoBasic principles of project design for the ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP(Page 6-1) Basic principles of installation(Page 4-1) Setting the PROFIBUS address (Page 4-17) Wiring rules for ET 200S(Page 5-7)





6.2.3.2 Startup of the ET 200S on PRO FIBUS DP

Flow diagram for startup of the ET 200S

Figure 6-5 Startup of the ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP





ote

All interface modules support the default startup. In other words, configuration using theGSD file or HW Config is not necessary.

The following conditions apply:• Preset parameters are used.• AKF (general identifier format in compliance with the PROFIBUS standard) in the

configuration frame• Grouping (packing) of the electronic modules is not possible without parameter

assignment.• All supply voltages must be switched on at the power modules.

• It is not possible to remove or insert modules during operation.

See also

Parameters for digital output modules (Page 11-4)

Parameters for digital input modules (Page 11-1)

Parameters for 4DI NAMUR (Page 11-3)

Parameters for analog electronic modules 2AI U ST, 2AI I 2WIRE ST, 4AI I 2WIRE ST, and2AI I 4WIRE ST (Page 12-26 )

Parameters for analog electronic modules 2AO U ST, 2AO U HF and 2AO I ST, 2AO I HF(Page 12-27 )

Parameters for 2AI RTD High Feature analog electronic module (Page 12-3 1)

Parameters for analog electronic modules 2AI RTD ST, 2AI TC ST, and 2AI TC HF(Page 12-34)

Parameters for analog electronic modules 2AI U High Speed, 2AI I 2WIRE High Speed, and2AI I 4WIRE High Speed (Page 12-28)

Parameters for analog electronic modules 2AI U HF and 2AI I 2/4WIRE HF (Page 12-27)

Channel-specific diagnostics (Page 6-40 )





6.2.4 Diagnostics using LED display

6.2.4.1 LED displays on the interface module

Interface m oduleLED display on the interface module:

1

2

3

① Group error (red)② Bus fault (red)③ Supply voltage (green)





Status and error displays using LEDs on IM151-1 BASIC /IM151-1 STAN DAR D/IM151-1 FO STANDARD/IM151-1 HIGH FEATUR E

The table below shows the status and error displays of the IM151-1 BASIC,IM151-1 STANDARD, IM151-1 FO STANDARD, and IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE interfacemodules.

Table 6-3 Status and error displays of the IM151-1 BASIC/ IM151-1 STANDARD/ IM151-1 FO STANDARD/IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE

Event (LEDs)

SF BF ON

Cause Action

Off Off Off There is no voltage at the interface module, orthe interface module has a hardware defect.

Switch on the power supply voltage DC 24 Von the interface module.

* * On There is voltage at the interface module. -

* Flashing On The interface module is not configured or isconfigured incorrectly. No data exchange istaking place between the DP master and theinterface module.Causes:• The PROFIBUS address is incorrect.• Configuration error• Parameter assignment error

• Check the interface module.• Check the configuration and parameter

assignment.• Check the PROFIBUS address.

* On On Transmission rate detection, illegalPROFIBUS address, or lowermost DIP switch(PROFIBUS address) not in the OFF position.Causes:• The response monitoring time haselapsed.• Bus communication with the interface

module via PROFIBUS DP has beeninterrupted.

Set a valid PROFIBUS address (1 to 125) atthe interface module, or check the busconfiguration.• Check that the bus connector is correctly

inserted.• Check whether the bus cable to the DP

master has been disconnected.• Switch the 24 VDC supply voltage off and

on again at the interface module.The designed configuration of the ET 200Sdoes not match the actual configuration.

Check the configuration of the ET 200S todetermine whether a module is missing ordefective or whether an unconfigured moduleis inserted.Check the configuration (e.g., using COMPROFIBUS or STEP 7), and correct theparameter assignment error.

On * On

There is an error in an I/O module, or theinterface module is defective.

Replace the interface module, or contact yourSiemens representative.

Off Off On Data exchange is taking place between the DPmaster and the ET 200S.The preset configuration and actualconfiguration of the ET 200S match.

-

* Not applicable





6.2.4.2 LED displays on the power module

Power moduleLED display on the power module:

1

2 3

① Group error (red)② Fuse (green) – only in the case of PM-E 24 to 48 VDC/120 to 230 VAC)③ Load voltage (green)

Status and error displays by means of LEDs on the pow er moduleThe table below shows the status and error displays on the power module.

Event (LEDs)

SF FSG PWR

Cause Action

On No parameter assignment, or incorrectmodule inserted. There is a diagnosticmessage.

Check the parameter assignment.Evaluate the diagnostics.

Off The fuse in the power module has tripped. Replace the fuse.Off There is no load voltage at the power

module.Check the load voltage.





6.2.4.3 LED displays on digital electronic modules

Digital electronic modulesLED displays on digital electronics modules:

1

2

3

① Group error (red) -only for 2DI DC24V HF, 4DI DC24V HF, 2DO DC24V/0.5A HF, 2DO DC24V/2A HF and4DI NAMUR

② Status display for input/output status (green)③ Status display for status of the inputs/outputs (green) -

only for 4DI DC24V ST, 4DI DC24V HF, 4DO DC24V/0.5A ST, 4DO DC24V/2A ST,4DI UC24..48V HF and 4DI NAMUR

Status and error displays by means of LEDs on the digital electronic moduleThe table below shows the status and error displays on the digital electronic module.

Event (LEDs)

SF 1 5 2 6

Cause Action

On No configuration or incorrectmodule plugged in. Diagnosticmessage present.

Check the parameterization.Evaluate the diagnosticmessage.

On Input/output on channel 0activated.

On Input/output on channel 1activated.

On Input/output on channel 2 (only for4DI/DO) activated.

On Input/output on channel 3 (only for4DI/DO) activated.





6.2.4.4 LED displays on analog electronic modules

Analog electronic modulesLED displays on analog electronics modules:

1

① Group error (red)

Status and error displays by m eans of LED s on analog electronic modulesThe table below shows the status and error displays on digital electronic modules.

Event (LED)

SF

Cause Action

On No parameter assignment, orincorrect module inserted. No loadvoltage. There is a diagnosticmessage.

Check the parameterassignment. Check the loadvoltage. Evaluate thediagnostics.





6.2.4.5 LED displays on the 1CO UNT 24V/100kHz electronic module

1COUNT 24V/100kHzLED displays on the 1COUNT 24V/100kHz:

1

2

3

① Group error (red)② Status display of counting direction (green)③ Status display for digital input/digital output (green)

Status and error displays by means of LEDs on the 1CO UNT 24V /100kHzThe table below shows the status and error displays on the 1COUNT 24V/100kHz electronicmodule.

Event (LEDs)

SF UP DN 4 8

Cause Action


Check the parameterization.Evaluate the diagnostic message.

On Status of the low-order bits ofthe counter, if the countercounts forward.

On Status of the inverse low-orderbits of the counter, if thecounter counts backward.

On DO (direct control, comparatoroutput) activated.

On DI (HW gate, synchronization,latch) activated.





6.2.4.6 LED displays on the 1COU NT 5V/500kHz electronic module

1COUNT 5V/500kHzLED displays on the 1COUNT 5V/500kHz:

1

2

34

5

① Group error (red)② Status display for the digital output (green)③ Status display for digital input (green)④ Status display for synchronization (green)

⑤ Status display for counting direction (green)

Status and error displays by means of LEDs on the 1C OUN T 5V/500kHz e lectronic moduleThe table below shows the status and error displays on the 1COUNT 5V/500kHz electronicmodule.

Event (LEDs)

SF UP DN SYN 9 13 16

Cause Action

On No parameterization. Diagnostic messagepresent.


On Status of the low-order bits of the counter,if the counter counts forward.

On Status of the inverse low-order bits of thecounter, if the counter counts backward.

On Synchronization is performed (only incounting modes; image of STS_SYNacknowledgement bit).

On DO 1 is activated.On DO 2 is activated.

On DI is activated.





6.2.4.7 LED displays on the 1SSI electronic module

1SSILED display on the EM 1SSI:

1

2

3 4

① Group error (red)② Status display for change in sensor value (green)③ Status display for digital input (green)④ Status display for result of comparison

Status and error displays by means of LEDs on the EM 1S SI electronic moduleThe table below shows the status and error displays on the EM 1SSI.

Event (LEDs)

SF UP DN 7 CMP

Cause Action

On No parameterization.Diagnostic message present.


On for transmitter value changefrom small to largertransmitter values (includingzero-crossing)

On for transmitter value changefrom larger to smallertransmitter values (includingzero-crossing)

On DI (latch) activated.On Set for comparison result

CMP 1





6.2.4.8 LED displays on the STEP 5V/204kHz electronic module

1STEP 5V /204kHzLED displays on the EM 1STEP 5V/204kHz:

1

2 3

4 5

① Group error (red)② Status display for digital input REF (green)③ Ready for positioning job (green)④ Status display for digital input (green)⑤ Positioning underway (green)

Status and error displays by means of LED s on the EM 1S TEP 5V /204kHz electronic moduleThe table below shows the status and error displays on the EM 1STEP 5V/204kHz electronicmodule.

Event (LEDs)

SF REF RDY 3 POS

Cause Action


Check theparameterization. Evaluatethe diagnostic message.

On REF activated.On If parameters were assigned to themodule correctly and pulse enablehas been activated

On DI activated.On If a positioning operation is running





6.2.4.9 LED displays on the 2PULS E electronic module

2PULSELED displays on the 2PULSE:

1

2

3

① Group error (red)② Status display for digital input (green)③ Status display for the digital output (green)

Status and error displays by means of LEDs on the 2PULSE electronic moduleThe table below shows the status and error displays on the 2PULSE electronic module.

Event (LEDs)

SF 1 5 4 8

Cause Action

On No parameterization. Diagnosticmessage present.

Check the parameterization. Evaluatethe diagnostic message.

On Input on the channel 0 activated.On Input on the channel 1 activated.

On Output on channel 0 is activated.On Output on channel 1 is activated.





6.2.4.10 LED displays on the 1POS INC/Digital, 1POS SSI/Digital, 1POS INC/Analog, and1POS SSI/Analog electronic modules

1POS INC/Digital, 1POS SSI/Digital, 1POS INC/Analog, 1POS SSI/AnalogLED displays on the 1POS INC/Digital, 1POS SSI/Digital, 1POS INC/Analog,1POS SSI/Analog:

1

2

3

4

① Group error (red)② Status displays for digital inputs (green)③ Positioning underway (green)④ Status display for a change in an actual value (green)







6.2.4.11 LED displays on the 1SI 3964/ASCII and 1SI Modbus/US S serial interface module

1SI 3964/ASC II and 1SI Modbus/USS serial interface modulesLED displays on the 1SI 3964/ASCII, 1SI Modbus/USS:

1

2

① Group error (red)② Status displays for digital inputs (green)

Status and error displays by means of LEDs on the 1SI 3964/AS CII and 1SI M odbus/USS serialinterface m odules

The table below shows the status and error displays on the 1SI 3964/ASCII and1SI Modbus/USS serial interface modules.

Event (LEDs)

SF TX RX

Cause Action

Hardware faultFirmware error

Check the module.

Parameter assignment error Check the parameter assignment.Evaluate the diagnostics.

Wire break or loose cable betweenthe module and the communicationpeer 1

Check the wiring.

On

Communication error Check the communication settings.On The module is sending data via the

interface.On The module is receiving data via

the interface.1 Only detected in the case of RS-422 interface connections when the default for the receive line isset to R(A) 5V/R(B) 0V.





6.2.4.12 LED displays on the 4 IQ-SENSE electronic module

4 IQ-SENSELED on the electronics module 4 IQ-SENSE:

1

2

① Group error (red)② Status display for the input status (green)

Status and error displays by means of LEDs on the 4 IQ-SENSE electronic moduleThe table below shows the status and error displays on the 4 IQ-SENSE electronic module.

Event (LEDs)

SF 1 5 2 6

Cause Action

No parameter assignment. Check the parameter assignment.There is a diagnostic message. Evaluate the diagnostics.Underrange of function reserve. Adjust the reflection light barrier. Clean

the optical system. Replace thesensor.

On

Teach-in operation is underway. Terminate the teach-in operation.On Input on the channel 0 activated.

On Input on the channel 1 activated.On Input on channel 2 is activated

On Input on channel 3 is activated





6.2.5 Diagnostic messa ges of the electronic modules

Actions after a diagnostic message in DPV0 m odeThe error is entered in the channel-specific diagnostics in the diagnostic frame:• The SF LED on the interface module lights up.• Several simultaneous diagnostic messages are possible.

Actions after a diagnostic message in DPV1 m odeEach diagnostic message leads to the following actions:• Diagnostics can be reported as diagnostic interrupts in DPV1 mode.

• After a diagnostic message is signaled, the message is: – Entered in the diagnostic frame as a diagnostic interrupt block (always limited to one

interrupt) – Stored in the diagnostic buffer of the CPU

• The SF LED on the interface module lights up.• OB82 is called. If OB82 is not available, the CPU goes to STOP mode.• Acknowledgement of the diagnostic interrupt (after which a new interrupt is possible).

See also

Channel-specific diagnostics (Page 6-40)

6.2.6 Evaluating interrupts by ET 200S

IntroductionIn the case of certain process states/errors, the DP slave saves one interrupt block for eachprocess state or error containing relevant information in the diagnostic frame (DPV1 interruptmechanism). Independent of this, the diagnostic status of the DP slave is maintained in theidentifier-related diagnostics, the module status, and the channel-related diagnostics.

Interrupts in DPV0 m odeFor DPV0 mode, no interrupts are defined based on the PROFIBUS standard. Thus,interface modules do not trigger an interrupt in DPV0 mode.







Hardware interrupts for 2AI U High Speed, 2AI I 2WIRE H igh Speed, and 2AI I 4W IRE HighSpeed electronic modules:

Figure 6-7 Start information of the OB 40: which event has triggered process alarm for analog input

modules

You will find a description of OB40 in theSystem and Standard Functions reference manual.

Triggering of an insert/remove-module interruptInsert/remove-module interrupts are supported in DPV1 mode. The CPU interruptsprocessing of the user program and processes the OB83 diagnostic block instead. The resultthat caused the interrupt to be triggered is entered in the start information of OB83.

6.2.7 Diagnostics with STEP 5 and STEP 7

6.2.7.1 Reading out the diagnostics

IntroductionThe slave diagnostics comply with IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1. Depending on the DPmaster, slave diagnostics can be read out with STEP 5 or STEP 7 for all DP slaves thatcomply with the standard.

Length of the diagnostics frame• The maximum frame length for the ET 200S is as follows:

– IM151-1 BASIC: 43 byte – IM151-1 STANDARD, IM151-1 FO STANDARD, IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE

(DPV0 mode): 64 byte – IM151-1 STANDARD, IM151-1 FO STANDARD (DPV1 mode): 110 byte – IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE (DPV1 mode): 128 byte

• The minimum frame length is – 6 bytes (identifier-related diagnostics, module status, and channel-specific diagnostics

disabled via parameter assignment).





Options for reading out the diagnosticsThe table below shows the options for reading out the diagnostics with STEP 7 and STEP 5

on PROFIBUS DP.

Table 6-4 Reading out the diagnostics with STEP 7 and STEP 5 on PROFIBUS DP

Automation system with DPmaster

Block or tab in STEP Application Reference

"DP Slave Diagnostics"tab

Slave diagnostics in plain text onthe STEP 7 user interface

"Diagnosing hardware" inSTEP 7 online help

SFC 13 "DP NRM_DG" Reading out slave diagnostics(store in data area of the userprogram)

For SFCs, refer to STEP 7online help

SFC 59 "RD_REC" Reading out data records of the

S7 diagnostics (store in the dataarea of the user program)

See the system and standard

functions reference manual

SFB 52"RDREC"

Read data records from the DPslave

For SFBs, refer to STEP 7online help (systemfunctions/system functionblocks)

SIMATIC S7/M7

SFB 54 "RALRM"1 Receiving interrupts from theinterrupt OBs


SIMATIC S5 with IM308-Cas DP master

FB 192 "IM308C"

SIMATIC S5 with theS5-95U PLC as DP master

FB 230 "S_DIAG"

Reading out slave diagnostics(store in data area of the userprogram)

For FBs, refer to the ET 200Distributed I/O System manual

1 Only with S7-400 V3.0 or higher and with CPU 318 V3.0 or higher

Exam ple of reading out slave diagnostics using FB 192 IM308CHere, you will find an example of how to use FB 192 to read out the slave diagnostics for aDP slave in the STEP 5 user program.The following assumptions apply to thisSTEP 5 user program:• The IM308-C occupies as DP master the tiles 0 ... 15 (number 0 of the IM308-C).• The DP slave has PROFIBUS address 3.• The slave diagnostics are intended to be stored in DB 20. However, you can also use any

other data block for this.• The slave diagnostics consist of a maximum 64 bytes (IM151-1 STANDARD).





STEP 5 user program

STL

Explanation

: A DB 30

: SPA FB 192

Name : IM308C

DPAD : KH F800 Default address area of the IM 308-C

IMST : KY 0, 3 IM No. = 0, PROFIBUS address of DP slave = 3

FCT : KC SD Function: read slave diagnostics

GCGR : KM 0 Not evaluated

TYP : KY 0, 20 S5 data area: DB 20

STAD : KF +1 Diagnostic data from data word 1

LENG : KF -1 Diagnostic length = joker length (all permitted bytes)

ERR : DW 0 Error code stored in DW 0 of DB 30

Examp le of reading out S7 diagnostics with SFC 13 DP NRM _DGHere, you will find an example of how to use SFC 13 to read out the slave diagnostics for aDP slave in the STEP 7 user program.The following assumptions apply to this STEP 7 user program:• The diagnostic address of the ET 200S is 1022 (3FE H).• The slave diagnostics should be stored in the DB82: starting at address 0.0, length 64

bytes.•

The slave diagnostics consist of a maximum of 64 bytes(IM151-1 STANDARD in DPV0 mode).

STEP 7 user program

STL Explanation

CALL SFC 13

REQ :=TRUE Read request

LADDR :=W#16#3FE Diagnostic address of the ET 200S

RET_VAL :=MW0 RET_VAL of SFC 13

RECORD :=P#DB82.DBX 0.0 BYTE 64 Data mailbox for the diagnostic in DB 82

BUSY :=M2.0 Read operation runs over several OB1 cycles





6.2.7.2 Structure of the slave diagnos tics

Structure of the slave diagnosticsThe figure below shows the structure of the slave diagnostics.

*

*

*

* **

*

*

*

48 bytes

Byte 0Byte 1Byte 2

Byte 3

Byte 4Byte 5

Byte 6 :Byte 14

Byte 35

Byte 15

Byte 34 :

Byte 37

Byte 36

Byte 109/127

Byte 61

:

:

Low byte

High byte

Byte 0Byte 1Byte 2

Byte 3

Byte 4Byte 5

Byte 6 :Byte 8

Byte 16

Byte 9

Byte 15 :

Byte 18

Byte 17

Byte 42

:

IM151-1 STANDARDIM151-1 FO STANDARDIM151-1 HIGH FEATUREIM151-1 BASIC

Station statuses 1 to 3

Master PROFIBUS address

Manufacturer ID

Identifier-relatedDiagnostics

Module status

9 channel-specific diagnostics(15 for IM151-1 HIGH FEATUREin the DPV1 mode)The channel-specificdiagnostics is variable from0 to 27 byte. This depends on thenumber of channel-specificdiagnoses.

Interrupts(only 1 interrupt possible for each slavediagnostic frame possible)

to max.

M o r e

i n f o r m a

t i o n

max.

* These diagnoses can be disabled or enabled by parameter. If you disable the diagnoses, they are removed from the diagnostic frame.** Only in the case of IM151-1 STANDARD (6ES7 151-1AA04-0AB0 or higher), IM151-1 FO STANDARD (6ES7 151-1AB03-0AB0 or higher) and IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE in the

DPV1 mode.

Figure 6-8 Structure of the slave diagnostics





NoteIf you utilize the ET 200S in a redundant system, the slave diagnostics receive an additionalH status block.

Note

The length of the diagnostic frame varies:• For IM151-1 BASIC, between 6 and 43 bytes• For the IM151-1 STANDARD, IM151-1 FO STANDARD and IM 151-1 HIGH FEATURE

(depending on the parameterization) – Between 6 and 62 bytes in DPV0 mode – Between 6 and 110 bytes in DPV1 mode (STANDARD) – Between 6 and 128 bytes in DPV1 mode (HIGH FEATURE)

• For IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE, between 6 and 62 bytes in DPV0 mode and between 6and 128 bytes in DPV1 mode (depending on the parameter assignment).

You can see the length of the last received diagnostic frame in:• STEP 7 from the parameter RET_VAL des SFC 13.• STEP 5 from the parameter ERR of the FB 192.





6.2.7.3 Station statuses 1 to 3

DefinitionStation statuses 1 to 3 provide an overview of the status of a DP slave.

Structure of station status 1(Byte 0)

Table 6-5 Structure of station status 1 (Byte 0)

Bit Meaning Cause/remedy

0 1: The DP slave cannot be addressed by the DPmaster.

• Correct PROFIBUS address set on the DP slave?• Bus connector connected?• Voltage at DP slave?• RS 485 repeater set correctly?• Reset carried out on DP slave?

1 1: The DP slave is not yet ready to exchange data. • Wait while the DP slave starts up.2 1: The configuration data sent by the DP master to

the DP slave does not match the configuration ofthe DP slave.

• Correct station type or correct configuration of the DPslave entered in the configuration software?

3 1: External diagnostics are available. (Groupdiagnostic display)

• Evaluate the identifier-related diagnostics, the modulestatus, and/or the channel-specific diagnostics. Bit 3 isreset as soon as all the faults have been rectified. The bitis reset when there is a new diagnostic message in thebytes of the diagnostics indicated above.

4 1: The required function is not supported by the DPslave (for example, changing the PROFIBUSaddress by means of software).

•

Check the configuration.

5 1: The DP master cannot interpret the response ofthe DP slave.

• Check the bus configuration.

6 1: The DP slave type does not match the softwareconfiguration.

• Correct station type entered in the configuration software?

7 1: Parameters have been assigned to the DP slaveby a different DP master (not the one that currentlyhas access to the DP slave).

• The bit is always 1, for example, if you access the DPslave with the programming device or another DP master.

• The PROFIBUS address of the DP master that assignedparameters to the DP slave is located in the "masterPROFIBUS address" diagnostic byte.





Structure of station status 2 (Byte 1)

Table 6-6 Structure of station status 2 (Byte 1)Bit Meaning

0 1: Parameters have to be reassigned to the DP slave.1 1: A diagnostic message is pending. The DP slave will not work until the fault has been

corrected (static diagnostic message).2 1: The bit is always set to "1" in the DP slave.3 1: Response monitoring has been enabled for this DP slave.4 1: The DP slave has received the "FREEZE" control command 1.5 1: The DP slave has received the "SYNC" control command 1.6 0: The bit is always at 0.7 1: The DP slave is disabled, that is, it has been removed from the processing in progress.

1 The bit is updated only if another diagnostic message changes, too.

Structure of station status 3 (Byte 2)

Table 6-7 Structure of station status 3 (Byte 2)

Bit Meaning

0 to 6 0: The bits are always at "0".7 1: • There are more diagnostic messages than the DP slave can store.

• The DP master cannot enter all the diagnostic messages sent by the DP slave in its

diagnostic buffer (channel-specific diagnostics).

6.2.7.4 Master PRO FIBUS address

DefinitionThe master PROFIBUS address diagnostic byte contains the PROFIBUS address of theDP master that:• Assigned parameters to the DP slave and• Has read and write access to the DP slaveThe master PROFIBUS address is in byte 3 of the slave diagnostics.





6.2.7.5 Manufacturer ID

StructureThe manufacturer ID contains a code that describes the type of the DP slave.The table below shows the structure of the manufacturer ID (Bytes 4, 5).

Table 6-8 Structure of the manufacturer ID (Bytes 4, 5)

Byte 4 Byte 5 Manu facturer ID for

80H F3H ET 200S with IM151-1 BASIC80H 6AH ET 200S with IM151-1 STANDARD80H 6BH ET 200S with IM151-1 FO STANDARD

80H E0H ET 200S with IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE

6.2.7.6 Identifier-related diagno stics

DefinitionThe identifier-related diagnostics indicate whether or not modules of the ET 200S haveerrors/faults. The identifier-related diagnostics start at byte 6 and comprise:• 3 bytes in the case of IM151-1 BASIC• 9 bytes in the case of IM151-1 STANDARD, IM151-1 FO STANDARD, and


Structure of the identifier-related diagnosticsThe identifier-related diagnostics for ET 200S is structured as follows with theIM151-1 BASIC interface module:

Figure 6-9 Structure of the identifier-related diagnostics for ET 200S with IM151-1 BASIC





The identifier-related diagnostics for ET 200S is structured as follows with theIM151-1 STANDARD, IM151-1 FO STANDARD, and IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE interfacemodules:

Figure 6-10 Structure of the identifier-related diagnostics for ET 200S with IM151-1 STANDARD,

IM151-1 FO STANDARD, and IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE

6.2.7.7 Module status

DefinitionThe module status indicates the status of the configured modules and expands on theidentifier-related diagnostics with regard to the configuration. The module status begins afterthe identifier-related diagnostics and comprises:• 7 bytes in the case of IM151-1 BASIC• 20 bytes in the case of IM151-1 STANDARD, IM151-1 FO STANDARD, and






Structure of the module statusThe module status for ET 200S is structured as follows with the IM151-1 BASIC interface

module:

Figure 6-11 Structure of the module status for ET 200S with IM151-1 BASIC

The module status for ET 200S is structured as follows with the IM151-1 STANDARD,IM151-1 FO STANDARD, and IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE interface modules:





Figure 6-12 Structure of the module status for ET 200S with IM151-1 STANDARD,

IM151 FO STANDARD, and IM151 HIGH FEATURE





6.2.7.8 Channel-specific diagnostics

DefinitionThe channel-specific diagnostics give information on channel faults of modules and expandon the identifier-related diagnostics. The channel-specific diagnostics start after the modulestatus (if parameters are preset accordingly). The maximum length is limited by themaximum total length of the slave diagnostics of 43/62 bytes in DPV0 mode or 110/128bytes in DPV1 mode. The channel-specific diagnostics do not affect the module status.A maximum of 9 (in DPV0/DPV1 mode) or 15 (in DPV1 mode withIM151-1 HIGH FEATURE) channel-specific diagnostic messages are possible.

Setup of the channel-specific diagnostics

The channel-specific diagnostics for ET 200S are structured as follows with theIM151-1 BASIC interface module:

Figure 6-13 Structure of the channel-specific diagnostics for ET 200S with IM151-1 BASIC





The channel-specific diagnostics for ET 200S is structured as follows with theIM151-1 STANDARD, IM151-1 FO STANDARD, and IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE interfacemodules:

Structure of the channel-specific diagnostics for ET 200S with IM151-1 STANDARD,IM151-1 FO STANDARD, and IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE

Note

The slot of the module is encoded in bits 0 to 5 of byte 16/35. Necessary: displayed number+1 ≙ slot of the module (0 ≙ slot 1; 1 ≙ slot 2; 3 ≙ slot 4 etc.)In bits 6/7 of byte 17/36, 00B is output if a power module reports a channel-specificdiagnostic.





Power m odule error typesThe diagnostic message is reported on channel 0 and applies to the whole module.

The table below shows the error types on power modules

Table 6-9 Power module error types

Power module electronicmodules

Error type Meaning Remedy

PM-E 24 VDCPM-E 24 to 48VDC

17D 10001: Sensor or loadvoltage missing

No supply voltage, orinadequate supplyvoltage.

Correct the processwiring. Check the supplyvoltage.

PM-E 24 to 48VDC/120 to 230 VAC

--- 18D 10010: Fuse error The fuse in the powermodule has tripped.

Replace the fuse.

Digital electronic module error typesThe table below shows the error types on digital electronic modules

Table 6-10 Digital electronic module error types

Digital electronic modu les Error type Mean ing Rem edy

2DI 24 VDC High Feature 1D 00001: Short-circuit Short circuit of thesensor supply. Thediagnostic message isissued on channel 0and applies to thewhole module.

Correct the processwiring (sensor wiring).

1D 00001: Short circuit(In conjunction withIM151-1 BASIC / IM151-1STANDARD,6ES7151-1AA02-0AB0 orhigher,IM151-1 FOSTANDARD,6ES7151-1AB01-0AB0 orhigher) or IM151-1 HIGHFEATURE

4DI 24 VDC High Feature

26D 11010: External error(In conjunction withIM151-1 STANDARD, upto 6ES7151-1AA01-0AB0or IM151-1 FOSTANDARD, up to6ES7151-1AB00-0AB0)

Short circuit of thesensor supply. Thediagnostic message isissued on channel 0and applies to thewhole module.

Correct the processwiring (sensor wiring).

Line to the actuatorinterrupted.

Correct the processwiring.

No supply voltage, orinadequate supplyvoltage.

Correct the processwiring. Check the supplyvoltage.

4DI 24 to 48 VUC High Feature 26D 11010: External error

Fuse triggered. Replace the fuse.





Digital electronic modu les Error type Mean ing Rem edy

1D 00001: Short circuit Short circuit of the

actuator supply toground.

2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature

2DO 24 VDC/2 A High Feature

6D 00110: Wire break Line to the actuatorinterrupted.


Short circuit on thesignal line to thesensor.


Sensor is defective. Replace the sensor.Wrong sensor typeassigned.

Parameterizationcorrection

1D 00001: Short circuit

Load impedance toolow.

Use a sensor with higherimpedance.

Signal line to a sensorinterrupted. Correct the processwiring.Sensor is defective. Replace the sensor.Wrong sensor typeassigned.

Parameterizationcorrection

6D 00110: Wire break

Load impedance toolow.

Use a sensor with higherimpedance.

Internal module erroroccurred.

Replace the module.9D 01001: Error

Sensor signal flutters. Eliminate cause of error.16D 10000: Parameterization

errorParameter assignmentis faulty.

Correct the parameterassignment.

Sensor error. Replace the sensor.

4DI NAMUR

26D 11010: External faultChangeover contactfault.






Analog input m odule error typesThe table below shows the error types on analog input modules

Table 6-11 Analog input module error types

Analog input modules Error type Meaning Remedy

16D

10000:Parameterizationerror

Module cannotevaluate parameter forthe channel:Inserted module doesnot match with theconfiguration.Parameterizationfaulty.

Correction of theconfiguration (adjustconfigured and actualupgrade)Correction of theparameterization(diagnostics wire failureonly for the allowedmeasuring rangeparameterized).

9D 01001: Error Internal module errorhas occurred(diagnostic messageon channel 0 appliesto the whole module).

Replace the module.

7D 00111: Upper valuelimit exceeded

Value is above theovercontrol range.

Correct themodule/actuator tuning.

2AI UHighSpeed

8D 01000: Lower valuelimit fallen below

Value is below theundercontrol range.

Correct themodule/actuator tuning.

---

2AI U Standard2AI U HighFeature2AI I 2WIREStandard4AI I 2WIREStandard2AI I 2WIRE High

Speed2AI I 4WIREStandard2AI I 2/4WIREHigh Feature2AI I 4WIRE HighSpeed2AI RTDStandard2AI RTD HighFeature 6D 00110:

Wire break1 Line to the sensorinterrupted.


--- ---

2AI TCStandard2AI TCHighFeature

21D

10101:Reference channelerror 2

Error on the referencechannel

Check the referencemodule(2AI RTD Standard).

1 In the case of the 2AI RTD High Feature reference module, a wire break is reported for the measured-current andconstant-current lines of the sensor.2 The following applies for the modules 2AI TC ST and 2AI TC HF:Reference channel error is not reported if the RTD module is not parameterized in the GSD file with the PT100 climate.This applies to IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE (6ES7151-1BA00-0AB0 or higher), IM151-7 CPU and IM151-3 PROFINET IO(6ES7151-3AA00-0AB0 or higher).)

Analog output mo dule error typesThe table below shows the error types on analog output modules.







1COUNT 24V/100kHz error typesThe table below shows the error types on the 1COUNT 24V/100kHz electronic module.

Table 6-14 1COUNT 24V/100kHz error types


1D 00001: Short-circuit Short circuit of the sensor supply or theactuator.

Check the wiring to the sensor. Correctthe process wiring.

5D 00101: Excess temperature Digital output is overloaded. Correct the process wiring.6D 00110: Wire break Line to the actuator interrupted. Correct the process wiring.

Internal module error occurred. Replace the module.9D 01001: ErrorLoad voltage from the power module istoo low.

Correct the process wiring. Check theload voltage.

16D 10000: Parameter assignmenterror

Parameters have not been assigned tothe module.

Correct the parameter assignment.

1COUNT 5V/500kHz error typesThe table below shows the error types on the 1COUNT 5V/500kHz electronic module.

Table 6-15 1COUNT 5V/500kHz error types


1D 00001: Short circuit Short circuit of the sensor supply or theactuator.


5D 00101: Excess temperature Digital output is overloaded. Correct the process wiring.6D 00110: Wire break Line to the actuator interrupted. Correct the process wiring.9D 01001: Error Internal module error occurred. Replace the module.16D 10000: Parameter assignment

errorParameters have not been assigned tothe module.


26D 11010: External error Wire break/short circuit of the 5 Vsensor signals:A, /A, B, /B, N, /N,


1STEP 5V/204kHz error typesThe table below shows the error types on the 1STEP 5V/204kHz electronic module.

Table 6-16 1STEP 5V/204kHz error types


1D 00001: Short-circuit Short circuit of the sensor supply. Check the wiring to the switches.Correct the process wiring.

9D 01001: Error Internal module error occurred. Replace the module.16D 10000: Parameter assignment







2Pulse error typesThe table below shows the error types on the 2PULSE electronic module.

Table 6-17 2PULSE error types


1D 00001: Short-circuit Short circuit of the sensor supply or theactuator.

Check the wiring to the switches andactuators. Correct the process wiring.

9D 01001: Error Internal module error occurred. Replace the module.16D 10000: Parameter assignment



1POS INC/Digital, 1POS S SI/Digital, 1POS INC/Analog, 1PO S SSI/A nalog error types

The table below shows the error types on the 1POS INC/Digital, 1POS SSI/Digital, 1POSINC/Analog, and 1POS SSI/Analog electronic modules.

Table 6-18 1POS INC/Digital, 1POS SSI/Digital, 1POS INC/Analog, 1POS SSI/Analog error types


1D 00001: Short-circuit Short circuit of the sensor supply. Check the wiring to the sensor. Correctthe process wiring.

16D 10000: Parameterization error Parameters have not been assigned tothe module.


17D 10001: Load voltage 2L+missing

applies only to 1POS INC/Digital and1POS SSI/Digital: Power supplyvoltage not present or too low.

Correct the process wiring. Check thesupply voltage.

26D 11010: external error Wire break/short circuit of the sensorsignals.Wire break in the sensor cable, orsensor cable is not connected.Sensor is defective or there are faults.Sensor type, transmission rate, andmonoflop time do not correspond to thesensor connected; programmablesensors do not correspond to thesettings on the module.

Correct the process wiring.Correct the parameter assignment.Replace the sensor.





1SI 3964/ASC II and 1SI Modbus/USS serial interface modulesThe table below shows the error types on the 1SI 3964/ASCII and 1SI Modbus/USS serial

interface modules.

Table 6-19 1SI 3964/ASCII, 1SI Modbus/USS error types


6D 00110: Wire break Wire broken or disconnected. Check the wiring to the terminals.Check the cable to the peer.

7D 00111: Upper value limitexceeded

Buffer overflow; message lengthoverflow

The P_RCV FB must be called morefrequently.

8D 01000: Lower value limit fallenbelow

Message with a length of 0 sent 1 Check why the communication peer issending frames without user data.

9D 01001: Error Internal module error occurred. Replace the module.

16D 10000: Parameterization error Parameters have not been assigned tothe module.


22D 10110: Message error Framing error, parity error Check the communication settings.1 EM 1SI: only for 3964(R)

4 IQ-SENS E error typesThe table below shows the error types on the 4 IQ-SENSE electronic module.

Table 6-20 4 IQ-SENSE error types


1D 00001: Short-circuit Short circuit of the lines between theelectronic module and sensor


6D 00110: Wire break Line to the sensor interrupted.No sensor connected.Sensor does not respond.

Correct the process wiring.Connect the sensor.Replace the sensor.

8D 01000: Lower value limit fallenbelow

Maintenance requirement (signalquality <130%, function reserve),sensor-dependent

Adjust the reflection light barrier.Clean the optical system.

9D 01001: Error Communication error between theelectronic module and sensor

Replace the electronic module or thesensor.Check the wiring.

16D 10000: Parameterization error Parameter assignment is faulty.Inserted module does not agree withthe configuration.Teach-in error (a new value could notbe determined/obtained)Inserted sensor does not matchconfigured sensor.

Correct the parameter assignment.Correct the configuration (align actualand preset configuration).Repeat teach-in .

Correct the configuration, or insert adifferent sensor type.

26D 11010: external error Function reserve lower limit violated(signal quality <110%) or sensor error,sensor-dependent

Adjust the reflection light barrier.Clean the optical system.Replace the sensor.






27D 11011: Unclear error Teach-in operation is underway.

Alignment tool is active.

Terminate the teach-in operation.

Close the alignment tool.

6.2.7.9 Interrupts

IntroductionThe information in this section is applicable to the IM151-1 STANDARD(6ES7151-1AA04-0AB0 or higher), IM151-1 FO STANDARD(6ES7151-1AB03-0AB0 or higher), and IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE interface modules.

DefinitionThe interrupt section of the slave diagnosis provides information on the interrupt type and thecause that led to the triggering of the interrupt. The interrupt section consists of a maximumof 48 bytes.

Position in the diagnostic frameThe interrupt section comes after the channel-specific diagnostics (only in DPV1 mode).Example: If 3 channel-specific diagnostics are pending, then the interrupt section starting atbyte 44

Data recordsThe diagnostic data of a module can be up to 44 bytes in length and is located in datarecords 0 and 1:• Data record 0 (DS 0) contains 4 bytes of diagnostic data describing the current status of

an automation system. DS0 is part of the header information of OB82(local data bytes 8 to 11).

• Data record 1 (DS 1) contains the 4 bytes of diagnostic data that are also contained indata record 0 and, in addition, up to 40 bytes of module-specific diagnostic data.

You can read out DS0 and DS1 by means of SFC59 "RD_REC".





ContentsThe contents of the interrupt function depend on the interrupt type:• In the case of diagnostic interrupts, diagnostic data record 1 (up to 44 bytes) is sent as

the interrupt status information (starting at byte x+4).• In the case of process interrupts, the interrupt status information is 4 bytes in length.• For insert/remove interrupt, the length of the interrupt information is

– 5 byte for IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE (6ES7151-1BA00-0AB0) – 0 Byte for IM151-1 STANDARD (6ES7151-1AA04-0AB0 or higher),

IM151-1 FO STANDARD (6ES7151-1AB03-0AB0 or higher) andIM151-1 HIGH FEATURE (6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0 or higher)

Structure of interruptsIf the configuration was performed with STEP 7, the interrupt data are evaluated andtransferred to the appropriate organization blocks (OBs).





The interrupt section for the ET 200S is structured as follows:

Figure 6-14 Structure of the interrupt status of the interrupt section





Diagnostic interrupt, byte x+4 to x+7

Figure 6-15 Structure of bytes x+4 to x+7 for diagnostic interrupt





Diagnostic interrupt of the m odules

Figure 6-16 Structure starting at byte x+8 for diagnostics frame





Exam ple of a diagnostic interrupt

Figure 6-17 Example of a diagnostic interrupt





Figure 6-18 Example of a diagnostic interrupt (continued)





Process interrupt of digital input modules

Figure 6-19 Structure starting at byte x+4 for process interrupt (digital input)

Process interrupt of analog input mod ules

Figure 6-20 Structure starting at byte x+4 and byte x+5 for process interrupt (analog input)





Insert/remove interrupt from IM15 1-1 HIGH FEA TURE (only 6ES7151-1BA00-0AB0 )

Figure 6-21 Structure starting at byte x+4 for remove/insert interrupt

Byte x+4 to x+8 contains the identifier of the module that has been removed or inserted.The interrupt type in byte x+1 indicates whether the modules have been removed orinserted.

6.2.7.10 Incorrect configuration states of ET 200S on PRO FIBUS DP

Invalid configuration statesThe following invalid configuration states of the ET 200S lead to station failure of theET 200S or prevent data exchange from occurring. These responses occur irrespective ofwhether the IM parameters "Operation at preset <> actual configuration", "Replace modulesduring operation", and "Startup when expected <> actual configuration" have been enabled.• Two missing modules• Terminating module missing• Number of modules exceeds the maximum configuration• Module missing in slot 1 (in the case of IM151-1 STANDARD, 6ES7151-1AA00-0AB0)• Faulty backplane bus (for example, terminal module is defective)

Note

Starting at IM151-1 BASIC / IM151-1 STANDARD (6ES7151-1AA01-0AB0),IM151-1 FO STANDARD and IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE: Ifon e module is missing (gap)and the ET 200S POWER ON is switched, then the station does not start up.





DiagnosticsThe following diagnostics can be used to identify all invalid configuration states:

Interface modu le Identifier-related diagnostics Modu le status

IM151-1 BASIC All 12 bits setIM151-1 STANDARDIM151-1 FO STANDARDIM151-1 HIGH FEATURE

All 63 bits set

• 01B: "Module error, invalid reference data" for allmodules (slots) up to cause of the malfunction

• 11B: "no module, invalid reference data" afterthe cause of the malfunction



Commissioning and Diagnostics6.3 Commissioning and diagnostics on PROFINET IO


6.3 6.3Com missioning and diagnostics on PRO FINET IO

6.3.1 Configuring ET 200S on PRO FIBUS IO

6.3.1.1 Basic principles of configuration for the ET 200S on PR OFINET IO

IntroductionThe IM151-3 PN interface module must be provided with a device name (see chapter oninstallation).

Configuration involves configuring and assigning parameters to the ET 200S.• Configuring: Systematic ordering of the individual ET 200S modules (setup).• Parameterizing: Determining the parameters from ET 200S with the configuration

software.

Note

The ET 200S is included in the hardware catalog of HW Config:IM151-3 PN: STEP 7 V5.3 and Service Pack 1 or higherThe STEP 7 online help provides additional information on the procedure.

GSD fileYou configure the ET 200S using the GSD file. This file enables you to integrate theET 200S in your system as an IO device. You can download the GSD file as follows:• On the Internet at http://www.ad.siemens.de/csi_e/gsd The following GSD file is available for the IM151-3 PN interface module:GSDML-V1.0-Siemens-ET200S-"Date in yyyymmdd".xml

6.3.1.2 Integrating the GSD file in your configuration software

IntroductionThe instructions below describe how to integrate the GSD file in SIMATIC S7 V5.3 ServicePack 1 or higher.







Integrating the GSD file in your configuration softwareTo integrate the GSD file in SIMATIC S7 into the configuration software, proceed as follows:

1. Start STEP 7 , and select "Options > Install New GSD File" in HW Config.2. In the next dialog, select the GSD file to be installed and confirm with "OK."

Result: The IO device is displayed in the PROFINET IO directory in the hardware catalog.3. Configure the ET 200S using STEP 7 (refer to STEP 7 integrated help).

6.3.1.3 Com bine modules for the configuration

Introduction

The IM151-3 PN has a maximum address scope of 256 byte for inputs and 256 bytes foroutputs.For a better utilization of the available address space of the IO controller, you can combinemultiple electronic modules/ load branches within a byte in the input or output area of thesystem image. This occurs though a systematic arrangement and identification of theET 200S electronic modules/ motor starters.

Note

The combination is only possible with the IM151-3 PN after 6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0 andSTEP 7 V5.3 SP 2.

You can find a specification of the required address space for individual modules in theappendix.You can combine the following device types within a byte:• Digital input modules• Digital output modules• Motor starters (direct starters and oscillating starters)Optional other devices may be connected between combinable devices.The combination procedure is identical to PROFIBUS DP.





Asymm etry for insert/remove interruptsThe combination of devices takes place during the configuration. By selecting a device label

without "*", you open a byte. By selecting a device with "*", you fill the byte until all bits areoccupied.For the generation of insert/remove interrupts results in the following asymmetrical behavior:

Figure 6-22 Asymmetry for insert/remove interrupts

Further informationYou can find further information on combining modules for the configuration in chapterET200S configuration on the PROFIBUS DP .

See alsoGrouping modules for configuration(Page 6-4)

6.3.2 Comm issioning and startup of ET 200S on PRO FINET IO

Software requirements

Table 6-21 Software requirements for commissioning on PROFINET IO

Configuration softwareused

Version Notes

STEP 7 Version 5.3 ServicePack 1 or higher

You use HW Config and the supplied GSD file.

Configuration software fora different IO controller

You need the GSD file of ET 200S.





Requirements for comm issioningThe following additional requirements must be satisfied for commissioning the ET 200S on

PROFINET IO:• IO device installed• IO device wired• SIMATIC Micro Memory Card inserted, IO device configured with device names

(configured and parameterized)• Supply voltage for the IO controller is switched on (see manual for the IO controller)• IO controller is switched to RUN mode (see manual for the IO controller)

Commissioning the ET 200S

To commission the IO device, proceed as follows:1. Switch on the voltage supply for the IO device (see relevant section in this manual).2. If necessary, switch on the supply voltage for the load.

Startup of the ET 200S

Switch on the supply voltage for the IO device

IO device sets outputs to"0" and accepts the

configured device name from theSIMATIC Micro Memory Card

The "ON" LED comes on"BF" LED flashes.

(with connection to the switch)“BF” LED lights up

(without connection to the switch)

IO device receives

connect telegram andparameter datafrom IO controller

"BF" LED off;inputs and outputs

enabled;data transfer possible.

Figure 6-23 Startup of the ET 200S on the PROFINET IO





NoteThe IM151-3 PN interface modules support the default startup.The following conditions then apply:• The preset parameters are used (refer to parameters for the electronic modules).• All supply voltages at the power modules must be switched on.

6.3.3 Diagnostics using LED display

Interface m oduleLED display on the interface module IM151-3 PN (front door opened):

4

5

1

2

3

① Group error (red)② Bus fault (red)③ Supply voltage (green)

under the front door:④ IO controller not available (green)⑤ Data exchange (yellow)





Status and error displays by means of LEDs on IM151-3 PN interface module

Table 6-22 Status and error displays of IM151-3 PNLEDs

SF BF ON

Meaning Remedy

Off Off Off There is no voltage at the interface module, orthe interface module has a hardware defect.

Switch on the power supply voltage DC 24 Von the interface module.

* * On There is voltage at the interface module. -* Flashing On Incorrect or no connect telegram - no data

exchange between the IO controller and theinterface module (IO device) takes place, butthe device is physically linked with a switch.Causes:•

Device name is incorrect• Configuration error• Parameter assignment error


assignment.• Check the device name.• Assign a valid device name to the interface

module.

* On On • The IO device is not linked with a switch • Establish a connection to the IO controller(via a switch).

• Assign a valid device name to the interfacemodule.

• Check the bus configuration.• Check that the bus connector is correctly

inserted.• Check whether the bus cable to the IO

controller has been disconnected.

The designed configuration of the ET 200Sdoes not match the actual configuration. Check the configuration of the ET 200S todetermine whether a module is missing ordefective or whether an unconfigured moduleis inserted.Check the configuration (e.g., with STEP 7),and correct the parameter assignment error.

On * On

There is an error in an I/O module, or theinterface module is defective.

Incoming diagnostic

Replace the interface module, or contact yourSiemens representative.

On Off On • No SIMATIC Micro Memory Card isinserted.

• The inserted SIMATIC Micro Memory Cardis full or does not have enough storagespace for the device name.

• No suitable SIMATIC Micro Memory Cardis inserted (i.e. no SIMATIC Micro MemoryCard from Siemens).

Before switching on the power supply voltage,insert an empty SIMATIC Micro Memory Cardin the IM151-3 PN.

Off Off On Data exchange is taking place between the IOcontroller and the ET 200S.The preset configuration and actualconfiguration of the ET 200S match.

-

On On Off FW update is runningOff Flashing

0.5 HzOff FW update successfully completed





LEDs

SF BF ON

Meaning Remedy

On Flashing0.5 Hz Off External error during FW update(e.g., incorrect FW) Use the proper FW for the update

On Flashing2 Hz

Off Internal error during FW update(e.g., read/write error)

Repeat FW update

LINK RX/TX Off Off There is no connection to the switch/IO

controller(no IO controller is available on the network)

• No uniform transmission rate• Autonegotiation not successful

On * Autonegotiation is complete and PROFINETtransmission rate is accepted

-

On On Transmission/reception is in progress -* Not applicable

Power m odules, electronic modules, technology modulesThe use of LED displays for diagnostics for power modules, electronic modules, andtechnology modules is the same as for ET 200S with PROFIBUS DP.

6.3.4 Diagnostic messa ges of the electronic modules

Actions after a diagnostic messageEach diagnostic message leads to the following actions:• The SF LED on the interface module lights up.• Several simultaneous diagnostic messages are possible.• Diagnostics are reported as diagnostic interrupts and can be read using data records.• After a diagnostic message is signaled, the message is stored in the diagnostic buffer of

the IO controller.• OB82 is called. If OB82 is not available, the IO controller goes to STOP mode.• Acknowledgement of the diagnostic interrupt (after which a new interrupt is possible).

Causes of errors and corrective actionsThe causes of the errors and the correction actions to be taken when specific diagnosticmessages appear are described later on in this manual.





6.3.5 Evaluating interrupts of ET 200S

IntroductionInterrupts are triggered by the IO device when certain errors occur. Interrupt evaluationdiffers according to the IO controller used.

Evaluating interrupts with IO controllerThe ET 200S supports the following interrupts:• Diagnostic interrupts• Process interrupts• Insert/remove module interruptsIn case of an interrupt, interrupt OBs are automatically executed in the CPU of the IOcontroller (see information on program design in the System Software for S7-300/ S7-400 programming manual).You can obtain information on the cause of the error and the error type using the OB numberand the start information.You can obtain detailed information on the error event in the error OB with SFB 54 RALRM(read supplementary interrupt information)

Triggering of a diagnostic interruptWhen an incoming or outgoing event (e.g. wire break) is registered , the module triggers adiagnostic interrupt if "Enable: Diagnostic interrupt" is set.The CPU interrupts the processing of the user program and processes the OB82 diagnosticblock. The event that caused the interrupt to be triggered is entered in the start information ofOB82.

Triggering of a process interruptWhen a process interrupt occurs, the CPU interrupts the processing of the user program andprocesses the OB40 process interrupt block. The event that caused the interrupt to betriggered is entered in the start information of OB40.

Triggering of an insert/remove-module interruptThe CPU interrupts the processing of the user program and processes the OB83 diagnosticblock. The event that caused the interrupt to be triggered is entered in the start information ofOB83.





Diagn ostic Process interrupt lostFor the modules• 2DI DC24V HF (6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0),• 4DI DC24V HF (6ES7131-4BD01-0AB0 and• 4DI UC24..48V HF (6ES7131-4CD00-0AB0)the diagnostic "Process interrupt lost" is not available at present.

Note

If more than 90 process interrupts are generated per second, process interrupts can be lost.

6.3.6 Differences in the replacement value behavior

Replacemen t value behavior station granular with 6ES7 151-3AA00-0AB 0If you use an interface module 6ES7151-3AA00-0AB0 in the IO device, the followingreplacement value behavior is displayed:• All output modules output their parameterized replacement values or 0 on their outputs.

Replacement value beh avior slot granular starting with 6ES71 51-3AA00-0AB0If you use an interface module 6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0 in the IO device, the followingreplacement value behavior is displayed:• All outputs whose reference data companion are "Bad" , output their parameterized

replacement values or 0 on their outputs.





6.3.7 Diagnostics with STE P 7

6.3.7.1 Reading out the diagnostics

Options for reading out the diagnostics

Table 6-23 Reading out the diagnostics with STEP 7

Automation systemwith

IO con troller

Block ortab in STEP

Application Reference

In HW Config via"Station > OpenONLINE"

Device diagnostics inform of plain text onSTEP 7 interface (in theQuick View, DiagnosticsView, or ModuleInformation windows)

"Diagnosing hardware" inSTEP 7 online help

SFB 52"RDREC"

Reading data recordsfrom the IO device


SIMATIC S7

SFB 54"RALRM"

Receiving interrupts fromthe IO device


6.3.7.2 Channel diagnostics

DefinitionThe channel diagnostics provide information on channel faults of modules.Channel faults are mapped as channel diagnostics in IO diagnostic data records. Each datarecord contains 10 bytes.Diagnostics can be read for all of the following: a submodule slot, a slot, the slots in a devicethat are assigned to an IO controller, and a device. The determination is reached via the data

record number:

800AH Channel diagnostics for a submodule slot800BH Manufacturer-specific channel diagnostics for a submodule slot (coming)800CH Manufacturer-specific diagnostics for a submodule slot (coming and going)C00AH Channel diagnostics for a slotC00BH Manufacturer-specific channel diagnostics for a slot (coming)C00CH Manufacturer-specific channel diagnostics for a slot (coming and going)E002H Deviation of the set configuration by the actual configuration of an IO

controller assigned IO device





E00A H Channel diagnostics for the slots in a device that are assigned to an IOcontroller

E00B H Manufacturer-specific channel diagnostics for an IO controller assignedchannel in an IO device (coming)E00C H Manufacturer-specific channel diagnostics for the IO controller assigned

channels in an IO device (coming and going)F00A H Channel diagnostics for a deviceF00B H Manufacturer-specific channel diagnostics for an IO device (coming)

F00C H Manufacturer-specific channel diagnostics for an IO device (coming andgoing)

AFF0 H to AFFF H

Manufacturer, order number, creation state, version, etc.

The data record is read with the SFB 52 RDREC (read data record).

tructure of diagnostic data recordsYou can find the diagnostic data records structure and examples for programming in theprogramming manual From PROFIBUS DP to PROFINET IO.

The data records that the ET 200S supports are based on the PROFINET IO - ApplicationLayer Service Definition V2.0 standard.

You can download the standard at http://www.profibus.com at no cost.

http://www.profibus.com/






Channel diagnosticsThe channel diagnostics for ET 200S is structured as follows with the IM151-3 PN interface

module:

Figure 6-24 Structure of the channel diagnostics for ET 200S with IM151-3 PN





Figure 6-25 Structure of the channel diagnostic record for ET 200S with IM151-3 PN

The bytes 16 to 21 repeat themselves for every further error that is reported in this diagnosticmessage.

Error types of the other modulesThe error types of the power modules, digital electronic modules, analog electronic modules,and the technology modules are the same as for ET 200S with PROFIBUS DP.





6.3.7.3 Incorrect configuration states of ET 200S on PRO FINET IO

Incorrect configuration statesThe following incorrect structure states of the ET 200S lead to a malfunction of the IO deviceET 200S or prevent the entry in the data exchange:• starting with 2 missing modules• Terminating module missing• Number of modules exceeds the maximum configuration• Faulty backplane bus (for example, terminal module is defective)

NoteIfon e module is missing (gap) and the ET 200S is powered up, the IO device will notstart up.

6.3.7.4 Interruption of the ET 200S backplane bus

Special diagnostics for bus interruptionIf the ET 200S does not start up or data exchange is terminated, the cause can be adefective terminal module. The defective terminal module causes the ET 200S backplanebus to be physically interrupted.The IM151-3 PN (slot 0) has a manufacturer-specific diagnostic consisting of 35 bytes forlocating a bus interruption. The module status and the identifier-related diagnostics aremapped within this diagnostic, as is the familiar case with PROFIBUS DP.An interrupt is not generated in the event of an interruption of the ET 200S backplane bus.The information must be read out explicitly by the user. The data record with index F00BH isavailable for this purpose.





Com position of m anufacturer-specific diagnosticsContent of manufacturer-specific diagnostics:

Figure 6-26 Structure of the identifier-related diagnostics for ET 200S with IM151-3 PN on

PROFINET IO












General technical specifications 77.1 7.1Standards, certifications, and approvals

Introduction

The general technical specifications comprise the standards and test values met by theET 200S distributed I/O system, as well as the criteria used to test theET 200S distributed I/O system.

CE certification

The distributed I/O system ET 200S fulfills the requirements and protection target/goals ofthe following EC guidelines and matches the harmonized European standards (EN) thatwere published for the memory-programmable controllers in the official journals of theEuropean communities.• 73/23/EEC "Electrical Equipment for Use within Fixed Voltage Ranges" (Low-Voltage

Directive)• 89/336/EEC "Electromagnetic Compatibility" (EMC Directive)• 94/9/EC "Equipment and protective systems intended for use in potentially explosive

atmospheres" (Explosion Protection Directive)The EC declarations of conformity are kept available for the responsible authorities at thefollowing address:Siemens AktiengesellschaftAutomation and DrivesA&D AS RD ST Type TestP.O. Box 1963D-92209 AmbergFederal Republic of Germany



General technical specifications7.1 Standards, certifications, and approvals


UL approval

Underwriters Laboratories Inc. in accordance with• UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment)

CSA approval

Canadian Standards Association in accordance with• C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control Equipment)

or

Underwriters Laboratories Inc. according to• UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment)• CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Industrial Control Equipment)

or

HAZ. LOC.

Underwriters Laboratories Inc. according to• UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment)• CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control Equipment)• UL 1604 (Hazardous Location)• CSA-213 (Hazardous Location)





APPROVED for use inClass I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D Tx;Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC TxThe motor starters ET 200S have no cUlus for HAZ. LOC.

Note

You can find the currently valid certificates and approvals on the type plate of each module.

FM approval

Factory Mutual Research (FM) in accordance withApproval Standard Class Number 3611, 3600, 3810APPROVED for use in Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D Tx;Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC TxThe ET 200S motor starters are not FM-approved. All other modules of the ET 200S areFM-approved.

In accordance with EN 50021 (Electrical apparatus for potentially explosive atmospheres;type of protection "n")

II 3 G EEx nA II T4 to T5

Warning

Personal injury and property damage can occur.Personal injury and property damage can occur can occur in hazardous areas if youdisconnect plug-in connections while an ET 200S is in operation.In hazardous areas, always deenergize the ET 200S before disconnecting plug-inconnections.





WarningWarning Explosion Hazard

Substitution of components may impair the suitability for Class I, Div. 2.

Warning

This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Div. 2, Group A, B, C, D or in non-hazardouslocations only.

Mark for Australia

The ET 200S distributed I/O system fulfills the requirements of AS/NZS 2064 (Class A).

IEC 61131The distributed I/O system ET 200S fulfills the requirements and criteria of the standard

IEC 61131-2 (memory programmable controllers, part 2: equipment requirements andverifications).

PROFIBUS standardThe ET 200S distributed I/O system is based on IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1 .

Marine type approvalClassification organizations:• ABS (American Bureau of Shipping)• BV (Bureau Veritas)• DNV (Det Norske Veritas)• GL (Germanischer Lloyd)• LRS (Lloyds Register of Shipping)• Class NK (Nippon Kaiji Kyokai)

Use in industrial environmentSIMATIC products are designed for use in industrial environment.





Table 7-1 Use in industrial environment

Requirement forrea of application

Emitted interference Interference immun ityIndustry EN 61000-6-4: 2001 2001 EN 61000-6-2 : 2001 2001

Use in residential areasIf you use the ET 200S in residential areas, you must ensure limit class B in accordance withEN 55011 with respect to emission of radio interference.Suitable measures for achieving a limit class B radio interference level are:• Installation of the ET 200S in grounded control cabinets/control boxes• Use of filters in supply lines



General technical specifications7.2 Electromagnetic compatibility


7.2 7.2Electromagne tic compatibility

DefinitionElectromagnetic compatibility is the capability of an electrical device to function satisfactorilyin its electromagnetic environment without interfering with this environment.The ET 200S distributed I/O system meets the requirements of the European Union's EMClaw, for example. This requires that the ET 200S distributed I/O system meets thespecifications and directives concerning electrical installation.

Pulse-shaped interferencesThe following table shows the electromagnetic compatibility of the ET 200S distributed I/O

system relative to pulse-shaped interferences.

Pulse-shaped interference Tested with Correspond s to severity

Electrostatic dischargein accordance withIEC 61000-4-2

8 kV4 kV

3 (air discharge)2 (contact discharge)

Burst pulses (rapid, transientinterferences) in accordance withIEC 61000-4-4.

2 kV (supply line)2 kV (signal line)

3

3Surge in accordance with IEC 61000-4-5Only with lightning protection elements (see the DP master manual andthe SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS Networks description)• Asymmetrical interconnection 2 kV (supply line)

2 kV (signal line/data line)• Symmetrical interconnection 1 kV (supply line)

1 kV (signal line/data line)

3



General technical specifications7.2 Electromagnetic compatibility


Sinusoidal interferencesThe following table shows the electromagnetic compatibility of the ET 200S distributed I/O

system relative to sinusoidal interferences.

RF radiation in accordance with IEC 61000-4-3Electromagne tic RF field

Amplitude-modulated Pulse-modulated

RF coupling in accordance withIEC 61000-4-6

80 MHz to 1000 MHz 900 MHz ±5 MHz 0.15 MHz to 80 MHz10 V/m 10 Veff unmodulated80% AM (1 kHz) 50% ED 80% AM (1 kHz)

200 Hz repetition rate 150 Ω source impedance

Emission of radio interferencesEmitted interference of electromagnetic fields in accordance with EN 55011: Limit class A,Group 1 (measured at a distance of 10 m).

Frequency Emitted interference

From 30 MHz to 230 MHz < 40 dB (µV/m)QFrom 230 MHz to 1000 MHz < 47 dB (µV/m)Q



General technical specifications7.3 Transport and storage conditions


7.3 7.3Transport and storage co nditions

Transport and storage conditionsThe ET 200S distributed I/O system surpasses the transport and storage requirements ofIEC 61131-2. The following specifications apply to modules that are transported and storedin their original packaging.

Type of condition Permitted range

Free fall ≤1 mTemperature From -40°C to +70 °CTemperature change 20 K/hAir pressure From 1080 to 660 hPa (corresponds to a height of -1000 to 3500 m)

Relative humidity From 5% to 95%, without condensation

7.4 7.4Mechanical and climatic environmental conditions

Climatic environmental conditionsThe following climatic environmental conditions apply:

Environmen tal conditions Areas of application Rem arks

From 0°C to 60°C For horizontal installationFrom 0°C to 40°C For all other mounting positions

Temperature

From 0°C to 55°C (see restrictions be low)* For vertical installationTemperature change 10 K/hRelative humidity From 15% to a maximum of 95% Without condensationAir pressure From 1,080 hPa to 795 hPa Corresponds to an altitude of

-1,000 m to 2,000 mContaminant concentration

SO2: < 0.5 ppm;

rel. humidity < 60 %, no condensationH2S: < 0.1 ppm;rel. humidity < 60 %, no condensation

Test:

10 ppm; 4 days1 ppm; 4 days

* Restrictions for area of ap plication: 0 to 55°C , vertically m ounted This area of application (0°C to 55°C, vertically-mounted) is permitted for the followingmodules only:• IM151-1 STANDARD: 6ES7151-1AA02-0AB0• PM-E DC24V: 6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0• 2DI DC24V ST: 6ES7131-4BB01-0AA0



General technical specifications7.4 Mechanical and climatic environmental conditions


• 2DI DC24V HF: 6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0• 4DI DC24V ST: 6ES7131-4BD01-0AA0• 4DI DC24V HF: 6ES7131-4BD01-0AB0• 2DO DC24V/0,5A ST: 6ES7132-4BB01-0AA0• 2DO DC24V/0,5A HF: 6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0• 4DO DC24V/0,5A: 6ES7132-4BD01-0AA0• 2DO DC24V/2A ST: 6ES7132-4BB31-0AA0• 2DO DC24V/2A HF: 6ES7132-4BB31-0AB0• 4DO DC24V/2A ST: 6ES7132-4BD31-0AA0• 2RO NO DC24..120V/5A AC24..230V/5A: 6ES7132-4HB01-0AB0

Note

None of the supply and load voltages of the ET 200S are permitted to exceed 24 VDC.This voltage limit must be ensured.

Mechanical environmental con ditionsThe mechanical environmental conditions are shown in the following table in the form ofsinusoidal vibrations.

ET 200S modules Frequency range Constant Intermittent

10 ≤ f ≤ 58 Hz 0.15 mm amplitude 0.35 mm amplitudeAll modules except motor starters58 ≤ f ≤ 150 Hz 2 g constant acceleration 5 g constant acceleration



General technical specifications7.4 Mechanical and climatic environmental conditions


Testing me chanical environmental conditionsThe following table provides information on the type and extent of tests for mechanical

environmental conditions.

Test for ... Test standard Termina l modu les and electronic modu les

Vibrations Vibration test inaccordance withIEC 60068-2-6

Vibration type: Frequency sweep with a rate of change of 1octave/minute.10 Hz ≤ f ≤ 58 Hz, constant amplitude of 0.35 mm58 Hz ≤ f ≤ 150 Hz, constant acceleration of 5 gVibration duration: 20 frequency sweeps per axis in each of the 3mutually vertical axes

Shock Shock, tested inaccordance withIEC 60068-2-27

Type of shock: Half-sineStrength of shock: 15 g peak value, 11 ms duration

Direction of shock: 3 shocks each in +/- direction in each of the 3mutually vertical axesRepetitive shock Shock, tested in

accordance withIEC 60068-29

Type of shock: Half-sineStrength of shock: 25g peak value, 6 ms durationDirection of shock: 1000 shocks each in +/- direction in each of the 3mutually vertical axes



General technical specifications7.5 Specifications for dielectric tests, protection class, degree of protection, and rated voltage of the ET 200S


7.5 7.5Specifications for dielectric tests, protection class, degree ofprotection, and rated voltage of the ET 200S

Test voltageInsulation resistance is demonstrated during the type test with the following test voltage inaccordance with IEC 61131-2:

Circuits with a rated voltage of U e relative toother circuits or ground

Test voltage

<50 V 500 VDC<150 V 2,500 VDC<250 V 4000 VDC

Pollution degree/overvoltage category in accordance with IEC 611 31• Pollution degree 2• Overvoltage category

– When UN = 120/230 VAC: III – When UN = 24 VDC: II

Protection classProtection class I in accordance with IEC 60536

Degree of protection IP 20Degree of protection IP 20 in accordance with IEC 60529 for all ET 200S modules, that is:• Protection against contact with standard test probes• Protection against foreign bodies with a diameter greater than 12.5 mm• No special protection against water

Rated voltage for ope ration

The ET 200S distributed I/O system works with the rated voltage and correspondingtolerances shown in the following table.

ET 200S modules Rated voltage Tolerance range

20.4 VDC to 28.8 VDC1 24 VDC18.5 VDC to 30.2 VDC2

120 VAC 93 VAC to 132 VAC (47 Hz to 63 Hz)

All modules except motor starters

230 VAC 187 VAC to 264 VAC (47 Hz to 63 Hz)1 Static value: Generation as functional extra-low voltage with safety isolation in accordance with IEC 60364-4-412 Dynamic value: Including ripple, e.g., at three-phase bridge rectifier



General technical specifications7.6 Variations in general technical specifications for the ET 200S FC frequency converter


7.6 7.6Variations in general technical specifications for the ET 200S FCfrequency converter

Variations in general technical specificationsThe table below presents the variations in the general technical specifications for theET 200S FC frequency converter compared to the ET 200S.

Table 7-2 Variations in general technical specifications for the ET 200S FC frequency converter

Section Variations

Standards, certifications, and approvals The frequency converter is no t • cULus-approved for hazardous locations• FM-approved (Factory Mutual Research)• Marine type-approved

Transport and storage conditions Free fall: ≤0.35 mClimatic environmental conditions Temperature for horizontal installation:

From 0 C to 60 CTemperature for vertical installation:From 0 C to 40 C

Mechanical environmental conditionsRated voltage for operation

See operating instructions for ET 200S FCFrequency Converter (6SL3 298-0CA12-0xP0)

Use in Zone 2 The ET 200S FC frequency converter is no t approved for use in hazardous area Zone 2.




Interface modules 88.1 8.1Param eters for interface modules

8.1.1 Param eters for the IM151-1 BAS IC interface modu le

Overview

Table 8-1 Parameters for the IM151-1 BASIC interface module

IM151-1 BASIC Value range Default setting Applicability

Operation at Preset <> Actualconfiguration

Disable/enable Disable ET 200S

Identifier-related diagnostics Disable/enable Enable ET 200SModule status Disable/enable Enable ET 200SChannel-specific diagnostics Disable/enable Enable ET 200SFormat of analog values SIMATIC S7/

SIMATIC S5S7 ET 200S

Interference frequencysuppression

50 Hz / 60 Hz 50 Hz ET 200S

Reference junction slot None / 2 to 12 None ET 200SReference junction input RTD on channel 0/

RTD on channel 10 ET 200S



Interface modules8.1 Parameters for interface modules


8.1.2 Parameters for interface module IM151-1 STAN DARD , IM151-1 FO STAN DARDand IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE

Overview

Table 8-2 Parameters for interface module IM151-1 STANDARD, IM151-1 FO STANDARD andIM151-1 HIGH FEATURE

IM151-1 STANDARD/ HIGHFEATURE

Value range Default 4 Applicability

DP interrupt mode DPV0/DPV1 DPV0 ET 200SBus length ≤ 1 m / > 1 m ≤ 1 m ET 200SOperation at preset <> actual

configuration1


Diagnostic interrupt3 Disable/enable Disable ET 200SHardware interrupt3 Disable/enable Disable ET 200SInsert/remove-module interrupt23


ID-relateddiagnostics

Disable/enable Enable ET 200S

Module status Disable/enable Enable ET 200SChannel-specific diagnostics Disable/enable Enable ET 200SOption handling, general Disable/enable Disable ET 200SOption handling: Slot 2 to 63 Disable/enable Disable Module

Analog-value format SIMATIC S7/SIMATIC S5

S7 ET 200S

Interference frequencysuppression

50 Hz/60 Hz 50 Hz ET 200S

Reference junction slot None/2 to 63 None ET 200SReference junction slot input RTD on channel 0/


Synchronize slave on DP cycle5 enable/disable disable ET 200STime Ti (read process values) 5 Minimum/Maximum Standard value ET 200STime To (output processvalues)5

Minimum/Maximum Standard value ET 200S

1 Note also the Option Handling parameter

2 In the GSD file, the default setting of the parameter is "Disable".3 Parameter can only be assigned in DPV1 mode.4 The default settings are applicable for the default startup (if no other parameters are specified bythe DP master).5 Only IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE

See alsoAssigning parameters for option handling (Page 3-34)



Interface modules8.1 Parameters for interface modules


8.1.3 Param eters for the IM151 -3 PN interface modu le

Overview

Table 8-3 Parameters for the IM151-3 PN interface module

IM151-3 PN Value range Default setting Applicability

Bus length ≤ 1 m / > 1 m ≤ 1 m ET 200SInterference frequencysuppression

50 Hz / 60 Hz 50Hz ET 200S

Reference junction slot None / 2 to 63 None ET 200SReference junction input RTD on channel 0/




Interface modules8.2 Parameter description for the interface modules


8.2 8.2Param eter description for the interface modu les

8.2.1 DP interrupt mode

Note

This parameter only used for IM151-1 STANDARD (6ES7151-1AA04-0AB0 or higher),IM151-1 FO STANDARD (6ES7151-1AB03-0AB0 or higher) and IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE.

DescriptionThis parameter allows you to enable or disable DPV1 operation of the ET 200S. If DPV1operation is enabled, data records and interrupts are supported (can be assignedparameters) by means of Class 1 and Class 2 services.

Requirement:• The DP master also support DPV1.

8.2.2 Bus length

Description≤ 1 m: Default setting - the maximum bus length is 1 m.> 1 m: The bus length of the ET 200S is > 1 m up to a maximum of 2 m. This setting will,however, increase the response time of the ET 200S.

8.2.3 Operation at Preset <> Actual Configuration

DescriptionIf the parameter is enabled and:• Modules are removed and inserted during operation, this does not lead to a station failure

of the ET 200S.• The actual configuration differs from the expected configuration, the ET 200S remains

engaged in data transfer with the DP master.





If the parameter is disabled and:• Modules are removed and inserted during operation, this leads to a station failure of the

ET 200S.• The actual configuration differs from the expected configuration, there is no data transfer

between the DP master and the ET 200S. Exception: Option handling with RESERVEmodules.

8.2.4 Option handling, general

DescriptionUsing this parameter you can enable or disable the option handling for the entire ET 200S.

8.2.5 Option handling: slots 2 to 63

DescriptionUsing this parameter you can enable or disable the checking of the configuration.• Slots 2 to 63 are enabled: Instead of the configured electronic module you can also insert

a RESERVE module in the relevant slot without diagnostics being reported.• Slots 2 to 63 are disabled: Only the configured module can be located on the relevant

slot. RESERVE modules are treated as incorrect modules. Depending on the setting ofthe "Operation at Preset <> Actual Configuration" parameter, the ET 200S will either failor remain in data transfer.

8.2.6 Diagnostic interrupt

DescriptionThis parameter allows you to enable or disable diagnostic interrupts. Diagnostic interrupts

are supported• On PROFIBUS DP, when the ET 200S is in DPV1 mode.• On PROFINET IO.





8.2.7 Hardware interrupt

DescriptionThis parameter allows you to enable or disable hardware interrupts. Hardware interrupts aresupported• On PROFIBUS DP, when the ET 200S is in DPV1 mode.• On PROFINET IO.

8.2.8 Insert/remov e-module interrupt

DescriptionThis parameter allows you to enable or disable insert/remove-module interrupts.Insert/remove-module interrupts are supported• On PROFIBUS DP, when the ET 200S is in DPV1 mode.• On PROFINET IO.

8.2.9 Analog-value format

DescriptionHere you set the number format for all analog electronic modules.

8.2.10 Interference frequency suppression

DescriptionThe frequency of your alternating voltage system can affect measured values negatively,

particularly in the case of both measurements in small voltage ranges and thermocouples.Specify here the dominant line frequency in your system (50 Hz or 60 Hz).The interference frequency suppression parameter is valid for all analog electronic modules.The integration time and conversion time of the individual modules are also set by means ofthis parameter. See the technical specifications of the analog electronic modules.





8.2.11 Reference junction slot

DescriptionThis parameter allows you to assign a slot (none, 2 to 12 or 2 to 63) where the channel formeasuring the reference temperature is located (calculation of the compensation value).

See alsoConnecting thermocouples (Page 12-8)

8.2.12 Reference junction input

DescriptionThis parameter allows you to set the channel (0/1) for measuring the reference temperature(calculation of the compensation value) for the assigned slot.


8.2.13 Synchronize DP slave with DP cycle

DescriptionYou can use this parameter to enable or disable isochronous operation.

If you enable isochronous operation, the I/O of the ET 200S are synchronized with the globalcontrol frame of the master (as an equidistance cycle).

8.2.14 Time Ti read in process values)

DescriptionThis value can only be set provided you have enabled the "Synchronize DP slave with DPcycle" parameter.

Ti is the time reserved for reading in the input data at the ET 200S. At the beginning of Ti,the input data is converted at the terminals and stored in a buffer via the backplane bus ofthe ET 200S. Ti ends at the beginning of the next, equidistant DP cycle (i.e. with the globalcontrol frame).





At this point, the most recent, most up-to-date input data must be available to be read in onthe PROFIBUS subnet. The time Ti must take into account the processing and delay times inthe modules and in the backplane bus of the ET 200S and, in the case of modular slaves, istherefore dependent on the configuration.The time Ti can only be set in the specified increments between the minimum and maximumvalues. Normally, the default values should be accepted.

8.2.15 Time To (output process values)

DescriptionThis value can only be set provided you have enabled the "Synchronize DP slave with DP

cycle" parameter.The end of the To time is the point at which the output data is switched to the moduleterminals in its converted form. The time To includes the following:• Distribution of the output data via the PROFIBUS DP bus system to the slaves

(= cyclic master- slave data exchange)• Distribution of the output data to the modules via the backplane bus of the slave• Conversion and transfer of the output data to the output terminals of the moduleTo starts with the arrival of the global control frame. Like Ti, the time can be set only in thespecified increments between the minimum and maximum values displayed. Normally, youshould accept the default values.



Interface modules8.3 IM151-1 BASIC interface module (6ES7151-1CA00-0AB0)


8.3 8.3IM151-1 BAS IC interface module (6ES7151-1CA 00-0AB0)

Order number6ES7151-1CA00-0AB0

FeaturesThe IM151-1 BASIC interface module has the following features:• It connects the ET 200S with PROFIBUS DP via the RS485 interface.• It prepares the data for the electronic modules and motor starters that are fitted.• It supplies the backplane bus.• The PROFIBUS DP address of the ET 200S can be set by means of switches.• If the 24 VDC power supply is disconnected, the IM151-1 BASIC interface module is also

disconnected.• The maximum address space is 88 bytes for inputs and 88 bytes for outputs.• The reference potential M of the rated supply voltage of the IM151-1 BASIC to the rail

(protective conductor) is connected by means of an RC combination, thus permitting anungrounded configuration.

• Operation as a DPV0 slave• A maximum of 12 modules can be operated with the IM151-1 BASIC.• The maximum bus length is not relevant.

Terminal assignmentThe following table shows the terminal assignment of the IM151-1 BASIC interface modulefor the 24 VDC voltage supply and PROFIBUS DP:

Table 8-4 Terminal assignment of the IM151-1 BASIC interface module

View Signal name Designation

1 - -2 - -

3 RxD/TxD-P Data line B4 RTS Request To Send5 M5V2 Data reference potential (station)6 P5V2 Supply plus (station)7 - -8 RxD/TxD-N Data line A

9






1L+ 24 VDC

2L+ 24 VDC (for loop through)1M Chassis ground

2M Ground (for loop through)

Block diagram

Figure 8-1 Block diagram for the IM151-1 BASIC interface module





Technical specifications

Dimensions and weight Dimension W x H x D (mm) 45 x 119.5 x 75Weight Approx. 150 g

Data for specific modules Transmission rate 9.6, 19.2, 45.45, 93.75, 187.5, 500 kbps, 1.5, 3; 6;

12 MbpsBus protocol PROFIBUS DPInterface RS 485SYNC capability YesFREEZE capability YesManufacturer ID 80F3H Direct data exchange YesIsochronous operation NoMax. output current of the PROFIBUS DPinterface (5, 6)

80 mA

Voltages, currents, po tentials Rated supply voltage of the electroniccomponents (1L+)

24 VDC

• P1 Yes• Power failure bypass NoIsolation• Between the backplane bus and electronic

componentsNo

• Between the PROFIBUS DP and electroniccomponents

Yes

• Between the supply voltage and electroniccomponents

No

Permitted potential difference (to the rail) 75 VDC, 60 VACInsulation tested with 500 VDCCurrent consumption from rated supply voltage(1L+)

Approx. 70 mA

Power dissipation of the module Typ. 1.5 WStatus, interrupts, diagnostics

Interrupts NoneDiagnostic function Yes• Group error• PROFIBUS DP bus monitoring

Red "SF" LEDred "BF" LED

• Monitoring of the power supply voltage of theelectronics

Green "ON" LED



Interface modules8.4 IM151-1 STANDARD interface module (6ES7151-1AA04-0AB0)


8.4 8.4IM151-1 STAND ARD interface module (6ES7151-1AA04-0AB0)

Order number6ES7151-1AA04-0AB0

FeaturesThe IM151-1 STANDARD interface module has the following features:• It connects the ET 200S with PROFIBUS DP via the RS485 interface.• It prepares the data for the electronic modules and motor starters that are fitted.• It supplies the backplane bus.• The PROFIBUS DP address of the ET 200S can be set by means of switches.• Switching off the DC 24 V power supply voltage also switches off the interface module

IM151-1 STANDARD.• The maximum address space is 244 bytes for inputs and 244 bytes for outputs.• The reference potential M of the rated supply voltage of the IM151-1 STANDARD to the

rail (protective conductor) is connected by means of an RC combination, thus permittingan ungrounded configuration.

• Operation as a DPV0 slave• A maximum of 63 modules can be operated with the IM151-1 STANDARD.• The maximum bus length is 2 m (can be set).• Supports option handling and status byte for power modules.Additional features as compared to the IM151-1 STANDARD interface module (up to6ES7151-1AA03-0AB0):• Operation as a DPV1 slave

– Noncyclical data traffic (data record read/write):Class 2 services and class 1 services

– Diagnostic interrupts – Hardware interrupts – Insert/remove module interrupts






Terminal assignmentThe following table shows the terminal assignment of the IM151-1 STANDARD interface

module for the 24 VDC voltage supply and PROFIBUS DP:

Table 8-5 Terminal assignment of the IM151-1 STANDARD interface module


1 - -2 - -3 RxD/TxD-P Data line B4 RTS Request To Send5 M5V2 Data reference potential (station)6 P5V2 Supply plus (station)

7 - -8 RxD/TxD-N Data line A

91L+ 24 VDC2L+ 24 VDC (for loop through)1M Chassis ground


Block diagram

Figure 8-2 Block diagram for the IM151-1 STANDARD interface module






Dimensions and weight Dimension W x H x D (mm) 45 x 119.5 x 75Weight Approx. 150 g

Data for specific modules Transmission rate 9.6, 19.2, 45.45, 93.75, 187.5, 500 kbps, 1.5, 3; 6;

12 MbpsBus protocol PROFIBUS DPInterface RS 485SYNC capability YesFREEZE capability YesManufacturer ID 806AH Direct data exchange YesIsochronous operation NoMax. output current of the PROFIBUS DPinterface (5, 6)

80 mA


24 VDC

• P1 Yes• Power failure bypass Min. 20 msIsolation• Between the backplane bus and

electronic componentsNo

• Between the PROFIBUS DP andelectronic components

Yes

• Between the supply voltage andelectronic components

No

Permitted potential difference (to the rail) 75 VDC, 60 VACInsulation tested with 500 VDCCurrent consumption from rated supplyvoltage (1L+)

Approx. 200 mA


Interrupts yesDiagnostic function yes• Group error• PROFIBUS DP bus monitoring

Red "SF" LEDRed "BF" LED

• Monitoring of the power supply voltage ofthe electronics

Green "ON" LED





Updating the firmware of the IM151-1 STAND ARDWith STEP 7 V5.1, Service Pack 3 and higher, you can update the firmware of the

IM151-1 STANDARD (via accessible nodes).To update the firmware you receive files (*.UPD) with the current firmware.The following prerequisites must be fulfilled:• The IM151-1 STANDARD in the station whose firmware is to be updated must be

accessible online.• The files with the current firmware version must be available in the file system of your

programming device (PG)/PC.You can find information about the procedure in the STEP 7 Online Help.

NoteWe recommend that you perform the firmware update via PROFIBUS DP.







Interface modules8.5 IM151-1 FO STANDARD interface module (6ES7151-1AB03-0AB0)



Dimensions and weight Dimensions W × H × D (mm) 45 × 119.5 × 75Weight Approx. 150 g

Data for specific modules Transmission rate 9.6; 19.2; 45.45; 93.75; 187.5; 500 kbps,

1.5; 12 mbpsBus protocol PROFIBUS DPInterface Fiber-optic cableSYNC capability YesFREEZE capability YesManufacturer ID 806BH Direct data exchange YesIsochronous operation No

Voltages, currents, po tentials Rated supply voltage of the electroniccomponents (1L+)1

24 VDC

• P1 Yes• Power failure bypass Min. 20 msIsolation• Between the backplane bus and electronic

componentsNo

• Between the supply voltage and electroniccomponents

No

Current consumption from rated supply voltage(1L+)

Approx. 200 mA

• Power supply for the ET 200S backplane bus Max. 700 mAPower dissipation of the module Typ. 3.3 W

Status, interrupts, diagnostics Interrupts yesDiagnostic function yes• Group error• PROFIBUS DP bus monitoring

Red "SF" LEDred "BF" LED


Green "ON" LED



Interface modules8.5 IM151-1 FO STANDARD interface module (6ES7151-1AB03-0AB0)


Updating the firmware of the IM151-1 FO STANDARDWith STEP 7 V5.1, Service Pack 3 and higher, you can update the firmware of the

IM151-1 FO STANDARD (via accessible nodes).To update the firmware you receive files (*.UPD) with the current firmware.The following prerequisites must be fulfilled:• The IM151-1 FO STANDARD in the station whose firmware is to be updated must be

accessible online.• The files with the current firmware version must be available in the file system of your


NoteWe recommend that you perform the firmware update via PROFIBUS DP.



Interface modules8.6 Interface module IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE (6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0)


8.6 8.6Interface module IM151-1 HIGH FE ATUR E (6ES7151-1BA01-0AB 0)

Order number6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0

FeaturesThe IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE interface module has the following features:• Links the ET 200S with PROFIBUS DP.• prepares the data for the populated electronic modules and motor starters.• Supplies the backplane bus.• synchronizable with the DP cycle (cycle synchronization).• Via switch, the PROFIBUS DP address is adjustable from ET 200S.• If the 24 VDC power supply is disconnected, the IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE interface

module is also disconnected.• The maximum address space is 244 bytes for inputs and 244 bytes for outputs.• The reference potential M of the rated supply voltage of the IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE to

the rail (protective conductor) is connected by means of an RC combination, thuspermitting a floating configuration.

• Operation as a DPV0 slave – Noncyclical data traffic (data record read/write):

Class 2 services• Operation as a DPV1 slave

– Noncyclical data traffic (data record read/write):Class 2 services and class 1 services


• A maximum of 63 modules can be operated with the IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE.

6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0 and higher:• The maximum bus length on the backplane bus amounts to 2 m.• Operation as DPV1-slave on the Y switching• Security-oriented I-slave-slave-communication via PROFIBUS DP. You saw the

description of this function in the manualS7 Distributed Safety Configuration andProgramming .

• Use of fault-secure RESERVE modules• Supports option handling and status byte for power modules• Firmware update via PROFIBUS DP with HW config possible.• Identification Data





Restrictions when operating the modu les with the IM 151 HIGH FE ATUR EThe following modules cannot be used with the IM 151 HIGH FEATURE:

Modu le Up to order numb er Up to product version

1Count 24V/100kHz 6ES7138-4DA02-0AB0 11Count 5V/500kHz 6ES7138-4DE00-0AB0 11SSI 6ES7138-4DB00-0AB0 31STEP 5V/204kHz 6ES7138-4DC00-0AB0 31SI serial interface module 6ES7138-4DF00-0AB0 1Modbus/USS serial interface module 6ES7138-4DF10-0AB0 12AI U; HIGH FEATURE 6ES7134-4LB00-0AB0 12AI I 2/4DMU; HIGH FEATURE 6ES7134-4MB00-0AB0 12AO U; HIGH FEATURE 6ES7135-4LB00-0AB0 1

Terminal assignmentThe following table shows the terminal assignment of the IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE interfacemodule for the 24 VDC voltage supply and PROFIBUS DP:

Table 8-7 Terminal assignment of the IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE interface module


1 - -2 - -3 RxD/TxD-P Data line B4 RTS Request To Send5 M5V2 Data reference potential (station)6 P5V2 Supply plus (station)7 - -8 RxD/TxD-N Data line A

91L+ 24 VDC2L+ 24 VDC (for loop through)1M Chassis ground






Block diagram

Figure 8-4 Block diagram for the IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE interface module


Dimensions and weight Dimensions W × H × D (mm) 45 × 119.5 × 75Weight Approx. 150 g

Data for specific modules Transmission rate 9.6; 19.2; 45.45; 93.75; 187.5; 500 kbps, 1.5; 3; 6;

12 MbpsBus protocol PROFIBUS DPInterface RS 485SYNC capability YesFREEZE capability YesManufacturer ID 80E0H Direct data exchange YesIsochronous operation Yes 1 Max. output current of the PROFIBUS DPinterface (5, 6)

80 mA


24 VDC

• P1 Yes• Power failure bypass Min. 20 msIsolation• Between the backplane bus and

electronic componentsNo

• Between the PROFIBUS DP andelectronic components

Yes

• Between the supply voltage andelectronic components

No





Permitted potential difference (to the rail) 75 VDC, 60 VACInsulation tested with 500 VDC

Current consumption from rated supplyvoltage (1L+) Approx. 200 mA


Interrupts YesDiagnostic function Yes• Group error• PROFIBUS DP bus monitoring


• Monitoring of the power supply voltage ofthe electronics

Green "ON" LED

1 As of 1.5 Mbps

Update of firmware for IM151-1 HIGH FEATUREAs of STEP 7 V5.1, ServicePack 3, you can update the firmware of theIM151-1 HIGH FEATURE.To update the firmware you receive files (*.UPD) with the current firmware.The following prerequisites must be fulfilled:• The IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE in the station whose firmware is to be updated is

accessible online.• The files with the current firmware version are available in the file system of your


Note

Be sure to use the correct firmware version for the interface module you are using for theupdate. An interface module with an older issue date can not be updated with the firmwareversion for an interface module with a newer issue date and vice versa.

Note

We recommend you update the firmware using PROFIBUS DP.



Interface modules8.7 Interface module IM151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0)


8.7 8.7Interface m odule IM151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0)

8.7.1 Features of the IM151-3 PN interface modu le

Order number6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0

FeaturesThe IM151-3 PN interface module has the following features:• It connects the ET 200S with PROFIBUS IO• It prepares the data for the electronic modules and motor starters that are fitted.• It supplies the backplane bus.• Adoption of the device name and backup on SIMATIC Micro Memory Card• Firmware update via SIMATIC Micro Memory Card• The reference potential M of the rated supply voltage of the IM151-3 PN to the mounting

rail (protective conductor) is connected by means of an RC combination, thus permittingan ungrounded configuration.

• Supported Ethernet services

– Network diagnostics (SNMP)• Interrupts


• The maximum address scope amounts to 256 byte I/O data.• A maximum of 63 modules can be operated with the IM151-3 PN.• The maximum bus length on the backplane bus is 2 m.• Summary of modules within a byte (packing).• Data sets for I/O devices





Com patibility of the interface mo dule IM151-3 PN (6ES7 151-3AA10-0AB 0)

NoteFirmwa re version of the controller used

In order for you to be able to operate the interface module IM151-3 PN(6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0) on a controller, this must be operated with one of the firmwareversions listed in the tables below. You can utilize the interface module IM151-3 PN(6ES7151-3AA00-0AB0) independently of the controller firmware version.

The following firmware versions are compatible to the interface module IM 151-3 PN(6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0):

CPU CP SOFTNET PNIO

Controller 315-2 PN/DP317-2 PN/DP

443-1 343-1 SIMATIC NET-CD

Firmware version ≥ V2.3.2 ≥ V2.2 ≥2.0 V 6.3 Hotfix 1

Restrictions when operating the modu les with the IM 151 PNThe following modules cannot be used with the IM 151-3 PN:

Modu le Up to order numb er Up to product version

2AO U; HIGH FEATURE 6ES7135-4LB01-0AB0 32AO I; HIGH FEATURE 6ES7135-4MB01-0AB0 31SI serial interface module 6ES7138-4DF00-0AB0 4Modbus/USS serial interface module 6ES7138-4DF10-0AB0 4








Dimensions and weight Dimensions W × H × D (mm) 45 x 119.5 x 75Weight Approx. 135 g

Data for specific modules Transmission rate 100 Mbps full duplexTransmission method 100BASE-TXAutonegotiation YesBus protocol PROFINET IO + TCP/IPSupported Ethernet services PROFINET IO (device),

TCP/IP Protocol Suite:• ping• arp• Network diagnostics (SNMP) / MIB-2

PROFINET interface RJ45Vendor ID 002AH Device ID 0301H


24 VDC

• P1 Yes• Power failure bypass Min. 20 ms

Isolation• Between the backplane bus and electronic

componentsNo

• Between Ethernet and electronic components Yes• Between the supply voltage and electronic

componentsNo

Permitted potential difference (to the rail) 75 VDC, 60 VACInsulation tested with 500 VDCCurrent consumption from rated supply voltage(1L+)

Approx. 200 mA

Power dissipation of the module Approx. 2 WStatus, interrupts, diagnostics

Interrupts YesDiagnostic function Yes• Group error• PROFINET IO bus monitoring



Green "ON" LED

• Existing connection to network Green "LINK" LED• Send/receive via network Yellow "RX/TX" LED





8.7.2 SNMPThe IM151-3 PN supports the Ethernet service SNMP. MIB-2 (RFC1213) is supported R/Wobjects are changeable using SNMP tools and are stored in the device.Remanent stored SNMP parameters are reset to default settings (STEP 7 V5.3 SP 3 andhigher) in HW config dialog "Target system > Ethernet > Edit Ethernet nodes" "Reset" buttonunder "Reset to default settings".After exchange with a factory-new device, the R/W objects in the IM151-3 PN are set todefault settings.

8.7.3 SIMATIC Micro Memory Card for IM151-3 PN

Insertion of the SIMATIC M icro Memory CardA SIMATIC Micro Memory Card is used as storage medium for the IM151-3 PN. TheSIMATIC Micro Memory Card can be used as a portable data medium..The following data are saved on the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card.• Technology data (device names)• Data for a firmware update

Note

On on e SIMATIC Micro Memory Card, you can saveeither technology data or updatedata.

Life of a SIMATIC M icro Memory CardThe life of an SIMATIC Micro Memory Card depends substantially on the following factors:• Number of deletion or programming operations• External factors, such as ambient temperatureAt an ambient temperature up to 60 ° C, a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card has a useful life of10 years at maximum 100,000 write/delete operations.

CautionPossible data loss

If the maximum number of write/delete operations is exceeded, data loss is possible.





Applicable SIMATIC Micro Memory CardsThe following memory modules are available for use:

Table 8-9 Available SIMATIC Micro Memory Cards

Type Order numbers

SIMATIC Micro Memory Card 64k 6ES7953-8LF11-0AA0SIMATIC Micro Memory Card 128k 6ES7953-8LG11-0AA0SIMATIC Micro Memory Card 512k 6ES7953-8LJ11-0AA0SIMATIC Micro Memory Card 2M 6ES7953-8LL11-0AA0SIMATIC Micro Memory Card 4M 6ES7953-8LM11-0AA0SIMATIC Micro Memory Card 8M 6ES7953-8LP11-0AA0

For storage of the device name, a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card 64k sufficient. For afirmware update the SIMATIC Micro Memory Cards with 2 MB or higher are required.

Inserting/replacing the cardThe SIMATIC Micro Memory Card designed so that it can also be removed and insertedunder power. The beveled corner of the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card prevents it from beinginserted the wrong way around (reverse polarity protection).The module slot on the IM 151-3 PN is located behind the front door. The front door has aprotruding edge for opening.The socket of the module slot has an ejector enabling you to remove the card. To eject thecard, push in the ejector with a small screwdriver or ball-point pen.

Position of the module slot for the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card on the IM151-3 PN:

1 2

3

① SIMATIC Micro Memory Card② Module slot③ Ejector





8.7.4 Updating the firmw are of the IM151-3 PN

Introduction• Starting with STEP 7 V5.3, Service Pack 1, you can update the firmware of the

IM151-3 PN.• You receive three files (*.upd) with the current firmware for the update of the firmware.

For performing the update use the file "header.upd".

ProcedureYou perform the firmware update using a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card with FW update.1. Transfer the update files using STEP 7 and your programming device to an empty

SIMATIC Micro Memory Card (≥ 2 MB).2. Switch off the power to the IM151-3 PN and insert the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card with

FW update.3. Switch on the power.

IM151-3 PN recognizes the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card with the FW updateautomatically and starts the FW update. During the FW update, the SF and BF LEDs areilluminated, and the ON LED is off.Once the FW update is complete, the BF LED flashes at 0.5 Hz.

4. Switch off the power to the IM151-3 PN and remove the SIMATIC Micro Memory Cardwith FW update.

5. Insert the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card with the device names and switch on the powersupply again.The IM 151-3 PN powers up with the new firmware and is now ready for operation.




Terminal modules 99.1 9.1Assignment of terminal modules to power modules and electronic

modules

Assignment of the terminal modules to pow er modules and electronic modulesThe following table describes which electronic modules you can use with the different powermodules:

Table 9-1 Assignment of TM-P terminal modules and power modules

Power modules TM-P terminal modules for power modules

Screw terminal 15S23-A1 15S 23-A0 15S22-01 30S44-A0 F30S47-F1

Order number6ES7193...

4CC20-0AA0 4CD20-0AA0 4CE00-0AA0 4CK20-0AA0 3RK1 903-3AA00

Spring terminal 15C23-A1 15C23-A0 15C22-01 30C44-A0

Order number6ES7193... 4CC30-0AA0 4CD30-0AA0 4CE10-0AA0 4CK30-0AA0

---

Fast Connect 15N23-A1 15N23-A0 15N22-01


4CC70-0AA0 4CD70-0AA0 4CE60-0AA0 ---

PM-E 24 VDC PM-E 24 to 48VDC

PM-E 24-48 VDC/120-230 VAC

PM-E F pm 24VDC

PROFIsafe*

PM-E F pp 24VDCPROFIsafe*

PM-D F 24 VDCPROFISafe *


The following table describes which electronic modules you can use with the differentterminal modules:



Terminal modules9.1 Assignment of terminal modules to power modules and electronic modules


Table 9-2 Assignment of TM-E terminal modules and electronic modules


Screw terminal 15S26-A1 15S24-A1 15S24-01 15S23-01 15S24-AT 30S44-01 30S46-A1Order number6ES7193...

4CA40-0AA0

4CA20-0AA0

4CB20-0AA0

4CB00-0AA0

4CL20-0AA0

4CG20-0AA0

4CF40-0AA0

Spring terminal 15C26-A1 15C24-A1 15C24-01 15C23-01 15C24-AT 30C44-01 30C46-A1


4CA50-0AA0

4CA30-0AA0

4CB30-0AA0

4CB10-0AA0

4CL30-0AA0

4CG30-0AA0

4CF50-0AA0



4CA80-0AA0

4CA70-0AA0

4CB70-0AA0

4CB60-0AA0

--- --- ---

2DI 24 VDC Standard2DI 24 VDC HighFeature4DI 24 VDC Standard4DI 24 VDC HighFeature4DI 24 VDC/SRCStandard

4DI UC24..48V HF 4DI NAMUR 2DI 120 VAC Standard 2DI 230 VAC Standard 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 AStandard2DO 24 VDC/0.5 AHigh Feature4DO 24 VDC/0.5 AStandard

2DO 24 VDC/2 AStandard2DO 24 VDC/2 A HighFeature4DO 24 VDC/2 AStandard

2DO 24-230 VAC/2 A

2RO NO 24 to 120VDC/5 A 24 to 230VAC/5 A2RO NO/NC 24 to 48VDC/5 A 24 to 230VAC/5 A

2AI U Standard2AI U High Feature2AI U High Speed

2AI I 2WIRE Standard2AI I 2WIRE HighSpeed



Terminal modules9.1 Assignment of terminal modules to power modules and electronic modules


Electronic modu les TM-E terminal modu les for electronic modules

Screw terminal 15S26-A1 15S24-A1 15S24-01 15S23-01 15S24-AT 30S44-01 30S46-A1

Order number6ES7193... 4CA40-0AA0 4CA20-0AA0 4CB20-0AA0 4CB00-0AA0 4CL20-0AA0 4CG20-0AA0 4CF40-0AA0 Spring terminal 15C26-A1 15C24-A1 15C24-01 15C23-01 15C24-AT 30C44-01 30C46-A1


4CA50-0AA0

4CA30-0AA0

4CB30-0AA0

4CB10-0AA0

4CL30-0AA0

4CG30-0AA0

4CF50-0AA0



4CA80-0AA0

4CA70-0AA0

4CB70-0AA0

4CB60-0AA0

--- --- ---

4AI I 2WIRE Standard 2AI 2/4WIRE HighFeature

2AI I 4WIRE Standard,

2AI I 4WIRE HighSpeed

2AI RTD Standard 2AI RTD High Feature 2AI TC Standard 2AI TC High Feature 2AO U Standard2AO U High Feature

2AO I Standard2AO I High Feature

4 IQ-SENSE 1COUNT 24V/100kHz 1COUNT 5V/500kHz 1SSI 1STEP 5V/204kHz 2PULSE 1POS INC/Digital 1POS SSI/Digital 1POS INC/Analog 1POS SSI/Analog 1SI 3964/ASCII

1SI Modbus/USS 4/8 F-DI 24 VDCPROFIsafe*

4 F-DO 24 VDC/2 APROFIsafe*

RESERVE (width 15mm)

RESERVE (width 30mm)




Terminal modules9.2 TM-P15S23-A1, TM-P15C23-A1, and TM-P15N23-A1 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CCx0-0AA0)


9.2 9.2TM-P15S23-A1, TM-P15C 23-A1, and TM-P15N23-A1 terminalmodules (6ES7193-4CCx0-0AA0)

Order numbers6ES7193-4CC20-0AA0 (screw terminal)6ES7193-4CC30-0AA0 (spring terminal)6ES7193-4CC70-0AA0 (Fast Connect)

Features• Terminal module for power module• Infeed for a new potential group up to the next TM-P terminal module• Connection by means of screw-type terminal with the TM-P15S23-A1• Connection by means of spring terminal with the TM-P15C23-A1• Connection via Fast Connect with the TM-P15N23-A1• 2 x 3 terminals• Prewiring of the terminal module• Noise diversion from the electronic module to the DIN rail by means of spring contact• Fitting of a shield contact element• Uninterrupted AUX1 bus with connection to terminals A4 and A8

Pin assignmentThe following table presents the terminal assignment of the TM-P15S23-A1, TM-P15C23-A1,and TM-P15N23-A1 terminal modules:

Table 9-3 Terminal assignment of the TM-P15S23-A1, TM-P15C23-A1, and TM-P15N23-A1terminal modules

View Terminal Designation

2 L+/L

3 M/ N

Rated load voltage for inserted power module

and associated potential groupA4

AUX1 Any connection for PE or voltage bus up to themaximum rated load voltage of the module

6 L+/L7 M/ N

Rated load voltage for inserted power moduleand associated potential group

AUX1

M/NM/N

L+/LL+/L2

3

4

6

7

8

AUX1

A A AUX1

4 8 A A

A8

AUX1 Any connection for PE or voltage bus up to themaximum rated load voltage of the module



Terminal modules9.2 TM-P15S23-A1, TM-P15C23-A1, and TM-P15N23-A1 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CCx0-0AA0)


Block diagramBlock diagram of the TM-P15S23-A1, TM-P15C23-A1, and TM-P15N23-A1 terminal

modules

1

2

3

4

5

3 7

4 8

2 6

PM-E

A A

① Backplane bus② Infeed of the power buses to the electronic modules③ Terminals with connection to the power module④ Use of terminals A4 and A8 as protective conductor terminals or potential terminals of any

kind⑤ Uninterrupted AUX1 bus with connection to terminals A4 and A8


Dimensions and weight Dimensions W × H × D (mm)• Screw-type/spring terminals• Fast Connect

15 × 132 × 4315 × 162 × 43

Weight Approx. 65 gData for specific modules

Number of terminals 2 x 3



Terminal modules9.3 TM-P15S23-A0, TM-P15C23-A0, and TM-P15N23-A0 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CDx0-0AA0)


9.3 9.3TM-P15S23-A0, TM-P15C 23-A0, and TM-P15N23-A0 terminalmodules (6ES7193-4CDx0-0AA0)

Order numbers6ES7193-4CD20-0AA0 (screw terminal)6ES7193-4CD30-0AA0 (spring terminal)6ES7193-4CD70-0AA0 (Fast Connect)

Features• Terminal module for power module• Infeed for a new potential group up to the next TM-P terminal module• Connection by means of screw-type terminal with the TM-P15S23-A0• Connection by means of spring terminal with the TM-P15C23-A0• Connection via Fast Connect with the TM-P15N23-A0• 2 x 3 terminals• Prewiring of the terminal module• Noise diversion from the electronic module to the DIN rail by means of spring contact• Fitting of a shield contact element• Interrupted AUX1 bus with connection to terminals A4 and A8This table shows the terminal assignment of the TM-P15S23-A0, TM-P15C23-A0, andTM-P15N23-A0 terminal modules.

Table 9-4 Terminal assignment of the TM-P15S23-A0, TM-P15C23-A0, and TM-P15N23-A0terminal modules


2 L+/L3 M/ N

Rated load voltage for inserted powermodule and associated potential group

A4

AUX1 Any connection for PE or voltage bus upto the maximum rated load voltage of themodule

6 L+/L7 M/ N

Rated load voltage for inserted powermodule and associated potential group

AUX1

M/NM/N

L+/LL+/L2

3

4

6

7

8

AUX1

A A AUX1

4 8 A A

A8




Terminal modules9.3 TM-P15S23-A0, TM-P15C23-A0, and TM-P15N23-A0 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CDx0-0AA0)


Block diagramBlock diagram for the TM-P15S23-A0, TM-P15C23-A0, and TM-P15N23-A0 terminal

modules

1

2

3

4

5

3 7

4 8

2 6

PM-E

A A

① Backplane bus② Infeed of the power buses to the electronic modules③ Terminals with connection to the power module④ Use of terminals A4 and A8 as protective conductor terminals or potential terminals of any

kind⑤ Uninterrupted AUX1 bus with connection to terminals A4 and A8



15 × 132 × 4315 × 162 × 43





Terminal modules9.4 TM-P15S22-01, TM-P15C22-01, and TM-P15N22-01 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CEx0-0AA0)


9.4 9.4TM-P15S22-01, TM -P15C22-01, and TM -P15N22-01 terminalmodules (6ES7193-4CEx0-0AA0)

Order numbers6ES7193-4CE00-0AA0 (screw terminal)6ES7193-4CE10-0AA0 (spring terminal)6ES7193-4CE60-0AA0 (Fast Connect)

Features• Terminal module for power module• Infeed for a new potential group up to the next TM-P terminal module• Connection by means of screw-type terminal with the TM-P15S22-01• Connection by means of spring terminal with the TM-P15C22-01• Connection via Fast Connect with the TM-P15N22-01• 2 x 2 terminals• Prewiring of the terminal module• Noise diversion from the electronic module to the DIN rail by means of spring contact• Fitting of a shield contact element• Uninterrupted AUX1 bus without a connection to the terminals

Pin assignmentThe following table presents the terminal assignment of the TM-P15S22-01, TM-P15C22-01,and TM-P15N22-01 terminal modules:

Table 9-5 Terminal assignment of the TM-P15S22-01, TM-P15C22-01, and TM-P15N22-01terminal modules


2 L+/L

3 M/ N

Rated load voltage for inserted power

module and associated potential group6 L+/L

M/N

L+/L L+/L2

3

6

7

AUX1

M/N

7 M/ NRated load voltage for inserted powermodule and associated potential group



Terminal modules9.4 TM-P15S22-01, TM-P15C22-01, and TM-P15N22-01 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CEx0-0AA0)


Block diagramBlock diagram for the TM-P15S22-01, TM-P15C22-01, and TM-P15N22-01 terminal

modules

1

2

3

4

3 7

2 6

PM-E

① Backplane bus② Infeed of the power buses to the electronic modules③ Terminals with connection to the power module

④ Uninterrupted AUX1 bus without a connection to the terminals



15 x 119.5 x 4315 x 142 x 43





Terminal modules9.5 TM-P30S44-A0 and TM-P30C44-A0 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CKx0-0AA0)


9.5 9.5TM-P30S44-A0 and TM -P30C44-A0 terminal modules(6ES7193-4CKx0-0AA0)

Order numbers6ES7193-4CK20-0AA0 (screw terminal)6ES7193-4CK30-0AA0 (spring terminal)

Features• Terminal module for the fail-safe PM-E F 24 VDC PROFIsafe power module• Infeed for a new potential group up to the next TM-P terminal module• Wiring of the fail-safe digital outputs of the PM-E F 24 VDC PROFIsafe• Prewiring possible• Noise diversion from the electronic module to the DIN rail by means of spring contact• Fitting of a shield contact element• Interrupted AUX1 bus with connection to terminals A4 and A8





Pin assignmentThe following table presents the terminal assignment of the TM-P30S44-A0 and

TM-P30C44-A0 terminal module:

Table 9-6 Terminal assignment of the TM-P30S44-A0 and TM-P30C44-A0 terminal module


2 24 VDC Load voltage of 24 VDC for: inserted powermodule, associated potential group. DO 0 andDO 1 and P1 and P2 voltage buses

3 M Chassis groundA4

AUX 1 Any connection for PE or voltage bus up to themaximum rated load voltage of the module

6 24 VDC Load voltage of 24 VDC for: inserted powermodule, associated potential group. DO 0 andDO 1 and P1 and P2 voltage buses

7 M Chassis groundA8

AUX 1 Any connection for PE or voltage bus up to themaximum rated load voltage of the module

9 DO 0 P10 DO 0 M

Connections for fail-safe digital output 0(switching to P/M potential)

11 DO 2 P12 DO 2 M

Connections (relay contacts) for fail-safeswitching of the voltage buses P1 and P2.P1 and P2 can also be used as DO 2 M andDO 2 P (for a diagram of the wiring, see theET 200S Fail-Safe Modules manual).

13 DO 1 P14 DO 1 M

Connections for fail-safe digital output 0(switching to P/M potential)

15 DO 2 P

2

3

6

7

10

11

1

2

13

14

15

1

6

9

A

4

A

8

4 8 A A

16 DO 2MConnections (relay contacts) for fail-safeswitching of the voltage buses P1 and P2.P1 and P2 can also be used as DO 2 M andDO 2 P (for a diagram of the wiring, see theET 200S Fail-Safe Modules manual).

Caution

If high currents occur at DO 2 P and DO 2 M, you must wire terminals 11 and 15 (DO 2 P)and 12 and 16 (DO 2 M) in parallel. Otherwise, the temperature of the terminals cannot beprevented from rising due to the current load.





Block diagramBlock diagram of the TM-P30S44-A0 and TM-P30C44-A0 terminal module

1

2

3

4

5

① Backplane bus② Uninterrupted power buses from the power module

③ Terminals with connection to the electronic module④ Use of terminals A4 and A8 as protective conductor terminals or potential terminals of any

kind⑤ Infeed of the AUX1 bus by means of terminals A4 and A8


Dimensions and weight Dimensions W × H × D (mm)Weight

30 x 132 x 43Approx. 116 g (TM-P30S44-A0)

Approx. 100 g (TM-P30C44-A0)Data for specific modules

Number of terminals 14

Description of the PM-E F 24 VDC PR OFIsafe power moduleYou can find a description of the PM-E F 24 VDC PROFIsafe power module you can usewith the above terminal modules in the ET 200S Distributed I/O System, Fail-Safe Modules manual.



Terminal modules9.6 TM-PF30S47-F1 terminal module (for PM-D F 24 VDC) (3RK1 903-3AA00)


9.6 9.6TM-PF30S 47-F1 terminal module (for PM-D F 24 VD C)(3RK1 903-3AA00)

Order number3RK1 903-3AA00 (screw-type terminal)

Features• Terminal module for the fail-safe PM-D F 24 VDC PROFIsafe power module• Infeed for a new potential group up to the next TM-P terminal module• Prewiring of the terminal module• Noise diversion from the electronic module to the DIN rail by means of spring contact• Fitting of a shield contact element• Uninterrupted AUX1 bus without a connection to the terminals

Pin assignmentThe following table shows the terminal assignment of the terminal module TM-PF30S47-F1:

Table 9-7 Terminal assignment of the TM-PF30S47-F1 terminal module


20 24 VDC Rated load voltage 24 VDC: for insertedpower module and voltage buses SG 1 toSG 6 and U 1

21 M Chassis ground27 24 VDC Rated load voltage 24 VDC: for inserted

power module and voltage buses SG 1 toSG 6 and U 1

21

28

27

20

28 M Chassis ground



Terminal modules9.6 TM-PF30S47-F1 terminal module (for PM-D F 24 VDC) (3RK1 903-3AA00)


Block diagramBlock diagram of the TM-PF30S47-F1 terminal module

1

2

3

4

① Backplane bus② Uninterrupted power buses from the power module③ Terminals with connection to the electronic module④ Uninterrupted AUX1 bus without a connection to the terminals


Dimensions and weight Dimensions W × H × D (mm) 30 × 196,5 × 102Weight Approx. 300 g

Data for specific modules Number of terminals 4



Terminal modules9.7 TM-E15S26-A1, TM-E15C26-A1, and TM-E15N26-A1 universal terminal modules (6ES7193-4CAx0-0AA0)


9.7 9.7TM-E15S26-A1, TM -E15C26-A1, and TM -E15N26-A1 universalterminal modules (6ES 7193-4CAx0-0AA0)

Order numbers6ES7193-4CA40-0AA0 (screw terminal)6ES7193-4CA50-0AA0 (spring terminal)6ES7193-4CA80-0AA0 (Fast Connect)

Features• Universal terminal module for the electronic modules• Connection by means of screw-type terminal with the TM-E15S26-A1• Connection by means of spring terminal with the TM-E15C26-A1• Connection via Fast Connect with the TM-E15N26-A1• 2 x 6 terminals• Prewiring of the terminal module• Noise diversion from the electronic module to the DIN rail by means of spring contact• Fitting of a shield contact element• Uninterrupted AUX1 bus with connection to terminals A4, A8 and A3, A7





Pin assignment• Terminal assignment of the TM-E15S26-A1, TM-E15C26-A1, and TM-E15N26-A1

terminal modules with the 4-channel digital electronic modules:

Table 9-8 Terminal assignment of the TM-E15S26-A1, TM-E15C26-A1, and TM-E15N26-A1terminal modules with the 4-channel digital electronic modules


1 DI0/DO0 2 DI2/DO2 3 24 VDC for DI0/ M for DO0 4 24 VDC for DI2/ M for DO2 5 DI1/DO1

6 DI3/DO3 7 24 VDC for DI1/ M for DO1 8 24 VDC for DI3/ M for DO3

DI: Digital inputDO: Digital output24 VDC: Sensor supplyvoltageM: Ground load powersupply

A4A3A8

2

3

4

1

6

7

8

5

A4

A3

A8

A7

A7

AUX1 bus implemented. Connection to terminals A4, A8and A3, A7.

• Terminal assignment of the TM-E15S26-A1, TM-E15C26-A1, and TM-E15N26-A1terminal modules with the 2-channel electronic modules and technology modules:The terminal assignment of terminals 1 to 8 corresponds to that of the TM-E15S24-01,TM-E15C24-01, and TM-E15N24-01 terminal modules. You will find the various terminalassignments in the technical specifications of the different electronic modules.You can obtain the terminal assignment of terminals A4, A8 and A3, A7 from the abovetable.





Block diagramBlock diagram for the TM-E15S26-A1, TM-E15C26-A1, and TM-E15N26-A1 terminal

modules

1

2

3

4

① Backplane bus② Uninterrupted power buses from the power module③ Terminals with connection to the electronic module④ Uninterrupted AUX1 bus with connection to terminals A4, A8 and A3, A7


Dimensions and weight Dimensions W × H × D (mm)• Screw-type/spring terminals• Fast Connect 15 × 157 × 43

15 × 202 × 43Weight Approx. 70 g (TM-E15C26-A1)

Approx. 83 g (TM-E15S26-A1)Approx. 95 g (TM-E15NS26-A1)

Data for specific modules Number of terminals 2 x 6



Terminal modules9.8 TM-E15S24-A1, TM-E15C24-A1, and TM-E15N24-A1 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CAx0-0AA0)


9.8 9.8TM-E15S24-A1, TM-E15C 24-A1, and TM-E15N24-A1 terminalmodules (6ES7193-4CAx0-0AA0)

Order numbers6ES7193-4CA20-0AA0 (screw terminal)6ES7193-4CA30-0AA0 (spring terminal)6ES7193-4CA70-0AA0 (Fast Connect)

Features• Terminal module for electronic modules• Connection by means of screw-type terminal with the TM-E15S24-A1• Connection by means of spring terminal with the TM-E15C24-A1• Connection via Fast Connect with the TM-E15N24-A1• 2 x 4 terminals• Prewiring of the terminal module• Noise diversion from the electronic module to the DIN rail by means of spring contact• Fitting of a shield contact element• Uninterrupted AUX1 bus with connection to terminals A4 and A8

Pin assignmentThe following table presents the terminal assignment of the TM-E15S24-A1, TM-E15C24-A1,and TM-E15N24-A1 terminal modules:

Table 9-9 Terminal assignment of the TM-E15S24-A1, TM-E15C24-A1, and TM-E15N24-A1terminal modules


12

3

The assignment depends on which electronic module isinserted

A4


567

The assignment depends on which electronic module isinserted

2

3

4

1

6

7

8 A A

5

A8




Terminal modules9.8 TM-E15S24-A1, TM-E15C24-A1, and TM-E15N24-A1 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CAx0-0AA0)


Block diagramBlock diagram for the TM-E15S24-A1, TM-E15C24-A1, and TM-E15N24-A1 terminal

modules

1

2

3

4

5

① Backplane bus② Uninterrupted power buses from the power module③ Terminals with connection to the electronic module④ Use of terminals 4 and 8 as protective conductor terminals or potential terminals of any kind⑤ Uninterrupted AUX1 bus with connection to terminals 4 and 8



15 × 132 × 4315 × 162 × 43

Weight Approx. 65 g (TM-E15S24-A1 andTM-E15C24-A1)Approx. 72 g(TM-E15N24-A1)




Terminal modules9.9 TM-E15S24-01, TM-E15C24-01, and TM-E15N24-01 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CBx0-0AA0)


9.9 9.9TM-E15S24-01, TM -E15C24-01, and TM -E15N24-01 terminalmodules (6ES7193-4CBx0-0AA0)

Order numbers6ES7193-4CB20-0AA0 (screw terminal)6ES7193-4CB30-0AA0 (spring terminal)6ES7193-4CB70-0AA0 (Fast Connect)

Features• Terminal module for electronic modules• Connection by means of screw-type terminal with the TM-E15S24-01• Connection by means of spring terminal with the TM-E15C24-01• Connection via Fast Connect with the TM-E15N24-01• 2 x 4 terminals• Prewiring of the terminal module• Noise diversion from the electronic module to the DIN rail by means of spring contact• Fitting of a shield contact element• Uninterrupted AUX1 bus without connection to terminals 4 and 8

Pin assignmentThe following table presents the terminal assignment of the TM-E15S24-01, TM-E15C24-01,and TM-E15N24-01 terminal modules:

Table 9-10 Terminal assignment of the TM-E15S24-01, TM-E15C24-01, and TM-E15N24-01terminal modules


12

34567

2

3

4

1

6

7

8

5

8

The assignment depends on which electronic module isinsertedNo access to the AUX1 bus.Terminals not used by the electronic module can be used forunneeded connecting wires. The permitted potentialcorresponds to the potential of the electronic module used.





Block diagramBlock diagram for the TM-E15S24-01, TM-E15C24-01, and TM-E15N24-01 terminal

modules

1

2

3

4

① Backplane bus② Uninterrupted power buses from the power module③ Terminals with connection to the electronic module④ Uninterrupted AUX1 bus without connection to terminals 4 and 8



15 × 132 × 4315 × 162 × 43

Weight Approx. 65 g (TM-E15S24-01 andTM-E15C24-01)Approx. 72 g (TM-E15N24-01)






9.10 9.10TM-E15S23-01, TM-E15C 23-01, and TM-E15N 23-01 terminalmodules (6ES7193-4CBx0-0AA0)

Order numbers6ES7193-4CB00-0AA0 (screw terminal)6ES7193-4CB10-0AA0 (spring terminal)6ES7193-4CB60-0AA0 (Fast Connect)

Features• Terminal module for electronic modules• Connection by means of screw-type terminal with the TM-E15S23-01• Connection by means of spring terminal with the TM-E15C23-01• Connection via Fast Connect with the TM-E15N23-01• 2 x 3 terminals• Prewiring of the terminal module• Noise diversion from the electronic module to the DIN rail by means of spring contact• Fitting of a shield contact element• Uninterrupted AUX1 bus without a connection to the terminals

Pin assignmentThe following table presents the terminal assignment of the TM-E15S23-01, TM-E15C23-01,and TM-E15N23-01 terminal modules:

Table 9-11 Terminal assignment of the TM-E15S23-01, TM-E15C23-01, and TM-E15N23-01terminal modules


12

356

2

3

1

6

7

5

7

The assignment depends on which electronic module is insertedNo access to the AUX1 bus.





Block diagramBlock diagram for the TM-E15S23-01, TM-E15C23-01, and TM-E15N23-01 terminal

modules

1

2

3

4




15 × 120 × 4315 × 142 × 43

Weight Approx. 55 g (TM-E15S23-01 andTM-E15C23-01)Approx. 60 g (TM-E15N23-01)




Terminal modules9.11 TM-E15S24-AT and TM-E15C24-AT terminal modules (6ES7193-4CLx0-0AA0)


9.11 9.11TM-E15S24-AT and T M-E15C 24-AT terminal modules(6ES7193-4CLx0-0AA0)

Order numbers6ES7193-4CL20-0AA0 (screw terminal)6ES7193-4CL30-0AA0 (spring terminal)

Features• Terminal module for the 2AI TC High Feature electronic module

Caution

You can only insert the 2AI TC HF electronic module into theTM-E15S24-AT/TM-E15C24-AT terminal module. Inserting another electronic modulecan result in the destruction of the internal reference junction of the terminal module.

• Terminal module has an internal reference junction for temperature compensation.Temperature compensation is thus possible directly at the reference junction of thethermocouples.

• Connection by means of screw-type terminal with the TM-E15S24-AT• Connection by means of spring terminal with the TM-E15C24-AT• 2 x 2 terminals• Prewiring of the terminal module• Noise diversion from the electronic module to the DIN rail by means of spring contact• Fitting of a shield contact element• Uninterrupted AUX1 bus without connection to terminals 4 and 8





Pin assignmentThe following table presents the terminal assignment of terminal module TM-E15S24-AT and

TM-E15C24-AT:

Table 9-12 Terminal assignment of the TM-E15S24-AT and TM-E15C24-AT terminal module


12

Assignment: See electronic module 2AI TC HF

34

Not available

56

Assignment: See electronic module 2AI TC HF

7

2

1

6

5

8Not available

Block diagramBlock diagram of the TM-E15S24-AT and TM-P15C24-AT terminal module

1

2

3

4







imensions and weight Dimensions W × H × D (mm) 15 × 132 × 43

Weight Approx. 55 g

ata for specific modules


See also2AI TC High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4NB01-0AB0) (Page 12-91)



Terminal modules9.12 TM-E30S44-01 and TM-E30C44-01 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CGx0-0AA0)


9.12 9.12TM-E30S44-01 and TM-E30C 44-01 terminal modules(6ES7193-4CGx0-0AA0)

Order numbers6ES7193-4CG20-0AA0 (screw terminal)6ES7193-4CG30-0AA0 (spring terminal)

Features• Terminal module for electronic modules with a width of 30 mm and fail-safe electronic

modules• Connection by means of screw-type terminal with the TM-E30S44-01• Connection by means of spring terminal with the TM-E30C44-01• 4 x 4 terminals• Prewiring of the terminal module• Noise diversion from the electronic module to the DIN rail by means of spring contact• Fitting of a shield contact element• Uninterrupted AUX1 bus without a connection to terminals 4 and 8 or 12 and 16.

Pin assignmentThe following table presents the terminal assignment of the TM-E30S44-01 andTM-E30C44-01 terminal modules:

Table 9-13 Terminal assignment of the TM-E30S44-01 and TM-E30C44-01 terminal module


123456

789101112131415

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

101112

13

141516

9

16

The assignment depends on which electronic module isinsertedNo access to the AUX1 bus.Terminals not used by the electronic module can be used forunneeded connecting wires. The permitted potentialcorresponds to the potential of the electronic module used.



Terminal modules9.12 TM-E30S44-01 and TM-E30C44-01 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CGx0-0AA0)


Block diagramBlock diagram of the TM-E30S44-01 and TM-E30C44-01 terminal module

1

2

3

4

① Backplane bus② Uninterrupted power buses from the power module③ Terminals with connection to the electronic module④ Uninterrupted AUX1 bus without a connection to terminals 4 and 8 or 12 and 16


Dimensions and weight Dimensions W × H × D (mm) 30 × 132 × 43Weight Approx. 110 g (TM-E30C44-01)

Approx. 125 g (TM-E30S44-01)Data for specific modules




Terminal modules9.13 TM-E30S46-A1 and TM-E30C46-A1 terminal modules (6ES7193-4CFx0-0AA0)


9.13 9.13TM-E30S46-A1 and TM -E30C46-A1 terminal modules(6ES7193-4CFx0-0AA0)

Order numbers6ES7193-4CF40-0AA0 (screw terminal)6ES7193-4CF50-0AA0 (spring terminal)

Features• Terminal module for the fail-safe electronic modules 4/8 F-DI 24 VDC PRFOFIsafe and

4 F-DO 24 VDC/2A PROFIsafe.

• Connection by means of screw-type terminal with the TM-E30S46-A1• Connection by means of spring terminal with the TM-E30C46-A1• 6 x 4 terminals• Prewiring of the terminal module• Noise diversion from the electronic module to the DIN rail by means of spring contact• Fitting of a shield contact element• Uninterrupted AUX1 bus with a connection to terminals A4, A8, A3, A7 and A12, A16,

A11, A15.





Pin assignmentThe following table presents the terminal assignment of the TM-E30S46-A1 and

TM-E30C46-A1 terminal modules:

Table 9-14 Terminal assignment of the terminal module

View Terminal F-DI F-DO Designation

1 DI 0 DO 0 P2 Vs1 DO 0 M3 DI 2 -4 Vs1 -5 DI 1 DO 1 P6 Vs1 DO 1 M

7 DI 3 -

DI: Digital inputDO P and DO M: Connection forfail-safe digital output (switchingto P/M potential)Vs1: Internal sensor supply 1 forDI 0 to DI 3Vs2: Internal sensor supply 2 for

DI 4 to DI 78 Vs1 -9 DI 4 DO 2 P10 Vs2 DO 2 M11 DI 6 -12 Vs2 -13 DI 5 DO 3 P14 Vs2 DO 3 M15 DI 7 -16 Vs 2 -A4, A3,A8, A7

AUX1 AUX1 bus implemented.Connection to terminals A4, A8and A3, A7.

2

3

4

1

6

7

8

5

A4

A3

A8

A

7

913

10

14

11

15

12

16

A12

A11

A16

A15

A12, A11,A16, A15

AUX1 AUX1 bus implemented.Connection to terminals A12, A11and A16, A15.





Block diagramBlock diagram of the TM-E30S46-A1 and TM-E30C46-A1 terminal module

1

2

3

4

5

① Backplane bus

② Uninterrupted power buses from the power module③ Terminals with connection to the electronic module④ Connection of terminals A4, A8, A3, A7 and A12, A16, A11, A15 as productive conductor

terminals or potential terminals of any kind⑤ Uninterrupted AUX1 bus with a connection to terminals A4, A3, A8, A7 and A12, A11, A16,

A15


Dimensions and weight Dimensions W × H × D (mm) 30 x 157 x 43Weight Approx. 158 g (TM-E30S46-A1)

Approx. 131 g (TM-E30C46-A1)Data for specific modules


Description of the electronic modulesYou can find a description of the 4/8 F-DI 24VDC PROFIsafe and 4 F-DO 24 VDC/2APROFIsafe electronic modules you can use with the above terminal modules in the ET 200SDistributed I/O Module, Fail-Safe Modules manual.








Power m odules 1010.1 10.1Parameters for power modules

Parameters

The following table contains the parameters of the power modules.

Table 10-1 Parameters for power modules

Power module

PM-E24 VDC PM-E 24 to 48VDC

PM-E 24 to 48VDC/24 to 230 VAC

Value range Default setting Applicability

Diagnostics: Noload voltage

Diagnostics: Noload voltage

Diagnostics: No loadvoltage

Disable/enable Disable Power module

--- --- Diagnostics: Fuseblown

Disable/enable Disable Power module

--- --- Voltage type DC/AC DC Power module

The parameters are explained below.

Diagnostics: No load voltageYou use this parameter to enable a diagnostic message about missing load voltage.In the absence of load voltage, only the diagnostic message of the affected power module isforwarded to the DP master. The SF error LEDs of all the modules in the affected potentialgroup come on.

Diagnostics: Fuse blownYou use this parameter to enable a diagnostic message about a blown fuse.In the event of a blown fuse, only the diagnostic message of the affected power module isforwarded to the DP master. The SF error LEDs of all the modules in the affected potentialgroup come on.

Voltage typeYou use this parameter to select the load voltage connected to the power module: DCvoltage or AC voltage.The correct diagnosis is thus provided in the event of missing load voltage or a blown fuse.





Power modules10.2 PM-E 24 VDC power module (6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0)


View Pin assignment Remarks

24 VDC: Rated load voltage

M: Chassis groundAUX1: Ground terminal or usableas any voltage bus up to the levelof the load voltage.AUX1 is used as PE.

24 VDC: Rated load voltageM: Chassis ground

Block diagram

Figure 10-1 Block diagram of the PM-E 24 VDC power module




Power modules10.2 PM-E 24 VDC power module (6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0)


Dimensions and weight Dimensions W × H × D (mm)

Weight

15 × 81 × 52

Approx. 35 gVoltages, currents, potentials

Rated load voltage 24 VDC• Overvoltage protection NoProtection with automatic circuit breakers Yes, type C tripping characteristicsMax. current-carrying capacity (up to 60° C) 10 A• Short-circuit protection NoIsolation• Between rated load voltage and backplane

busYes

• Between the power modules YesInsulation tested with 500 VDCCurrent consumption• From the load voltage L+ (no load) Max. 4 mAPower dissipation of the module Typ. 100 mW

Status, interrupts, diagnostics Diagnostic function Yes• Group error• Load voltage monitoring

Red "SF" LEDGreen "PWR" LED

• Diagnostic information readable Yes



Power modules10.3 PM-E 24-48 VDC power module (6ES7138-4CA50-0AA0)


10.3 10.3PM-E 24-48 VDC pow er module (6ES7138-4CA50-0AA0)

Order number6ES7138-4CA50-0AA0

Features• The PM-E 24-48 VDC power module monitors the supply voltage for all the electronic

modules in the voltage group. The supply voltage is fed in by means of the TM-P terminalmodule.

• You can use all the electronic modules except the 2DI 120 VAC Standard, 2DI 230 VACStandard, and 2DO 24-230 VAC/1 A in the voltage group of the PM-E 24-48 VDC power

module.• Control interface (PIQ) and feedback interface (PII) in the process image for option

handling.• The current status of the power module is stored in the status byte in the process input

image (PII). This is updated irrespective of whether the "No Load Voltage" diagnosis hasbeen enabled.

• The PM-E 24-48 VDC power module is suitable for fail-safe modules.

Caution

Only connect the specified rated load voltage of 24-48 VDC to the TM-P terminal moduleof the power module.The connected rated load voltage must correspond to the supply voltage of the electronicmodules in the voltage group.





Pin assignmentThe following table shows you the terminal assignment of the PM-E 24-48 VDC power

module for the different terminal modules:

Table 10-3 Terminal assignment of the PM-E 24-48 VDC power module


24-48 VDC: Rated load voltage

M: Chassis ground

AUX1: Ground terminal or usableas any voltage bus up to the levelof the load voltage.


M: Chassis ground


AUX1 is used as PE.


M: Chassis ground





Block diagram

Figure 10-2 Block diagram of the PM-E 24-48 VDC power module



15 × 81 × 52Approx. 35 g

Voltages, currents, po tentials Rated load voltage VDC•

P1 Yes• Overvoltage protection NoProtection with automatic circuit breakers Yes, tripping characteristic B, CMax. current-carrying capacity (up to 60° C) 10 A• Short-circuit protection NoIsolation• Between rated load voltage and backplane

busYes

• Between the power modules YesInsulation tested with 500 VDCCurrent consumption• From the load voltage L+ (no load) Max. 12 mAPower dissipation of the module Typ. 500 mW



• Diagnostic information readable Yes




Power modules10.4 PM-E 24-48 VDC, 24-230 VAC power module (6ES7138-4CB10-0AB0)


10.4 10.4PM-E 24-48 VDC , 24-230 VAC pow er module(6ES7138-4CB10-0AB0)

Order number6ES7138-4CB10-0AB0

FeaturesThe PM-E 24-48 VDC, 24-230 VAC has the following characteristic features:• Monitors the supply voltage for all the electronic modules in the voltage group. The

supply voltage is fed in by means of the TM-P terminal module.

• Can be used universally and can be assigned parameters for DC and AC load voltage foruse with any electronic module.• Is required at least once for the ET 200S (to the right of the interface module).• Control interface (PIQ) and feedback interface (PII) in the process image for option

handling (see Appendix).• The current status of the power module is stored in the status byte in the process input

image (PII). This is updated irrespective of whether the "No Load Voltage" diagnostic hasbeen enabled (see Appendix).

• Is additionally equipped with a replaceable fuse (5 mm x 20 mm).

1

2 Figure 10-3 Replacing the fuse

(1) 3-mm screwdriver(2) Fuse





NoteThe PM-E 24-48 VDC, 24-230 VAC power module (6ES7138-4CB10-0AB0) is not a directreplacement for the device with the order number 6ES7138-4CB00-0AB0 for AC applicationsbecause you have to select either AC or DC supply voltage. In the case of DC applications,the new module is a direct replacement because the default setting of the new parameter is"DC". If you want to replace the device 6ES7138-4CB00-0AB0 in AC applications, you haveto create a new hardware configuration and set the value "AC" for the load voltage typeparameter.If the hardware configuration is not changed for AC applications, the SF status LED remainson all the time. If the "No load voltage" diagnostic interrupt is enabled, several interrupts areactivated in each AC cycle. The electronic modules that are connected to the voltage groupof this PM-E continue to function normally, however.

Pin assignmentThe following table indicates the terminal assignment of the PM-E 24-48 VDC, 24-230 VACpower module for the different terminal modules:

Table 10-4 Terminal assignment of the PM-E 24-48 VDC, 24-230 VAC power module


24-48 VDC/ L1: Rated load voltage

M/ N: Ground/neutral conductor

AUX1: Ground terminal or usable asany voltage bus up to the level of theload voltage.



AUX1: Ground terminal or usable asany voltage bus up to the level of theload voltage.AUX1 is used as PE.








Block diagram

Figure 10-4 Block diagram of the PM-E 24-48 VDC, 24-230 VAC







15 × 81 × 5234 g

Voltages, currents, po tentials Rated load voltage 24 to 56.7 VDC

24 to 48 VAC/120 VAC/ 230 VAC• Overvoltage protection YesMax. current-carrying capacity 10 A• For 24-56.7 VDC Up to 30° C Max. 10 A

up to 40° C: max. 9 Aup to 60° C: max. 7 A

• For 24-48/120/230 VAC up to 30° C: max. 8 Aup to 40° C: max. 7 Aup to 60° C: max. 5 A

• Short-circuit protection Yes, IEC 127-2/1, 250 V, 10 A, fast fuse(5 x 20 mm), replaceable1

Isolation• Between rated load voltage and backplane

bus• Between the power modules

Yes

YesInsulation tested with 1500 VACCurrent consumption from backplane bus Max. 9.5 mA• From load voltage L1/L+ (no load) Max. 9 mAPower dissipation of the module Max. 5 W



• Fuse Green "FSG" LED• Diagnostic information can be displayed Yes1 The fuses on this module are only additional fuses. External overcurrent protection (suitable forbranch circuits in accordance with the applicable national regulations for electrical engineering) is

required in the supply lines of the load circuit.







Digital Electronic Modules 1111.1 11.1Param eters for digital electronic m odules

11.1.1 Param eters for digital input modules

IntroductionThe range of digital electronic modules (EM) includes input and output modules for 24 VDC.Input and output modules for 120/230 VAC are also available.A relay module enables the switching of voltages for AC and DC.



Digital Electronic Modules11.1 Parameters for digital electronic modules


OverviewThis table shows the parameters for digital input modules:

Table 11-1 Parameters for digital input modules

2DI 24 VDCHigh Feature

4DI 24 VDCHigh Feature

4DI 24 to 48VUC High

Feature

2DI/ 4DI 24 VDCStandard

4DI 24 VDC/SRCStandard

2DI 120 VAC Standard4DI 230 VAC Standard


Hardware interrupt3 --- --- • Disable• Enable

Disable Module

--- Diagnostic

interrupt

--- • Disable• Enable

Disable Module

Input delay1 --- --- • 0.1 ms• 0.5 ms• 3 ms• 15 ms

3 ms Module

Diagnostics: Short-circuit toM2

--- --- • Disable• Enable

Disable Module

--- Diagnostics:Wire break4


Disable Module

--- Diagnostics:Fuse defect


Disable Module

--- Diagnostics:Load voltagemissing

--- • Disable• Enable Disable Module

Channel 0Trigger forhardwareinterrupt,rising edge3

Channel 1

Channel 2---

Trigger forhardwareinterrupt,rising edge3

--- --- • Disable• Enable

Disable

Channel 31 The input delay applies to "0" to "1" and to "1" to "0".2 Short circuit of the sensor supply.3Can only be assigned parameters for the IM151-1 High Feature interface module and the IM151-7 CPU4 If the wire break check is activated, all the unused inputs must be stabilized to prevent them from triggering a modulewire break. To do this, connect a resistor between terminal 24/48 V (3, A4, 7, A8) and the free input. The resistor mustprovide at least 0.5 mA of input current (see "Sensor Switching" in the table of technical specifications). This ensures thatsufficient current is flowing to prevent wire break detection..In the off state, a sensor must provide a minimum of 0.5 mA (otherwise a wire break is detected in the off state).Alternatively, a resistor can be connected parallel to the sensor terminals (the current must be at least. 0.5 mA).





11.1.2 Parameters for 4DI NAM UR

List of parametersThis table shows the parameters for 4 DI NAMUR:

Table 11-2 Parameters for 4DI NAMUR

4DI NAM UR Value range Default setting Applicability

Diagnostic interrupt • Enable• Disable

Disable Module

Sensor type • Channel disabled• NAMUR sensor• Open single contact• Single contact, closed,

with 10 kΩ• NAMUR changeover

contact• Open changeover

contact• Changeover contact,

closed, with 10 kΩ

Disable Channel

Pulse stretching • None• 0.5 s• 1 s• 2 s

None Channel

DiagnosticsNo sensor supply

• Enable• Disable

Disable Module

Diagnostics: wire break • Enable• Disable

Disable Channel

Diagnostics: wire break • Enable• Disable

Disable Channel

Chatter monitoring:Monitoring window*

• 0.5 s• 1 s to 100 s (can be set

at increments of 1 s)

0.5 s Channel

Chatter monitoring:Number of signal changes

• Disable• 2 to 31

Disable Channel

* The parameters can only be set when the number of signal changes for chatter monitoring is activated





11.1.3 Param eters for digital output modu les

OverviewThis table shows the parameters for digital output modules:

Table 11-3 Parameters for digital output modules

2DO 24VDC/0.50, 5

A HighFeature

2DO 24 to 230VAC/1 A

2DO/ 4DO 24VDC/0.5 AStandard

2DO 24VDC/2 A

High Feature

2RO NO24 to 120 VDC/5 A24 to 230 VAC/5 A

2RO NO NC24-48 VDC/5 A

24-230 VAC/ 5 A

2DO/ 4DO 24VDC/2 AStandard

Value range Default setting A pplicability

Reaction to CPU-/master-STOP --- • Substitute avalue

• Keep lastvalue

Substitute avalue

Module

Substitute value 1 --- • "0"• "1"

"0" Channel


Disable Module

Diagnostics:Wire break2


Disable Channel

Diagnostics:

Short-circuitto M

--- • Disable•

Enable

Disable Channel

1 If the interface module becomes deenergized, the digital output modules will not produce substitute values. The valuethat is output = 0.2 A wire break is only detected in the switched output state.



Digital Electronic Modules11.2 Parameter description for the digital electronic modules


11.2 11.2Param eter description for the digital electronic modules

11.2.1 Hardware interrupt

DescriptionThis parameter enables the hardware interrupts for the module.

11.2.2 Input delay

DescriptionYou can use this parameter to suppress signal interference. Changes to the signal aredetected once the set time has elapsed.

11.2.3 Trigger for hardware interrupt, rising edge

Description

This parameter allows you to enable a hardware interrupt at a rising edge(of a signal status change) for each channel.

11.2.4 Pulse stretching

DefinitionPulse stretching is a function that changes a digital input signal. A pulse at a digital input isstretched to at least the assigned parameter length. If the input pulse already longer than theassigned parameter length, the pulse is not changed.





The principle of pulse stretchingThe following figure uses examples to illustrate how and when input pulses are changed.

Figure 11-1 Principle of pulse stretching

Note

If you set pulse stretching for an input channel, this also affects the chatter monitoringenabled for this channel. The signal with a "stretched" pulse is the input signal for chattermonitoring. Make sure, therefore, that the parameter assignment for pulse stretching andchatter monitoring correspond with one another. By selecting the appropriate values for theparameters you can adapt the functions to suit your process.





11.2.5 Chatter monitoring

DefinitionChatter monitoring is a process control function for digital input signals. It detects and reportssignal characteristics that are unusual from a process engineering viewpoint, such as theinput signal fluctuating too frequently between "0" and "1". If signal characteristics like theseoccur, it is a sign that the sensors are faulty or that there are instabilities from a processengineering viewpoint.

Activating chatter monitoringYou activate chatter monitoring by setting the number of signal changes for chattermonitoring to a value other than zero.

Detecting unusual signal patternsEach input channel has a monitoring window that has been assigned parameters. Themonitoring window is started the first time the input signal changes. If the input signalchanges more often within the monitoring window than the set number of signal changes, achatter error is detected. If no chatter error is detected within the monitoring window, themonitoring window is started again at the next signal change.

Reporting a chatter errorIf a chatter error has occurred, the current signal status is entered in the process image andthe value of the signal is set to "invalid". A chatter error is also entered as diagnosticinformation, triggering an incoming diagnostic interrupt.You must evaluate and process the status of the value and the diagnostic information in theuser program.

Resetting a chatter errorIf no further chattering of the input signal is detected within three monitoring windows, thediagnostic entry is removed and an outgoing diagnostic interrupt is triggered. The status ofthe value of the current signal in the process image is set to "valid".





PrincipleThe following figure gives you another graphic illustration of the principle of chatter

monitoring.

Figure 11-2 The principle of chatter monitoring



Digital Electronic Modules11.3 2DI 24 VDC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BB01-0AA0).


11.3 11.32DI 24 VDC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BB01-0AA0).

Order number6ES7131-4BB01-0AA0

Features• Digital electronic module with two inputs• Rated input voltage 24 VDC• Suitable for switches and proximity switches (BEROs)

Pin assignmentThe following table illustrates the terminal assignment of the 2DI 24 VDC Standard for thedifferent terminal modules:

Table 11-4 Terminal assignment of the 2DI 24 VDC Standard


Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A4Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A8DI: Input signal24 VDC: Sensor supplyvoltageM: Chassis ground

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8DI: Input signal24 VDC: Sensor supplyvoltageM: Chassis groundTerminals 4 and 8 can beused for unneeded wires of upto 30 VDC.







Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8DI: Input signal24 VDC: Sensor supplyvoltageM: Chassis ground

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3

Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7DI: Input signal24 VDC: Sensor supplyvoltageM: Chassis groundTerminals 4 and 8 can beused for unneeded wires of upto 30 VDC.







Technical specificationsDimensions and weight

Dimensions W × H × D (mm) 15 × 81 × 52Weight Approx. 35 g

Data for specific modules Number of inputs 2Length of cable• Unshielded max. 600m• Shielded max. 1000m

Voltages, currents, potentials Rated supply voltage (from the power module) 24 VDC• Reverse polarity protection YesIsolation• between the channels No• between the channels and backplane bus YesPermissible potential difference• between the different circuits 75 VDC, 60 VACInsulation tested with 500 VDCCurrent consumption• From supply voltage Dependent on the sensorPower dissipation of the module Typ. 0.4 W

Status, interrupts, diagnostics Status display Green LED per channelDiagnostic functions No

Sensor supply output Output voltage• with load min. L+ (-0.5 V)Output current• Rated value 500 mA• Permitted range 0 to 500 mA

Data for selecting a sensor Input voltage• Rated value 24 VDC• For signal "1" 15 to 30 V• For signal "0" -30 to 5 VInput current• At signal "1" Typ. 7 mA (at 24 V)Input delay• At "0" to "1" Typ. 3 ms (2.0 to 4.5 ms)• At "1" to "0" Typ. 3 ms (2.0 to 4.5 ms)Input characteristic curve To IEC 61131, Type 1Connection of two-wire BEROs Possible• Permitted bias current Max. 1.5 mA



Digital Electronic Modules11.4 4DI 24 VDC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD01-0AA0)


11.4 11.44DI 24 VDC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD01-0AA0)

Order number6ES7131-4BD01-0AA0

Features• Digital electronic module with four inputs• Rated input voltage 24 VDC• Suitable for switches and proximity switches (BEROs)

Pin assignmentThe following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 4DI 24 VDC Standard for thedifferent terminal modules:

Table 11-5 Terminal assignment of the 4DI 24 VDC Standard


Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 3Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 7DI: Input signal24 VDC: Sensor supply voltage







Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3

Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 3Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 7DI: Input signal24 VDC: Sensor supply voltage






Block diagram

Figure 11-4 Block diagram of the 4DI 24 VDC Standard


Dimensions and weight Dimensions W × H × D (mm) 15 × 81× 52Weight Approx. 35 g

Data for specific modules Number of inputs 4Length of cable• Unshielded max. 600m• Shielded max. 1000 m

Voltages, currents, po tentials Rated supply voltage (from the power module) 24 VDC• Reverse polarity protection YesIsolation• between the channels No• between the channels and backplane bus YesPermissible potential difference• between the different circuits 75 VDC, 60 VAC





Insulation tested with 500 VDCCurrent consumption• From supply voltage Dependent on the sensorPower dissipation of the module Typ. 0.7 WStatus, interrupts, diagnosticsStatus display Green LED per channelDiagnostic functions No

Sensor supply output Output voltage• with load min. L+ (-0.5 V)Output current• Rated value 500 mA• Permitted range 0 to 500 mA

Data for selecting a sensor Input voltage• Rated value 24 VDC• For signal "1" 15 to 30 V• For signal "0" -30 to 5 VInput current• At signal "1" Typ. 7 mA (at 24 V)Input delay• At "0" to "1" Typ. 3 ms (2.0 to 4.5 ms)• At "1" to "0" Typ. 3 ms (2.0 to 4.5 ms)Input characteristic curve To IEC 61131, Type 1Connection of two-wire BEROs Possible• Permitted bias current Max. 1.5 mA



Digital Electronic Modules11.5 4DI 24 VDC/SRC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD51-0AA0)


11.5 11.54DI 24 VDC/SRC ST digital electronic module(6ES7131-4BD51-0AA0)


Features• Digital electronic module with four inputs• Source input• Rated input voltage 24 VDC• Suitable for switches and proximity switches (BEROs)

Pin assignmentThe following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 4DI 24 VDC/SRC Standard forthe different terminal modules:

Table 11-6 Terminal assignment of the 4DI 24 VDC/SRC Standard



Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 3Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 7DI: Input signalM: Sensor supply voltage







Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 4Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 8DI: Input signalM: Sensor supply voltage

Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 3Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 7DI: Input signalM: Sensor supply voltage

Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 4Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 8DI: Input signalM: Sensor supply voltage





Block diagram

Figure 11-5 Block diagram of the 4DI 24 VDC/SRC Standard


Dimensions and weight Dimensions W × H × D (mm) 15 × 81 × 52Weight Approx. 35 g

Data for specific modules Number of inputs 4Length of cable• Unshielded max. 600 m• Shielded max. 1000 m

Voltages, currents, po tentials Rated supply voltage (from the power module) 24 VDC• Reverse polarity protection YesIsolation• between the channels No• between the channels and backplane bus YesPermissible potential difference• between the different circuits 75 VDC, 60 VACInsulation tested with 500 VDC





Current consumption• From supply voltage Dependent on the sensor


Status display Green LED per channelDiagnostic functions No

Sensor supply output Output voltage• With load Max. M +0.5 VOutput current• Rated value 500 mA• Permitted range 0 to 500 mA

Data for selecting a sensor Input voltage• Rated value 24 VDC• For signal "1" -15 to -30 V1 • For signal "0" 30 to -5 V1 Input current• At signal "1" Typ. 7 mA (at 24 V)Input delay• At "0" to "1" Typ. 3 ms (2.0 to 4.5 ms)• At "1" to "0" Typ. 3 ms (2.0 to 4.5 ms)Input characteristic curve To IEC 61131, Type 1Connection of two-wire BEROs Possible• Permitted bias current Max. 1.5 mA1 Reference potential is L+



Digital Electronic Modules11.6 2DI 24 VDC High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0)


11.6 11.62DI 24 VDC High Feature digital electronic module(6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0)

Order number6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0

Features• Digital electronic module with two inputs• Rated input voltage 24 VDC• Suitable for switches and proximity switches (BEROs)• Supports isochronous operation

Pin assignmentThe following table illustrates the terminal assignment of the 2DI 24 VDC High Feature forthe different terminal modules:

Table 11-7 Terminal assignment of the 2DI 24 VDC High Feature



Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A8DI: Input signal24 VDC: Sensor supplyvoltageM: Chassis ground







Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8DI: Input signal24 VDC: Sensor supplyvoltageM: Chassis groundTerminals 4 and 8 can beused for unneeded wires of upto 30 VDC.

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8DI: Input signal24 VDC: Sensor supplyvoltageM: Chassis ground

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7DI: Input signal24 VDC: Sensor supplyvoltageM: Chassis groundTerminals 4 and 8 can beused for unneeded wires of upto 30 VDC.





Block diagram

Figure 11-6 Block diagram of the 2DI 24 VDC High Feature



Data for specific modules Supports isochronous operation YesNumber of inputs 2Length of cable• Unshielded max. 600 m• Shielded max. 1000 m

Voltages, currents, po tentials

Rated supply voltage (from the power module) 24 VDC• Reverse polarity protection YesIsolation• between the channels No• between the channels and backplane bus YesPermissible potential difference• between the different circuits 75 VDC, 60 VACInsulation tested with 500 VDCCurrent consumption• From supply voltage Dependent on the sensorPower dissipation of the module Typ. 0.4 W





Status, interrupts, diagnostics Status display Green LED per channel

Interrupts• Hardware interrupt Parameters can be assignedDiagnostic functions• Group error Red "SF" LED• Diagnostic information can be displayed Yes

Sensor supply output Output voltage• with load Min.. L+ (-0.5V)Output current• Rated value 500 mA• Permitted range 0 to 500 mAShort-circuit protection Yes, electronic1

Data for selecting a sensor Input voltage• Rated value 24 VDC• For signal "1" 11 to 30 V• For signal "0" -30 to 5 VInput current• At signal "1" Typ. 8 mAInput delay (parameters can be assigned)• At "0" to "1" 0.1 ms (0.05 to 0.15 ms)

0.5 ms (0.4 to 0.6 ms)3 ms (2.7 to 3.3 ms)15 ms (14.85 to 15.15 ms)

• At "1" to "0" 0.1 ms (0.05 to 0.15 ms)0.5 ms (0.4 to 0.6 ms)3 ms (2.7 to 3.3 ms)15 ms (14.85 to 15.15 ms)

Input characteristic curve To IEC 61131, Type 1Connection of two-wire BEROs Possible• Permitted bias current max. 1.5 mA1 Per module



Digital Electronic Modules11.7 4DI 24 VDC High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD01-0AB0)


11.7 11.74DI 24 VDC High Feature digital electronic module(6ES7131-4BD01-0AB0)

Order number6ES7131-4BD01-0AB0

Features• Digital electronic module with four inputs• Rated input voltage 24 VDC• Suitable for switches and proximity switches (BEROs)• Supports isochronous operation

Pin assignmentThe following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 4DI 24 VDC High Feature for thedifferent terminal modules:

Table 11-8 Terminal assignment of the 4DI 24 VDC High Feature


Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 3

Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 7DI: Input signal24 VDC: Sensor supply voltage















Block diagram

Figure 11-7 Block diagram of the 4DI 24 VDC High Feature



Data for specific modules Supports isochronous operation YesNumber of inputs 4Length of cable• Unshielded max. 600 m• Shielded max. 1000 m

Voltages, currents, po tentials Rated supply voltage (from the power module) 24 VDC• Reverse polarity protection YesIsolation• between the channels No





• between the channels and backplane bus YesPermissible potential difference• between the different circuits 75 VDC, 60 VACInsulation tested with 500 VDCCurrent consumption• From supply voltage Dependent on the sensorPower dissipation of the module Typ. 0.7 W

Status, interrupts, diagnostics Status display Green LED per channelInterrupts• Hardware interrupt Parameters can be assignedDiagnostic functions• Group error Red "SF" LED• Diagnostic information can be displayed Yes

Sensor supply output Output voltage• with load Min.. L+ (-0.5V)Output current• Rated value 500 mA• Permitted range 0 to 500 mAShort-circuit protection Yes, electronic1

Data for selecting a sensor Input voltage• Rated value 24 VDC• For signal "1" 11 to 30 V• For signal "0" -30 to 5 VInput current• At signal "1" Typ. 8 mAInput delay (parameters can be assigned)• At "0" to "1" 0.1 ms (0.05 to 0.15 ms)

0.5 ms (0.4 to 0.6 ms)3 ms (2.7 to 3.3 ms)15 ms (14.85 to 15.15 ms)

• At "1" to "0" 0.1 ms (0.05 to 0.15 ms)0.5 ms (0.4 to 0.6 ms)3 ms (2.7 to 3.3 ms)15 ms (14.85 to 15.15 ms)

Input characteristic curve To IEC 61131, Type 1Connection of two-wire BEROs Possible• Permitted bias current max. 1.5 mA1 Per module



Digital Electronic Modules11.8 4DI 24-48 VUC High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7131-4CD00-0AB0)


11.8 11.84DI 24-48 V UC High Fea ture digital electronic module(6ES7131-4CD00-0AB0)

Order number6ES7131-4CD00-0AB0

Features• Digital electronic module with four inputs• Rated input voltage 24-48 VAC/VDC• Parameter assignment length: 3 bytes• Diagnostics: Wire break• Diagnostics: Fuse blown• Diagnostics: Load voltage missing• Suitable for switches and proximity switches (BEROs)• Supports isochronous operation

Pin assignmentThe following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 4DI 24 to 48 VUC High Featurefor the different terminal modules:

Table 11-9 Terminal assignment of the 4DI 24-48 VUC High Feature


Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 3Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 7DI: Input signalVDC sensor supplyPE: Chassis ground







Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 4Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 8DI: Input signalVDC sensor supply

Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 3Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 7DI: Input signalVDC sensor supply

Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 4Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 8DI: Input signalVDC sensor supplyAUX: Terminals A4, A3, A8DC/AC and A7 can be usedfor unused cables up to30 VDC.





Block diagram

Figure 11-8 Block diagram of the 4DI 24-48 VUC High Feature


Dimensions W × H × D 15 × 81 × 52 (mm)Weight Approx. 35 g

Data for specific modules Supports isochronous operation YesNumber of inputs 4Length of cable• Unshielded Max. 600 m•

Shielded Max. 1000 mVoltage, currents, poten tials

Rated supply voltage (from the power module) 24-48 VAC/VDC• Horizontal installation

up to 60° C• Vertical installation

up to 40° C• P1 AC or DC automaticallyIsolation• Between the channels No• Between channels and backplane bus Yes





Permissible potential difference• Between the different circuits 75 VDC, 60 VAC

Insulation tested with 2500 VDCCurrent consumption• From the power supply L+ Dependent on the sensor• From the backplane bus Max. 10 mAPower dissipation of the module Typ. 0.7 W

Status, interrupts, diagnostics Status display Green LEDs per channelDiagnostic functions• Group error display

Parameters can be assignedRed LEDs (SF)

Sensor power supply outputs Output voltage• With load Min. L+ (-0.5 V)Output current• Rated value 500 mA• Permitted rangeShort-circuit protection

0 to 500 mAYes (per module)

Data for selecting a sensor Input voltage• Rated value 24 to 48 VUC• For signal "1" -15 VDC to -57.6 VDC

15 VDC to 57.6 VDC

15 VAC to 48 VAC• For signal "0" -6 VDC to 6 VDC 0

VAC to 5 VAC• Frequency range 47 Hz to 63 HzInput current• At signal "1" From 4 mA to 10 mAInput delay• At "0" to "1"• At "1" to "0"

Max. 15 msMax. 15 ms

Input characteristic curve1 Connection of two-wire BEROs Possible• Permitted bias current Max. 0.5 to 2 mA2

Sensor switching Resistance circuit of the sensor for wire breakmonitoring• Nominal voltage

24 V (15 V to 35 V)• Nominal voltage

48 V (30 V to 60 V)

18 kΩ

39 kΩ1 IEC 61131 does not provide technical specifications for UC modules. However, the values havebeen adjusted to IEC 61131 as closely as possible.2 Minimum load current is required in the case of wire-break monitoring.



Digital Electronic Modules11.9 4DI NAMUR digital electronic module (6ES7131-4RD00-0AB0)


11.9 11.94DI N AMU R digital electronic module (6ES7131-4RD 00-0AB0)

Order number6ES7131-4RD00-0AB0

Features• Digital electronic module with four inputs• 8.2 VDC sensor supply• Suitable for NAMUR sensors and both closed and open mechanical contacts

Terminal assignment of NAMUR sensors and sensors to IEC 60947-5-6This table shows the terminal assignment of NAMUR sensors and sensors according toIEC 60947-5-6.

Table 11-10 Terminal assignment of NAMUR sensors and sensors to IEC 60947-5-6


Sensor 1:

Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3Sensor 2:

Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7Sensor 3:Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 3Sensor 4:

Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 7DI: Input signalVs: Sensor supply voltage





Terminal assignment of NAM UR chang eover contacts or sensors to IEC 60947-5-6This table shows the terminal assignment of NAMUR changeover contacts or sensors

according to IEC 60947-5-6.

Table 11-11 Terminal assignment of NAMUR changeover contact or sensor to IEC 60947-5-6


Changeover contact 1:

terminals 1, 5 and 3Changeover contact 2 terminals 2, 6 and 7DI: Input signalVs: Sensor supply voltage

Terminal assignment of a single, closed contact with 10 kΩ (mec hanical normally open contact)This table shows the terminal assignment of a single, closed contact with 10 kΩ(mechanical normally open contact).

Table 11-12 Terminal assignment of a single, closed contact with 10 kΩ (mechanical normally open contact)


Single contact 1:

Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3Single contact 2: Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7Single contact 3: Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 3Single contact 4: Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 7DI: Input signalVs: Sensor supply voltage





Terminal assignment of a closed changeover contact with 10 kΩ (mechanical changeover contact)This table shows the terminal assignment of a closed changeover contact with 10 kΩ

(mechanical normally open contact).

Table 11-13 Terminal assignment of a closed changeover contact with 10 kΩ (mechanical changeover contact)


Changeover contact 1: Terminals 1, 5 and 3Changeover contact 2:Terminals 2, 6 and 7DI: Input signalVs: Sensor supply voltage

Terminal assignment of an open single contact (mechanical normally open contact with singlecontact)

This table shows the terminal assignment of an open single contact(mechanical normally open contact with single contact).

Table 11-14 Terminal assignment of an open single contact (mechanical normally open contact with single contact)


Single contact 1:

Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3Single contact 2: Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7Single contact 3: Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 4Single contact 4:

Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 8DI: Input signalVs: Sensor supply voltage





Terminal assignment of an open changeover contact (mechanical changeover contact)This table shows the terminal assignment of an open changeover contact

(mechanical changeover contact).

Table 11-15 Terminal assignment of an open changeover contact (mechanical changeover contact)


Changeover contact 1: terminals 1, 5 and 3Changeover contact 2: terminals 2, 6 and 7DI: Input signalVs: Sensor supply voltage

Block diagram

Figure 11-9 Block diagram of the 4DI NAMUR







Data for specific modules Number of inputs 4Length of cable• Shielded Max. 200 mVoltage, currents, potentialsNumber of inputs that can be triggeredsimultaneously

4

• Horizontal installation up to 60° C 4• All other mounting positions up to 40° C 4Isolation• Between the channels No• Between channels and backplane bus Yes• Between channels and load voltage Yes• Between load voltage and backplane bus YesPermissible potential difference• Between different circuits 75 VDC, 60 VACInsulation tested with:• Channels against the backplane bus and

load voltage

500 VDC

• Load voltage against the backplane bus 500 VDCCurrent consumption• From load voltage L+ Dependent on the sensorPower dissipation of the module Typ. 1.6 W

Status, interrupts, diagnostics Status display Green LED per channelInterrupts• Hardware interrupt• Diagnostic interrupt

NoYes, can be set

Diagnostic functions• Group error display• Diagnostic information can be displayed

Red "SF" LEDPossible

Monitoring for• Short circuit• Wire break

I > 7 mA*I < 0.35 mA*

Data for selecting a sensor Input current for NAMUR sensors according to NAMUR or IEC 60947-5-6• At signal "1"• At signal "0"

2.1 mA to 7 mA0.35 mA to 1.2 mA

Input current for a closed contact





• At signal "1" 2.1 mA to 7 mA• For signal "0" 0.35 mA to 1.2 mA

Input current for an open contact• At signal "1" Typ. 8 mA• Permitted bias current 0.5 mAInput delay• At "0" to "1" Max. 4.6 ms• At "1" to "0" Max. 4.6 msTolerated switchover time with changeovercontacts

300 ms

Parallel connection of inputs NoSensor power supply outputs

Number of outputs 1Output voltage• With load Min. 8.2 VOutput current• Rated value 45 mAAdditional (redundant) supply Not permissibleShort-circuit protection Yes, electronic* Only for NAMUR sensors and closed contacts.

Value status

The value status provides additional binary information on a digital input signal. The valuestatus is entered in the process input image at the same time as the signal, and it providesinformation on the validity of the input signal. The value status is affected by:• Wire break check/short circuit• Flutter monitoring• Pulse extension• Validity check of changeover contact sensor typesMeaning of the value status:• "1": input signal is valid• "0": Input signal is invalid





Assignment in the process input imageThe data is transferred to the process image in two bytes (16 bits).

Figure 11-10 Assignment in the process input image for 4DI NAMUR

Diagnosis for changeover contact sensor typesWhen a diagnosis is made for the changeover contact sensor type, the digital electronicmodule controls the switchover between two input channels. If there is no signal change inthe normally closed contact after the set switchover time (see technical specifications), themodule reports a diagnosis.

Purpose of chang eover contact diagnosticsYou can use the diagnosis for the following:• A diagnosis of the sensor• To make absolutely sure that there has been a switchover between a normally open

contact and normally closed contact

Principle of changeover contact diagnosticsIf the digital inputs of a channel group are assigned parameters as changeover contacts, themodule carries out a diagnosis for changeover contact sensor types for this channel group.The tolerated switchover time between the two channels is fixed at 300 ms.If the validity check is negative, the following applies:• The module designates the value status of the normally open contact channel as invalid.• The module creates a diagnostic entry for the NO contact channel.• The module triggers a diagnostic interrupt.





The digital input signal and the value status are only updated for the NO contact channel(channel 0 and 2). In the case of the NC contact channel (channel 1 and 3) the digital inputsignal is fixed at "zero" and the value status is "invalid" because this channel is only used fora validity check of the sensor.Note the following points when carrying out a diagnosis for a changeover contact sensortype:• If there is already an error on the NO contact channel (wire break, for example), the

module will not carry out a diagnosis for changeover contact errors. The diagnosis forchangeover contact errors continues to be carried out on the second channel.

• You will find additional points to note in the following table:

Table 11-16 Diagnosis for changeover contacts

Chang eover contact A negative check means...

Changeover contact asNAMUR

• Short circuit or• Wire break

Closed changeover contact • Defective sensor or short circuitNo distinction can be made here between a defective sensorand short circuit

Open changeover contact Attention: No distinction possible between• Signal "0" and wire break• Signal "1" and short circuit

Additionally:Changeover contact erroror external fault (in thecase of DP diagnosis)



Digital Electronic Modules11.10 2DI 120 VAC Standard digital electronic module (6ES7131-4EB00-0AB0)


11.10 11.102DI 120 V AC Standard digital electronic module(6ES7131-4EB00-0AB0)

Order number6ES7131-4EB00-0AB0

Features• Digital electronic module with two inputs• Rated input voltage 120 VAC• Suitable for switches

Pin assignmentThe following table illustrates the terminal assignment of the 2DI 120 VAC Standard for thedifferent terminal modules:

Table 11-17 Terminal assignment of the 2DI 120 VAC Standard


Channel 0:Terminals 1 to A4Channel 1:Terminals 5 to A8DI: Input signalL1: Sensor supply voltageN: Neutral conductor


Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8DI: Input signalL1: Sensor supply voltageN: Neutral conductorTerminals 4 and 8 can beused for unneeded wires of upto 120 VAC.







Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7DI: Input signalL1: Sensor supply voltageN: Neutral conductor


Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7DI: Input signalL1: Sensor supply voltageN: Neutral conductorTerminals 4 and 8 can beused for unneeded wires of upto 120 VAC.





Block diagram

Figure 11-11 Block diagram of the 2DI 120 VAC Standard


Dimensions and weight


Data for specific modules Supports isochronous operation NoNumber of inputs 2Length of cable• Unshielded Max. 600 m• Shielded Max. 1000 m

Voltages, currents, po tentials Supply voltage (from the power module) 120 VAC• Frequency

47 to 63 HzIsolation• between the channels No• between the channels and backplane bus YesPermissible potential difference• between Minternal and the inputs 1500 VACInsulation tested with 2500 VDCPower dissipation of the module Typ. 0.5 W






Data for selecting a sensor Input voltage• Rated value 120 VAC• For signal "1" 79 to 132 VAC• For signal "0" 0 to 20 VACInput current• At signal "1" 3 to 9 mAInput delay• At "0" to "1" 15 ms• At "1" to "0" 25 msInput characteristic curve To IEC 61131, Type 1Connection of two-wire BEROs No• Permitted bias current Max. 1 mA



Digital Electronic Modules11.11 2DI 230 VAC Standard digital electronic module (6ES7131-4FB00-0AB0)


11.11 11.112DI 230 V AC Standard digital electronic module(6ES7131-4FB00-0AB0)

Order number6ES7131-4FB00-0AB0

Features• Digital electronic module with two inputs• Rated input voltage 230 VAC• Suitable for switches

Pin assignmentThe following table illustrates the terminal assignment of the 2DI 230 VAC Standard for thedifferent terminal modules:

Table 11-18 Terminal assignment of the 2DI 230 VAC Standard


Channel 0:Terminals 1 to A4Channel 1:Terminals 5 to A8DI: Input signalL1: Sensor supply voltageN: Neutral conductor


Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8DI: Input signalL1: Sensor supply voltageN: Neutral conductorTerminals 4 and 8 can beused for unneeded wires of upto 230 VAC.







Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7DI: Input signalL1: Sensor supply voltageN: Neutral conductor


Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7DI: Input signalL1: Sensor supply voltageN: Neutral conductorTerminals 4 and 8 can beused for unneeded wires of upto 230 VAC.





Block diagram

Figure 11-12 Block diagram of the 2DI 230 VAC Standard



Dimensions W × H × D (mm) 15 × 81× 52Weight Approx. 31 g

Data for specific modules Supports isochronous operation NoNumber of inputs 2Length of cable• Unshielded Max. 600 m• Shielded Max. 1000 m

Voltages, currents, po tentials Supply voltage (from the power module) 230 VAC• Frequency 47 to 63 HzIsolation• between the channels No• between the channels and backplane bus YesPermissible potential difference• between Minternal and the inputs 1500 VACInsulation tested with 4000 VDCPower dissipation of the module Typ. 0.7 WStatus, interrupts, diagnosticsStatus display Green LED per channelDiagnostic functions No





Data for selecting a sensor Input voltage• Rated value 230 VAC• For signal "1" 164 to 264 VAC• For signal "0" 0 to 40 VACInput current• At signal "1" 5 to 30 mAInput delay• At "0" to "1" 15 ms• At "1" to "0" 45 msInput characteristic curve To IEC 61131, Type 1Connection of two-wireBEROs

No

• Permitted bias current Max. 2 mA



Digital Electronic Modules11.12 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB01-0AA0)


11.12 11.122DO 24 VD C/0.5 A Standard digital electronic module(6ES7132-4BB01-0AA0)


Features• Digital electronic module with two outputs• Output current 0.5 A per output• Rated load voltage 24 VDC• Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors, and indicator lights• Supports isochronous operation

PeculiarityWhen you supply the 24 VDC rated load voltage at the power module by means of amechanical contact, depending on the circuit the digital outputs carry the "1" signal forapproximately 50 µs. You need to take this into account if you connect the module to fastcounters.

Pin assignmentThe following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2DO 24 VDC, 0.5 A Standard forthe different terminal modules:

Table 11-19 Terminal assignment of the 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard


Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A4Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A8DO: Output signal (maximum 0.5A per channel)24 VDC: Sensor supply voltageM: Ground load power supply







Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8DO: Output signal (maximum 0.5A per channel)24 VDC: Sensor supply voltageM: Ground load power supplyTerminals 4 and 8 can be used forunneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7DO: Output signal (maximum 0.5A per channel)24 VDC: Sensor supply voltageM: Ground load power supply

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7DO: Output signal (maximum 0.5A per channel)24 VDC: Sensor supply voltageM: Ground load power supplyTerminals 4 and 8 can be used forunneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.





Block diagram

Figure 11-13 Block diagram of the 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard







Data for specific modules Supports isochronous operation YesNumber of outputs 2Length of cable• Unshielded Max. 600 m• Shielded Max. 1000 m

Voltages, currents, po tentials Rated load voltage L+ (from the power module) 24 VDC• P1 Yes 1 Total current of the outputs (per module) 1 AIsolation• between the channels No• between the channels and backplane bus YesPermissible potential difference• between the different circuits 75 VDC, 60 VACInsulation tested 500 VDCCurrent consumption• From the load voltage L+ (no load) Max. 5 mA per channelPower dissipation of the module Typ. 0.4 W


Data for selecting an actuator

Output voltage• At signal "1" Min.. L+ (-1V)Output current• At signal "1"

– Rated value –

Permitted range

0.5 A

7 mA up to 0.6 A• With signal "0" (leakage current) Max. 0.3 mAOutput delay (for resistive load)• At "0" to "1" Max. 200 µs• At "1" to "0" Max. 1.3 msLoad resistor range 48 Ω to 3.4 kΩLamp load Max. 5 WConnecting two outputs in parallel• For redundant triggering of a load Yes (per module)• To increase performance NoControl of a digital input Yes





Switch rate• For resistive load 100 Hz• With inductive load 2 Hz• For lamp load 10 HzLimitation (internal) of the voltage induced oncircuit interruption

Typ. L+ (-55 to -60 V)

Reverse-voltage proof Yes, if using the same load voltage as at thepower module

Short-circuit protection of the output Yes2 • Threshold on Typ. 0.7 to 1.8 A1 Polarity reversal can lead to the digital outputs being connected through2 Per channel





Digital Electronic Modules11.13 4DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BD01-0AA0)




Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 4Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 8DO: Output signal (maximum 0.5A per channel)M: Ground load power supply

Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 3Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 7DO: Output signal (maximum 0.5A per channel)M: Ground load power supply

Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 4Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 8DO: Output signal (maximum 0.5A per channel)M: Ground load power supply





Block diagram

Figure 11-14 Block diagram of the 4DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard







Data for specific modules Supports isochronous operation NoNumber of outputs 4Length of cable• Unshielded Max. 600 m• Shielded Max. 1000 m

Voltages, currents, po tentials Rated load voltage L+ (from the power module) 24 VDC• P1 Yes 1 Total current of the outputs (per module) 2 AIsolation• between the channels No• between the channels and backplane bus YesPermissible potential difference• between the different circuits 75 VDC, 60 VACInsulation tested 500 VDCCurrent consumption• From the load voltage L+ (no load) Max. 5 mA per channelPower dissipation of the module Typ. 0.8 WStatus, interrupts, diagnosticsStatus display Green LED per channelDiagnostic functions No

Data for selecting an a ctuator

Output voltage• At signal "1" Min.. L+ (-1V)Output current• At signal "1"

– Rated value –

Permitted range

0.5 A

7 mA up to 0.6A• With signal "0" (leakage current) Max. 0.3 mAOutput delay (for resistive load)• At "0" to "1" Max. 100 µs• At "1" to "0" Max. 300 µsLoad resistor range 48 Ω to 3.4 kΩLamp load Max. 5 WConnecting two outputs in parallel• For redundant triggering of a load Yes (per module)• To increase performance NoControl of a digital input Yes






Typ. L+ (-55 to -60 V)

Reverse-voltage proof Yes, if using the same load voltage as at thepower module2

Short-circuit protection of the output Yes3 • Threshold on Typ. 0.7 to 1.5 A1 Polarity reversal can lead to the digital outputs being connected through2 The module must be supplied with voltage.3 Per channel



Digital Electronic Modules11.14 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0)


11.14 11.142DO 24 VD C/0.5 A High Feature digital electronic module(6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0)


Features• Digital electronic module with two outputs• Output current 0.5 A per output• Rated load voltage 24 VDC• Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors, and indicator lights• Supports isochronous operation

PeculiarityWhen you connect the 24 VDC rated load voltage to the power module by means of amechanical contact, depending on the circuit the digital outputs carry the "1" signal forapproximately 50 µs. You need to take this into account if you connect the module to fastcounters.

Pin assignmentThe following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2DO 24 VDC, 0.5 A HighFeature for the different terminal modules:

Table 11-21 Terminal assignment of the 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature


Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A4Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A8DO: Output signal (maximum 0.5A per channel)24 VDC: Sensor supply voltageM: Ground load power supply







Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8DO: Output signal (maximum 0.5A per channel)24 VDC: Sensor supply voltageM: Ground load power supplyTerminals 4 and 8 can be used forunneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7DO: Output signal (maximum 0.5A per channel)24 VDC: Sensor supply voltageM: Ground load power supply

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A7Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A3DO: Output signal (maximum 0.5A per channel)24 VDC: Sensor supply voltageM: Ground load power supplyTerminals 4 and 8 can be used forunneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.





Block diagram

Figure 11-15 Block diagram of the 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature







Data for specific modules Supports isochronous operation YesNumber of outputs 2Length of cable• Unshielded Max. 600 m• Shielded Max. 1000 m

Voltages, currents, po tentials Rated load voltage L+ (from the power module) 24 VDC• P1 Yes 1 Total current of the outputs (per module) 1 AIsolation• between the channels No• between the channels and backplane bus YesPermissible potential difference• between the different circuits 75 VDC, 60 VACInsulation tested 500 VDCCurrent consumption• From the load voltage L+ (no load) Max. 5 mA per channelPower dissipation of the module Typ. 0.4 W

Status, interrupts, diagnostics Status display Green LED per channelDiagnostic functions• Group error Red "SF" LED• Diagnostic functions readable Yes


Output voltage• At signal "1" Min. L+ (-1V)Output current• At signal "1" – Rated value

– Permitted range0.5 A7 mA up to 0.6A

• With signal "0" (leakage current) Max. 0.3 mAOutput delay (for resistive load)• At "0" to "1" Max. 100 µs• At "1" to "0" Max. 400 µsLoad resistor range 48Ω to 3.4 kΩLamp load Max. 2.5 WConnecting two outputs in parallel• For redundant triggering of a load Yes (per module)





• To increase performance NoControl of a digital input Yes


Typ. L+ (-55 to -60 V)


Short-circuit protection of the output Yes2 • Threshold on Typ. 1.5 A1 Polarity reversal can lead to the digital outputs being connected through2 Per channel



Digital Electronic Modules11.15 2DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB31-0AA0)


11.15 11.152DO 24 VD C/2 A Standa rd digital electronic module(6ES7132-4BB31-0AA0)


Features• Digital electronic module with two outputs• Output current 2 A per output• Rated load voltage 24 VDC• Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors, and indicator lights

PeculiarityWhen you supply the 24 VDC rated load voltage at the power module by means of amechanical contact, depending on the circuit the digital outputs carry the "1" signal forapproximately 50 µs. You need to take this into account if you connect the module to fastcounters.

Pin assignment

The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2DO 24 VDC, 2 A Standard forthe different terminal modules:

Table 11-22 Terminal assignment of the 2DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard


Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A4Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A8DO: Output signal (maximum 2 Aper channel)24 VDC: Sensor supply voltageM: Ground load power supply







Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8DO: Output signal (maximum 2 Aper channel)24 VDC: Sensor supply voltageM: Ground load power supplyTerminals 4 and 8 can be used forunneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7DO: Output signal (maximum 2 Aper channel)24 VDC: Sensor supply voltageM: Ground load power supply

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7DO: Output signal (maximum 2 Aper channel)24 VDC: Sensor supply voltageM: Ground load power supplyTerminals 4 and 8 can be used forunneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.





Block diagram

Figure 11-16 Block diagram of the 2DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard







Data for specific modules Supports clocked operation NoNumber of outputs 2Length of cable• Unshielded Max. 600 m• Shielded Max. 1000 m

Voltages, currents, po tentials Rated load voltage L+ (from the power module) 24 VDC• Polarity reversal Yes 1 Total current of the outputs (per module) 4 AIsolation• between the channels No• between the channels and backplane bus YesPermissible potential difference• between the different circuits 75 VDC, 60 VACInsulation tested 500 VDCCurrent consumption• From rated load voltage L+ (no load) Max. 5 mA per channelPower dissipation of the module Typ. 1.4 W



Output voltage• At signal "1" Min. L+ (-1V)Output current• At signal "1"

– Rated value –

Permitted range

2 A

7 mA to 2.4 A• With signal "0" (leakage current) Max. 0.5 mAOutput delay (for resistive load)• At "0" to "1" Max. 200 µs• At "1" to "0" Max. 1.3 msLoad resistor range 12 Ω to 3.4 kΩLamp load Max. 10 WConnecting two outputs in parallel• For redundant triggering of a load Yes (per module)• To increase performance NoControl of a digital input Yes





Switch rate• For resistive load 100 Hz• With inductive load 2 Hz (0.5 H)• For lamp load 10 HzLimitation (internal) of the voltage induced oncircuit interruption

Typ. L+ (-55 to -60 V)





Digital Electronic Modules11.16 4DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BD31-0AA0)


11.16 11.164DO 24 VD C/2 A Standa rd digital electronic module(6ES7132-4BD31-0AA0)


Features• Digital electronic module with four outputs• Output current 2 A per output• Rated load voltage 24 VDC• Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors, and indicator lights


Pin assignment

The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 4DO 24 VDC, 2 A Standard forthe different terminal modules:

Table 11-23 Terminal assignment of the 4DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard


Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 3Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 7DO: Output signal (maximum 2 Aper channel)M: Ground load power supply







Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 4Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 8DO: Output signal (maximum 2 Aper channel)M: Ground load power supply







Block diagram

Figure 11-17 Block diagram of the 4DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard








Voltages, currents, po tentials Rated load voltage L+ (from the power module) 24 VDC• Polarity reversal Yes 1 Total current of the outputs (per module) 4 AIsolation• between the channels No• between the channels and backplane bus YesPermissible potential difference• between the different circuits 75 VDC, 60 VACInsulation tested 500 VDCCurrent consumption• From rated load voltage L+ (no load) Max. 5 mA per channelPower dissipation of the module Typ. 1.6 W



Output voltage• At signal "1" Min. L+ (-1V)Output current• At signal "1"

– Rated value –

Permitted range

2 A

7 mA to 2.4 A• With signal "0" (leakage current) Max. 0.5 mAOutput delay (for resistive load)• At "0" to "1" Max. 200 µs• At "1" to "0" Max. 1.3 msLoad resistor range 12 Ω to 3.4 kΩLamp load Max. 10 WConnecting two outputs in parallel• For redundant triggering of a load Yes (per module)• To increase performance NoControl of a digital input Yes






Typ. L+ (-55 to -60 V)





Digital Electronic Modules11.17 2DO 24 VDC/2 A High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB31-0AB0)


11.17 11.172DO 24 VD C/2 A High Feature digital electronic modu le(6ES7132-4BB31-0AB0)


Features• Digital electronic module with two outputs• Output current 2 A per output• Rated load voltage 24 VDC• Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors, and indicator lights• Supports clocked operation


Pin assignmentThe following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2DO 24 VDC, 2 A High Featurefor the different terminal modules:

Table 11-24 Terminal assignment of the 2DO 24 VDC/2 A High Feature


Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A4Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A8DO: Output signal (maximum 2 Aper channel)24 VDC: Sensor supply voltageM: Ground load power supply







Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8DO: Output signal (maximum 2 Aper channel)24 VDC: Sensor supply voltageM: Ground load power supplyTerminals 4 and 8 can be used forunneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7DO: Output signal (maximum 2 Aper channel)24 VDC: Sensor supply voltageM: Ground load power supply

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7DO: Output signal (maximum 2 Aper channel)24 VDC: Sensor supply voltageM: Ground load power supplyTerminals 4 and 8 can be used forunneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.





Block diagram

Figure 11-18 Block diagram of the 2DO 24 VDC/2 A High Feature







Data for specific modules Supports clocked operation YesNumber of outputs 2Length of cable• Unshielded Max. 600 m• Shielded Max. 1000 m

Voltages, currents, po tentials Rated load voltage L+ (from the power module) 24 VDC• Polarity reversal Yes 1 Total current of the outputs (per module) 4 AIsolation• Between the channels No• Between the channels and backplane bus YesPermissible potential difference• Between the different circuits 75 VDC, 60 VACInsulation tested 500 VDCCurrent consumption• From rated load voltage L+ (no load) Max. 5 mA per channelPower dissipation of the module Typ. 1.4 W

Status, interrupts, diagnostics Status display Green LED per channelDiagnostic functions• Group error Red "SF" LED• Diagnostic functions readable Yes


Output voltage• At signal "1" Min. L+ (-1V)Output current• At signal "1" – Rated value

– Permitted range2 A7 mA to 2.4 A

• With signal "0" (leakage current) Max. 0.5 mAOutput delay (for resistive load)• At "0" to "1" Max. 100 µs• At "1" to "0" Max. 400 µsLoad resistor range 12 Ω to 3.4 kΩLamp load Max. 5 WConnecting two outputs in parallel• For redundant triggering of a load Yes (per module)





• To increase performance NoControl of a digital input Yes


Typ. L+ (-55 to -60 V)


Short-circuit protection of the output Yes2 • Threshold on Typ. 4 A1 Polarity reversal can lead to the digital outputs being connected through2 Per channel



Digital Electronic Modules11.18 Digital electronic module 2DO 24 to 230 VAC (6ES7132-4FB00-0AB0)


11.18 11.18Digital electronic module 2DO 24 to 230 V AC (6ES7132-4FB00-0AB0)


Features• Digital electronic module with two outputs• Output current 2 A per output• Rated load voltage 24-48/120/230 VAC• Substitute value• Parameter assignment length: 3 bytes• Suitable for solenoid valves, AC contactors, and indicator lights

Pin assignmentThe following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2DO 24 to 230 VAC for thedifferent terminal modules:

Table 11-25 Terminal assignment of the 2DO 24-230 VAC


Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7DO: Output signal (maximum 2 Aper channel)N: Neutral conductor







Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7DO: Output signal (maximum 2 Aper channel)N: Neutral conductorTerminals 4 and 8 can be used forunneeded wires of up to 230VAC.

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7DO: Output signal (maximum 2 Aper channel)N: Neutral conductor

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7DO: Output signal (maximum 2 Aper channel)N: Neutral conductorTerminals 4 and 8 can be used forunneeded wires of up to 230VAC.





Block diagram

Figure 11-19 Block diagram of the 2DO 24-230 VAC





Voltages, currents, po tentials Rated load voltage L1 (from the power module) 24-230 VAC• Frequency 47 to 63 HzTotal current of the outputs (per module)• Up to 40° C Max. 2 A*• Up to 60° C Max. 1 A*Isolation• Between the channels No• Between the channels and backplane bus YesInsulation tested 2500 VDCCurrent consumption• From the backplane bus Max. 18 mA• From rated load voltage L1 (no load) Max. 15 mA per channel





Power dissipation of the module Max. 4 WStatus, interrupts, diagnostics



Output voltage• At signal "1" Min. L (-1.5 V)Output current (per channel)• At signal "1"

– Rated value – Permitted range

2 A0.1 mA to 2.2 A

• With signal "0" (leakage current) Max. 3 mAOutput delay (for resistive load)• At "0" to "1" Max. 15 ms• At "1" to "0" Max. 15 msZero cross inhibit voltage Max. 25 VMotor starter size• Up to 40° C Max. size in accordance with NEMA: 5• Up to 60° C Max. size in accordance with NEMA: 4Lamp load Max. 100 WConnecting two outputs in parallel• For redundant triggering of a load Yes (per module)• To increase performance No

Control of a digital input PossibleSwitch rate• For resistive load Max. 10 Hz• With inductive load Max. 0.5 Hz• For lamp load Max. 1 HzShort-circuit protection of the output Yes, by means of fuse in the power module* Total current of the outputs (per module), see figure below





Total current of the outputs

Figure 11-20 Total current of the outputs for 2DO 24 to 230 VAC



Digital Electronic Modules11.19 2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A digital electronic module (6ES7132-4HB01-0AB0)


11.19 11.192RO NO 24-120 VDC /5 A, 24-230 VAC /5 A digital electronic module(6ES7132-4HB01-0AB0)

Order number6ES7132-4HB01-0AB0

Note

If you connect an extra-low voltage system (SELV/PELF) on one channel of the2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A, you can only use an extra-low voltage system(SELV/PELF) on the other channel.

As of version 2 of the 2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A there is no longer aninternal jumper between terminals 2 and 6. If you need this jumper, you can replace it withan external jumper between terminals 3 and 7 (see block diagram below).

Features• Digital electronic module with two relay outputs• Output current 5 A per output• Rated load voltage up to 120 VDC and up to 230 VAC• Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors, and indicator lights• Isolated from the supply voltage

Caution

The rated supply voltage of the 2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A is 24 VDC.The 2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A can only be located in a potential groupwith 24 VDC (from the power module).





Pin assignmentThe following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A,

24-230 VAC/5 A (as of version 2) for the different terminal modules:

Table 11-26 Terminal assignment of the 2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A (as of Version 2)


Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 713, 14: Normally open contactchannel 0:23, 24: Normally open contactchannel 1:Internal jumper between

terminals 2 and 3, 6 and 7

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 713, 14: Normally open contactchannel 0:23, 24: Normally open contactchannel 1:Terminals 4 and 8 can be usedfor unneeded wires up to theload voltage used.Internal jumper betweenterminals 2 and 3, 6 and 7

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 713, 14: Normally open contact

channel 0:23, 24: Normally open contactchannel 1:Internal jumper betweenterminals 2 and 3, 6 and 7







Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 713, 14: Normally open contactchannel 0:23, 24: Normally open contactchannel 1:Terminals 4 and 8 can be usedfor unneeded wires up to theload voltage used.Internal jumper betweenterminals 2 and 3, 6 and 7

Block diagram

Figure 11-21 Block diagram of the 2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A, 230 VAC/5 A








Voltages, currents, po tentials Rated supply voltage L+ (from the powermodule)

24 VDC

Reverse polarity protection Current per channel Yes• Up to 50° C Max. 5 A• Up to 60° C Max. 4 AIsolation• Between the channels Yes• Between the channels and backplane bus Yes• Between the channels and supply voltage Yes• Between the supply voltage and backplane

busYes

Permissible potential difference• Between the supply voltage and backplane

bus75 VDC, 60 VAC

• Between channels and backplane bus 240 VAC• Between the channels and supply voltage 240 VACInsulation tested Yes• Between the supply voltage and backplane

bus500 VDC

• Between channels and backplane bus 1500 VAC• Between the channels and supply voltage 1500 VACCurrent consumption• From the power supply L+

Max. 30 mAPower dissipation of the module Typ. 0.6 WStatus, interrupts, diagnostics



Output current• Continuous thermal current Max. 5 A• Min. load current 8 mA• Min. voltage 17 V





Connecting two outputs in parallel• For redundant triggering of a load No• To increase performance NoControl of a digital input YesSwitch rate• For resistive load 2 Hz• With inductive load 0.5 Hz• For lamp load 2 HzLimitation (internal) of the voltage induced oncircuit interruption

No

Short-circuit protection of the output1 No1 The relay outputs must be fused externally with 6A.





Switching capacity and lifetime of the contactsWith an external protective circuit, the contacts will last longer than specified in the table.

This table shows the switching capacity and endurance of the relay contacts:

Table 11-27 Switching capacity and lifetime of the relay contacts

Resistive load Voltage Current Operating cycles(typical)

5.0 A 0.1 million4.0 A 0.2 million2.0 A 0.5 million1.0 A 1.6 million0.5 A 4 million

24 VDC

0.1 A 7 million60 VDC 0.5 A 1.6 million120 VDC 0.2 A 1.6 million48 VAC 2.0 A 1.6 million60 VAC 2.0 A 1.2 million

5.0 A 0.1 million3.0 A 0.2 million2.0 A 0.4 million1.0 A 0.8 million

120 VAC

0.5 A 1.5 million5.0 A 0.1 million3.0 A 0.2 million2.0 A 0.4 million1.0 A 0.8 million

For resistive load

230 VAC

0.5 A 1.5 million2.0 A 0.1 million1.0 A 0.2 million

24 VDC

0.5 A 0.5 million60 VDC 0.5 A 0.2 million120 VDC 0.2 A 0.5 million48 VAC 1.0 A 0.7 million60 VAC 1.0 A 0.5 million

2.0 A 0.1 million1.0 A 0.3 million0.5 A 1 million

For inductive load inaccordance with IEC947-5-1 DC 13/ AC 15

120 VAC

0.1 A 2 million2.0 A 0.1 million1.0 A 0.3 million

For inductive load inaccordance with IEC947-5-1 DC 13/ AC 15

230 VAC

0.5 A 1 million



Digital Electronic Modules11.20 2RO NO/NC 24-48 VDC/5 A 24-230 VAC/5 A digital electronic module (6ES7132-4HB10-0AB0)


11.20 11.202RO NO/NC 24-48 VDC /5 A 24-230 VAC /5 A digital electronic module(6ES7132-4HB10-0AB0)

Features• Digital electronic module with two relay outputs• Output current 5 A per output• Substitute value• Parameter assignment length: 3 bytes• Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors, and indicator lights• Isolated from the supply voltage• Normally open contact and normally closed contact

Note

If you connect an extra-low voltage system (SELV/ PELV) on one channel of the relaymodule, you can only use an extra-low voltage system (SELV/ PELV) on the otherchannel.

Pin assignmentThe following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2RO NO/NC 24-48 VDC/5 A,24-230 VAC/5 A for the different terminal modules:

Table 11-28 Terminal assignment of the 2RO NO/NC 24-48 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A


Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 71, 2: normally open contactchannel 01, 3: normally closed contactchannel 05, 6: normally open contactchannel 15, 7: normally closed contactchannel 1







Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 71, 2: normally open contactchannel 01, 3: normally closed contactchannel 05, 6: normally open contactchannel 15, 7: normally closed contactchannel 1







Block diagram

Figure 11-22 Block diagram of the 2RO NO/NC 24-48 VDC/5 A 24-230 VAC/5 A


Dimensions and weight Dimensions W × H × D 15 × 81 × 52 (mm)Weight Approx. 50 g

Data for specific modules Supports isochronous operation NoNumber of outputs 2Length of cable• Unshielded Max. 600 m• Shielded Max. 1000 m

Voltages, currents, potentials Rated supply voltage L+ (from the power

module)

24 VDC

Reverse polarity protection Current per channel Yes• Up to 50° C Max. 5 A• Up to 60° C Max. 4 AIsolation• Between the channels Yes• Between channels and backplane bus Yes• Between the channels and supply voltage Yes• Between the supply voltage and backplane

busYes





Permissible potential difference• Between the supply voltage and backplane

bus75 VDC, 60 VAC

• Between channels and backplane bus 240 VAC• Between the channels and supply voltage 240 VACInsulation tested• Between the supply voltage and backplane

bus500 VDC

• Between channels and backplane bus 2500 VDC• Between the channels and supply voltage 2500 VDCCurrent consumption• From the power supply L+ Max. 30 mA• From the backplane bus Max. 10 mA


Status display Green LEDs per channelDiagnostic functions No

Data for selecting an actuator Output current• Continuous thermal current Max. 5 A• Min. load current 8 mAConnecting two outputs in parallel• For redundant triggering of a load No• To increase performance

NoControl of a digital input YesSwitch rate• For resistive load 2 Hz• With inductive load 0.5 Hz• For lamp load 2 HzLimitation (internal) of the voltage induced oncircuit interruption

No

Short-circuit protection of the output1 No1 The relay outputs must be protected externally with a 6 A fuse. For installation in a hazardous areain accordance with the National Electric Code (NEC), only remove the fuse using a suitable tool if the

module is not in a potentially explosive area.





Switching capacity and lifetime of the co ntactsWith an external protective circuit, the contacts will last longer than specified in the following

table.The normally open and normally closed contacts of the relay vary in their length of servicelife. This table shows the switching capacity and lifetime of the contacts.

Table 11-29 Switching capacity and lifetime of the contacts

Resistive load Voltage Current Operating cycles(typ.)

Normally opencontact

Operating cycles(typ.)

Normally closedcontact

5,0 A 0.1 million 0.15 million4.0 A 0.2 million 0.175 million

2.0 A 0.45 million 0.3 million0.5 A 1.4 million 1.1 million

24 VDC

0.1 A 1.5 million 1.5 million2.0 A 0.15 million 0.11 million1.0 A 0.3 million 0.2 million0.5 A 0.6 million 0.6 million

48 VDC

0.1 A 0.8 million 0.6 million48 VAC 2.0 A 0.45 million 0.35 million60 VAC 2.0 A 0.45 million 0.35 million

5.0 A 0.1 million 0.1 million3.0 A 0.2 million 0.2 million2.0 A 0.4 million 0.3 million1.0 A 0.8 million 0.6 million

120 VAC

0.5 A 1.5 million 1.0 million5.0 A 0.1 million 0.1 million3.0 A 0.2 million 0.2 million2.0 A 0.4 million 0.3 million1.0 A 0.8 million 0.6 million

For resistive load

230 VAC

0.5 A 1.5 million 1.0 million





Resistive load Voltage Current Operating cyclestyp.)

Normally open

contact

Operating cyclestyp.)

Normally closed

contact2.0 A 0.1 million 0.1 million


24 VDC




For inductive load inaccordance with IEC947-5-1 DC 13/ AC15

48 VDC


48 VAC 1.0 A 0.5 million 0.3 million

60 VAC 1.0 A 0.5 million 0.3 million


1.0 A 0.3 million 0.1 million0.5 A 0.9 million 0.6 million

120 VAC





230 VAC









Analog electronic modules 1212.1 12.1Introduction

Analog electronic module range

The range of analog electronic modules (EM) includes modules for measuring voltages andcurrents. For time-critical measuring of voltage and current, you can use the HIGH SPEEDmodules. The HIGH FEATURE modules provide a higher resolution and greater accuracy.There are also modules available for connecting thermocouples and resistancethermometers or resistors.Modules for connecting loads/actuators to current and voltage outputs complete the range.

12.2 12.2Analog value representation

12.2.1 Overview

Electronic mo dules with analog inputsYou can use electronic modules with analog inputs to record, evaluate, and convertcontinuously changing signals to digital values that you can process further. Examples ofsuch continuously changing signals are those that occur when measuring temperature orpressure.

Electronic mo dules with analog outputsThe electronic modules with analog outputs allow digitized values that are input by means ofa controller to be converted in an analog output module to a corresponding analog signal(current or voltage) to control actuators (setpoint input for speed controllers, temperaturecontrollers, etc.).



Analog electronic modules12.2 Analog value representation


Measured values in the case of a wire break depending on diagnostic being enabledThe rules and additions outlined below apply to the following measuring ranges:• V to 5 V, 4 mA to 20 mA• Temperature sensor Pt xxx Standard and Climatic, Ni xx Standard and Climatic, Cu 10

Standard and Climatic• Thermocouple type E, N, J, K, L, S, R, B, C, TThe following additions and rules apply:

Table 12-1 Measured values in the case of a wire break depending on diagnostic being enabled

Measured valuesormat Param eter assignmen t

Decimal Hexadecimal

Explanation

• Enable "Wire break" diagnostics (at 1to 5 V, 4 to 20 mA, RTD)1

32767 7FFFH • "Open circuit" diagnostic message

• "Wire break check" enabled (in thecase of TC)

32767 7FFFH • "Open circuit" diagnostic message

• "Wire break" diagnostics disabled (at1 to 5 V, 4 to 20 mA, RTD)1

• "Overflow/underflow" enabled

-32767 8000H • Measured value after leaving theunderrange

• "Lower limit value violated"diagnostic message

• "Wire break" diagnostics disabled (at1 to 5 V, 4 to 20 mA, RTD)1

• "Overflow/underflow" disabled

-32767 8000H • Measured value after leaving theunderrange

S7

• "Wire break check" disabled (in thecase of TC)

--- --- • Open input: undefined measuredvalue

1 Measuring range limits for detection of wire break/underrange:1 to 5 V: for 0, 296 V4 to 20 mA: for 1,185 mA

12.2.2 Analog value representation for measu ring ranges with SIM ATIC S7

Analog value representationThe digitized analog value for input and output values is the same in the same rated range.

Analog values are represented in twos complement.The following table shows the analog value representation of the analog electronic modules.

Table 12-2 Analog value representation (SIMATIC S7 format)

Resolution Analog value

Bit number 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0Significance of the bits S 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20





SignThe sign (S, +/-) of the analog value is always in bit number 15:• "0" → +• "1" → –

Measured-value resolutionIn the table below, you will find the representation of the binary analog values and theassociated decimal and hexadecimal representation of the units of the analog values.The following table shows the resolutions 11, 12, 13, and 15 bits + sign. Each analog valueis entered in the accumulator with left justification. The bits marked "x" are set to "0".

Table 12-3 Measured-value resolution of the analog values (SIMATIC S7 format)

Units Analog valueesolution in bits

Decimal Hexadecimal High byte Low byte

11+ sign (S) 16 10H S 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 x x x x12 + sign (S) 8 8H S 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 x x x13 + sign (S) 4 4H S 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 x x15 + sign (S) 1 1H S 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

Note

This resolution does not apply to temperature values. The converted temperature values arethe result of a conversion in the analog electronic module.

Note

The following applies to temperature measurements: In the overrange and underrange, thegradient of the characteristic curve at the point where the linearized rated range is left isretained.





12.2.3 Meas uring ranges of the analog input modules in SIMA TIC S7 format for voltage,current, and resistance-type sensors

IntroductionThe following tables contain the digitized analog values for the measuring ranges of theanalog input modules.The binary representation of the analog values is always the same, so these tables onlycompare the measuring ranges and the units.

Measuring ranges for voltage: ± 80 mV , ± 2.5 V, ± 5 V, ± 10 V

Table 12-4 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges ±80 mV, ±2.5 V, ±5 V, and ±10 VUnitseasuring

range ± 80 mVMeasuring

range ± 2.5 VMeasuring

range ± 5 VMeasuring

range± 10 V

Decimal HexadecimalRange

> 94,071 > 2,9397 > 5,8794 > 11,7589 32767 7FFF H Overflow94,071

:80,003

2,9397:

2,5001

5,8794:

5,0002

11,7589:

10,0004

32511:

27649

7EFFH :

6C01H Overrange

80,00060,000

:- 60,000

- 80,000

2,51,86

:- 1,86

- 2,50

5,003,75

:- 3,75

- 5,00

10,007,50

:- 7,50

- 10,00

2764820736

:-20736

-27648

6C00H 5100H

:AF00H

9400H

Rated range

- 80,003:

- 94,074

- 2,5001:

- 2,9397

- 5,0002:

- 5,8796

- 10,0004:

- 11,759

-27649:

-32512

93FFH :

8100H Underrange

< - 94,074 < - 2,9397 < - 5,8796 < - 11,759 -32768 8000H Underflow

Measuring ranges for voltage and current: 1 to 5 V, 0 to 20 mA , 4 to 20 m A

Table 12-5 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges 1 to 5 V, 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA

Unitseasuring range 1to 5 V

Measuring range0 to 20 mA

Measuring range4 to 20 mA Decimal Hexadecimal

Range

> 5,704 > 23,5178 > 22,8142 32767 7FFF H Overflow5,704

:5,000145

23,5178:

20,0007

22,8142:

20,0005

32511:

27649

7EFFH :

6C01H Overrange

5,0004,000

:1,000

20,000015,0000

:0,0000

20,000016,0000

:4,0000

2764820736

:0

6C00H 5100H

:0H

Rated range

0,999855:

0,296

3,9995.

1,1852

-1:

-4864

FFFFH :

ED00H Underrange

< 0,296

Negative valuesnot possible

< 1,1852 -32768 8000H Underflow





Measuring range for current: ± 20 m A

Table 12-6 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range ± 20 mAUnitseasuring range ± 20 m A

Decimal Hexadecimal

Range

> 23,5150 32767 7FFFH Overflow23,5150

:20,0007

32511:

27649

7EFFH :

6C01H Overrange

20,000014,9980

:- 14,9980- 20,0000

2764820736

:-20736-27648

6C00H 5100H

:AF00H 9400H

Rated range

- 20,0007:

- 23,5160

-27649:

-32512

93FFH :

8100H Underrange

< - 23,5160 -32768 8000H Underflow

Measuring ranges for resistance-type sensors: 150 Ω, 300 Ω, 600 Ω, 3000 Ω

Table 12-7 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges 150 Ω, 300 Ω, 600 Ω, 3000 Ω

Unitseasuring range150 Ω

Measuring range300 Ω

Measuring range600 Ω

Measuring range3000 Ω Decimal Hexa-

decimal

Range

> 176.38 > 352,77 > 705,53 > 3527,67 32767 7FFF H Overflow176,38

:150,005

352,77:

300,01

705,53:

600,02

3527,67:

3000,11

32511:

27649

7EFFH :

6C01H Overrange

150,00112,50

:0,00

300,00225,00

:0,00

600,00450,00

:0,00

3000,002250,00

:0,00

2764820736

:0

6C00H 5100H

:0H

Rated range

-1:

-4864

FFFFH :

ED00H Underrange*

(Negative values not physically possible)

-32768 8000H Underflow** If the resistors are connected incorrectly





12.2.4 Meas uring ranges of the analog input modules in SIMA TIC S7 format forresistance thermometer

Measuring ranges for resistance thermometer Pt x00 Standard

Table 12-8 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges Pt 100, 200, 500, 1000 Standard in °C and °F

Units Unitst x00 Standard in °C(1 digit = 0.1°C) Decimal Hexa-

decimal

Pt x00 Standard in °F(1 digit = 0.1 °F) Decimal Hexa-

decimal

Range

> 1000,0 32767 7FFFH > 1832,0 32767 7FFFH Overflow1000,0

:850,1

10000:

8501

2710H :

2135H

1832,0:

1562,1

18320:

15621

4790H :

3D05H Overrange

850,0:

-200,0

8500:

-2000

2134H :

F830H

1562,0:

-328,0

15620:

-3280

3D04H :

F330H Rated range

-200,1:

-243,0

-2001:

-2430

F82FH :

F682H

-328,1:

-405,4

-3281:

-4054

F32FH :

F02AH Underrange

< - 243,0 -32768 8000H < - 405,4 -32768 8000H Underflow

Measuring ranges for resistance thermometer Pt x00 Climatic

Table 12-9 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges Pt 100, 200, 500, 1000 Climatic in °C and °F

Units Unitst x00 Climatic in °C(1 digit = 0.01°C) Decimal Hexa-

decimal

Pt x00 Climatic in °F(1 digit = 0.01 °F) Decimal Hexa-

decimal

Range

> 155,00 32767 7FFFH > 311,00 32767 7FFF H Overflow155,00

:130,01

15500:

13001

3C8CH :

32C9H

311,00:

266,01

31100:

26601

797CH :

67E9H Overrange

130,00

:-120,00

13000

:-12000

32C8H

:D120H

266,00

:-184,00

26600

:-18400

67E8H

:B820H

Rated range

-120,01:

-145,00

-12001:

-14500

D11FH :

C75CH

-184,01:

-229,00

-18401:

-22900

B81FH :

A68CH Underrange

< - 145,00 -32768 8000H < - 229,00 -32768 8000H Underflow





Measuring ranges for resistance thermometer Ni x00 Standard

Table 12-10 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges Ni 100, 200, 500, 1000 Standard in °C and °FUnits Unitsi x00 Standard in °C

(1 digit = 0.1°C) Decimal Hexa-decimal

Ni x00 Standard in °F(1 digit = 0.1 °F) Decimal Hexa-

decimal

Range


:250,1

2950:

2501

B86H :

9C5H

563,0:

482,1

5630:

4821

15FEH :

12D5H Overrange

250,0:

-60,0

2500:

-600

9C4H :

FDA8H

482,0:

-76,0

4820:

-760

12D4H :

FD08H Rated range

-60,1:

-105,0

-601:

-1050

FDA7H :

FBE6H

-76,1:

-157,0

-761:

-1570

FD07H :

F9DEH Underrange

< -105,0 -32768 8000H < -157,0 -32768 8000H Underflow

Measuring ranges for resistance thermometer Ni x00 Climatic

Table 12-11 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges Ni 100, 200, 500, 1000 Climatic in °C and °F

Units Unitsi x00 Climatic in °C(1 digit = 0,01°C)

Decimal Hexa-decimal

Ni x00 Climatic in °F(1 digit = 0.01 °F)

Decimal Hexadecimal

Range


:250,01

29500:

25001

733CH :

61A9H

327,66:

280,01

32766:

28001

7FFEH :

6D61H Overrange

250,00:

-60,00

25000:

-6000

61A8H :

E890H

280,00:

-76,00

28000:

-7600

6D60H :

E250H Rated range

-60,01:

-105,00

-6001:

-10500

E88FH :

D6FCH

-76,01:

-157,00

-7601:

-15700

E24FH :

C2ACH Underrange

< - 105,00 -32768 8000H < - 157,00 -32768 8000H Underflow





Measuring ranges for resistance thermom eter Cu 10 Standard

Table 12-12 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges Cu 10 Standard in °C und °FUnits Unitsu 10 Standard in °C

(1 digit = 0.1°C) Decimal Hexa-decimal

Cu 10 Standard in °F(1 digit = 0.1 °F) Decimal Hexa-

decimal

Range


:260,1

3120:

2601

C30H :

A29H

593,6:

500,1

5936:

5001

1730H :

12D5H Overrange

260,0:

-200,0

2600:

-2000

A28H :

F830H

500,0:

-328,0

5000:

-3280

1389H :

F330H Rated range

-200,1:

-240,0

-2001:

-2400

F82FH :

F6A0H

-328,1:

-400,0

-3281:

-4000

F32FH :

F060H Underrange

< - 240,0 -32768 8000H < - 400,0 -32768 8000H Underflow

Measuring ranges for resistance thermom eter Cu 10 C limatic

Table 12-13 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring ranges Cu 10 Climatic in °C und °F

Units Unitsu 10 Climatic in °C(1 digit = 0.01°C)


Cu 10 Clima tic in °F(1 digit = 0.01° F)


Range


:150,01

18000:

15001

4650H :

3A99H

327,66:

280,01

32766:

28001

7FFEH :

6D61AH Overrange

150,00:

-50,00

15000:

-5000

3A98H :

EC78H

280,00:

-58,00

28000:

-5800

6D60H :

E958H Rated range

-50,01:

-60,00

-5001:

-6000

EC77H :

E890H

-58,01:

-76,00

-5801:

-7600

E957H :

E250H

Underrange

< - 60,00 -32768 8000H < - 76,00 -32768 8000H Underflow





12.2.5 Meas uring ranges of the analog input modu les in SIMA TIC S7 format forthermocouples

Measuring range for thermocouple: Type B

Table 12-14 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type B in °C and °F

Units Unitsype B in °C


Type B in °F


Range


:1820,1

20700:

18201

50DCH :

4719H

3276,6:

2786,6

32766:

27866

7FFEH :

6CDAH Overrange

1820,0:

0,0

18200:0

4718H :

0000H

2786,5:

32

27865:

320

6CD9H :

0140H Rated range

-0,1:

-120,0

-1:

-1200

FFFFH :

FB50H

31,9:

-184,0

319:

-1840

013FH :

F8D0H Underrange

< -120,0 -32768 8000H < -184,0 -32768 8000H Underflow

Measuring range for thermocouple: Type C

Table 12-15 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type C in °C and °F

Units Unitsype C in °C


Type C in °F


Range


:2315,1

25000:

23151

61A8H :

5A6FH

3276,6:

2786,6

32766:

27866

7FFEH :

6CDAH Overrange

2315,0

:0,0

23150

:0

5A6EH

:0000H

2786,5

:32,0

27865

:320

6CD9H

:0140H

Rated range

0,1:

-120,0

-1:

-1200

FFFFH :

FB50H

31,9:

-184,0

319:

-1840

013FH :

F8D0H Underrange

< -120,0 -32768 8000H < -184,0 -32768 8000H Underflow





Measuring range for thermocouple type E

Table 12-16 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type E in °C and °FUnits Unitsype E in °C


Type E in °FDecimal Hexa-

decimal

Range


:1000,1

12000:

10001

2EE0H :

2711H

2192,0:

1832,1

21920:

18321

55A0H :

4791H Overrange

1000,0:

-270,0

10000:

-2700

2710H :

F574H

1832,0:

-454,0

18320:

-4540

4790H :

EE44H Rated range

< -270,0 - 32768 8000H < -454,0 - 32768 8000H Underflow

Measuring range for thermocouple type J

Table 12-17 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type J in °C and °F

Units Unitsype J in °CDecimal Hexa-

decimal

Type J in °FDecimal Hexa-

decimal

Range


:1200,1

14500:

12010

38A4H :

2EEAH

2642,0:

2192,1

26420:

21921

6734H :

55A1H Overrange

1200,0:

-210,0

12000:

-2100

2EE0H :

F7CCH

2192,0:

-346,0

21920:

-3460

55A0H :

F27CH Rated range

< -210,0 - 32768 8000H < -346,0 - 32768 8000H Underflow

Measuring range for thermocouple type K

Table 12-18 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type K in °C and °F

Units Unitsype K in °CDecimal Hexa-decim

al

Type K in °FDecimal Hexa-deci

mal

Range


:1372,1

16220:

13721

3F5CH :

3599H

2951,6:

2501,7

29516:

25062

734CH :

61B9H Overrange

1372,0:

-270,0

13720:

-2700

3589H :

F574H

2501,6:

-454,0

25061:

-4540

61B8H :

EE44H Rated range

< -270,0 - 32768 8000H < -454,0 - 32768 8000H Underflow





Measuring range for thermocouple type L

Table 12-19 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type L in °C and °FUnits Unitsype L in °C


Type L in °FDecimal Hexa-

decimal

Range


:900,1

11500:

9001

2CECH :

2329H

2102,0:

1652,1

21020:

16521

521CH :

4089H Overrange

900,0:

-200,0

9000:

-2000

2328H :

F830H

1652,0:

-328,0

16520:

-3280

4088H :

F330H Rated range

< -200,0 -32768 8000H < -328,0 -32768 8000H Underflow

Measuring range for thermocouple type N

Table 12-20 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type N in °C and °F

Units Unitsype N in °CDecimal Hexa-

decimal

Type N in °FDecimal Hexa-

decimal

Range


:1300,1

15500:

13001

3C8CH :

32C9H

2822,0:

2372,1

28220:

23721

6E3CH :

5CA9H Overrange

1300,0:

-270,0

13000:

-2700

32C8H :

F574H

2372,0:

-454,0

23720:

-4540

5CA8H :

EE44H Rated range

< -270,0 -32768 8000H < -454,0 -32768 8000H Underflow

Measuring range for thermocouple types R, S

Table 12-21 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type R, S in °C and °F

Units Unitsypes R, S in °CDecimal Hexa-

decimal

Types R, S in °FDecimal Hexa-

decimal

Range


:1769,1

20190:

17691

4EDEH :

451BH

3276,6:

3216,3

32766:

32163

7FFEH :

7DA3H Overrange

1769,0:

-50,0

17690:

-500

451AH :

FE0CH

3216,2:

-58,0

32162:

-580

7DA2H :

FDBCH Rated range

-50,1:

-170,0

-510:

-1700

FE0BH :

F95CH

-58,1:

-274,0

-581:

-2740

FDBBH :

F54CH Underrange

< -170,0 -32768 8000H < -274,0 -32768 8000H Underflow





Measuring range for thermocouple type T

Table 12-22 SIMATIC S7 format: Measuring range Type T in °C and °FUnits Unitsype T in °C


Type T in °F


Range


:400,1

5400:

4001

1518H :

0FA1H

1004,0:

752,1

10040:

7521

2738H :

1DC1H Overrange

400,0:

-270,0

4000:

-2700

0FA0H :

F574H

752,0:

-454,0

7520:

-4540

1D60H :

EE44H Rated range

< -270,0 -32768 8000H < -454,0 -32768 8000H Underflow

12.2.6 Output ranges of the analog output modules in SIMA TIC S7 format for voltage andcurrent

Output modu les for voltage and current: ± 5V; ± 10V; ± 20m A

Table 12-23 SIMATIC S7 format: Output ranges ± 5 V; ± 10 V; ± 20 mA

Unitsutput range ± 5 V Output range ± 10 V Output range ± 20mA Decimal Hexa-

decimal

Range

0 0 0 > 32511 > 7EFFH Overflow5,8800

:5,0002

11,7589:

10,0004

23,5150:

20,0007

32511:

27649

7EFFH :

6C01H Overrange

5,00003,7500

:

- 3,7500- 5,0000

10,00007,5000

:

- 7,5000- 10,0000

20,000014,9980

:

- 14,9980- 20,0000

2764820736

:

-20736-27648

6C00H 5100H

:

AF00H 9400H

Rated range

- 5,0002:

- 5,8800

- 10,0004:

- 11,7589

- 20,0007:

- 23,5160

-27649:

-32512

93FFH :

8100H Underrange

0 0 < - 23,5160 < -32512 < 8100H Underflow



Analog electronic modules12.3 Fundamentals of analog value processing


Output mo dules for voltage and current: 1 to 5 V; 4 to 20 m A

Table 12-24 SIMATIC S7 format: Output ranges 1 to 5V; 4 to 20mAUnitsutput range

Up to 5 VOutput rangeUp to 20 mA Decimal Hexa-

decimal

Range

0 0 > 32511 > 7EFFH Overflow5,7000

:5,0002

22,8100:

20,0005

32511:

27649

7EFFH :

6C01H Overrange

5,0000:

1,0000

20,0000:

4,0000

27648:0

6C00H :

0H Rated range

0,9998:0

3,9995:0

-1:

-6912

FFFFH :

E500H Underrange

0 0 < -6913 < E4FFH Underflow

12.3 12.3Fundamentals of analog value processing

12.3.1 Conne cting measu ring sensors

IntroductionYou can connect different measuring sensors to the analog input modules, depending on thetype of module involved:• Voltage sensor• Current sensors as:

– 2-wire measuring transducer – 4-wire measuring transducer

• Resistance-type sensorIn this chapter you will find out how to connect the measuring sensors and what to watch forwhen doing so.





Lines for analog signalsYou should use shielded and twisted-pair lines for the analog signals. This reduces the effect

of interference. You should ground the shield of the analog lines at both ends of the line. Ifthere are differences in potential between the ends of the line, a compensating current flowsvia the shield that can interfere with the analog signals. If this is the case, you should onlyground the shield at one end of the line.

Analog input modulesIn the case of the analog input modules there is electrical isolation:• Between the logic circuitry and backplane bus• Between the load voltage and the channels. The following differences exist:

– No isolation: Link between MANA and central grounding point

– Isolation: No link between MANA and the central grounding point (UISO)

Analog output modulesIn the case of the analog output modules there is generally electrical isolation:• Between the logic circuitry and backplane bus• Between the load voltage and MANA.

Note

Ensure that this potential difference UISO does not exceed the permitted value. If there isa possibility of exceeding the permitted value, make a connection between terminal MANA and the central grounding point.

Connecting mea suring sensors to analog inputsBetween the measuring lines M- of the input channels and the reference point of themeasuring circuit MANA there can be only a limited potential difference UCM (common-modevoltage). To ensure that the permitted value is not exceeded, you must take different stepsdepending on the whether the sensors are isolated or non-isolated. The steps you have to

take are described in this chapter.Generally speaking, however, when connecting two-wire measuring transducers for currentmeasurement and when connecting resistance-type sensors, you should not make aconnection from M- to MANA. This also applies to inputs that have been assigned parameterscorrespondingly but unused.

Note

For the analog input modules 2AI U, 2AI RTD, and 2AI TC, you must short-circuit unusedanalog inputs.





Abbreviations usedThe meanings of the abbreviations in the figures below are as follows:

M+ Measuring line (positive)M- Measuring line (negative)MANA Reference potential of the analog measuring circuitM Frame connectionL+ Rated load voltage 24 VDCUCM Potential difference between inputs and reference potential of the measuring

circuit MANA UISO Potential difference between MANA and central grounding point

Isolated measuring sensorsThe isolated measuring sensors are not connected to the local ground potential. They can befloating. Depending on local conditions or interference, potential differences UCM (static ordynamic) can occur between the measuring lines M- of the input channels and the referencepoint of the measuring circuit MANA.To ensure that the permitted value for U CM is not exceeded in environments with strong EMCinterference, the following applies:• In the case of the analog input modules 2AI U, 2AI I 4WIRE, and 2AI TC: Connect M-

with MANA!• When connecting two-wire measuring transducers for current measurement and when

connecting resistance-type sensors, you must not connect M- to M ANA.





The following figure illustrates the connection of isolated measuring sensors to the floatinganalog input modules.

Connection of isolated measuring sensors to a floating analog input module:

1

2

3

4

5

6

① Logic② Backplane bus③ Ground bus④ Central grounding point⑤ Recommended connection⑥ Isolated measuring sensors

Non-isolated measuring sensorsThe non-isolated measuring sensors are connected to the local ground potential. You mustconnect MANA to the ground potential. Depending on local conditions or interference,potential differences UCM (static or dynamic) can occur between the locally distributedmeasuring points.If the permitted value for UCM is exceeded, there must be equipotential bonding conductorsbetween the measuring points.The following figure illustrates the connection of non-isolated measuring sensors to a floatinganalog input module.





Connection of non-isolated measuring sensors to a floating analog input module:

5

4

1

2

3

① Logic② Backplane bus③ Ground bus④ Equipotential bonding conductor⑤ Non-isolated measuring sensors

Operating four-wire m easuring transducers on an external voltage supplyIf there is isolation between the output and the supply of the measuring transducer, you canconnect it to the 2AI I 4WIRE without additional connections.If there is no isolation between the output and the supply of the measuring transducer, youcan connect it to the 2AI I 4WIRE only if the reference potential of the power supply voltages(24 VDC) is the same.If there is an increase in interference radiation, a connection between M- and M ANA on theterminal module of the 2AI I 4WIRE is recommended.





12.3.2 Connec ting thermocouples

IntroductionThis section contains additional information on connecting thermocouples.

Com pensation of the reference junction temp eratureThere are various ways of obtaining the reference junction temperature in order to get anabsolute temperature value from the temperature difference between the reference junctionand the measuring point.

Table 12-25 Compensation of the reference junction temperature

Option Explanation Reference junction parame tersNo compensation You record not only the temperature of the

measurement point. The temperature of thereference junction (transition from Cu line tothermocouple line) also affects thethermo-electromotive force. The measured valueis thus errored.

None

Use of a compensatingbox on the incoming linesof a single thermocouple

You compensate using a compensating box. Thecompensating box is the transition point from theCu line to the thermocouple line. No furtherprocessing is necessary through the 2AI TCStandard.

None

Use of a Pt100 ClimaticRange resistancethermometer to record thereference junctiontemperature (best method)

You can record the reference junctiontemperature using a resistance thermometer(Pt100 Climatic Range). Given appropriateparameter assignment, this temperature value inthe ET 200S is distributed to the 2AI TC Standardmodules and calculated in the modules togetherwith the temperature value obtained for themeasurement point.Number of reference junctions: 1 1

The parameter assignment of the IM151-1and the 2AI TC must be coordinated:• AI RTD Standard assigned

parameters to the Pt100 climaticrange at the correct slot;

• AI TC ST: Reference junction : RTD;select reference junction number 1

• IM : Assignment of the reference junction to a slot with the 2AI RTDStandard; selection of a channel;

Internal compensation inthe case of the 2AI TCHigh Feature

There is a temperature sensor in theTM-E15S24-AT and TM-E15C24-AT terminalmodules. The temperature sensor reports thetemperature of the terminals to the 2AI TC HighFeature. This value is then calculated togetherwith the measured value from the channel of theelectronic module.

• AI TC High Feature:Reference junction: yes

Extension to a reference junctionThe thermocouples can be extended from their connection point by means of equalizinglines to the reference junction (transition to Cu line) or the compensating box. The reference

junction can also be an ET 200S terminal module.The equalization lines are made of the same material as the wires of the thermocouple. Theincoming lines are made of copper. Ensure correct polarity when connecting.





Use of a compensating boxThe influence of the temperature on the reference junction of a thermocouple (for example,

terminal boxes) can be adjusted with a compensating box.The compensating box contains a bridge circuit that is adjusted for a certain reference

junction temperature (compensating temperature). You connect the thermocouples or theiradjustment lines to the compensating box. The compensating box then forms the reference

junction.If the actual reference temperature differs from the compensating temperature, thetemperature-dependent bridge resistance changes. A positive or negative compensationvoltage occurs that is added to the thermo-electromotive force.Compensating boxes with a reference junction temperature of 0° C must be used for thecompensation of the analog input modules.Please note:• The compensating box must be supplied on an isolated basis.• The power supply unit must have adequate interference filtering (by means of a grounded

shielding winding, for example).





Com pensation by means of a resistance thermom eter at the 2AI RT DIf thermocouples that are connected to the inputs of the 2AI TC have the same reference

junction, compensate by means of a 2AI RTD.For both channels of the 2AI TC module, you can select "RTD" or "None" as the reference

junction. If you select "RTD," the same reference junction (RTD channel) is always used forboth channels.

Figure 12-1 Compensation by means of the 2AI RTD





Parameter assignment of the reference junction for the 2AI TC a nd the interface moduleYou set the reference junctions for the 2AI TC electronic modules by means of the following

parameters:

Table 12-26 Reference junction parameters

Parame ters Modu le Value range Explanation

Reference junction slot IM 151 None, 2 to 12(IM151-1 BASIC)

None, 2 to 63(IM151-1 HIGHFEATUREIM 151-1 STANDARDIM 151-1FO

STANDARD)

This parameter allows you to assign aslot (none, 2 to 12 or 2 to 63) where thechannel for measuring the referencetemperature is located (calculation ofthe compensation value).

Reference junction input IM 151 RTD at channel 0RTD at channel 1

This parameter allows you to set thechannel (0/1) for measuring thereference temperature (calculation ofthe compensation value) for theassigned slot.

Reference junction E0 andreference junction E1

AI TC None, RTD This parameter allows you to enablethe use of the reference junction.

Reference junction number AI TC 1 This parameter allows you to assign thereference junction (1) that contains thereference temperature (compensationvalue).

Examp le of assigning parameters of reference junctionsSetup: For simplification, only RTD and TC modules are shown in the following figure:

Figure 12-2 Example of assigning parameters of reference junctions





Relevant parameters to be set for the interface module:

Parameters Value

Reference junction slot 3Reference junction input RTD at channel 0

(Relevant) parameters for 2AI RTD and 2AI TC:

Slot P arameters Value

3 (2AI RTD) Type/range of measurement E0 RTD-4L Pt100 ClimaticReference junction E0 RTDReference junction E1 NoneReference junction number 1Type/range of measurement E0 TC-EL Type...

5 (2AI TC)

Type/range of measurement E1 (any)Reference junction E0 RTDReference junction E1 RTDReference junction number 1Type/range of measurement E0 TC-EL Type...

8 (2AI TC)

Type/range of measurement E1 TC-EL Type...Reference junction E0 NoneReference junction E1 RTDReference junction number 1Type/range of measurement E0 (any)

11 (2AI TC)

Type/range of measurement E1 TC-EL Type...

Non-isolated thermocouplesWhen you use non-isolated thermocouples, you must comply with the permittedcommon-mode voltage.





12.3.3 Connec ting unused channels of analog input modu les

RulesNote the following when connecting unused channels:• Deactivate unused input channels during parameter assignment.• A deactivated channel always returns a value of 7FFF H.• In the case of the standard modules 2AI U, 2AI I 2WIRE, 2AI I 4WIRE, 2AI RTD

Standard, 2AI RTD High Feature, 2AI TC Standard, and 2AI TC High Feature, the cycletime of the module is halved.

• The cycle time remains unchanged for the 4AI I 2WIRE standard module.• In the case of the HIGH SPEED modules 2AI U, 2AI I 2WIRE, and 2AI I 4WIRE, the cycle

time remains unchanged at 1 ms.• To adhere to the permissible potential differences (U CM), you must wire jumpers on the

terminal module for the unused channels. This is necessary in the case of the followingmodules:

TM terminal

Channel 0 Channel 1

Analog input module

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2AI U Standard

2AI RTD Standard, 2AI RTD HighFeature, 2AI TC High Feature

2AI TC Standard

2AI U High Speed



Analog electronic modules12.4 Behavior of the analog modules during operation and in the event of problems


12.4 12.4Behavior of the analog modules during operation and in the even t ofproblems

12.4.1 Influence of supply voltage and operating state on analog input and output values

PrincipleThe input and output values of the analog modules are dependent on the supply voltage forelectronic components/sensors and on the operating mode of the PLC (CPU of the DPmaster).

Table 12-27 How the analog input/output values depend on the operating mode of the PLC (CPU of the DP master) andthe supply voltage L +

Operating mode of thePLC (CPU of the DP

master)

Supply voltage L +to ET 200S (power

module)

Input value of the electronic modulewith analog inputs (evaluationpossible in the CPU of the DP

master)

Output value o f the electronicmodule with analog outputs

Process values PLC valuesL + applied7FFFH until the first conversion afterswitching on or after assigningparameters to the module

Until the first value output:• After switching on, a signal

of 0 mA or 0 V is output• Dependent on the

"Behavior atCPU-Master-STOP"parameter

Power on RUN

L + not applied 7FFFH -L + applied Process value Dependent on the "Behavior at

CPU-Master-STOP" parameterPower on STOP

L + not applied 7FFFH -L + applied - Dependent on the "Behavior at

CPU-Master-STOP" parameterPower off -

L + not applied - -



Analog electronic modules12.4 Behavior of the analog modules during operation and in the event of problems


12.4.2 Effect of the value range for the analog input

PrincipleThe behavior of the electronic modules with analog inputs depends on where the inputvalues are in the value range.

Table 12-28 Behavior of the analog modules depending on the position of the analog input value in the value range

Measu red value in Input value in SIMATIC S7 format Input value in SIMATIC S5 format

Rated range Measured value Measured valueOverrange/underrange Measured value Measured valueOverflow 7FFFH End of the overrange +1 plus overflow

bitUnderflow 8000H End of the underrange -1 plus overflow

bitBefore assigning parameters or in thecase of incorrect parameterassignment 1

7FFFH 7FFFH

1 The following applies to 2AI U Standard, 2AI I 2WIRE Standard, 2AI I 4WIRE Standard, 2AI RTD Standard, and 2AI TCStandard with product version 1: If you assign a parameter incorrectly and trigger the diagnostic message for a parameterassignment error (for example, wire break for measuring range ± 20 mA), the SF LED lights up on the module and you canevaluate the diagnostics. In this state, correct input values are delivered to the DP master.

12.4.3 Effect of the value range for the analog output

PrincipleThe behavior of the electronic modules with analog outputs depends on where the outputvalues are in the value range. The following table indicates this:

Table 12-29 Behavior of the analog modules depending on the position of the analog output value in the value range

Output value in Output value in SIMAT IC S5/S7 format

Rated range Value from DP master

Overrange/underrange Value from DP masterOverflow 0 signalUnderflow 0 signalBefore assigning parameters or in the case of incorrectparameter assignment 1

0 signal

1 The following applies to 2AO U Standard, 2AO I Standard with product version 1: If the assigned substitute value isoutside the nominal range, a diagnostic message for parameter error is entered and the SF LED lights up. In this state, theoutput values transmitted by the DP master are output at the analog output modules.



Analog electronic modules12.5 Parameters for analog electronic modules


12.4.4 Use of the shield connection

RulesTo avoid interference with analog electronic modules, we recommend the following:• Use shielded cables for the sensors/actuators.• Apply the cable shields on the shield connection element.• Connect the shield connection to the ground bus.

12.5 12.5Param eters for analog electronic modules

12.5.1 Param eters for analog electronic modules 2AI U ST, 2AI I 2WIR E ST,4AI I 2WIRE ST, and 2AI I 4WIRE ST

Overview

Table 12-30 Parameters for analog input modules U, I Standard

2AI UStandard

2AI I 2WIREStandard

4AI I 2WIREStandard

2AI I 4WIREStandard


Group diagnosis (parameter assignment error,internal error)

• Disable• Enable

Disable Module

Diagnostics: Diagnostics/ underflow • Disable• Enable

Disable Module

Diagnostics:wire break2

Diagnostics:wire break

Diagnostics:wire break1


Disable Channel

Smoothing • None• Weak• Medium• Strong

None Channel

Type/rangeof measure-ment

--- --- • Deactivated• ± 5V• Up to 5 V• ± 10V

± 10V Channel

--- Type/range ofmeasurement

--- • Deactivated• 2 WIRE: 4 to 20 mA

2 WIRE: 4 to 20 mA Channel

--- --- Type/range ofmeasurement

• Deactivated• 4 WIRE: 4 to 20 mA• 4 WIRE: ±20 mA

2 WIRE: 4 to 20 mA Channel

1 Only in the measuring range 4 to 20 mA2 Only in the measuring range 1 to 5 V






12.5.2 Param eters for analog electronic modu les 2AI U HF and 2AI I 2/4WIRE HF

Overview

Table 12-31 Parameters for analog electronic modules U, I High Feature

2AI U High Feature 2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature Value range Default setting Applicability



Disable Module


Disable Module

--- Diagnostics: Wire break1 • Disable• Enable

Disable Channel


None Channel

Type/range ofmeasurement

--- • Deactivated• ± 5V• 1 to 5 V• ± 10V

± 10V Channel

--- Type/range of measurement • Deactivated• 4 to 20 mA• ± 20mA

4 to 20 mA Channel

Interference frequency suppression • Disable• Enable

Disable Module

Run-time calibration • Disable• Enable

Disable Module

1 Only in the measuring range 4 to 20 mA






12.5.3 Param eters for analog electronic modules 2AI U High Speed , 2AI I 2WIR E HighSpeed, and 2AI I 4WIRE High Speed

Parameters

Table 12-32 Parameters for analog input modules U, I High Speed

2AI U High Speed 2AI I 2WIRE HighSpeed

2AI I 4WIRE HighSpeed


Group diagnosis (parameter assignment error, internalerror)


Disable Module


Disable Module

--- Diagnostics: Wirebreak

Diagnostics: Wirebreak


Disable Channel


None Channel


--- --- • Deactivated• ±10 V• ±5 V• ±2,5 V• Up to 5 V

± 10V Channel

--- Type/range ofmeasurement --- • Deactivated• 4 to 20 mA• 0 to 20 mA

4 to 20 mA Channel

--- --- Type/range ofmeasurement

• Deactivated• 4 to 20 mA• 0 to 20 mA• ± 20mA

4 to 20 mA Channel

Note

If you deactivate a channel of the HIGH SPEED module, you do not achieve any speedadvantage on account of the measuring procedure used.






12.5.4 Param eters for analog electronic modu les 2AI RTD ST, 2AI TC ST,and 2AI TC HF

Parameters

Table 12-33 Parameters for analog input modules RTD, TC

2AI RTDStandard

2AI TC Standard 2AI TC HighFeature




Disable Module


Disable Module

Diagnostics:Wire break2

Diagnostics: Wire break check1 • Disable• Enable

Disable Channel


None Channel

Temperatureunit

• Celsius• Fahrenheit

Celsius Module

--- Reference junction --- • None• RTD

None Channel

--- Reference

junction

• None• Yes (i.e. internal)

None Channel

--- Reference junctionnumber

--- • None• 1 to 8

(in the case of the IM151-1STANDARD and IM151-1FO STANDARD)

• 1(in the case of the IM151-1BASIC and IM151-1 HIGHFEATURE)

None Module


--- • Deactivated• 150 ohms• 300 ohms• 600 ohms• Pt100 Climatic• Ni100 Climatic Range• Pt100 Standard• Ni100 Standard

Pt100Standard

Channel





2AI RTDStandard

2AI TC Standard 2AI TC HighFeature


--- Type/range ofmeasurement

--- • Deactivated• Voltage ± 80 mV• TC-EL type T (Cu-CuNi)• TC-EL type K (NiCr-Ni)• TC-EL type B (PtRh-PtRh)• TC-EL type N (NiCrSi-NiSi)• TC-EL type E (NiCr-CuNi)• TC-EL type R (PtRh-Pt)• TC-EL type S (PtRh-Pt)• TC-EL type J (Fe-Cu-Ni)• TC-EL type L (Fe-Cu-Ni)

TC-EL type K(NiCr-Ni)

Channel

Type/rangeofmeasurement

• Deactivated• Voltage ± 80 mV• TC-EL type T (Cu-CuNi)• TC-EL type K (NiCr-Ni)• TC-EL type B (PtRh-PtRh)• TC-EL type C (WRe-WRe)• TC-EL type N (NiCrSi-NiSi)• TC-EL type E (NiCr-CuNi)• TC-EL type R (PtRh-Pt)• TC-EL type S (PtRh-Pt)• TC-EL type J (Fe-Cu-Ni)• TC-EL type L (Fe-Cu-Ni)

TC-EL type K(NiCr-Ni)

Channel

1 Only with thermocouples. A parameter assignment error occurs when the wire break diagnosis is enabled in the voltagemeasuring range.The module does not start up.

2 The wire break is only detected with constant-current lines.








Param eters Value range Default setting ApplicabilityMeasuring range • 150 Ω

•

300 Ω• 600 Ω• 3000 Ω• PTC• Pt100 Climatic• Ni100 Climatic Range• Pt100 Standard• Ni100 Standard• Pt500 standard range• Pt1000 standard range• Ni1000 standard range• Pt200 climatic range• Pt500 climatic range• Pt1000 climatic range• Ni1000 climatic range• Pt200 standard range• Ni120 standard range• Ni120 climatic range• Cu10 climatic range• Cu10 standard range• Ni200 standard range• Ni200 climatic range• Ni500 standard range• Ni500 climatic range

Pt100 Standard Channel

1 Wire break diagnostic is disabled if - Type of measurement = "deactivated" or Measuring Range = "PTC" was assigned.





Type of m easurement - temperature coefficient - measuring rangeThe following table lists the temperature coefficients and measuring ranges you can set for

each measurement type:

Type of measu rement Tem perature coefficient Meas uring range

Deactivated – –Four-conductor resistorThree-conductor resistor

– 150 Ω / 300 Ω / 600 Ω / 3000 Ω

Two-conductor resistor – 150 Ω / 300 Ω / 600 Ω / 3000 Ω / PTCPt 0.003850/ Pt 0.003916 /Pt 0.003902 / Pt 0.003920 /Pt 0.0038511

Pt100 climatic range /Pt100 standard range /Pt200 climatic range /Pt200 standard range /Pt500 climatic range /

Pt500 standard range /Pt1000 climatic range /Pt1000 standard range

Ni 0.0061801 / Ni 0.006720 Ni100 climatic range /NI100 standard range /Ni120 climatic range /Ni120 standard range /Ni200 climatic range /Ni200 standard range /Ni500 climatic range /Ni500 standard range /Ni1000 climatic range /Ni1000 standard range

Ni 0.005000 Ni 1000 climatic range2

Ni 1000 standard range 2

Three-conductor thermal resistor

Cu 0.004271 Cu10 climatic range /Cu10 standard range

Pt 0.003850 / Pt 0.003916 /Pt 0.003902 / Pt 0.003920 /Pt 0.003851

Pt100 climatic range /Pt100 standard range /Pt200 climatic range /Pt200 standard range /Pt500 climatic range /Pt500 standard range /Pt1000 climatic range /Pt1000 standard range

Ni 0.006180) / Ni 0.006720 Ni100 climatic range /

Ni100 standard range /Ni120 climatic range /Ni120 standard range /Ni200 climatic range /Ni200 standard range /Ni500 climatic range /Ni500 standard range /Ni1000 climatic range /Ni1000 standard range

Two-conductor thermal resistorFour-conductor thermal resistor

Ni 0.005000 Ni 1000 climatic range2Ni 1000 standard range 2

1 The default settings for the temperature coefficients are valid for Europe.2 For LG-Ni 1000 sensors from Siemens Building Ltd (Landis & Stäfa)





Tem perature coefficientThe correction factor for the temperature coefficient (α-value) specifies how much theresistance of a certain material changes when the temperature is raised by 1° C.The temperature coefficient depends on the chemical composition of the material. Only onevalue is used in Europe for each type of sensor (default value).Additional values enable you to make a sensor-specific setting for the temperaturecoefficient, therefore ensuring more accuracy.


12.5.6 Parameters for analog electronic modules 2AO U ST, 2AO U HF and 2AO I ST,2AO I HF

Overview

Table 12-35 Parameters for analog output modules U, I

2AO U Standard,2AO U High

Feature

2AO I Standard,2AO I High

Feature


Group diagnosis (parameterassignment error, internal error)


Disable Module

Diagnostics:Short-circuit to M ---•

Disable• Enable Disable Channel--- Diagnostics:

Wire break• Disable• Enable

Disable Channel

Reaction to CPU-/master-STOP • Output de-energized• Substitute a value• Keep last value

Output de-energized Module

Type/range ofoutput

--- • Deactivated• 1 to 5 V• ± 10V

± 10V Channel

--- Type/range ofoutput

• Deactivated• 4 to 20 mA• ± 20mA

4 to 20mA Channel

Substitute value1 To 65535 (value range must bewithin the nominal range) ±10V/ ±20V: 0 V4 to 20mA: 4 mA

1 to 5V: 1V

Channel

1 If there is no voltage going to the IM but the supply to the analog output modules continues, the substitute values thathave been assigned parameters are output. Substitute values must be within the nominal range. You can assign asparameters values from -27648 to +27648 (in the case of parameter assignment by means of the device database file).






12.5.7 Param eter description for the analog electronic modu les

SmoothingThe individual measured values are smoothed by means of digital filtering. The smoothingcan be adjusted in 4 steps, where the smoothing factor k multiplied by the cycle time of theelectronic module corresponds to the time constant of the smoothing filter. The greater thesmoothing, the greater the time constant of the filter.The figures below show the step response for the different smoothing factors depending onthe number of module cycles.

Figure 12-3 Smoothing in the case of the 2AI U Standard, 2AI U High Feature, 2AI I 2WIRE

Standard, 2AI I 4WIRE Standard, 2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature, 2AI RTD Standard,2AI RTD High Feature, 2AI TC Standard, 2AI TC High Feature





Figure 12-4 Smoothing with 4AI I 2WIRE ST

Figure 12-5 Smoothing in the case of the 2AI U High Speed, 2AI I 2WIRE High Speed, 2AI I 4WIRE

High Speed

Interference frequency suppressionThe 2AI U High Feature and 2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature analog input modules support theinterference frequency suppression setting (50 Hz or 60 Hz) for the interface module. TheseHIGH FEATURE analog input modules also allow you to disable interference frequencysuppression, thus enabling you to forego the setting on the interface module. If you disableinterference frequency suppression, the conversion and cycle times become faster for thesemodules.



Analog electronic modules12.6 2AI U Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4FB01-0AB0)


Run-time calibration• 2AI U High Feature

Run-time calibration can be enabled at module parameter assignment for the 2AI U HighFeature analog electronic module to adjust for component drift due to changes in ambienttemperature. During the calibration interval, the updating of data is delayed by 250 ms.Calibration takes place each time the ambient temperature changes by 5 °C.

• 2AI I 2/4WIRE High FeatureRun-time calibration can be enabled at module parameter assignment for the 2AI I2/4WIRE High Feature analog electronic module to periodically adjust for the offsetvoltage drift of the A/D converter. During the calibration interval, the updating of data isdelayed by 200 ms. The accuracy limits of the module will be met without run-timecalibration.

Reference junction, reference junction numberSee "Connecting thermocouples."


12.6 12.62AI U Standard analog electronic m odule (6ES7134-4FB01-0AB0)


Features• 2 inputs for measuring voltage• Input ranges:

± 10 V, resolution 13 bits + sign± 10 V, resolution 13 bits + sign1 to 5 V, resolution 13 bits

• Isolated from the load voltage L+• Permitted common-mode voltage 2 VSS AC





Pin assignmentThe following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AI U Standard for the different

terminal modules:

Table 12-36 Terminal assignment of the 2AI U Standard


Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A4Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A8M+: Input signal "+"M-: Input signal "-"Mana : Ground of the module

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8M+: Input signal "+"M-: Input signal "-"

Mana : Ground of the moduleTerminals 4 and 8 can be used forunneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7M+: Input signal "+"

M-: Input signal "-"Mana : Ground of the module







Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7M+: Input signal "+"M-: Input signal "-"Mana : Ground of the moduleTerminals 4 and 8 can be used forunneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.

Block diagram

Figure 12-6 Block diagram of the 2AI U Standard


Dimensions and weight Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 15 x 81 x 52Weight Approx. 40 g

Data for specific modules Supports isochronous operation NoNumber of inputs 2Length of cable• Shielded Max. 200 m





Voltages, currents, potentials Rated load voltage L+ (from the power module) 24 VDC•

P1 YesIsolation• Between the channels and backplane bus Yes• Between the channels and load voltage L+ Yes• Between the channels NoPermissible potential difference• Between the inputs and MANA (UCM) 2 VACSS • Between MANA and the central grounding

point (UISO)75 VDC/60 VAC

Insulation tested 500 VDCCurrent consumption• From load voltage L+ Max. 30 mAPower dissipation of the module Typ. 0.6 W

Status, interrupts, diagnostics Diagnostic functions• Group error Red "SF" LED• Diagnostic functions readable Yes

Analog value generation Measuring principle IntegrativeIntegration and cycle time/resolution perchannel:• Integration time can be assigned parameters Yes• Interference frequency suppression in Hz 60 50• Integration time in milliseconds 16,7 20• Conversion time in ms 55 65• Cycle time in ms Number of active channels per module x

conversion time• Resolution (including overrange) ± 10 V/13 bits + sign

± 5 V/13 bits + sign1 to 5 V/13 bits

Suppression of interference, limits of error Interference voltage suppression for

f = n x (f1 ± 1%), (f1 = interference frequency)• Common-mode interference (USS)• Series-mode interference

(peak interference value < nominal value ofinput range)

• Crosstalk between the inputs

min. 90 dBmin. 70 dB

min. -50dB

Operational limit(over the entire temperature range, relative to

the input range)

± 0,6%

Basic error limit (operational limit at 25° Crelative to input range)

±0,4%



Analog electronic modules12.7 2AI U High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4LB00-0AB0)


Temperature error (with reference to the inputrange)

± 0.01%/K

Linearity error (with reference to the input range) ±0,01%Repeatability (in steady state at 25° C withreference to input range)

±0,05 %

Data for selecting a sensor Input range (rated value)/input resistance• Voltage ±5V/min. 100 kΩ

1 to 5 V/min.100 kΩ±10V/min. 100 kΩ

Permitted input voltage (destruction limit) 35 V continuous, 75 V for max. 1 ms (pulse dutyfactor 1:20)

Smoothing of the measured values Yes, can be assigned parameters in 4 steps bymeans of digital filtering

Step

NoneWeak

MediumStrong

Time constant 1 x cycle time4 x cycle time32 x cycle time64 x cycle time

12.7 12.72AI U High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4LB00-0AB0 )

Order number6ES7134-4LB00-0AB0


– ± 10 V, resolution 15 bits + sign –

± 10 V, resolution 15 bits + sign – 1 to 5 V, resolution 15 bits• Isolated from the load voltage L+• Permitted common-mode voltage between the channels 100 VAC





Pin assignmentThe following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AI U High Feature for the

different terminal modules:

Table 12-37 Terminal assignment of the 2AI U High Feature


Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A4Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A8M+: Input signal "+"M-: Input signal "-"

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8M+: Input signal "+"M-: Input signal "-"

Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for unneededwires of up to 30 VDC.

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7M+: Input signal "+"

M-: Input signal "-"







Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7M+: Input signal "+"M-: Input signal "-"Terminals 4 and 8 can be used for unneededwires of up to 30 VDC.

Block diagram

Figure 12-7 Block diagram of the 2AI U High Feature








Voltages, currents, po tentials Rated load voltage L+ (from the power

module)

VDC

• P1 YesIsolation• Between the channels and backplane bus Yes• Between the channels and load voltage L+ Yes• Between the channels and PE Yes• Between the channels NoPermissible potential difference• Between the channels 140 VDC/100 VACInsulation tested 500 VDCCurrent consumption• From load voltage L+ Max. 53 mAPower dissipation of the module Typ. 0.85 W

Status, interrupts, diagnostics Diagnostic functions• Group error Red "SF" LED• Diagnostic functions readable (wire break

diagnosis is not supported on the module.)Yes

Analog value generation Measuring principle IntegrativeIntegration and cycle time/resolution perchannel• Integration time can be assigned

parametersYes

• Interference frequency suppression in Hz 60 50 No• Integration time in milliseconds 16,67 20 7,5• Conversion time in ms

– 1 channel active per module – 2 channels active per module

2558,3

3070

1026

• Cycle time in ms – 1 channel active per module – 2 channels active per module

75175

90210

3078

• Resolution (including overrange) ± 10 V/15 bits + sign± 5 V/15 bits + sign1 to 5 V/15 bits





Suppression of interference, limits of error Interference voltage suppression forf = n x (f1 ± 0.5%), (f1 = interferencefrequency)• Common-mode interference (USS)• Series-mode interference

peak interference value < rated value ofinput range)

• Crosstalk between the inputs

Min. 100dBmin. 90dB

min. -100dB

Operational limit(entire temperature range with reference toinput range; calibration enabled1)

±0,1%

Operational limit(entire temperature range with reference toinput range; calibration disabled)

±0,5%

Basic error limit (operational limit at 25° C withreference to input range; calibration enabled 1)

±0,05%

Temperature error (with reference to inputrange; calibration enabled1)

± 0.003%/K

Temperature error (with reference to inputrange; calibration disabled)

± 0.015%/K

Linearity error (with reference to the inputrange)

±0,03%

Repeatability(in steady state at 25°C with reference to inputrange)

±0,01%

Data for selecting a sensor Input range (rated value)/input resistance• Voltage ± 10 V/min. 1 MΩ

± 5 V/min. 1 MΩ1 to 5 V/min.1 MΩ

Permitted input voltage (destruction limit) 35 V continuous, 75 V for max. 1 msSmoothing of the measured values Yes, can be assigned parameters in 4 steps by

means of digital filteringStep

NoneWeak

MediumStrong

Time constant 1 x cycle time4 x cycle time

32 x cycle time64 x cycle time

1Run-time calibration can be enabled during module parameter assignment to adjust for componentdrift due to changes in ambient temperature. During the calibration interval, the updating of data isdelayed by 250 ms. Calibration takes place each time the ambient temperature changes by 5° C.



Analog electronic modules12.8 2AI U High Speed analog electronic module (6ES7134-4FB51-0AB0)


12.8 12.82AI U High Speed analog electronic module (6ES7134-4FB51-0AB0)



± 10 V, resolution 13 bits + sign± 5 V, resolution 13 bits + sign

± 2,5 V, resolution 13 bits + sign1 to 5 V, resolution 13 bits

• Isolated from the load voltage L+• Permitted common-mode voltage 100 VSS AC• Supports isochronous operation

– Minimum time for the isochronous DP cycle (TDPmin): 2.5 ms – Minimum conversion time of the input modules (TWEmin): 1.1 ms

Pin assignmentThe following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AI U High Speed for thedifferent terminal modules:

Table 12-38 Terminal assignment of the 2AI U High Speed


Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A4Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A8M+: Input signal "+"M-: Input signal "-"Mana : Ground of the module







Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8M+: Input signal "+"M-: Input signal "-"Mana : Ground of the moduleTerminals 4 and 8 can be used forunneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7M+: Input signal "+"M-: Input signal "-"Mana : Ground of the module

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7M+: Input signal "+"M-: Input signal "-"Mana : Ground of the moduleTerminals 4 and 8 can be used forunneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.





Block diagram

Figure 12-8 Block diagram of the 2AI U High Speed



Data for specific modules Supports isochronous operation YesNumber of inputs 2Length of cable• Shielded Max. 200 m

Voltages, currents, potentials Rated load voltage L+ (from the powermodule)

24 VDC

• P1 YesIsolation• Between the channels and backplane

busYes

• Between the channels and load voltageL+

Yes

• Between the channels NoPermissible potential difference• Between the inputs and MANA (UCM) 100 VSS AC• Between MANA and the central

grounding point (UISO)75 VDC/60 VAC

Insulation tested 500 VDCCurrent consumption• Power supply and load voltage L+ (no

load)Max. 35 mA

Power dissipation of the module Typ. 0.8 W





Status, interrupts, diagnostics Interrupts• Process interrupt Can be assigned parameters 1 Diagnostic functions• Group error display Red "SF" LED• Diagnostic information can be displayed Possible2

Analog value generation Measuring principle Instantaneous value encodingCycle time/resolution:• Conversion time in ms (per channel) 0,1• Cycle time in ms (per module) 1• Resolution (including overrange) ± 10 V/13 bits + sign

± 5 V/13 bits + sign± 2,5 V/13 bits + sign1 to 5 V/13 bits

Suppression of interference, limits of error • Common mode interference (Ucm) < 100VSS)

> 70 dB

Crosstalk between the inputs > 50 dBOperational limit(in the entire temperature range, withreference to the input range)

± 0,3%

Basic error limit (operational limit at 25° Cwith reference to input range)

±0,2%

Temperature error (with reference to theinput range)

± 0.01%/K


±0,01%

Repeatability(in steady state at 25°C with reference toinput range)

±0,05%

Data for selecting a sensor Input ranges (rated value)/input resistance• Voltage ± 10 V/min. 100kΩ

±5 V/min. 100 kΩ±2.5 V/min. 100 kΩ1 - 5 V/min. 100 kΩ

Maximum input voltage for voltage input(destruction limit)

50 V continuous, 100 V for max. 1 ms (pulse dutyfactor 1:20)

Connection of the sensors• For measuring voltage Possible

Smoothing of the measured values Yes, can be assigned parameters in 4 steps by meansof digital filteringStep

NoneWeak

MediumStrong


1 DPV1 only2 Parameter assignment errorViolation of lower limit valueViolation of upper limit valueOpen circuit (only with 1 to 5 V)Process interrupt lost



Analog electronic modules12.9 2AI I 2WIRE Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB01-0AB0)


12.9 12.92AI I 2WIRE S tandard analog electronic modu le(6ES7134-4GB01-0AB0)

Order number6ES7134-4GB01-0AB0

Features• 2 inputs for measuring current• Input range:

4 to 20 mA, resolution 13 bits

Pin assignmentThe following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AI I 2WIRE Standard for thedifferent terminal modules:

Table 12-39 Terminal assignment of the 2AI I 2WIRE Standard


Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A4Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A8M+: Input signal "+"M-: Input signal "-"Mana : Ground (of power module)2-wire measuring transducer is suppliedby means of the measuring circuits.







Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8M+: Input signal "+"M-: Input signal "-"Mana : Ground (of power module)2-wire measuring transducer is suppliedby means of the measuring circuits.Terminals 4 and 8 can be used forunneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7M+: Input signal "+"M-: Input signal "-"Mana : Ground (of power module)2-wire measuring transducer is suppliedby means of the measuring circuits.

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7M+: Input signal "+"M-: Input signal "-"Mana : Ground (of power module)2-wire measuring transducer is suppliedby means of the measuring circuits.Terminals 4 and 8 can be used forunneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.





Block diagram

Figure 12-9 Block diagram of the 2AI I 2WIRE Standard



Data for specific modules

Supports isochronous operation NoNumber of inputs 2Length of cable• Shielded Max. 200 m

Voltages, currents, potentials Rated load voltage L+ (from the powermodule)

24 VDC

• P1 YesPower supply of the transmitters Yes• Short-circuit protection Yes, (destruction limit 35 mA per channel)

Isolation• Between the channels and backplane bus Yes• Between the channels and load voltage

L+No

• Between the channels NoInsulation tested 500 VDCCurrent consumption• From load voltage L+ Max. 80 mAPower dissipation of the module Typ. 0.6 W





Status, interrupts, diagnostics Diagnostic functions•

Group error Red "SF" LED• Diagnostic functions readable Yes

Analog value generation Measuring principle IntegrativeIntegration and cycle time/resolution perchannel:• Integration time can be assigned

parametersYes

• Interference frequency suppression in Hz 60 50• Integration time in milliseconds 16,7 20• Conversion time in ms 55 65•

Cycle time in ms Number of active channels per module x conversiontime• Resolution (including overrange) 4 to 20 mA/13 bits

Suppression of interference, limits of error Interference voltage suppression forf = n x (f1±1%), (f1 = interference frequency)• Series-mode interference

(peak interference value < rated value ofinput range)

Min. 70 dB

Crosstalk between the inputs Min. -50 dBOperational limit(in the entire temperature range, with

reference to the input range)

±0,6%


±0,4%


± 0,005%/K


±0,01%


±0,05%

Data for selecting a sensor Input range (rated value)/input resistance• Current 4 to 20 mA/50 ΩPermitted input current (destruction limit) 40 mALoad of the two-wire measuring transducer Max. 750 ΩSmoothing of the measured values Yes, can be assigned parameters in 4 steps by


NoneWeak

MediumStrong




Analog electronic modules12.10 Analog electronic module 4AI I 2WIRE ST (6ES7134-4GD00-0AB0)


12.10 12.10Analog electronic module 4AI I 2WIRE ST (6ES 7134-4GD00-0AB0)

Order number6ES7134-4GD00-0AB0

Features• 4 inputs for measuring current• Input range:

4 to 20 mA, resolution 13 bits

Pin assignmentThe following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 4AI I 2WIRE ST for the differentterminal modules:

Table 12-40 Terminal assignment of the 4AI I 2WIRE ST


Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 2Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 6Channel 2: Terminals 3 and 4Channel 3: Terminals 7 and 8M+: Input signal "+"M-: Input signal "–"2-wire measuring transducer issupplied by means of the measuringcircuits.

Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 2Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 6Channel 2: Terminals 3 and 4Channel 3: Terminals 7 and 8M+: Input signal "+"M-: Input signal "–"2-wire measuring transducer issupplied by means of the measuringcircuits.





Block diagram

Figure 12-10 Block diagram of the 4AI I 2WIRE ST




Voltages, currents, po tentials Rated load voltage L+ (from the powermodule)

24 VDC

• P1 YesPower supply of the transmitters Yes• Short-circuit protection Yes (approx. 200 mA for module)Isolation• Between the channels and backplane bus Yes• Between the channels and load voltage L+ No• Between the channels NoInsulation tested 500 VDC





Current consumption of the module• From the load voltage L+ (with sensor

supply)Max. 125 mA


Diagnostic functions• Group error Red "SF" LED• Diagnostic functions readable Yes


parametersYes

• Interference frequency suppression in Hz 60 50• Integration time in milliseconds 16,7 20• Cycle time per module in ms 33 40• Resolution (including overrange) 4 to 20 mA/13 bits

Suppression of interference, limits of error Interference voltage suppression for f = n x(f1±1%), (f1 = interference frequency)• Series-mode interference


Min. 70 dB

Crosstalk between the inputs Min. -50 dBOperational limit(in the entire temperature range, withreference to the input range)

±0,4 %

Basic error limit (operational limit at 25° C withreference to input range)

±0,3 %


± 0,003 %/K


±0,01 %

Repeatability(in steady state at 25°C with reference to inputrange)

±0,05 %

Data for selecting a sensor Input range (rated value)/input resistance• Current 4 to 20 mA/25 Ω

Permitted input current (destruction limit) Approx. 30 mA (limited electronically)Load of the two-wire measuring transducer Max. 750 ΩSmoothing of the measured values Yes, can be assigned parameters in 4 steps

StepNoneWeak

MediumStrong

Time constant1 x cycle time4 x cycle time16 x cycle time32 x cycle time



Analog electronic modules12.11 2AI I 2WIRE High Speed analog electronic module (6ES7134-4GB51-0AB0)


12.11 12.112AI I 2W IRE H igh Speed analog electronic module(6ES7134-4GB51-0AB0)


Features• 2 inputs for measuring current• Current-limited sensor supply (90 mA)• Input ranges:

4 to 20 mA, resolution 13 bits0 to 20 mA, resolution 13 bits

• Supports isochronous operation – Minimum time for the isochronous DP cycle (TDPmin): 2.5 ms – Minimum conversion time of the input modules (TWEmin): 1.1 ms

Pin assignmentThe following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AI I 2WIRE High Speed for thedifferent terminal modules:

Table 12-41 Terminal assignment of the 2AI I 2WIRE High Speed


Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A4Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A8M+: Input signal "+"M-: Input signal "-"Mana: Ground (of power module)2-wire measuring transducer is supplied bymeans of the measuring circuits.







Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8M+: Input signal "+"M-: Input signal "-"Mana : Ground (of power module)2-wire measuring transducer is supplied bymeans of the measuring circuits.Terminals 4 and 8 can be used forunneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7M+: Input signal "+"M-: Input signal "-"Mana : Ground (of power module)2-wire measuring transducer is supplied bymeans of the measuring circuits.

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7M+: Input signal "+"M-: Input signal "-"Mana : Ground (of power module)2-wire measuring transducer is supplied bymeans of the measuring circuits.Terminals 4 and 8 can be used forunneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.





Block diagram

Figure 12-11 Block diagram of the 2AI I 2WIRE High Speed




Supports isochronous operation YesNumber of inputs 2Length of cable• Shielded Max. 200 m

Voltages, currents, po tentials Rated load voltage L+ (from the power module) 24 VDC• P1 Yes• Short-circuit protection Yes, (destruction limit 35 mA per channel)Isolation• Between channels and backplane bus Yes• Between channels and load voltage L+ No• Between the channels NoPermissible potential difference• Between MANA and Minternal (UISO) 75 VDC, 60 VACInsulation tested with 500 VDCCurrent consumption• Power supply and load voltage L+ (no load) Max. 35 mA1 Power dissipation of the module Typ. 0.8 W





Status, interrupts, diagnostics Interrupts•

Process interrupt Parmeterizable2

Diagnostic functions• Group error display Red "SF" LED• Diagnostic functions readable Possible3

Analog value generation Measuring principle Instantaneous value encodingCycle time/resolution:• Conversion time in ms (per channel) 0,1• Cycle time in ms (per module) 1• Resolution (including overrange) 4 to 20 mA/13 bits

0 to 20 mA/13 bitsSuppression of interference, limits of error

Crosstalk between the inputs > 50 dBOperational limit(in the entire temperature range, with referenceto the input range)

±0,3%

Basic error limit (operational limit at 25° C withreference to input range)

±0,2%


± 0,01%/K

Linearity error (with reference to the input range) ±0,01%Repeatability

(in steady state at 25°C with reference to inputrange)

±0,05%

Sensor power supply outputs Number of outputsOutput voltage• With load

2

L+ (-2.5 V)Output current• Rated value• Permitted range

90 mA (both channels)0 mA to 90 mA

Short-circuit protection Yes, electronicData for selecting a sensor

Input range (rated value/input resistance)• Current To 20 mA/50 Ω

To 20 mA/50 ΩConnection of the sensors• For current measurement as two-wire

transmitterPossible

Load of the two-wire measuring transducer Max. 670 ΩMaximum input current for current input(destruction limit)

60 mA





Smoothing of the measured values Yes, can be assigned parameters in 4 steps bymeans of digital filtering

StepNoneWeak

MediumStrong


1 Without sensor supply voltage2 DPV only3 Parameter assignment errorViolation of lower limit valueViolation of upper limit valueOpen circuit (only with 4 to 20 mA)Process interrupt lost

12.12 12.122AI I 4WIRE S tandard analog electronic modu le(6ES7134-4GB11-0AB0)


Features• 2 inputs for measuring current• Input ranges:

– ± 20 mA, resolution 13 bits + sign – to 20 mA, resolution 13 bits

• Permitted common-mode voltage 2 VACSS





Pin assignmentThe following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AI I 4WIRE Standard for the


Table 12-42 Terminal assignment of the 2AI I 4WIRE Standard


Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8M+: Input signal "+"M-: Input signal "-"DC 24V: Power supply for four-wiremeasuring transducerMana : Ground (of power module)4-wire measuring transducer is supplied bymeans of the module.

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7M+: Input signal "+"M-: Input signal "-"DC 24V: Power supply for four-wiremeasuring transducerMana : Ground (of power module)4-wire measuring transducer is supplied bymeans of the module.





Block diagram

Figure 12-12 Block diagram of the 2AI I 4WIRE Standard





24 VDC

• P1 YesPower supply of the transmitters Yes• Short-circuit protection Yes, 60 mA (for both channels)Isolation• Between the channels and backplane

busYes


No

• Between the channels NoInsulation tested 500 VDCCurrent consumption• From load voltage L+ Max. 30 mAPower dissipation of the module Typ. 0.6 W








parametersYes

• Interference frequency suppression in Hz 60 50• Integration time in milliseconds 16,7 20• Conversion time in ms 55 65•

Cycle time in ms Number of active channels per module x conversiontime• Resolution (including overrange) ± 20 mA/13 bits + sign

4 to 20 mA/13 bitsSuppression of interference, limits of error

Interference voltage suppression for f = n x(f1±1%),(f1 = interference frequency)• Series-mode interference


Min. 70 dB

Crosstalk between the inputs Min. -50 dB

Operational limit (in the entire temperaturerange, with reference to the input range)

±0,6%


±0,4%


± 0.005%/K


±0,01%


±0,05%

Data for selecting a sensor Input range (rated value)/input resistance• Current ± 20 mA/50 Ω

4 to 20 mA/50 ΩPermitted input current (destruction limit) 40 mASmoothing of the measured values Yes, can be assigned parameters in 4 steps by means

of digital filteringStep

NoneWeak

MediumStrong






Analog electronic modules12.13 2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4MB00-0AB0)




Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8M+ : Input signal "-"M- : Connect to 24 VDCDC+ 24V: Input signal "+"2-wire measuring transducers are supplied bymeans of the measuring circuits.Mixing two-wire and four-wire measuringtransducers is permitted.To support isolation between the channels, usean external supply to feed one of the measuringtransducers.

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7M+ : Input signal "+"M- : Input signal "-"DC+ 24V: Power supply for four-wire measuringtransducerDC -24V: Return circuit for measuringtransducer supplyIt is possible to supply four-wire measuringtransducers by means of the module.To support isolation between the channels, use

an external supply to feed one of the measuringtransducers.

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7M+ : Input signal "-"M- : Connect to 24 VDCDC+ 24V: Input signal "+"2-wire measuring transducers are supplied bymeans of the measuring circuits.Mixing two-wire and four-wire measuringtransducers is permitted.To support isolation between the channels, usean external supply to feed one of the measuringtransducers.





Block diagram

Figure 12-13 Block diagram of the 2AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature





24 VDC

• P1 YesPower supply of the transmitters Yes• Short-circuit protection Yes, 60 mA (for both channels)Isolation• Between the channels and backplane

busYes


Yes

• Between the channels and PE Yes• Between the channels NoPermissible potential difference• Between the channels 140 VDC/100 VAC (with isolated power supply of

measuring transducers)





Insulation tested 500 VDCCurrent consumption• From load voltage L+ Max. 53 mAPower dissipation of the module Typ. 0.85 W



parametersYes

• Interference frequency suppression in Hz 60 50 No• Integration time in milliseconds 16,67 20 7,5• Conversion time in ms

– 1 channel active per module – 2 channels active per module

2558,3

3070

1026

• Cycle time in ms – 1 channel active per module – 2 channels active per module

75175

90210

3078

• Resolution (including overrange) ± 20 mA/15 bits + sign4 to 20 mA/15 bits

Suppression of interference, limits of error Interference voltage suppression for f = n x(f1±0.5%), (f1 = interference frequency)• Common-mode interference (USS)• Series-mode interference


Min. 100dB

min. 90dB

Crosstalk between the inputs Min. -100 dBOperational limit1(over the entire temperature range, withreference to the input range)

±0,1%

Basic error limit1operational limit at 25° C with reference toinput range

±0,05%


± 0,003%/K


±0,03%


±0,01%





Data for selecting a sensor Input range (rated value)/input resistance•

Current ± 20 mA/50 Ω4 to 20 mA/50 ΩPermitted input current (destruction limit) 40 mA (on a single channel)Load of the two-wire measuring transducer Max. 750 ΩSmoothing of the measured values Yes, can be assigned parameters in 4 steps by


NoneWeak

MediumStrong


1 Run-time calibration can be enabled during module parameter assignment to periodically adjust forthe offset voltage drift of the A/D converter. During the calibration interval, the updating of data isdelayed by 200 ms. The accuracy limits of the module will be met without run-time calibration.

12.14 12.142AI I 4W IRE H igh Speed analog electronic module(6ES7134-4GB61-0AB0)

Order number

6ES7134-4GB61-0AB0

Features• 2 inputs for measuring current• Current-limited sensor supply (90 mA)• Input ranges:

– 4 to 20 mA, resolution 13 bits – 0 to 20 mA, resolution 13 bits – ± 20 mA, resolution 13 bits + sign

• Supports isochronous operation – Minimum time for the isochronous DP cycle (TDPmin): 2.5 ms – Minimum conversion time of the input modules (TWEmin): 1.1 ms





Pin assignmentThe following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AI I 4WIRE High Speed for the

terminal module.

Table 12-44 Terminal assignment of the 2AI I 4WIRE High Speed


Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8M+: Input signal "+"M- : Input signal "-"DC 24V: Power supply for four-wire measuringtransducerMana : Ground (of power module)4-wire measuring transducer is supplied bymeans of the module.

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7M+: Input signal "+"M- : Input signal "-"DC 24V: Power supply for four-wire measuringtransducerMana : Ground (of power module)4-wire measuring transducer is supplied bymeans of the module.





Block diagram

Figure 12-14 Block diagram of the 2AI I 4WIRE High Speed



Data for specific modules Supports isochronous operation YesNumber of inputs 2Length of cable• Shielded Max. 200 m


24 VDC

• P1 YesIsolation• Between channels and backplane bus Yes• Between channels and load voltage L+ No• Between the channels NoPermissible potential difference• Between MANA and Minternal (UISO) 75 VDC, 60 VACInsulation tested with 500 VDCCurrent consumption• Power supply and load voltage L+ (no

load)Max. 35 mA1

Power dissipation of the module Typ. 0.8 W





Status, interrupts, diagnostics Interrupts•

Process interrupt Can be assigned parameters2

Diagnostic functions• Group error display Red "SF" LED• Diagnostic information readable Possible3

Analog value generation Measuring principle Instantaneous value encodingCycle time/resolution:• Conversion time in ms (per channel) 0,1• Cycle time in ms (per module) 1• Resolution (including overrange) 4 to 20 mA/13 bit

0 to 20 mA/13 bit

± 20 mA/13 bits + signSuppression of interference, limits of error

Crosstalk between the inputs > 50 dBOperational limit(in the entire temperature range, withreference to the input range)

±0,3%

Basic error limit (operational limitat 25° C with reference to input range)

±0,2%


± 0,01%/K


±0,01%


±0,05%

Sensor power supply outputs Number of outputs 2Output voltage• With load L+ (-2.5 V)Output current• Rated value• Permitted range

90 mA (both channels)0 mA to 90 mA

Short-circuit protection Yes, electronicData for selecting a sensor

Input range (rated value)/input resistance• Current 4 to 20 mA/50 Ω

0 to 20 mA/50 Ω±20 mA/50 Ω

Connection of the sensors• For current measurement as two-wire

transmitterPossible

Load of the two-wire measuring transducer Max. 670 Ω



Analog electronic modules12.15 2AI RTD Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4JB50-0AB0)


Maximum input current for current input(destruction limit)

60 mA

Smoothing of the measured values Yes, can be assigned parameters in 4 steps by meansof digital filtering

Step

NoneWeak

MediumStrong


1 Without encoder supply voltage2 DPV1 only3 Parameter assignment errorViolation of lower limit valueViolation of upper limit valueOpen circuit (only with 4 to 20 mA)Process interrupt lost

12.15 12.152AI RT D Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4JB50-0AB0)

Order number6ES7134-4JB50-0AB0

Features• 2 inputs for resistance thermometers or resistance measurement• Input ranges:

– Resistance thermometers: Pt100, Ni100; resolution 15 bits + sign – Resistance measurement: 150 Ω; 300 Ω ; 600 Ω, resolution max. 15 bits + sign

• Isolated from the load voltage L+• Linearization of the sensor characteristic curves

Pin assignmentThe resistance thermometers/resistors are measured in a four-conductor connection.Constant current is fed to the resistance thermometers/resistors by means of connectionsIC + and IC -. The voltage generated at the resistance thermometer/resistor is measured bymeans of the connections M + and M -. This ensures highly accurate measurement resultswith the four-conductor connection.With the two/three-conductor connection, you must apply corresponding jumpers to themodule between M+ and Ic+ or M- and Ic- . However, you have to expect a loss of accuracyin the measurement results.





The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AI RTD Standard on theterminal module.

Table 12-45 Terminal assignment of the 2AI RTD Standard


Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8M+: Measuring line positiveIC-: Constant-current line negativeM- : Measuring line negativeIC+: Constant-current line positive

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7M+: Measuring line positiveIC-: Constant-current line negativeM-: Measuring line negativeIC+: Constant-current line positive

Note

A wire break in the measuring lines of the temperature sensors for three- or four-conductorconnections (connections 1 and 2, or 5 and 6) is not detected. Undefined values can bereported.





Block diagram

Figure 12-15 Block diagram of the 2AI RTD Standard





24 VDC

• P1 YesPower supply of the transmitters Yes• Constant-current supply for

resistance-type sensorsApprox. 1.5 mA

• Short-circuit protection YesIsolation• between the channels and backplane

busYes

• Between the channels and loadvoltage L+

Yes

• between the channels NoPermissible potential difference• Between MANA and the central


Insulation tested 500 VDCCurrent consumption• From load voltage L+ max. 30mAPower dissipation of the module Typ. 0.6 W







parametersYes

• Interference frequency suppression inHz

60 50

• Integration time in milliseconds 16,7 20•

Conversion time in ms 110 130• Cycle time in ms Number of active channels per module x conversion time• Resolution (including overrange) Pt100, Ni100/ 15 bits + sign

150 Ω/14 bits/300 Ω, 600 Ω/15 bits

Suppression of interference, limits of error Interference voltage suppression forf = n x (f1±1%), (f1 = interferencefrequency)• Common-mode interference (USS)• Series-mode interference

peak interference value < rated valueof input range)

Min. 90dBmin. 70dB

Crosstalk between the inputs Min. -50 dBOperational limit (in the entire temperaturerange, with reference to the input range)

±0,6%


±0,4%


± 0.005%/K


±0,01%

Repeatability (in steady state at 25° C with

reference to input range)

±0,05%

Data for selecting a sensor Input range (rated value)/input resistance• Resistance-type sensor 150 Ω/min. 2 MΩ

300 Ω/min. 2 MΩ600 Ω/min. 2 MΩ

• Resistance thermometers Pt100/min. 2 MΩNi100/min. 2 MΩ

Permitted input voltage (destruction limit) Max. 9 V





Analog electronic modules12.16 2AI RTD High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4NB51-0AB0)


NoteThe EM 2AI RTD High Feature can replace a 2AI RTD Standard in an existing system.• The wiring does not have to be changed. The additional bridges on the terminal module

of the 2AI RTD Standard do not have to be removed.• The configuration (in HW Config or the GSD file) does not have to be changed. Only the

new functions of the 2AI RTD High Feature cannot be assigned parameters in thisinstance.

Pin assignmentThe following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AI RTD High Feature on theterminal modules.

Table 12-46 Terminal assignment of the 2AI RTD High Feature


Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7M+: Measuring line positiveM-: Measuring line negativeIC+: Constant-current line positive

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A4Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A8M+: Measuring line positiveM-: Measuring line negativeIC+: Constant-current line positive







Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8M+: Measuring line positiveIC-: Constant-current line negativeM-: Measuring line negativeIC+: Constant-current line positive

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7M+: Measuring line positiveIC-: Constant-current line negativeM-: Measuring line negativeIC+: Constant-current line positive

Block diagram

Figure 12-16 Block diagram of the 2AI RTD High Feature






Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 15 x 81 x 52Weight Approx. 40 g



24 VDC

• P1 YesPower supply of the transmitters Yes• Constant-current supply for

resistance-type sensors

Approx. 1.25 mA

• Short-circuit protection YesIsolation• between the channels and backplane

busYes


Yes

• between the channels NoPermissible potential difference• Between MANA and the central


Insulation tested 500 VDCCurrent consumption• From load voltage L+ max. 30mAPower dissipation of the module Typ. 0.6 W


Analog value generation Measuring principle Integrating (sigma-delta)Integration and cycle time/resolution perchannel:• Integration time can be assigned

parametersYes


60 50

• Integration time in milliseconds 16,7 20• Basic conversion time including

Integration time in milliseconds50 60

• Additional conversion time for wirebreak check diagnosis in ms

5 5

• Additional conversion time in ms forline compensation in three-conductorconnections

50 60

• Cycle time in ms Number of active channels per module x conversion time• Resolution (including overrange) Pt 100; Ni 100; Ni120; Pt 200; Ni 200; Pt 500; Ni 500; Pt

1000; Ni 1000; Cu 10 / 15 bits + sign150Ω; 300Ω; 600Ω; 3000Ω; / 15 bitsPTC1 / 1 bit






peak interference value < rated valueof input range)

Min. 90dBmin. 70dB

Crosstalk between the inputs Min. -50 dBOperational limit (in the entire temperaturerange, with reference to the input range)• Resistance-type sensor ±0,1%• Pt100, Pt200, Pt500, Pt1000 Standard ± 1.0K• Pt100, Pt200, Pt500, Pt1000 Climatic ± 0.25K• Ni100, Ni120, Ni200, Ni500, Ni 1000

Standard and Climatic± 0.4K

• Cu10 ± 1.5KBasic error limit for resistance-typesensors (operational limit at 25° C withreference to input range)• Resistance-type sensor ±0,05%• Pt100, Pt200, Pt500, Pt1000 Standard ± 0.6K• Pt100, Pt200, Pt500, Pt1000 Climatic ± 0.13K• Ni100, Ni120, Ni200, Ni500, Ni 1000

Standard and Climatic± 0.2K

• Cu10 ± 1.0KTemperature error (with reference to theinput range)

± 0.0009%/K

Linearity error (with reference to the inputrange) ±0,01%

Repeatability (in steady state at 25° C withreference to input range)

±0,05%

Data for selecting a sensor Input range (rated value)/input resistance• Resistance-type sensor 150 Ω/min. 10 MΩ

300 Ω/min. 10 MΩ600 Ω/min. 10 MΩ3000 Ω/min. 10 MΩPTC min 10 MΩ

• Resistance thermometers Pt100/min. 10 MΩNi100/min. 10 MΩNi120/min. 10 MΩPt200/min. 10 MΩNi200/min. 10 MΩPt500/min. 10 MΩNi500/min. 10 MΩPt1000/min. 10 MΩNi1000/min. 10 MΩCu10/min. 10 MΩ

Permitted input voltage (destruction limit) Max. 9 V





Connection of the sensors• For measuring resistance

– 2-conductor connection – 3-conductor connection – 4-conductor connection

Yes,Yes, internal compensation of line resistancesYes

Characteristic curve linearization Yes, can be assigned parameters for Ptxxx, NixxxSmoothing of the measured values Yes, can be assigned parameters in 4 steps by means of

digital filteringStep

NoneWeak

MediumStrong


1In accordance with VDE 0660 Part 302/303, Type A

Use of Cu10 sensors• Select "Three-conductor thermal resistor" and "Cu10" at parameter assignment.• Wire the Cu10 sensor in accordance with the three-conductor connection method.• Automatic, internal compensation of line resistance for the missing measuring line occurs

during operation.

Note

Please note the following to ensure optimum line compensation in the case of Cu10:• The sum of the cable resistance and measurement resistance must not exceed 31 Ω.• The cable must have a resistance of no more than 8 Ω if you want to use the temperature

range up to and above 312° C. Example: A 200 m Cu cable with a 0.5 mm 2 conductorcross-section has approximately 7 Ω. A smaller cross-section shortens the permissiblecable length accordingly.





Using PTC resistorsPTCs are suitable for temperature monitoring and as thermal protective devices for complex

drives and transformer windings.• Select "Two-conductor resistor" and "PTC" at parameter assignment:• Connect the PTC in accordance with the two-conductor connection method.• Apply PTC resistors of type A (PTC thermistors) in accordance with DIN / VDE 0660, Part

302.• Sensor data for the PTC resistor:

Feature Technicalspecifications

Remarks

Behavior with rising temperature

< 550Ω Normal range: • SIMATIC S7: Bit 0 = "0", Bit 2 = "0" (in the PII)• SIMATIC S5: Bit 3 = "0", Bit 5 = "0" (in the PII)

550Ω to 1650Ω Prewarning range: • SIMATIC S7: Bit 0 = "0", Bit 2 = "1" (in the PII)• SIMATIC S5: Bit 3 = "0", Bit 5 = "1" (in the PII)

> 1650Ω Addressable range: • SIMATIC S7: Bit 0 = "1", Bit 2 = "0" (in the PII)• SIMATIC S5: Bit 3 = "1", Bit 5 = "0" (in the PII)

Behavior with rising temperature > 750Ω Addressable range:

• SIMATIC S7: Bit 0 = "1", Bit 2 = "0" (in the PII)• SIMATIC S5: Bit 3 = "1", Bit 5 = "0" (in the PII)

750Ω to 540Ω Prewarning range: • SIMATIC S7: Bit 0 = "0", Bit 2 = "1" (in the PII)• SIMATIC S5: Bit 3 = "0", Bit 5 = "1" (in the PII)

Switching points

< 540Ω Normal range: • SIMATIC S7: Bit 0 = "0", Bit 2 = "0" (in the PII)• SIMATIC S5: Bit 3 = "0", Bit 5 = "0" (in the PII)

(TNF-5) °C(TNF+5) °C(TNF+15) °CMeasuring voltageVoltage on the PTC

Max. 550 ΩMin. 1330 ΩMin. 4000 ΩMax. 7.5 V

TNF= rated operating temperature

• Assignment in the process input image (PII) in the case of SIMATIC S7





IB x

7 6 02 1345

000000

IB x + 1

7 6 02 134500000000

0: Measured resistance < response thresholdbetween prewarning threshold: 1and response threshold 1: Measured resistance > response threshold

• Assignment in the process input image (PII) in the case of SIMATIC S5

between prewarning threshold: 1and response threshold

• Notes on programming

Notice

Only the bits 0+2 or 3+5 are relevant for the purposes of evaluation in the process input

image. You can use bits 0+2 or 3+5 to monitor the temperature of a motor, for example.Bits 0+2 or 3+5 in the process input image does not have a retentive function. Make sureat parameter assignment that motor start-up is controlled (by means of anacknowledgment), for example.Bits 0+2 or 3+5 cannot be set at the same time, but set one after the other.For security reasons, always evaluate the diagnostic inputs of the 2AI RTD High Featurebecause measurement is not possible when the EM is removed, when the power supplyto the EM has failed, or in the event of a wire break or short-circuit of the measuring lines.



Analog electronic modules12.17 2AI TC Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4JB00-0AB0)


ExampleThe diagram below shows the temperature pattern and the switching points belonging to it.

12.17 12.172AI TC Standard analog electronic m odule (6ES7134-4JB00-0AB0)

Order number6ES7134-4JB00-0AB0

Features• 2 inputs for thermocouple or voltage measurement•

Input ranges: – Voltage measurement: ± 80 mV, resolution 15 bits + sign – Thermocouples: Type E, N, J, K, L, S, R, B, T, resolution 15 bits + sign

• Isolated from the load voltage L+• Linearization of the sensor characteristic curves• Permitted common-mode voltage 2 VACSS





Pin assignmentThe following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AI TC Standard for the different

terminal modules:Voltage measurement as for 2AI U ST.

Table 12-47 Terminal assignment of the 2AI TC Standard


Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A4Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A8M+: Measuring line positiveM-: Measuring line negativeMana : Ground of the module

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8M+: Measuring line positiveM-: Measuring line negativeMana : Ground of the moduleTerminals 4 and 8 can be used forunneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7M+: Measuring line positiveM-: Measuring line negativeMana : Ground of the module








24 VDC


busYes


Yes

• Between the channels No• Between the channels and 24 V supply

voltageYes

Permissible potential difference• Between MANA and the central

grounding point (Uiso)

75 VDC/60 VAC

• Between the inputs and MANA (UCM) 2 VACSS Insulation tested 500 VDCCurrent consumption• From load voltage L+ max. 30mAPower dissipation of the module Typ. 0.6 W


Analog value generation Measuring principle IntegrativeIntegration time/conversion time/resolutionper channel:• Integration time can be assigned

parametersYes


60 50



• Additional conversion time for wirebreak check diagnosis in ms

20 20

• Cycle time in ms Number of active channels per module x conversion time• Resolution (including overrange) 15 bits plus sign






(peak interference value < rated valueof input range)

Min. 90 dBMin. 70 dB

Crosstalk between the inputs Min. -50 dBOperational limit (over the entiretemperature range, with reference to theinput range)1

±0,6%

Basic error limit (operational limit at 25° Cwith reference to input range)1

±0,4%


± 0,005%/K


±0,01%


±0,05%

Data for selecting a sensor Input range (rated value)/input resistance• Voltage ± 80 mV/min. 1 MΩ• Thermocouple Type E, N, J, K, L, S, R, B, T/min. 1 MΩPermitted input voltage (destruction limit) ±10 V, continuousConnection of the sensors• For measuring voltage PossibleCharacteristic curve linearization Yes, can be assigned parameters for type E, N, J, K, L,

S, R, B, T to IEC 584Temperature compensation• Internal temperature compensation Not possible• External temperature compensation by

looping a compensating box into themeasuring circuit

Possible, one external compensating box per channel

• External compensation by means oftemperature value obtained at ananalog module of the same ET 200Sstation

Yes

Smoothing of the measured values Yes, can be assigned parameters in 4 steps by means ofdigital filtering

Step

NoneWeak

MediumStrong


1 for Type N: from -150°C, Typ B: from 200°C, Typ T: from -230°C





Com pensation of thermocouples with a comp ensating boxAs well as the error limits of the 2AI TC Standard electronic module (see Table "Technical

specifications" in this chapter) you must also take the accuracy of the compensating box intoaccount.

Com pensation of thermocouples with a Pt100 on the 2AI RTD Standard

Factors affecting the accuracy of the temperature measurem ent

Ensure there is good thermal contact between the reference junction and the Pt100 used for compensation.

Wiring rules

We recommend that you wire the Pt100 with a four-conductorconnection.The accuracy of the thermal resistor (Pt100) used forcompensation must be taken into account.*

Additional technical specificationson the error limits of the 2AI TC

The error of the measurement input (2AI RTD Standard) used forcompensation must be taken into account.*

* In the case of thermocouples with a characteristic curve with a very shallow gradient, these errorscan lead to a major measurement discrepancy.For the following thermocouples, this causes a limitation of the input range of the thermocouples inwhich the accuracy information in the manual applies:• Type N: -100°C• Type K: -230°C• Type E: -230°C

See also2AI U Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4FB01-0AB0)(Page 12-37)



Analog electronic modules12.18 2AI TC High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4NB01-0AB0)


12.18 12.182AI TC H igh Feature analog electronic module(6ES7134-4NB01-0AB0)

Order number6ES7134-4NB01-0AB0

Features• 2 inputs for thermocouple or voltage measurement• Input ranges:

– Voltage measurement: ± 80 mV, resolution 15 bits + sign

– Thermocouples: Types E, N, J, K, L, S, R, B, T, C, resolution 15 bits + sign• 2AI TC High-Feature is inserted on the TM-E15S24-AT or TM-E15C24-AT• Isolated from the load voltage L+• Linearization of the sensor characteristic curves• Permitted common-mode voltage 140 VDC/100 VAC• Internal reference junction in connection with TM-E15S24-AT or TM-E15C24-AT

Pin assignment

The following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AI TC High Feature for theTM-E15S24-AT or TM-E15C24-AT terminal modulesVoltage measurement as for 2AI U ST.

Table 12-48 Terminal assignment of the 2AI TC High Feature


Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 2Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 6M+: Measuring line positiveM-: Measuring line negative





Block diagram

Figure 12-18 Block diagram of the 2AI TC High Feature




Supports isochronous operation NoNumber of inputs 2Length of cable• Shielded Max. 50 m


24 VDC


busYes

• Between the channels and load voltageL+ Yes• Between the channels No• Between the channels and 24 V supply

voltageYes

Permissible potential difference• Between MANA and the central grounding

point (Uiso)75 VDC/60 VAC

• Between the inputs and MANA (UCM) 140 VDC/100 VACInsulation tested 500 VDC





Current consumption• From load voltage L+ Max. 30 mA


Diagnostic functions• Group error Red "SF" LED• Diagnostic functions readable Yes

Analog value generation Measuring principle IntegrativeIntegration time/conversion time/resolutionper channel:• Integration time can be assigned

parametersYes

• Interference frequency suppression inHz 60 50



• Additional conversion time for wire breakcheck diagnosis in ms

5 5

• Cycle time in ms Number of active channels per module x conversiontime

• Resolution (including overrange) 15 bits plus signSuppression of interference, limits of error

Interference voltage suppression forf = n x (f1±1%), (f1 = interferencefrequency)• Common-mode interference (USS)• Series-mode interference


Min. 90dBmin. 70dB

Crosstalk between the inputs Min. -50 dBOperational limit for ±80 mV (over the entiretemperature range with reference to theinput range)

±0,1%

Operational limit for thermocouples (over

the entire temperature range with referenceto the input range)1

± 1.5 K

Operational limit for thermocouple type C (inthe entire temperature range with referenceto the input range)1

± 7 K

Basic error limit for ±80 mV (operationallimit at 25° C with reference to the inputrange)

±0,05%

Basic error limit for thermocouples(operational limit at 25° C with reference toinput range)1

± 1 K





Basic error limit for thermocouples of type C(operational limit at 25° C with reference tothe input range)1

± 5 K


± 0,005%/K


±0,01%


±0,05%

Overall error limits using internalcompensation• Operational limit (in the entire

temperature range with a static, thermalstate, ambient temperature change <0.3K/min)2

± 2.5 K

• Basic error limit (operational limit at25°C with a static, thermal state,ambient temperature change < 0.3K/min)3

± 1.5 K

Data for selecting a sensor Input range (rated value)/input resistance• Voltage ± 80 mV/min. 1 MΩ• Thermocouple Type E, N, J, K, L, S, R, B, T, C/min. 1 MΩPermitted input voltage (destruction limit) ±20 V, continuousConnection of the sensors• For measuring voltage PossibleCharacteristic curve linearization

Yes, can be assigned parameters for types E, N, J, K,L, S, R, B, T, C to IEC 584Temperature compensation• Internal temperature compensation Possible with TM-E15S24-ATTM-E15C24-AT• External temperature compensation by

looping a compensating box into themeasuring circuit

Possible, one external compensating box per channel

Smoothing of the measured values Yes, can be assigned parameters in 4 steps by meansof digital filtering

StepNoneWeak

MediumStrong

Time constant 1 x cycle time4 x cycle time

32 x cycle time64 x cycle time

1 The specified error limits apply starting with the following temperatures:• Thermocouple Type T: -200°C• Thermocouple Type K: -100°C• Thermocouple Type B: +700°C• Thermocouple Type N: -150°C• Thermocouple Type E: -150°C• Thermocouple Type R: +200°C• Thermocouple Type S: +100°C2 In the case of thermocouple type C: ±8K3 In the case of thermocouple type C: ±6K



Analog electronic modules12.19 2AO U Standard analog electronic module (6ES7135-4FB01-0AB0)


Com pensation of thermocouples with a compe nsating boxIn addition to the error limits of the 2AI TC High Feature electronic module (see the table

entitled "Technical specifications" in this chapter), you must take into account the accuracyof the compensating box.

Internal compensation with TM-E 15S24-AT or TM-E15 C24-AT

Factors affecting the accuracy of the temperature measurem ent

The connected channel with internal compensation must beassigned parameters separately.

Rules on using internaltemperature compensation

Don't insert the 2AI TC High Feature directly next to a powermodule with high incoming current ( >3 A). An incoming current of10 A can result in a further ±2 K error.

The station must be in a static state* to ensure that the specifiedaccuracy is achieved.Accuracy is achieved 30 minutes after the static state has beenachieved.

Additional technical specificationsfor the error limits of the 2AI TCHigh Feature

The overall malfunction of the channel is caused by thecombination of the input error and the internal compensationerror.

* The static state is defined by an almost constant ambient temperature (no draft, for example, in aclosed cabinet!)

See also2AI U Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4FB01-0AB0)(Page 12-37)

12.19 12.192AO U Standard analog electronic module (6ES7135-4FB01-0AB0)


Features• 2 outputs for voltage output• Output range:

– ± 10 V, resolution 13 bits + sign – 1 to 5 V, resolution 12 bits

• Isolated from the load voltage L+





Pin assignmentThe following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AO U Standard for the terminal

module:

Table 12-49 Terminal assignment of the 2AO U Standard


Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8QV: Analog output voltageS+: Detector line positiveMana : Ground of the moduleS-: Detector line negative

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A3Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7QV: Analog output voltageS+: Detector line positiveMana : Ground of the module

S-: Detector line negative





Block diagram

Figure 12-19 Block diagram of the 2AO U Standard



Data for specific modules Supports isochronous operation NoNumber of outputs 2Length of cable• Shielded max. 200m


24 VDC

• Reverse polarity protection YesIsolation• between the channels and backplane bus Yes• Between the channels and load voltage L+ Yes• between the channels NoPermissible potential difference• Between MANA and the central grounding


Insulation tested 500 VDCCurrent consumption• From load voltage L+ max. 130mAPower dissipation of the module Max. 2 W







Analog value generation Resolution (including overrange) ± 10 V/13 bits + sign

1 to 5 V/12 bitsCycle time Max. 1.5 msSettling time• For resistive load 0.1 ms• For capacitive load 0.5 ms• For inductive load 0.5 msSubstitute value can be assigned parameters Yes

Suppression of interference, limits of error Crosstalk between the outputs min. -40dBOperational limit (in the entire temperaturerange, with reference to the output range)

±0,4%

Basic error limit (operational limit at 25° C withreference to output range)

±0,2%

Temperature error (with reference to theoutput range)

± 0,01%/K

Linearity error (with reference to the outputrange)

±0,02%

Repeatability

(in steady state at 25°C with reference tooutput range)

±0,05%

Output ripple (with reference to output range,bandwidth 0 to 50 kHz)

±0,02%

Data for selecting an actuatorOutput range (rated value) ± 10 V

1 to 5 VLoad resistance Min. 1.0 kΩ• For capacitive load Max. 1 µF• Short-circuit protection Yes• Short-circuit current Approx. 25mA

Destruction limit against voltages/currentsapplied from outside• Voltage at the outputs to MANA Max. 15 V continuous; 75 V for max. 1 s (pulse duty

factor 1:20)• Current Max. DC 50 mAConnection of actuators• 2-conductor connection Possible, without compensation of the line

resistances• 4-conductor connection Yes



Analog electronic modules12.20 2AO U High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7135-4LB01-0AB0)


12.20 12.202AO U High Feature analog electronic module(6ES7135-4LB01-0AB0)

Order number6ES7135-4LB01-0AB0

Features• 2 outputs for voltage output• Output range:

– ± 10 V, resolution 15 bits + sign

– 1 to 5 V, resolution 14 bits• Isolated from the load voltage L+• Supports isochronous operation

– Minimum time for the isochronous DP cycle (TDPmin): 3.75 ms – Minimum conversion time of the output modules: (TWAmin): 1.5 ms

Pin assignmentThe following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AO U High Feature for theterminal module:

Table 12-50 Terminal assignment of the 2AO U High Feature


Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8QV: Analog output voltageS+: Detector line positiveMana : Ground of the moduleS-: Detector line negative







Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7QV: Analog output voltageS+: Detector line positiveMana : Ground of the moduleS-: Detector line negative

Block diagram

Figure 12-20 Block diagram of the 2AO U High Feature



Data for specific modules Supports isochronous operation YesNumber of outputs 2Length of cable• Shielded max. 200m






module)

24 VDC

• Reverse polarity protection YesIsolation• between the channels and backplane bus Yes• Between the channels and load voltage L+ Yes• between the channels NoPermissible potential difference• Between MANA and the central grounding


Insulation tested 500 VDCCurrent consumption• From load voltage L+ max. 130mAPower dissipation of the module Max. 2 W

Status, interrupts, diagnostics Diagnostic functions• Group error display Red "SF" LED• Diagnostic information readable PossibleSubstitute values can be applied Yes, parameters can be assigned

Analog value generation Resolution (including sign) ± 10 V/16 bits

1 to 5 V/14 bits

Conversion time (per channel) Max. 1.0 msSettling time• For resistive load 0.1 ms• For capacitive load 0.5 ms• For inductive load 0.5 ms

Suppression of interference, limits of error Crosstalk between the outputs > 60 dBOperational limit(in the entire temperature range, withreference to the output range)

±0,07%

Basic error limit (operational limit at 25° C with

reference to output range)

±0,03%

Temperature error (with reference to theoutput range)

± 0.001%/K


±0,02%

Repeatability (in steady state at 25°C withreference to output range)

±0,01%


±0,02%



Analog electronic modules12.21 2AO I Standard analog electronic module (6ES7135-4GB01-0AB0)


Data for selecting an actuator Output range (rated value) ± 10 V

1 to 5 VLoad impedance (in the rated range of theoutput)• At voltage outputs

Capacitive load

Min. 1.0 kΩmax. 1 µF

Voltage output• Short-circuit protection• Short-circuit current

YesApprox. 25 mA

Destruction limit against voltages/currentsapplied from outside• Voltage at the outputs to MANA Max. 15 V continuous; 75 V for max. 1 s (pulse duty

factor 1:20)• Current Max. DC 50 mAConnection of actuators• Voltage output

2-conductor connection

4-conductor connection

Possible, without compensation of the lineresistancesPossible

12.2112.21

2AO I Standard analog electronic m odule (6ES7135-4GB01-0AB0)


Features• 2 outputs for current output• Output range:

– ± 20 mA, resolution 13 bits + sign – 4 to 20 mA, resolution 13 bits

• Isolated from the load voltage L+





Pin assignmentThe following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AO I Standard for the different

terminal modules:

Table 12-51 Terminal assignment of the 2AO I Standard


Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A4Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A8QI: Analog output currentMana : Ground of the moduleTerminals 2 and 6 can be used forunneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8QI: Analog output currentMana : Ground of the moduleTerminals 2 and 6 and 4 and 8 can beused for unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7QI: Analog output currentMana : Ground of the moduleTerminals 2 and 6 can be used forunneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.







Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7QI: Analog output currentMana : Ground of the moduleTerminals 2 and 6 and 4 and 8 can beused for unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.

Block diagram

Figure 12-21 Block diagram of the 2AO I Standard



Data for specific modules Supports isochronous operation NoNumber of outputs 2Length of cable• Shielded max. 200m






module)

24 VDC

• Reverse polarity protection YesIsolation• Between the channels and backplane bus Yes• Between the channels and load voltage Yes• Between the channels NoPermissible potential difference• Between MANA and the central grounding


Insulation tested 500 VDCCurrent consumption• From the power supply L+ Max. 150 mAPower dissipation of the module Max. 2 W


Analog value generation Resolution (including overrange) ± 20 mA/13 bits + sign

4 to 20 mA/13 bitsCycle time Max. 1.5 ms

Settling time• For resistive load 0.1 ms• For capacitive load 0.5 ms• For inductive load 0.5 msSubstitute values can be applied Yes

Suppression of interference, limits of error Crosstalk between the outputs min. -40dBOperational limit (in the entire temperaturerange, with reference to the output range)

±0,5%

Basic error limit (operational limit at 25° Cwith reference to output range)

±0,3%

Temperature error (with reference to theoutput range) ± 0.01%/K


±0,02%

Repeatability(in steady state at 25°C with reference tooutput range)

±0,05%


±0,02%



Analog electronic modules12.22 2AO I High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7135-4MB01-0AB0)


Data for selecting an actuator Output range (rated value) ±20 mA

4 to 20 mALoad resistance Max. 500 Ω• For inductive load 1 mH• No-load voltage 18 VDestruction limit against voltages/currentsapplied from outside• Voltage at the outputs to MANA Max. 15 V continuous; 75 V for max. 1 s (pulse duty

factor 1:20)• Current Max. DC 50 mAConnection of actuators• 2-conductor connection Yes• 4-conductor connection No

12.22 12.222AO I High Fea ture analog electronic module(6ES7135-4MB01-0AB0)

Order number

6ES7135-4MB01-0AB0

Features• 2 outputs for current output• Output range:

– ± 20 mA, resolution 15 bits + sign – 4 to 20 mA, resolution 15 bits

• Isolated from the load voltage L+• Supports isochronous operation

– Minimum time for the isochronous DP cycle (TDPmin): 3.75 ms – Minimum conversion time of the output modules: (TWAmin): 1.5 ms





Pin assignmentThe following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 2AO I High Feature for the


Table 12-52 Terminal assignment of the 2AO I High Feature


Channel 0: Terminals 1 to A4Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A8QI: Analog output currentMana : Ground of the moduleTerminals 2 and 6 can be used forunneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 4Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 8QI: Analog output currentMana : Ground of the moduleTerminals 2 and 6 and 4 and 8 can be usedfor unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.

Channel 0: Terminals 1 to 3Channel 1: Terminals 5 to 7QI: Analog output currentMana : Ground of the module

Terminals 2 and 6 can be used forunneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.







Channel 1: Terminals 5 to A7QI: Analog output currentMana : Ground of the moduleTerminals 2 and 6 and 4 and 8 can be usedfor unneeded wires of up to 30 VDC.

Block diagram

Figure 12-22 Block diagram of the 2AO I High Feature



Data for specific modules Supports isochronous operation YesNumber of outputs 2Length of cable• Shielded Max. 200 m





Voltages, currents, po tentials Rated supply voltage of the electronics L+ 24 VDC• P1 YesIsolation• Between the channels and backplane bus Yes• Between channels and power supply of the

electronicsYes

• Between the channels NoPermissible potential difference• Between MANA and Minternal (UISO) 75 VDC/60 VACInsulation tested 500 VDCCurrent consumption• From the power supply L+ Max. 150 mAPower dissipation of the module Max. 2 W

Status, interrupts, diagnostics Diagnostic functions• Group error display Red "SF" LED• Diagnostic information readable YesSubstitute values can be applied Yes, parameters can be assigned

Analog value generation Resolution (including sign) ± 20 mA/16 bits

4 to 20 mA/15 bitsConversion time (per channel) Max. 1.0 ms

Settling time• For resistive load 0.25 ms• For capacitive load 1.0 ms• For inductive load 0.5 ms

Suppression of interference, limits of error Crosstalk between the outputs > 60 dBOperational limit (in the entire temperaturerange, with reference to the output range)

±0.07% (at 250 Ω load impedance)±0.3% (for all other load impedances)

Basic error limit (operational limit at 25° C withreference to output range)

±0,03% (at 250 Ω load impedance)±0,26% (for all other load impedances)

Temperature error (with reference to theoutput range) ± 0.001%/KLinearity error (with reference to the outputrange)

±0,02%

Repeatability(in steady state at 25°C with reference tooutput range)

±0,01%


±0,02%





Data for selecting an actuator Output range (rated value) ±20 mA

4 to 20 mALoad impedance (in the rated range of theoutput)• For current outputs

For inductive loadMax. 500 Ω1mH

Current output• No-load voltage 18 VDestruction limit against voltages/currentsapplied from outside• Voltage at the outputs to MANA Max. 15 V continuous; 75 V for max. 1 s (pulse duty

factor 1:20)•

Current Max. DC 50 mAConnection of actuators• Current output

2-conductor connectionPossible





Analog electronic modules13.1 Features of 4 IQ-SENSE


Parameter assignmentYou set the parameters for the 4 IQ-SENSE using the STEP 7 parameter assignment

software.

Configuration rules

With STEP 7 as of V5.1, Service Pack 3 With STEP 7 as of V5.1, Service Pack 3 or otherconfiguration software

IM151-1 BASIC: GSD file SIEM80F3.GSx as of09/02 (as of V1.0)IM151-1 STANDARD: GSD file SIEM806A.GSx asof 10/01 (as of V1.0)IM151-1 FO STANDARD: GSD file SIEM806B.GSxas of 10/01 (as of V1.5)IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE: GSD fileSIR380E0.GSx as of 12/01 (as of V1.0)

Contained in the hardware catalog of HWConfig. A GSD file is not required.

IM 151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0)



Analog electronic modules13.2 Parameters for the 4 IQ-SENSE


13.2 13.2Parameters for the 4 IQ-SEN SE

13.2.1 Overview

Parameters

Table 13-1 Parameters for the 4 IQ-SENSE

Parame ters Value range Default setting Applicability

Group diagnosis • Disable• Enable

Disable Module

Synchronization group • 1• 2• 3• 4

1 Module

Sensor type • Reflex sensor• Diffuse sensor• Deactivated

Reflex sensor Channel

Switching hysteresis • 5 %• 10 %• 20 %• 50 %

20 % Channel

Time functions • None• Return delay• Pickup delay• Pickup and return delay• Momentary impulse

None Channel

Time value • 5 ms• 10 ms• 20 ms• 50 ms• 100 ms• 200 ms• 500 ms• 1 s• 2 s• 5 s• 10 s

5 ms Channel

Teach-in disable • Teach-in with buttonpossible

• Teach-in with button notpossible

Teach-in with buttonpossible

Channel





NoteUnused channels of the module must be deactivated otherwise the wire break diagnosis willbe reported.Measurement type parameter: deactivated • All the diagnostics are suppressed.• Sensitivity/distance values and circuit states are set to "0".• The sensor is switched off

13.2.2 Group diagnostics parameter

FeaturesIf you enable group diagnosis, a queued diagnostic message is entered.

See alsoChannel-specific diagnostics (Page 6-40)

13.2.3 Synchronization group parameter

Features• Sensors of different modules of the 4 IQ-SENSE can affect one another with scattered

light, for example.• To prevent this interference between adjacent sensors on different modules, you can

assign each module a separate synchronization group with this parameter. Modules withdifferent synchronization groups do not affect each other.

• It is not possible for sensors on the same module to affect one another.





Operating principleThe following figure illustrates how the synchronization group parameter works:

Figure 13-1 Synchronization group

It is only possible for the sensors of the modules in slots 2 and 6 to interfere with one anotherbecause they are in the same synchronization group: group 1.

Note

When you install sensors of the same synchronization group, you must ensure that the

minimum clearance is adhered to (see the sensor information leaflet) to prevent anyinterference between the sensors.





13.2.4 Sensor type parameter

FeaturesYou use this parameter to set the sensor type for each channel.• Reflex sensor• Diffuse sensor• Deactivated

Diffuse sensor

Table 13-2 Diffuse sensor

Diffuse sensor Objec t

Transmitter

Receiver

Circuit state 0: No object detected. Inother words, the object is not in the pathof the beams. The receiver cannot seeany light

Transmitter

Receiver

Circuit state 1: Object detected. In otherwords, the object is in the path of thebeams. The receiver cannot see any light.

Reflex sensor

Table 13-3 Reflex sensor

Reflex sensor Objec t

Transmitter

Receiver

Circuit state 0: No object detected. Inother words, the object is not in the pathof the beams. The receiver sees somelight.

Transmitter

Receiver

Circuit state 1: Object detected. In otherwords, the object is in the path of thebeams. The receiver cannot see any light.





13.2.5 Switching hysteresis parameter

FeaturesFaults with the diffuse sensor or in the production process can result in signal wobbles. Themeasured value then changes the switching threshold by 100 % (object detected - object notdetected). You can prevent this switching threshold wobble using the switching hysteresisparameter. This will ensure a stable output signal on the sensor.You can assigned parameters to 5%/10%/20%/50% for switching hysteresis.

RequirementsYou can only set the switching hysteresis parameter for diffuse sensors with backgroundfadeout.

Operating principle

Figure 13-2 Switching hysteresis parameter





Analog electronic modules13.3 Control and feedback interface (PIQ/PII)


13.3 13.3Control and feedback interface (PIQ/PII)

13.3.1 Fundam entals of the control and feedback interface (PIQ/PII)

IntroductionYou can configure the address space of the control and feedback interfaces of the4 IQ-SENSE. You can choose between Standard and Enhanced .

Standard features•

The 4 IQ-SENSE occupies 4 bits in the feedback interface.• You can evaluate the circuit state of each channel using the feedback interface.

Enhanced features• The 4 IQ-SENSE occupies one byte in the control interface and one in the feedback

interface.• You can use the control interface to specify the sensitivity and distance values for each

channel (IntelliTeach via "IQ-SENSE Opto" FB) and execute Teach-in .• You can use the feedback interface to evaluate the acquired sensitivity and distance

values (switching threshold) and the circuit state for each channel.

Requirements:• You can use the "IQ-SENSE Opto" function block. The FB facilitates easy access to the

control and feedback interface.• Please note that in this case PII equals PIQ.• You can download the function block and the relevant product information on the Internet

at http://www.ad.siemens.de/csi_e/gsd.

Configuring the address space

Address area With STEP 7 as of V5.1, ServicePack 3

With STEP 7 as of V4.02 or COMPROFIBUS or other configuration software

Standard In the hardware catalog of HWConfig, choose 4IQ-SENSEOpto S

From the GSD file, chooseS 6ES7138 -4GA00-0AB0 IQ-SENSE Opto

Enhanced In the hardware catalog of HWConfig, choose 4IQ-SENSEOpto E

From the GSD file, chooseE 6ES7138 -4GA00-0AB0 IQ-SENSE Opto







13.3.2 Standard

Feedback interface (PII)

Table 13-4 Standard feedback interface

Address Assignment

Bit 7: 0 (not assigned)Bit 6: 0 (not assigned)Bit 5: 0 (not assigned)Bit 4: 0 (not assigned)Bit 3: Circuit state sensor on channel 3

1: Object detected0: Object not detected

Bit 2: Circuit state sensor on channel 21: Object detected0: Object not detected


Byte 0






13.3.3 Enhanced

Feedback interface (PII)

Table 13-5 Enhanced feedback interface

Address Assignme nt Designation onIQ-SENSE Opto FB


Q_CH0Byte 0

Bit 1 to bit 7:Acquired sensitivity/distance values on channel 0 by

Teach in *

TEACH_VAL_OUT


Q_CH1Byte1

Bit 1 to Bit 7:Acquired sensitivity/distance values on channel 1 byTeach in *

TEACH_VAL_OUT


Q_CH2Byte 2

Bit 1 to Bit 7:

Acquired sensitivity/distance values on channel 2 byTeach in *

TEACH_VAL_OUT


Q_CH3Byte 3

Bit 1 to Bit 7:Acquired sensitivity/distance values on channel 3 byTeach in *

TEACH_VAL_OUT

*: The current sensitivity/distance value is entered:- After teach-in is completed on the sensor- After teach-in is completed via the "IQ-SENSE Opto"





Control interface (PIQ)

Table 13-6 Enhanced control interfaceAddress Assignment Designation on

IQ-SENSE Opto FB

Specify sensitivity/distance value on c hannel 0 • Bit 0:

1: Transfer sensitivity/distance value to the sensor onchannel 2 (using rising edge)0: deactivated

WR_TEACH_VAL

• Bit 1 to 7:Specify sensitivity/distance value on channel 0: 1 to 126(sensor-dependent)

TEACH_VAL_IN

Byte 0

Teach-in on the sensor on chan nel 0 • Bit 0:

1: Start teach-in on the sensor on channel 0 (at the risingedge)0: deactivated

• Bit 1 to 7: 0

START_TEACH




WR_TEACH_VAL

TEACH_VAL_IN

Byte1

Teach-in on the sensor on chan nel 1 • Bit 0:


• Bit 1 to 7: 0

START_TEACH




WR_TEACH_VAL

TEACH_VAL_IN

Byte 2

Teach-in on channel 2 • Bit 0:


• Bit 1 to 7: 0

START_TEACH





Address Assignme nt Designation onIQ-SENSE Opto FB

Specify sensitivity/distance value on ch annel 3 • Bit 0:



WR_TEACH_VAL

TEACH_VAL_IN

Byte 3

Teach-in on the sensor on chann el 3 • Bit 0:


•

Bit 1 to 7: 0

START_TEACH

Principle of operation: Specifying a sensitivity/distance value (IntelliTeach)

Figure 13-4 Principle of operation: Specifying a sensitivity/distance value (IntelliTeach)





Principle of operation: Teach-in

Figure 13-5 Principle of operation: Teach-in



Analog electronic modules13.4 Technical specifications


13.4 13.4Technical specifications

Pin assignmentThe following table indicates the terminal assignment of the 4 1Q-SENSE for the differentterminal modules:

Table 13-7 Terminal assignment of the 4 IQ-SENSE


Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 4

Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 8M+: Input signal "+"M-: Input signal "-"

Channel 0: Terminals 1 and 3Channel 1: Terminals 5 and 7

Channel 2: Terminals 2 and 4Channel 3: Terminals 6 and 8M+: Input signal "+"M-: Input signal "-"

Note

The connections to the sensors are protected against polarity reversal.The minimum conductor cross-section for the sensors is 0.25 mm 2.The connecting cable for the sensors is described in the appendix.





Block diagram

Figure 13-6 Block diagram of the 4 IQ-SENSE






Dimensions and weight Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 15 x 81 x 52Weight Approx. 35g

Data for specific modules Number of inputs 4Length of cable• Unshielded Max. 50 m• Shielded Max. 50 m

Voltages, currents, po tentials Rated supply voltage (from the power module) 24 VDC• P1 YesIsolation• Between the channels No• Between the channels and backplane bus YesPermissible potential difference• Between the different circuits 75 VDC, 60 VACInsulation tested with 500 VDCCurrent consumption• From supply voltage Max. 0.3 APower dissipation of the module Typ. 0.85 W

Status, interrupts, diagnostics Status display Green LED per channelDiagnostic functions• Group error Red "SF" LED• Diagnostic information can be displayed Yes

Data for selecting a sensor Connectable sensors Photoelectric proximity switch with IQ-SENSE

Response Times Cycle time Max. 3.24 ms

See alsoOrder numbers for connecting cables for 4 IQ-SENSE electronic module (Page A-9)






RESER VE modules 1414.1 14.1RESER VE modules

Order numbers

6ES7138-4AA01-0AA0 (installation width 15 mm)6ES7138-4AA11-0AA0 (installation width 30 mm)

FeaturesThe RESERVE module has the following characteristic features:• Suitable for all TM-E terminal modules (installation widths 15 mm and 30 mm)• Reserves a slot for any electronic module slot. Insert the RESERVE module in the

reserved slot of the ET 200S configuration.

Note

Note the following for IM 151 (6ES7151-1AA01-0AB0, 6ES7151-1AA02-0AB0),IM 151 FO (6ES7151-1AB00-0AB0, 6ES7151-1AB01-0AB0), and IM 151/ CPU(6ES7151-7AA00-0AB0):If you remove an electronic module during operation of the ET 200S and replace it with aRESERVE module, you must then cycle the supply voltage (power OFF/power ON) onthe interface module.Note the following for IM 151 (6ES7151-1AA00-0AB0):The RESERVE module cannot be used in the ET 200S.

Parameter assignm ent (without option handling)• In STEP 7 or COM PROFIBUS, assign parameters to the electronic module you want to

use for future applications, such as 4DI DC High Feature, on the slot of the RESERVEmodule. – Drag the module to the configuration table – Assign the parameters

• Assign parameters to the interface module as follows:



RESERVE modules14.1 RESERVE modules


Parameters Setting

Operation at Preset <> Actual

Configuration

Enable

• If you have assigned parameters to an electronic module with inputs for the RESERVEmodule, the following substitute values are reported:

– Digital input modules: 0 – Analog input modules: 7FFFH – Function module: 0

Note

If you use RESERVE modules:• The SF LED lights up on the interface module• A channel-specific diagnostic and module status "10B: Wrong module" are reported for

the RESERVE module slot.

Pin assignmentThe RESERVE module has no connection to the terminals of the TM-E terminal module.This enables you to fully wire the TM-E terminal module and prepare it for the subsequent

application.


Dimensions and weight Dimension W x H x D (mm)

Weight

15 x 81 x 5230 x 81 x 52Approx. 33 g (installation width 15 mm)Approx. 55g (installation width 30 mm)

Voltages, currents, potentials

Power dissipation of the module Typ. 0.025 WStatus, interrupts, diagnostics Status display NoDiagnostic functions No

See alsoBasic principles of option handling on PROFIBUS DP(Page 3-30) Example: Use of RESERVE modules (Page 3-33)





Order numbers A.1 Module order numbers

Distributed I/O System ET200SA-2 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Terminal modules

Figure A-1 Explanation of the abbreviated designation

This table shows the order numbers for terminal modules.

Table A-2 Terminal module order numbersDesignation Order numb er

TM-P15S23-A1 (screw-type terminal), 1 unit 6ES7193-4CC20-0AA0TM-P15C23-A1 (spring terminal), 1 unit 6ES7193-4CC30-0AA0TM-P15N23-A1 (Fast Connect), 1 unit 6ES7193-4CC70-0AA0TM-P15S23-A0 (screw-type terminal), 1 unit 6ES7193-4CD20-0AA0TM-P15C23-A0 (spring terminal), 1 unit 6ES7193-4CD30-0AA0TM-P15N23-A0 (Fast Connect), 1 unit 6ES7193-4CD70-0AA0TM-P15S22-01 (screw-type terminal), 1 unit 6ES7193-4CE00-0AA0TM-P15C22-01 (spring terminal), 1 unit 6ES7193-4CE10-0AA0

TM-P15N22-01 (Fast Connect), 1 unit 6ES7193-4CE60-0AA0TM-P30S44-A0 (screw-type terminal), 1 unit 6ES7193-4CK20-0AA0TM-P30C44-A0 (spring terminal), 1 unit 6ES7193-4CK30-0AA0TM-PF30S47-F1 (screw-type terminal), 1 unit 3RK1 903-3AA00TM-E15S26-A1 (screw-type terminal), 5 units 6ES7193-4CA40-0AA0TM-E15C26-A1 (spring terminal), 5 units 6ES7193-4CA50-0AA0TM-E15N26-A1 (Fast Connect), 5 units 6ES7193-4CA80-0AA0TM-E15S24-A1 (screw-type terminal), 5 units 6ES7193-4CA20-0AA0TM-E15C24-A1 (spring terminal), 5 units 6ES7193-4CA30-0AA0TM-E15N24-A1 (Fast Connect), 5 units 6ES7193-4CA70-0AA0




Distributed I/O System ET200SOperating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14 A-3

Designation Order number

TM-E15S24-01 (screw-type terminal), 5 units 6ES7193-4CB20-0AA0

TM-E15C24-01 (spring terminal), 5 units 6ES7193-4CB30-0AA0TM-E15N24-01 (Fast Connect), 5 units 6ES7193-4CB70-0AA0TM-E15S23-01 (screw-type terminal), 5 units 6ES7193-4CB00-0AA0TM-E15C23-01 (spring terminal), 5 units 6ES7193-4CB10-0AA0TM-E15N23-01 (Fast Connect), 1 unit 6ES7193-4CB60-0AA0TM-E15S24-AT (screw-type terminal), 5 units 6ES7193-4CL20-0AA0TM-E15C24-AT (spring terminal), 5 units 6ES7193-4CL30-0AA0TM-E30S44-01 (screw-type terminal), 1 unit 6ES7193-4CG20-0AA0TM-E30C44-01 (spring terminal), 1 unit 6ES7193-4CG30-0AA0TM-E30S46-A1 (screw-type terminal), 1 unit 6ES7193-4CF40-0AA0

TM-E30C46-A1 (spring terminal), 1 unit 6ES7193-4CF50-0AA0

Power m odulesThis table shows the order numbers for power modules.

Table A-3 Power module order numbers


PM-E 24 VDC, 1 unit 6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0PM-E 24-48 VDC/24-230 VAC, 1 unit 6ES7138-4CB10-0AB0PM-E 24-48 VDC, 1 unit 6ES7138-4CA50-0AB0

Digital electronic modulesThis table shows the order numbers for digital electronic modules.

Table A-4 Digital electronic module order numbers


2DI 24 VDC Standard, 5 units 6ES7131-4BB01-0AA04DI 24 VDC Standard, 5 units 6ES7131-4BD01-0AA04DI 24 VDC/SRC Standard, 5 units 6ES7131-4BD51-0AA02DI 24 VDC High Feature, 5 units 6ES7131-4BB01-0AB04DI 24 VDC High Feature, 5 units 6ES7131-4BD01-0AB04DI 24-48 VUC High Feature, 5 units 6ES7131-4CD00-0AB04DI NAMUR 6ES7131-4RD00-0AB02DI 120 VAC Standard, 5 units 6ES7131-4EB00-0AB02DI 230 VAC Standard, 5 units 6ES7131-4FB00-0AB02DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard, 5 units 6ES7132-4BB01-0AA04DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard, 5 units 6ES7132-4BD01-0AA02DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature, 5 units 6ES7132-4BB01-0AB02DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard, 5 units 6ES7132-4BB31-0AA0





Designation Order numb er

4DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard, 5 units 6ES7132-4BD31-0AA0

2DO 24 VDC/2 A High Feature, 5 units 6ES7132-4BB31-0AB02DO 24-230 VAC/2 A, 5 units 6ES7132-4FB00-0AB02RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A, 5 units 6ES7132-4HB01-0AB02RO NO/NC 24-48 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A, 5 units 6ES7132-4HB10-0AB04 IQ-SENSE, 5 units 6ES7138-4GA00-0AB0

Analog electronic modulesThis table shows the order numbers for analog electronic modules.

Table A-5 Analog electronic module order numbers

Designation Order numb er

2AI U Standard, 1 unit 6ES7134-4FB01-0AB02AI U High Feature, 1 unit 6ES7134-4LB00-0AB02AI U High Speed, 1 unit 6ES7134-4FB51-0AB02AI I 2WIRE Standard, 1 unit 6ES7134-4GB01-0AB04AI I 2WIRE Standard, 1 unit 6ES7134-4GD00-0AB02AI I 2WIRE High Speed, 1 unit 6ES7134-4GB51-0AB02AI I 4WIRE Standard, 1 unit 6ES7134-4GB11-0AB02AI I 2/4WIRE High Feature, 1 unit 6ES7134-4MB00-0AB02AI I 4WIRE High Speed, 1 unit 6ES7134-4GB61-0AB02AI RTD Standard, 1 unit 6ES7134-4JB50-0AB02AI RTD High Feature, 1 unit 6ES7134-4NB51-0AB02AI TC Standard, 1 unit 6ES7134-4JB00-0AB02AI TC High Feature, 1 unit 6ES7134-4NB01-0AB02AO U Standard, 1 unit 6ES7135-4FB01-0AB02AO U High Feature, 1 unit 6ES7135-4LB01-0AB02AO I Standard, 1 unit 6ES7135-4GB01-0AB02AO I High Feature, 1 unit 6ES7135-4MB01-0AB0





Technology modulesThis table shows the order numbers for technology modules.

Table A-6 Process-related module order numbers


1Count 24V/100kHz, 1 unit 6ES7138-4DA03-0AB01Count 5V/500kHz, 1 unit 6ES7138-4DE01-0AB01 SSI, 1 unit 6ES7138-4DB01-0AB01 STEP 5 V/204 kHz, 1 unit 6ES7138-4DC00-0AB02PULSE, 1 unit 6ES7138-4DD00-0AB01POS INC/Digital 6ES7138-4DG00-0AB01POS SSI/Digital 6ES7138-4DH00-0AB0

1POS INC/Analog 6ES7138-4DJ00-0AB01POS SSI/Analog 6ES7138-4DK00-0AB01SI 3964/ASCII serial interface module 6ES7138-4DF01-0AB01SI Modbus/USS serial interface module 6ES7138-4DF11-0AB0SIWAREX CS weighing module 7MH4 910-0AA01

RESERVE m odulesThis table shows the order numbers for reserve modules.

Table A-7 Reserve module order numbers


RESERVE (with 15 mm), 5 unit 6ES7138-4AA01-0AA0RESERVE (with 30 mm), 1 unit 6ES7138-4AA11-0AA0



Order numbers A.2 Order numbers for ET 200S accessories


A.2 A.2Order numbers for ET 200S accessories

ET 200S accessoriesThis table shows the order numbers for ET 200S accessories.

Table A-8 ET 200S accessories order numbers


Shield connection:Shield connection element, 5 unitsPower rail, 1 units at 1 m, 3x10 mmShield terminal, 5 unitsGrounding terminal

6ES7193-4GA00-0AA08WA2 8426ES7193-4GB00-0AA08WA2 868

DIN A4 labeling sheet, white, 10 units 6ES7193-4BA00-0AA0DIN A4 labeling sheet, red, 10 units 6ES7193-4BD00-0AA0DIN A4 labeling sheet, yellow, 10 units 6ES7193-4BB00-0AA0DIN A4 labeling sheet, petrol, 10 units 6ES7193-4BH00-0AA0Color identification labels (10 strips each containing 20 items ineach color)• White 6ES7193-4LA10-0AA0• Red 6ES7193-4LD10-0AA0• Yellow 6ES7193-4LB10-0AA0• Yellow-green 6ES7193-4LC10-0AA0• Brown 6ES7193-4LG10-0AA0• Blue 6ES7193-4LF10-0AA0• Turquoise 6ES7193-4LH10-0AA0Slot number labels, 10x (1 to 20), 200 units 8WA8 861-0ABSlot number labels, 5x (1 to 40), 200 units 8WA8 861-0ACTerminating module, 1 unit 6ES7193-4JA00-0AA0



Order numbers A.3 Order numbers for ET 200S network components


A.3 A.3Order numbers for ET 200S network components

Network compone nts for ET 200SThe tables below lists all the network components for the ET 200S distributed I/O systemthat you may require to use the ET 200S.

Table A-9 Network components (PROFIBUS DP) for ET 200S order numbers


RS 485 repeater, PROFIBUS DP, IP 20 6ES7972-0AA00-0XA0PROFIBUS bus connector (12 Mbps)• Anthracite (without programming port)• Anthracite (with programming port)

6ES7972-0BA11-0XA06ES7972-0BB11-0XA0

Bus cable• Normal• Drum cable• Direct-buried cable

6XV1 830-0EH106XV1 830-3BH106XV1 830-3AH10

Repeater adapter 6GK1510-1AA00Active RS 485 terminating element 66ES7972-0DA00-0AA0Optical link modules for glass fiber-optic cable 6GK1502-3AB10

6GK1502-4AB10PROFIBUS connecting cable 6ES7901-4BD00-0XA0Fiber-optic cable•

SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS plastic fiber-optic, duplex core (50 mring) 6XV1 821-2AN50• SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS plastic fiber optic, standard cable

– Sold by the meter – 50 m ring – 100 m ring

6XV1 821-0AH106XV1 821-0AN506XV1 821-0AT10

• SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS PCF fiber optic, standard cable, variouslengths from 50 m to 300 m 6XV1 821-1Bxxx

Plugs for fiber-optic cable• Package of 100 simplex plugs and 5 polishing sets 6GK1901-0FB00-0AA0• Package of 50 plug adapters 6ES7195-1BE00-0XA0



Order numbers A.4 Order numbers for ET 200S spare parts


Table A-10 Network components (PROFINET IO) for ET 200S order numbers


Industrial Ethernet FC RJ45 Plug 90 (RJ45 plug for Industrial Ethernetwith robust metal housing and integrated cutting/clamping contacts forconnecting the Industrial Ethernet FC installation cables; with 90°cable outlet.• 1 unit• 10 units• 50 units

6GK1 901-1BB20-2AA06GK1 901-1BB20-2AB06GK1 901-1BB20-2AE0

Industrial Ethernet Fast Connect installation cables• Fast Connect standard cable• Fast Connect trailing cable• Fast Connect marine cable

6XV1 840-2AH106XV1 840-3AH106XV1 840-4AH10

Industrial Ethernet Fast Connect stripping tool 6GK1 901-1GA00

A.4 A.4Order numbers for ET 200S spare parts

Spare partsThis table shows the order numbers for the fuses for digital input module and power module.

Table A-11 Fuse for digital input module and power module


Fuse for 4DI 24-48 VUC HF• ET200S Spare Fuse Kit 1 A, (10 ea.) 6ES7193-4KA00-0AA0Fuse for PM-E 24-48 VDC/24-230 VAC• ET200S Spare Fuse Kit 10 A, (ea.) 6ES7193-4KA10-0AA0



Order numbers A.5 Order numbers for connecting cables for 4 IQ-SENSE electronic module


A.5 A.5Order num bers for connecting cables for 4 IQ-SEN SE electronicmodule

Order numb ers for connecting cables for 4 IQ-SENSE electronic modu leThe following table contains the connecting cables for the sensors on the 4 IQ-SENSEelectronic module. You will also find these connecting cables in the NS BERO catalog (in thechapter on 3RX1 plug connections).

Table A-12 Connecting cable for 4 IQ-SENSE electronic module


Cable box (M12) for screw-type attachment with 5 m PURconnecting cable 3 x 0.34 mm2

3RX1 533

Cable box (M12) for screw-type attachment with 5 m PURconnecting cable 4 x 0.34 mm2 3RX1 536

A.6 A.6Order numbers for manuals

ET 200S Distributed I/O SystemThis table shows the order numbers for the documentation packages and manuals forET 200S.

Table A-13 ET 200S documentation packages or manuals


ET 200S Distributed I/O System model. Available only on the InternetET 200S Motor Starter manual Available only on the InternetET 200S Interface Module IM 151-7 CPU manual and instructionlist

Available only on the Internet

ET 200S Technological Functions manual Available only on the InternetET 200S Positioning manual Available only on the InternetET 200S Serial Interface Module manual Available only on the InternetET 200S Distributed I/O System Fail-Safe Modules manual Available only on the Internet• ET 200S FC Frequency Converter Operating Instructions • ET 200S FC Frequency Converter List Manual )

Available only on the Internet

They are also available on the Internet in German, English, French, Spanish, and Italian (see Service& Support on the Internet).



Order numbers A.6 Order numbers for manuals


STEP 7 and SIMATIC S7To program and commission the ET 200S with STEP 7 , you require one of the following

manuals.The STEP 7 and SIMATIC S7 manuals are listed in this table.

Table A-14 STEP 7 and SIMATIC S7 manuals

Designation Contents

S7-300 Programmable Controllerdocumentation package consisting of:

Among others,

• Reference Manual – CPU data: CPU 312 IFM to 318-2 DP

and instruction list – CPU data: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x and

instruction list

• Operating instructions and a description of thefunctions and technical specifications of theCPUs

• List of the instruction set of CPUs and their

execution times List of executable blocks andtheir execution times• Manual

– CPU 31xC: Process-related functionsincluding CD with examples

• Description of the different process-relatedfunctions

• Installation manual – S7-300 Programmable Controller:

Setup: CPU 312 IFM to 318-2 DP – S7-300 Programmable Controller:

Setup: CPU 31xC and CPU 31x

• Description of the configuration, mounting,wiring, networking and commissioning of anS7-300

• Reference manual: – S7-300 Programmable Controller

Module Specifications

• Functional descriptions and technicalspecifications of the signal modules, powersupply modules and interface modules

• Getting Started • Examples of different commissioning stepsleading up to a functional application.

Programmable Controllers S7 F/FH manual Among others,• Description of the tasks that have to be

executed to create and commission a fail-safeS7 F Systems system

S7 Distributed Safety Configuring andProgramming manual

Among others,• Description of the tasks that have to be

executed to create and commission a fail-safeS7 Distributed Safety system

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controllers Hardware and Installation

Among others,• Description of the PROFIBUS DP master

interface in S7-400 and M7-400• Installing a PROFIBUS DP network• RS 485 repeater

System Software for S7-300/400 Program Design Programming Manual

Among others,Description of addressing and diagnostics inSIMATIC S7

System Software for S7-300/400 System and Standard Functions Reference Manual

Description of the SFCs in STEP 7

Description SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS networks, laying of linesand cables (primarily)





ET 200 in SIMATIC S5To program and commission the ET 200S with STEP 7 and COM PROFIBUS , you need the

following manual.The STEP 7 and SIMATIC S7 manuals are listed in this table.

Table A-15 STEP 7 and SIMATIC S7 manuals

Designation Contents

ET 200 Distributed I/O System Among others,• Description of the IM308-C master interface for

S5-115U/H, S5-135U, and S5-155U/H• Description of the S5-95U with the PROFIBUS

DP master interface• Description of the procedure for installing a DP

system and an FMS system with the CP 5412(A2) as master• Handling COM PROFIBUS• Working with the FB IM308C/FB 230

Decentralizing with PRO FIBUS DP technical guideThis table shows the order numbers of the technical guide to PROFIBUS DP and SIMATICS7.

Table A-16 Technical Guide to PROFIBUS DP and SIMATIC S7

Technical guide Order numbe rs ContentsDecentralizing with PROFIBUS DP - Aufbau, Projektierung und Einsatz desPROFIBUS DP mit SIMATIC S7 (Structure,Configuration, and Use of the PROFIBUSDP with the SIMATIC S7)Josef Weigmann, Gerhard KilianPublicis MCD Verlag, 1998

From booksellers:ISBN 3-89578-074-XFrom your Siemensbranch office:A19100-L531-B714

Instruction manual for asimple introduction to thePROFIBUS DP andimplementation ofautomation tasks with thePROFIBUS DP andSIMATIC S7.Use of the PROFIBUS DP isillustrated for theSIMATIC S7 with a largenumber of practicalexamples.







Distributed I/O System ET200SOperating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14 B-1

BDimension drawings BB.1 B.1Minimum clearances for moun ting, wiring, and heat dissipation

Minimum clearances for mounting, wiring, and h eat dissipation

Figure B-1 Minimum clearances



Dimension drawingsB.2 Interface modules

Distributed I/O System ET200SB-2 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

B.2 B.2Interface modules

Interface m oduleIM151-1 interface module drawing (dimensions in mm):

1

① Rail support

IM151-3 PN interface module drawing (dimensions in mm):

1

45

6 6

. 5

5 3

67

1 1 9

. 5

① Rail support



Dimension drawingsB.3 Terminal modules (screw-type/spring terminals) with an electronic module inserted


B.3 B.3Terminal modules (screw-type/spring terminals) with an electronicmodule inserted

Terminal m odules (screw-type/spring terminals) with an electronic m odule insertedThe dimensions of the terminal modules with the power module inserted are identical.Dimension drawing of terminal modules (screw-type/spring terminals) with an electronicmodule inserted (dimensions in mm):

1

1

① Rail support





Dimension drawing of terminal modules (screw-type/spring terminals) with an electronicmodule inserted (dimensions in mm):

1

1

① Rail support





Dimension drawing of terminal modules (screw-type/spring terminals) with an electronicmodule inserted (dimensions in mm):

1

① Rail support





Dimension drawing of terminal modules (screw-type terminals) with an electronic moduleinserted (dimensions in mm):

1

1 3 0

30

6 6

. 5

3

67

1 9 6

. 5

① Rail support



Dimension drawingsB.4 Terminal modules (Fast Connect) with an electronic module inserted


B.4 B.4Terminal modules (Fast Connect) with an electronic module inserted

Terminal modules (Fast C onnect) with an electronic module insertedThe dimensions of the terminal modules with the power module inserted are identical.Dimension drawing of terminal modules (Fast Connect) with an electronic module inserted(dimensions in mm):





1

1

① Rail support





Dimension drawing of terminal modules (Fast Connect) with an electronic module inserted(dimensions in mm):

1

① Rail support



Dimension drawingsB.5 Terminating module


B.5 B.5Terminating module

Terminating moduleTerminating module drawing (dimensions in mm):

1

① Rail support

B.6 B.6Shield connection

Shield connectionShield connection (dimensions in mm):

Figure B-2 Shield connection dimension drawing



Distributed I/O System ET200SOperating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14 C-1

CAddress space of the inputs and outputs CC.1 C.1Address space of the inputs and outputs

Address space of the modulesThis table shows the address spaces of the inputs and outputs of the ET 200S

Table C-1 Address spaces of the inputs and outputs of the ET 200S

Address space of the inputs Address space of the outputsodule

No grouping with grouping1 No grouping with grouping1

Power modulesWith status byte (S)2 1 bytes ---With option handling (O)2 8 bytes 8 bytesWith status byte and optionhandling (SO)2

9 bytes 9 bytes (9th byte not relevant)

Digital input modules 1 bytes 2 bits (2DI)4 bits (4DI)

--- ---

4DI NAMUR 2 bytes ---Digital output modules --- --- 1 bytes 2 bits (2DO)

4 bits (4DO)Analog input modules 4 bytes (2AI)

8 bytes (4AI)--- ---

Analog output modules --- --- 4 bytes1COUNT 24V/100kHz 8 bytes 8 bytes1COUNT 5V/500kHz 8 bytes 8 bytes1SSI 8 bytes 8 bytes

1SSI fast 4 bytes ---1STEP 5V/204kHz 8 bytes 8 bytes2PULSE 8 bytes 8 bytes1POS INC/Digital 8 bytes 8 bytes1POS SSI/Digital 8 bytes 8 bytes1POS INC/Analog 8 bytes 8 bytes1POS SSI/Analog 8 bytes 8 bytes1SI 3964/ASCII serialinterface module

4/8 bytes 4/8 bytes

1SI Modbus/USS serialinterface module

4/8 bytes 4/8 bytes



Address space of the inputs and outputsC.1 Address space of the inputs and outputs

Distributed I/O System ET200SC-2 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Address space of the inputs Address space of the outputs

4IQ-SENSE (standard) 1 bytes --- ---

4IQ-SENSE (enhanced) 4 bytes 4 bytesET 200S FC frequencyconverter

8 bytes 8 bytes

1See sections on configuring the ET 200S2Additional optional entries you can select from the GSD file

Address area for option handling and status byteYou can control and monitor option handling, and evaluate the status byte of the powermodule using the control (PIQ) and feedback interface (PII).The address range of the control (PIQ) and feedback interface (PII) depends on the

configuration or selection of the corresponding entry in the configuration software.This table shows the PII feedback interface and the PIQ control interface for different entries.

Table C-2 PII feedback interface and PIQ control interface

In STEP 7/HW C onfig orCOM PR OFIBUS or other

configuration software

Feed back interface PII Control interface PIQ

Usual entry for the powermodule

--- ---

Ends in ...S IBx Status byte ---Ends in ...O IBx

...IBx+7

Option handlingQBx...QBx+7

Option handling

IBx...IBx+7

Option handlingQBx...QBx+7

Option handlingEnds in ...SO

IBx+8 Status byte QBx+8 Not relevant

Option handling in PIQ/PII

(*) Not relevant




Distributed I/O System ET200SOperating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14 C-3

PIQ: QB x to QB x+7

0 Parameter assignment for option handling applies. RESERVE

modules are permitted:• The station is engaged in data exchange.• A diagnostic is not signaled.• The SF LED on the interface module is off.

Slots 2 to 63:

1 Parameter assignment for option handling is cancelled.RESERVE modules are not accepted on this slot:• The station is engaged in data exchange.• A diagnostic is not signaled.• The SF LED on the interface module is off.

PII: IB x to IB x+7 0 The RESERVE module, an incorrect module, or no module is

on the slot.Slots 1 to 63:

1 The configured module is on the slot.

Status byte power modules

Figure C-1 Assignment of status byte for power modules




Distributed I/O System ET200SC-4 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14



Distributed I/O System ET200SOperating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14 D-1

DResponse Times DD.1 D.1Overview

IntroductionThe figure below shows the different response times between the DP master and the ET200S.

Figure D-1 Response times between the DP master and the ET 200S

D.2 D.2Response times at the DP masterYou will find information on the response times in the manual for the DP master.



Response TimesD.3 Response times for the ET 200S

Distributed I/O System ET200SD-2 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

D.3 D.3Response times for the ET 200S

Calculating the response time for IM151-1 BA SICThe following formula enables you to make an approximate calculation of the ET 200Sresponse time:Response time [μs] = 156 · m + 33 · do + 486 · ai + 374 · ao + 1633 · t + 934Explanation of the parameters:• m : Total number of all modules (power modules, digital electronic modules, analog

electronic modules, IQ-SENSE electronic modules, process-related modules, and motorstarters)

• do : Sum of all the digital output modules• ai : Sum of all the analog input modules and 1SSI fast electronic modules• ao : Sum of all the digital output modules• t: Number of all process-related modules (except 1SSI fast)

Exam ple of the calculation of the ET 200S response time in the case of the IM151-1 BAS IC

Figure D-2 Example setup for calculating the response time in the case of the IM151-1 BASIC

Calculation method:m = 12; do=2; ai=1; ao=1; t=0Response time = 156 · m + 33 · do + 486 · ai + 374 · ao + 1633 · t + 934Response time = 156 · 12 + 33 · 2 + 486 · 1 + 374 · 1 + 1633 · 0 + 934Response time = 3732 μs





Calculation of the response time in the case of the IM151-1 STA NDA RD and IM151-1 FOSTANDARD

The following formula enables you to make an approximate calculation of the ET 200Sresponse time:Response time [μs]* = 55 · m + 110 · a + 400 · t + 190* Bus length parameter > 1m: The response time is increased by an additional 40%.Explanation of the parameters:• m : Total number of all modules (power modules, digital electronic modules, analog

electronic modules, IQ-SENSE electronic modules, process-related modules, and motorstarters)

• a : Sum of all the analog electronic modules, 4 IQ-SENSE electronic modules, and 1SSIfast electronic modules

•

t: Number of all process-related modules (except 1SSI fast)

Note

The formula specified applies to cyclic data transfer. The following prerequisites must befulfilled:• No diagnoses are reported.• No modules are removed and inserted.

Examp le for the calculation of the ET 200S response time for the IM151-1 STAN DAR D andIM151-1 FO STANDA RD

Figure D-3 Example of the calculation of the response time in the case of the IM151-1 STANDARD,

IM 151-1 FO STANDARD





Calculation method:m = 21; a = 3; t = 1

Response time = 55 · m +110 · a + 400 · t + 190Response time = 55 · 21 +110 · 3 + 400 · 1 + 190Response time = 2075 μs

Calculation of the reaction time for IM151-1 HIGH FEAT URE (6ES 7151-1BA00 -0AB0)When you calculate the ET 200S response time, you have to choose between 2 setupvariants:1. If there are only power modules, digital electronic modules, and motor starters in your

ET 200S setup (exception: no no motor starters; High Feature), the following formulaapplies:Response time [μs] = response time PII + response time PIQ + 1000*Response time PII [μs] = 55 · m +130Response time PIQ [μs] = 10 · mdo +90

2. If your ET 200S setup differs from no.1, the following formula applies:Response time [μs] = response time PII + response time PIQ + 1000*Response time PII [μs] = 55 · m +125 · ai + 175 · t +250Response time PIQ [μs] = 10 · mdo +125 · ao + 175 · t +130

Explanation of the parameters:

• m : Total number of all modules (power modules, digital electronic modules, analogelectronic modules, IQ-SENSE electronic modules, process-related modules, and motorstarters)

• mdo: Slot number of the last digital output module, 4 IQ-SENSE electronic module, ormotor starter in the ET 200S setup. You should place these modules or motor starters onthe front slots to improve the response time.

• ai : Sum of all the analog input modules• ao : Sum of all the analog output modules• t: Number of all technological modules• *: In the case of isochronous mode, this value can be increased per configuration

(settings on the DP master system in HW Config: equidistant DP cycle). Note: This value(1000 µs) must be included in the calculation even if you have not set isochronous mode.





Examp le of the calculation of the ET 200S response time with IM151-1 HIGH F EATU RE(6ES7151-1BA00-0AB0)

Figure D-4 Example setup for the calculation of the ET 200S response time with IM151-1 HIGH

FEATURE (6ES7151-1BA00-0AB0)

Calculation method:m = 17; mdo = 6Response time PII [μs] = 55 · m +130 = 55 · 17 + 130 = 1065 μsResponse time PIQ [μs] = 10 · mdo +90 = 10 · 6 + 90 = 150 μsResponse time [μs] = response time PII + response time PIQ + 1000Response time [μs] = 1065 + 150 + 1000 = 2215 μs

Calculation of the reaction time for IM151-1 HIGH FEATU RE (6ES7 151-1BA01-0AB 0)

The following formula enables you to make an approximate calculation of the ET 200Sresponse time:Reaction time [µs] = 22 · m + 14 · b + 213Explanation of the parameters:• m : Total number of all configured modules• b : Sum of all input and output bytes (without bitgranular modules)



Response TimesD.4 Response times for the digital input modules


Exam ple of the calculation of the ET 200S response time with IM151-1 HIGH FE ATUR E(6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0)

Example setup for the calculation of the ET 200S response time with IM151-1 HIGHFEATURE (6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0)Calculation method:m = 17; b = 0Reaction time [µs] = 22 · m + 14 · b + 213 = 22 · 17 + 14 · 0 + 213 = 587 µsReaction time [µs] =587 µs

D.4 D.4Response times for the digital input modules

Input delayThe response times of the digital input modules depend on the input delay.

See also4DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BD31-0AA0)(Page 11-69) 2DI 24 VDC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BB01-0AA0).(Page 11-9) 2RO NO/NC 24-48 VDC/5 A 24-230 VAC/5 A digital electronic module(6ES7132-4HB10-0AB0)(Page 11-90) 2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A digital electronic module(6ES7132-4HB01-0AB0) (Page 11-84) Digital electronic module 2DO 24 to 230 VAC (6ES7132-4FB00-0AB0)(Page 11-79) 2DO 24 VDC/2 A High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB31-0AB0)(Page 11-74) 2DO 24 VDC/2 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB31-0AA0)(Page 11-64) 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0)(Page 11-59) 4DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard digital electronic module(6ES7132-4BD01-0AA0)(Page 11-54) 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard digital electronic module (6ES7132-4BB01-0AA0)(Page 11-49)



Response TimesD.5 Response times for the digital output modules


2DI 230 VAC Standard digital electronic module (6ES7131-4FB00-0AB0)(Page 11-45) 2DI 120 VAC Standard digital electronic module (6ES7131-4EB00-0AB0)(Page 11-41)

4DI NAMUR digital electronic module(6ES7131-4RD00-0AB0)(Page 11-33) 4DI 24-48 VUC High Feature digital electronic module(6ES7131-4CD00-0AB0)(Page 11-29) 4DI 24 VDC High Feature digital electronic module(6ES7131-4BD01-0AB0)(Page 11-25) 2DI 24 VDC High Feature digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0)(Page 11-21) 4DI 24 VDC/SRC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD51-0AA0)(Page 11-17) 4DI 24 VDC ST digital electronic module (6ES7131-4BD01-0AA0)(Page 11-13)

D.5 D.5Response times for the digital output modu les

Output delayThe response times correspond to the output delay.

See alsoParameters for power modules (Page 10-1)

D.6D.6

Response times for analog input modules

Conversion timeThe conversion time consists of the basic conversion time and the processing time for wirebreak check diagnostics.In integrative conversion processes, the integration time is included directly in the conversiontime.

Cycle time

The analog/digital conversion and the transfer of the digitized measured values to memory orto the backplane bus take place sequentially. In other words, the analog input channels areconverted one after the other. The cycle time, that is, the time until an analog output value isconverted again, is the sum of the conversion times of all the activated analog outputchannels of the analog input modules. You should deactivate unused analog input channelsduring parameter assignment in order to reduce the cycle time. The conversion andintegration time for a deactivated channel is 0.The following figure provides you with an overview of what makes up the cycle time for ann-channel analog input module.



Response TimesD.7 Response times for analog output modules


Figure D-5 Cycle time of the analog input module

See also2AI TC Standard analog electronic module (6ES7134-4JB00-0AB0) (Page 12-85)

2AI TC High Feature analog electronic module (6ES7134-4NB01-0AB0) (Page 12-91)

D 7 D 7Response times for analog output modules

Conversion timeThe conversion time of the analog output channels comprises the time for the transfer of thedigitized output values from internal memory and the digital/analog conversion.

Cycle timeThe conversion of the analog output channels for the module takes place with a processingtime and sequentially with a conversion time for channels 0 and 1.

The cycle time, that is, the time until an analog output value is converted again, is the sum ofthe conversion times of all the activated analog output channels and of the processing timeof the analog output module.

The following figure provides you with an overview of what makes up the cycle time for ananalog output module.



Response TimesD.7 Response times for analog output modules


Figure D-6 Cycle time of the analog output module

Settling timeThe settling time (t2 to t3) - that is, the time from the application of the converted value untilthe specified value is obtained at the analog output - depends on the load. A distinction mustbe drawn between resistive, capacitive, and inductive loads.

Response timeThe response time (t 1 to t3) - that is, the time from the application of the digital output valuesin internal memory until the specified value is obtained at the analog output - is, in the most

unfavorable case, the sum of the cycle time and the settling time. The most unfavorable caseis when the analog channel is converted shortly before the transfer of a new output valueand is not converted again until after the conversion of the other channels (cycle time).This figure shows the response time of an analog output channel:

Figure D-7 Response time of an analog output channel

tA Response timetZ Cycle time, corresponding to the processing time of the module and the conversion time of

the channeltE Settling timet1 New digital value appliedt2 Output value transferred and convertedt3 Specified output value obtained



Response TimesD.8 Response times for a 4 IQ-SENSE electronic module


D.8 D.8Response times for a 4 IQ-SENSE electronic moduleThe response time of the 4 IQ-SENSE electronic module is specified as a cycle time in the

technical specifications.

D.9 D.9Response times for technological modulesThe response times of the technological modules are indicated as response time or updaterate in the technical specifications. See the ET 200S Technological Functions manual.

D.10 D.10Response times of PRO FINET IO

The response time of PROFINET IO basically corresponds to the response time ofPROFIBUS DP DPV1 with a 1.5 Mbps transmission rate.Depending on the setup of the ET 200S, the device cycle increases by approximately 25% to100% with IM151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA00-0AB0) as compared to an ET 200S withIM151-1 HIGH FEATURE (6ES7151-1BA00-0AB0)..An IM151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0) has in comparison to a 6ES7151-3AA00-0AB0 a25% to 30% better performance. The margin of deviation of the cycle in the IM151-3 PN(6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0) is approx. 50 % smaller as for 6ES7151-3AA00-0AB0.



Distributed I/O System ET200SOperating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14 E-1

EDetermining the Leakage Resistance of an ET 200S Station EOhm ic resistance

When determining the leakage resistance for an ET 200S station (for a ground-fault detector,for example), you must take into account the ohmic resistance from the RC combination ofeach module:

Module Ohmic resistance from RC network

Interface module 10 MΩ (−5%)PM-E 24 VDC power module 10 MΩ (−5%)PM-E 24 VDC / 120/230 VAC power module ---

FormulaYou can use the following formula to calculate the leakage resistance of an ET 200S stationif you protect all the modules listed above withon e single ground-fault detector:

RET200S = RET200S = Leakage resistance of the ET 200S stationRmodule = Leakage resistance of a moduleN = Number of power/interface modules in the ET 200S station

RIM 151 = RPM-E 24 VDC = Rmodule = 9.5 MΩRIM 151 = Leakage resistance of the IM151-1 interface moduleRPM-E 24 VDC = Leakage resistance of the PM-E 24 VDC power module

If you secure the modules listed above in an ET 200S station with a number of ground-faultdetectors, you must obtain the leakage resistance for each ground-fault detector.

ExampleAn ET 200S configuration contains an IM151-1 STANDARD, two PM-E 24 VDC powermodules, and various input and output modules. The entire ET 200S station is equipped withon e single ground-fault detector:

Figure E-1 Example calculation for leakage resistance



Determining the Leakage Resistance of an ET 200S StationD.10 Response times of PROFINET IO

Distributed I/O System ET200SE-2 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14



Distributed I/O System ET200SOperating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14 F-1

FSpecial Measures for Interference-Free Operation FInductive voltages

Overvoltage occurs when sources of inductance are switched off. Examples of this are relaycoils and contactors.

Integrated overvoltage protectionThe digital output modules of the ET 200S have an integrated overvoltage protection device.

Additional overvoltage protectionInductance can only be wired with additional overvoltage protection devices in the followingcases:• If digital output circuits can be switched off by additionally installed contacts, such as

relay contacts.• If the inductance cannot be controlled by digital output modules.Note: Find out from the supplier of the inductance what dimensions the overvoltageprotection device should have.

ExampleThe following figure shows an output circuit that requires additional overvoltage protectiondevices.Relay contact for emergency stop in the output circuit:



Special Measures for Interference-Free OperationD.10 Response times of PROFINET IO

Distributed I/O System ET200SF-2 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

1

2

① Contact in the output circuit② Inductance requires a circuit(see the following figures)

Wiring of DC -operated coilsDC-operated coils are wired with diodes and Zener diodes as illustrated in the followingfigure.

1 2

① With diode② With Zener diode

A circuit with diodes/Zener diodes has the following properties:• Switching overvoltages can be completely avoided.

A Zener diode has higher circuit interruption voltage.• Long switch-off delay (6 to 9 times longer than without a protective circuit).

A Zener diode switches off quicker than a diode circuit




Distributed I/O System ET200SOperating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14 F-3

Wiring of AC -operated coilsAC-operated coils are wired with varistors or RC elements as illustrated in the figure.

1 2

① With varistor② With RC element

A circuit with varistors has the following properties:• The amplitude of the switching overvoltage is limited but not dampened.• The gradient of the overvoltage remains the same.• The switch-off delay is short.A circuit with RC elements has the following properties:• The amplitude and gradient of the switching overvoltage are reduced.• The switch-off delay is short.




Distributed I/O System ET200SF-4 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14



Distributed I/O System ET200SOperating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14 Glossary-1

Glossary

Aggregate currentThe sum of the currents of all the output channels of a digital output module.

AUX1 bus

Power modules permit you to connect additional potential (up to 230 VAC), which you canapply by means of the AUX(iliary) bus. You can set the AUX(iliary) bus individually:• As a protective conductor bar• Additionally required voltage

Backplane busThe backplane bus is a serial data bus via which the IM151-1 interface communicates withthe electronic modules/motor starters, supplying them with the required voltage. Theconnection between the individual modules is established by means of the terminal modules.

BusA common transfer route connecting all notes and having two defined ends.In the case of the ET 200, the bus is a two-wire or fiber-optic cable.

Bus connectorA physical connection between the bus nodes and the bus line.

Chassis ground

Chassis ground refers to all the interconnected inactive parts of a piece of equipment that,even in the event of a fault, cannot carry voltage that is dangerous to the touch.

ConfigurationThe systematic arrangement of the different ET 200S modules (setup).

Connecting to comm on potentialThe opening of a new potential group by a power module. This permits the individualgrouping of the sensor and load supplies.



Glossary

Distributed I/O System ET200SGlossary-2 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Device namesBefore an IO device can be addressed by an IO controller, it must have a device name. Thisprocedure was selected for PROFINET because names are easier to handle than complexIP addresses.

Assignment of a device name for a concrete IO device can be compared with the setting ofthe PROFIBUS address for a DP slave.An IO device does not have a device name upon delivery. An IO device can only beaddressed by an IO controller - i.e., for transferring configuration data (including the IPaddress) during startup or for user data exchange during cyclic operation - after it has beenassigned a device name with the programming device/PC.

DiagnosticsDiagnostics involves the identification, localization, classification, display, and furtherevaluation of errors, faults, and messages.

Diagnostics includes monitoring functions that run automatically while the system is inoperation. This increases the availability of systems by reducing setup times and downtimes.

Direct starterA direct starter is a → motor starter that switches a motor on or off directly. It consists of acircuit breaker and a contactor.

Distributed IO system sThese are input/output units that are not located in the base unit; instead, they aredistributed at some distance from the CPU.• The following are examples of such units:• ET 200M, ET 200X, ET 200L, ET 200S DP/AS-i Link• S5-95U with PROFIBUS DP slave interface• Other DP slaves from either Siemens or other vendorsThe distributed IO systems are connected to the DP master by means of PROFIBUS DP.

DP masterA → master that complies with the standard IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1

is known as a DP master.

DP slaveA → slave running on the PROFIBUS on the basis of the PROFIBUS DP protocol inaccordance with IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1 is known as a DP slave.

DP standardThe DP standard is the bus protocol of the ET 200 distributed IO system in accordance withIEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1.



Glossary


Equipotential bondingElectrical connection (equipotential bonding conductor) that brings the exposed conductiveparts of electrical equipment and other conductive parts to the same or approximately thesame potential in order to prevent troublesome or dangerous voltages arising between these

parts.

ET 200The ET 200 distributed IO system with the PROFIBUS DP protocol enables distributed IOdevices to be connected to a CPU or an appropriate DP master. A feature of the ET 200 isits fast response times, since only a small amount of data (bytes) is transferred.The ET 200 is based on IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1.The ET 200 works on the master/slave principle. Examples of DP masters are the IM308-Cmaster interface or the CPU 315-2 DP.DP slaves can be the distributed IO devices ET 200M, ET 200X, ET 200L, or ET 200S or DPslaves from Siemens or other vendors.

FREEZEThis is a control command of the DP master to a group of DP slaves.When a DP slave receives the FREEZE control command, it freezes the current status of theinputs and transfers them cyclically to the DP master.After each subsequent FREEZE control command, the DP slave freezes the status of theinputs again.The input data is not transferred from the DP slave to the DP master again cyclically until theDP master sends the UNFREEZE control command.

GroundThe conductive mass of earth, the electrical potential of which is equivalent to zero. In thevicinity of grounding electrodes, the potential may not be zero. The term "reference ground"is often used here.

GroundingGrounding means connecting an electrically conductive part to a grounding electrode bymeans of a grounding system.

GSD fileThe properties of a PROFINET device are described in a GSD (General Station Descriptor)file that contains all required information for configuration.As with PROFIBUS, you can link a PROFINET device in STEP 7 by means of a GSD file.In PROFINET IO, the GSD file is always in XML format. The structure of the GSD filecorresponds to ISO 15734, the worldwide standard for device descriptions.In PROFIBUS, the GSD file is in ASCII format (as defined in IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1).



Glossary


Hot swappingThis is the removal and insertion of modules during the operation of the ET 200S.

IsolatedIn the case of isolated input/output modules, the reference potentials of the control and loadcircuit are galvanically isolated - for example, by means of optical isolators, relays, ortransformers. Input/output circuits can be grouped.

MAC addressEach PROFINET device has a factory-assigned worldwide unique device identification. This6-byte device identification is the MAC address.The MAC address consists of:• 3-byte manufacturer ID• 3-byte device ID (serial number)As a rule, the MAC address can be read on the front of the device,e. g.: 08-00-06-6B-80-C0

MasterWhen it has a token, a master can send data to and request data from other nodes(= active participants). Examples of DP masters are the CPU 315-2 DP or the IM308-C.

Motor starter (MS)Motor starter is the generic term for → direct and → reversing starters. The startup anddirection of rotation of a motor are determined by motor starters.

NodeA device that can send, receive, or repeat data on the busfor example, a DP master, DP slave, or RS 485 repeater.

Non-isolatedIn the case of non-isolated input/output modules, the reference potentials of the control and

load circuits are electrically connected.

Parameter assignmentParameter assignment is the transfer of slave parameters from the DP master to the DPslave.

PELVP rotective Extra Low Voltage = extra low voltage with safe isolation



Glossary


Power buses (P1/ P2)Two internal buses (P1 and P2) that supply the electronic modules with voltage. The powerbuses are fed by the power module and connected by means of the terminal modules.

PrewiringThe wiring of the terminal modules before the electronic modules are inserted.

Process imageThe process image is a component of the system memory of the DP master. The signalstates of the input modules are transferred to the process-image input area at the beginningof the cyclic program. At the end of the cyclic program, the values of the process-imageoutput area are transferred to the DP slave as the signal states.

PROFIBUSPROcess FIeld BUS, process field bus standard specified in IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1.It defines functional, electrical, and mechanical properties for a bit-serial field bus system.PROFIBUS is available with the protocols DP (which stands for distributed peripherals, thatis, distributed or remote IO), FMS (which stands for field bus message specification),PA (= process automation), or TF (= technological functions).

PROFIBUS addressEach bus node must receive a PROFIBUS address to identify it uniquely on the PROFIBUS.The PC/programming device has the PROFIBUS address "0".The PROFIBUS addresses 1 to 125 are permitted for the ET 200S distributed IO system.

PROFINETWithin the context of Totally Integrated Automation (TIA), PROFINET is the systematicdevelopment of the following systems:• PROFIBUS DP, the established field bus• Industrial Ethernet, the communication bus for the cell levelExperiences from both systems have been and are being integrated in PROFINET.

PROFINET as the Ethernet-based automation standard of PROFIBUS International (formerlyPROFIBUS Nutzerorganisation e.V.) defines a cross-vendor communication, automation,and engineering model.



Glossary


PROFINET componentA PROFINET component includes all data of the hardware configuration, the parameters ofthe modules, and the associated user program. The PROFINET component comprises thefollowing elements:• Technological function

The (optional) technological (software) function includes the interface to other PROFINETcomponents as interconnectable inputs and outputs.

• DeviceThe device represents the physical automation device or field device, including the IO,sensors and actuators, mechanical system, and device firmware.

PROFINET deviceA PROFINET device always has at least one Industrial Ethernet connection. In addition, a

PROFINET device can also have a PROFIBUS connection and even act as a master withproxy functionality. In exceptional cases, a PROFINET device can also have severalPROFIBUS connections (e. g. CP 5614).

PROFINET IOWithin the context of PROFINET, PROFINET IO is a communication concept forimplementing modular, distributed applications.With PROFINET IO, you can create automation solutions using the trusted and familiarmethods of PROFIBUS.PROFINET IO is implemented with the PROFINET standard for automation devices on theone hand and the STEP 7 engineering tool on the other hand.This means that you have the same application layer in STEP 7 - regardless of whether youconfigure PROFINET devices or PROFIBUS devices. The programming of your userprogram is identical for PROFINET IO and PROFIBUS DP when you use the blocks andsystem status lists expanded for PROFINET IO.

PRO FINET IO controllerDevice by means of which connected IO devices are addressed. This means: that the IOcontroller exchanges input and output signals with assigned field devices. The IO controlleris often the controller in which the automation program is executed.

PROFINET IO deviceDistributed field device assigned to one of the IO controllers(e.g. remote IO, valve terminals, frequency converters, or switches).

Programm able controllerAn automation system is a programmable logic controller consisting of at least one CPU,various input and output modules, and operator control and monitoring devices.



Glossary


Provider-consumer principleUnlike PROFIBUS DP, both partners on PROFINET IO are independent providers fortransmission of data.

Real timeReal time means that a system processes external events within a defined time.Determinism means that a system responds in a predictable (deterministic) manner.Both requirements are important for industrial networks. PROFINET satisfies theserequirements. Thus, as a deterministic real-time network, PROFINET is designed as follows:• The transfer of time-critical data between different stations via a network is guaranteed

within a defined interval of time.• To this end, PROFINET has an optimized communication channel for real-time

communication: Real time (RT).• The time of transfer can be accurately determined.• It is ensured that seamless communication can take place in the same network by means

of other standard protocols, such as industrial communication for PG/PC.

Reference data companionsA value is assigned to every peripheral module in the input or output data telegram whichgives evidence about the quality of this reference date. For example outputs of a module canthus be switched off without influencing other modules.

Reference potentialPotential from which the voltages of the circuits involved can be observed and/or measured.

Reversing starterA reversing starter is a → motor starter that determines the direction of rotation of a motor. Itconsists of a circuit breaker and two contactors.

SegmentThe bus line between two terminating resistors forms a segment. A segment contains 0 to 32→ bus nodes. Segments can be interconnected by means of RS 485 repeaters.

SELVS afety Extra Low Voltage

SlaveA slave can only exchange data with a → master when requested by it to do so. By slaves wemean, for example, all DP slaves such as ET 200X, ET 200M, ET 200S, etc.



Glossary


SNMPSNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) is the standardized protocol for performingdiagnostics and assigning parameters to the Ethernet network infrastructure.In the office setting and in automation engineering, devices from many different vendorssupport SNMP on the Ethernet.SNMP-based applications can be operated on the same network in parallel to applicationswith PROFINET.The scope of supported functions depends on the device type. For example, a switch hasmore function than a CP 1616.

SSIThe positional information is transferred synchronously on the basis of the SSI (synchronousserial interface) protocol. The SSI protocol is used with absolute encoders.

Stationary w iringAll the wiring-carrying elements (terminal modules) are mounted on a rail. The power andelectronic modules are inserted in the terminal modules.

SwitchPROFIBUS is a linear network. The communication nodes are linked by means of a passivecable– the bus.By contrast, Industrial Ethernet consists of point-to-point connections: each communicationnode is directly connected to exactly one communication node.

If a communication node is linked to several communication nodes, this communication nodeis connected to the port of an active network component – the switch. Additionalcommunication nodes (including switches) can now be connected to the other ports of theswitch. The connection between a communication node and the switch remains apoint-to-point connection.A switch also has the task of regenerating and distributing received signals. The switch"learns" the Ethernet address(es) of a connected PROFINET device or additional switchesand only forwards those signals that are intended for the connected PROFINET device orswitch.A switch has a specific number of ports. You connect at most one PROFINET device oradditional switch to each port.

SYNCThis is a control command of the DP master to a group of DP slaves.By means of the SYNC control command, the DP master causes the DP slave to freeze thecurrent statuses of the outputs. With the subsequent frames, the DP slave stores the outputdata, but the statuses of the outputs remain unchanged.After each new SYNC control command, the DP slave sets the outputs that it has stored asoutput data. The outputs are not cyclically updated again until the DP master sends theUNSYNC control command.



Glossary


Technological modulesModules that are equipped with technological functions, such as counting pulses,positioning, and controlling stepping motor power units.

Terminating moduleThe ET 200S distributed IO system is completed by the terminating module. If you have notinserted a terminating module, the ET 200S is not ready for operation.

Transmission rateThe transmission rate of a data transfer is measured in bits transmitted per second.In the case of the ET 200S, transmission rates of 9.6 kbps to 12 Mbps are possible.

Voltage groupA group of electronic modules supplied by a power module.



Glossary




Distributed I/O System ET200SOperating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14 Index-1

Index

11COUNT 24V/100kHz,6-18

Error types, 6-461COUNT 5V/500kHz,6-19

Error types, 6-461POS INC/Analog

Error types, 6-471POS INC/Digital

Error types, 6-471POS INC/Digital, 1POS SSI/Digital, 1POSINC/Analog, 1POS SSI/Analog,6-231POS SSI/Analog

Error types, 6-471POS SSI/Digital

Error types, 6-471SI 3964/ASCII

Error types, 6-481SI 3964/ASCII and 1SI Modbus/USS serialinterface modules, 6-251SI Modbus/USS

Error types, 6-481SSI, 6-20

Error types, 6-451STEP 5V/204kHz, 6-21

Error types, 6-46

224 VDC supply, 5-22DO 24 VDC/0.5 A Standard digital electronicmodule

Block diagram,11-51Features, 11-49Pin assignment, 11-49Technical specifications, 11-52

2PULSE, 6-22Error types, 6-47

2RO NO 24-120 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A digital

electronic module, 11-84Block diagram,11-86Pin assignment, 11-85Switching capacity and lifetime of thecontacts, 11-89Technical specifications, 11-87

44 IQ-SENSE, 6-26, 13-1

Error types, 6-484-wire measuring transducer, 12-17

AAddress area, 6-4Address scope, 6-60Address space, 3-45, C-1Analog electronic module 2AI I 2/4WIRE High

Feature, 12-65Block diagram,12-67Features, 12-65Pin assignment, 12-65Technical specifications, 12-67

Analog electronic module 2AI I 2WIRE HighSpeed, 12-57


Analog electronic module 2AI I 2WIREStandard, 12-50, 12-54


Analog electronic module 2AI I 4WIRE HighSpeed, 12-69




Index

Distributed I/O System ET200SIndex-2 Operating Instructions, Edition 07/2005, EWA-4NEB 780602402-14

Analog electronic module 2AI I 4WIREStandard, 12-61

Block diagram, 12-63Features, 12-61

Pin assignment, 12-62Technical specifications, 12-63Analog electronic module 2AI RTD HighFeature, 12-77

Technical specifications, 12-80Analog electronic module 2AI RTD Standard,12-73

Block diagram, 12-75Features, 12-73Pin assignment, 12-73Technical specifications, 12-75

Analog electronic module 2AI TC High Feature,12-91


Analog electronic module 2AI TC Standard,12-85Block diagram, 12-87Features, 12-85Pin assignment, 12-86Technical specifications, 12-87

Analog electronic module 2AI U High Feature,12-41


Pin assignment, 12-42Technical specifications, 12-43Analog electronic module 2AI U High Speed,12-46


Analog electronic module 2AI U Standard,12-37Block diagram, 12-39Features, 12-37Pin assignment, 12-38Technical specifications, 12-39

Analog electronic module 2AO I High Feature,12-106


Analog electronic module 2AO I Standard,12-102Block diagram, 12-104Features, 12-102Pin assignment, 12-103Technical specifications, 12-104

Analog electronic module 2AO U High Feature,12-99


Pin assignment, 12-99Technical specifications, 12-100Analog electronic module 2AO U Standard,12-95


Analog electronic module 4AI I 2WIRE STBlock diagram, 12-55Features, 12-54Pin assignment, 12-54Technical specifications, 12-55

Analog electronic modules, 6-17, 12-1Analog input modules, 12-14

Error types, 6-44Analog output modules, 12-14

Error types, 6-44Analog output modules in SIMATIC S7 format,12-12Analog value representation, 12-1, 12-13

for resistance thermometers, 12-6, 12-7, 12-8for thermocouples, 12-9, 12-10, 12-11, 12-12

Applications,3-6, 3-9Approval

FM, 7-3

Marine type, 7-4Assigning a device name, 5-30AUX(iliary) bus (AUX 1),3-4

BBackplane bus

Interruption,6-72Behavior of the analog modules, 12-24

during operation, 12-24in the event of problems, 12-24

Brief instructions on commissioningET 200S on PROFINET IO,2-10ET 200S on the PROFIBUS DP, 2-1

Burst pulses, 7-6Bus cable, 1-6

CCalculation of the response time, D-4CE

Certification,7-1Certification

CE, 7-1



Index


Certifications and approvalsStandards, 7-1

Changesin the manual, iii

Changes in the manual, iiiChanging the PROFIBUS address, 4-18Channel diagnostics, 6-68Channel-specific diagnostics, 6-40Climatic environmental conditions,7-8Color identification labeling,1-6Commissioning, 6-1

PROFIBUS DP, 6-10PROFINET IO,6-61Requirements, 6-62

Commissioning the ET 200S, 6-62Compensation of the reference junctiontemperature, 12-18Components and protective measures, 5-4Configuration,6-59

ET 200S, 6-59Configuration examples for ET 200S, 3-1Configuration examples of terminal modules forelectronic modules, 3-20Configuration examples of terminal modules forpower modules, 3-16Configuration options for the interface modules,3-6Connecting cable shields, 5-13Connecting measuring sensors to analoginputs, 12-14

Connecting PROFIBUS DP, 5-18, 5-23Connecting the supply voltage, 5-18, 5-23Connecting to common potential, 3-4Connection, 12-13, 12-18Control interface, 3-36Conversion time, D-8Cycle time, D-7, D-8

DDefinition

Station status, 6-34Degree of protection IP 20, 7-11Diagnostics, 6-1, 6-68

After IO controller STOP,6-75After recovery of IO device,6-75Bus interruption,6-72

Diagnostics readout, 6-29, 6-30Diagnostics using LED display, 6-63Dielectric test, 7-11Digital electronic module 2DI 120 VAC

Standard, 11-41Block diagram,11-43Features, 11-41Pin assignment, 11-41

Technical specifications, 11-43Digital electronic module 2DI 230 VACStandard, 11-45


Digital electronic module 2DI 24 VDC HighFeature, 11-21

Block diagram,11-23Pin assignment, 11-21Technical specifications, 11-23

Digital electronic module 2DI 24 VDC Standard,11-9

Block diagram,11-11Pin assignment, 11-9Technical specifications, 11-12

Digital electronic module 2DI 24-48 VUC HighFeature, 11-29


Digital electronic module 2DO 24 VDC/0.5 A HighFeature, 11-49, 11-59


Digital electronic module 2DO 24 VDC/2 A HighFeature, 11-74


Digital electronic module 2DO 24 VDC/2 AStandard, 11-64


Digital electronic module 2DO 24-230 VAC,11-79Block diagram,11-81Features, 11-79Pin assignment, 11-79Technical specifications, 11-81



Index


Digital electronic module 2RO NO/NC24-48 VDC/5 A, 24-230 VAC/5 A,11-90

Block diagram, 11-92Pin assignment, 11-90

Switching capacity and lifetime of thecontacts, 11-94Technical specifications, 11-92

Digital electronic module 4DI 24 VDC HighFeature, 11-25

Block diagram, 11-27Pin assignment, 11-25Technical specifications, 11-27

Digital electronic module 4DI 24 VDC Standard,11-13


Digital electronic module 4DI 24 VDC/SRCStandard


Digital electronic module 4DI 24<SP>VDC/SRCStandard, 11-17Digital electronic module 4DI NAMUR,11-33


Digital electronic module 4DO 24 VDC/0.5 A HighFeature, 11-54Digital electronic module 4DO 24 VDC/0.5 AStandard


Digital electronic module 4DO 24 VDC/2 AStandard, 11-69


Digital electronic modules,6-16Error types, 6-42

Digital Electronic Modules,11-1Digital input modules,6-4, 6-60Digital output modules,6-4, 6-60

DimensionsTerminal modules (Fast Connect) with a powermodule inserted, B-7Terminal modules (Fast Connect) with an

electronic module inserted, B-7Terminal modules with a power moduleinserted, B-3Terminal modules with an electronic moduleinserted, B-3Terminating module, B-10

Discretely modular system, 3-1Distributed I/O System – Range of Application,1-1DP master, 1-1DP slave, 1-1

EElectromagnetic compatibility,7-6Electronic module, 1-6, 3-9, 5-26

Replacing, 5-27Type change, 5-26

Electronic modules, 3-12, 5-25, 5-26, 5-27, 5-28, 9-1

Identifying,5-25Inserting, 5-25Removing, 5-26Removing and inserting during operation, 5-28

Electrostatic discharge, 7-6EMC, 7-6Emergency stop devices, 5-1Emission of radio interference, 7-7ET 200S, 5-3, 5-5, 6-1, 6-10, 6-61

Commissioning, 6-10Configuration,6-59Configuring,6-1Features and benefits, 1-9Overall configuration,5-5with grounded reference potential, 5-3

ET 200S components, 1-6ET 200S distributed I/O system

Area of application,1-4Definition,1-4Terminal modules and electronic modules, 1-4View, 1-5

ET 200S FC frequency converterVariations in technical specifications, 7-12

Example configuration of a fiber-optic cable networkwith IM151-1 FO STANDARD,3-8Example of a project design, 6-8



Index


FFailure of the load voltage, 6-75Fault types

Channel-specific diagnostics, 6-40FB 192, 6-30Feedback interface, 3-36Fiber-optic cable

Bending radius, 5-22Order number, A-7

Fiber-optic duplex cable, 1-6FM

Approval,7-3Frequency converter

Variations in technical specifications, 7-12Fundamentals, 12-13

GGeneral rules, 5-1General technical specifications, 7-1Grounded incoming supply, 5-3GSD file,6-2, 6-59Guide

to the manual, v

HHeat dissipation, 4-3

IIdentification data,3-38Identifier-related diagnostics, 6-36IEC 204, 5-1IEC 61131, 7-4IEC 61784-1

2002 Ed1 CP 3/1, 1-2IM151-1 BASIC interface module

Parameters, 8-1IM151-1 BASIC/ IM151-1 STANDARD/ IM151-1 FOSTANDARD/ IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE,6-14

Status and error displays, 6-14IM151-1 FO STANDARD

Plug adapters, 5-21IM151-1 interface module,1-6IM151-1 STANDARD interface module,8-12, 8-13

Technical specifications, 8-14Terminal assignment, 8-13

IM151-3 PNMicro Memory Card,8-28SNMP, 8-28Status and error displays, 6-64

Technical specifications, 8-27Terminal assignment, 8-26Updating firmware,8-30

IM151-3 PN interface module,1-6, 8-24, 8-26Parameters, 8-3

Installation,4-1Installation rules, 4-1Installing simplex connectors, 5-21Integrating the GSD file in SIMATIC S5,6-3Integrating the GSD file in SIMATIC S7,6-3Integrating the GSD file in the configurationsoftware, 6-60Interface module, 3-6Interface module IM151-1 BASIC,8-9

Technical specifications, 8-11Terminal assignment, 8-9

Interface module IM151-1 FO STANDARD,8-17Block diagram,8-17Technical specifications, 8-18

Interface module IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE,8-20, 8-21

Technical specifications, 8-22Interface module IM151-3 PN,8-26

Block diagram,8-26Interface modules, 8-1

Interface modules and applications, 3-6interface modules IM151-1 STANDARD andIM151-1 FO STANDARD

Parameters, 8-2Interference frequency suppression, 12-36IO controller STOP

Diagnostics afterwards, 6-75Isolated measuring sensors, 12-15Isolation, 5-6

L

Labeling sheet, 1-6Length of the diagnostics frame, 6-29Life of a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card,8-28Lines for analog signals, 12-14Load voltage

Failure, 6-75



Index


MManual

Purpose, iiiManuals

Other, vManufacturer ID,6-36Marine type

Approval,7-4Marking for Australia,7-4Master PROFIBUS address, 6-35Maximum configuration,3-43Measured-value resolution, 12-3Measuring ranges with SIMATIC S7,12-2Measuring sensors, 12-13Mechanical environmental conditions,7-9Minimum clearances, 4-3

Minimum clearances for mounting, wiring, and heatdissipation, B-1Shield connection, B-10

Module status, 6-37Motor starter, 6-60Motor starters, 6-4Mounting,4-4, 4-11, 4-13, 4-15

Color-coding plates, 4-15Interface module, 4-4Shield connection, 4-13Slot number plates, 4-15Terminating module, 4-11

Mounting dimensions,4-2Mounting position,4-1Mounting rail,1-6, 4-2Mounting TM-E,4-6

TM-P terminal modules,4-6

NNo grouping, 6-9Non-isolated measuring sensors, 12-16

OOption handling, 3-30

Features, 3-30Parameter assignment, 3-34Principle of operation,3-30Requirements, 3-32

Options, 6-30, 6-68

Order numbers, A-1Analog electronic modules, A-4Digital electronic modules,A-3ET 200 manual in SIMATIC S5,A-11

ET 200S accessories, A-6Interface module, A-1Network components for ET 200S, A-7Power modules, A-3RESERVE modules, A-5STEP 7 and SIMATIC S7 manuals, A-9, A-10Technical guide to PROFIBUS DP with SIMATICS7 and STEP 7, A-11Technology modules, A-5Terminal modules, A-2

Order numbers for brief guide, 2-11Order numbers for example configuration

on the PROFIBUS DP, 2-2Output ranges, 12-12

PParameter assignment of the reference

junction, 12-21Parameter length in bytes, 3-43Parameters, 8-1

for analog electronic modules, 12-26for digital electronic modules,11-1for digital input modules,11-1for digital output modules,11-4For power modules, 10-1IM151-3 PN interface module,8-3interface modules IM151-1 STANDARD andIM151-1 FO STANDARD,8-2

PII, 3-36PIQ, 3-36Placing and Connecting to Common Potential, 3-4Placing power modules and connecting them tocommon potential, 3-4Plug adapters

for IM151-1 FO STANDARD,5-21Order number, A-7

PM-E 24 to 48 VDC power module,10-5Block diagram, 10-7Pin assignment, 10-6Technical specifications, 10-7

PM-E 24 to 48 VDC/24 to 230 VAC powermodule, 10-8




Index


PM-E 24 VDC power module,10-2Block diagram,10-3Features, 10-2Pin assignment, 10-2

Technical specifications, 10-3Pollution degree, 7-11Power module, 1-6Power module PM-E 24-28 VDC

Features, 10-5Power modules, 3-11, 6-15, 9-1

Error types, 6-42Parameters, 10-1

Power modules and electronic modules, 3-15Power supply, 3-4PROFIBUS DP, 1-1, 1-2

Devices, 1-2PROFIBUS DP network

Structure, 1-2PROFIBUS standard, 7-4PROFINET IO

Network structure, 1-3Project design, 6-1

ET 200S, 6-1Protection against outside electrical influences, 5-2Protection class, 7-11Pulse-shaped interferences, 7-6

R

Rated voltage, 7-11Reading out the diagnostics, 6-68Recovery of IO device

Diagnostics afterwards, 6-75Redundancy, 3-41Regulations, 5-1Removing and inserting

Electronic modules, 5-28Repetitive shock, 7-10Replacement of terminal box

On the terminal module, 4-9Required level of knowledge, iiiRESERVETechnical specifications, 14-2RESERVE modules, 14-1

Use of, 3-33Response time, D-9Response Times, D-1

analog output modules, D-8digital input modules,D-6digital output modules, D-7Technological modules, D-10

Rules for fiber-optic cable network,3-8

SSafety isolation, 5-3Scope

of the manual, iiiSelf-coding, 5-25Setting the PROFIBUS address, 4-17Settling time, D-9SFC 13, 6-31Shield connection, 1-6, 12-26Shock, 7-10SIMATIC Micro Memory Card

Applicable SIMATIC Micro Memory Cards,8-29Service life, 8-28

Simplex connectorOrder number, A-7

Sinusoidal interferences, 7-7

Slave diagnostic, 6-29Slave diagnostics, 6-32Slot number plates, 1-6Smoothing, 12-35Software requirements

Commissioning, 6-61Commissioning PROFIBUS DP, 6-10

Specific application,5-1Standards, certifications, and approvals, 7-1Startup, 6-10, 6-61Startup of the ET 200S, 6-11, 6-62Startup of the system after certain events, 5-1Station status 1

Structure, 6-34Station status 2

Structure, 6-35Station status 3

Structure, 6-35Station statuses 1 to 3, 6-34Status and error displays, 6-14

IM151-1 BASIC/IM151-1 STANDARD/IM151-1FO STANDARD/IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE,6-14IM151-3 PN,6-64

STEP 5 user program, 6-30STEP 7, 6-68STEP 7 user program, 6-31Storage conditions, 7-8Structure, 6-32

TTechnical specifications

Climatic environmental conditions,7-8Electromagnetic compatibility,7-6Mechanical environmental conditions,7-8



Index


Terminal box on the terminal moduleReplacing, 4-9

Terminal module, 1-6, 5-7, 5-8, 5-9Wired with Fast Connect, 5-9

Wiring with screw terminals,5-7Wiring with spring terminals,5-8Terminal module TM-E15S24-01, TM-E15C24-01,and TM-E15N24-01,9-20


Terminal module TM-E15S24-AT andTM-E15C24-AT,9-24


Terminal module TM-E30S46-A1 andTM-E30C46-A1,9-29

Features, 9-10, 9-29Pin assignment, 9-11, 9-30

Terminal module TM-PF30S47-F1,9-13Block diagram, 9-14Features, 9-13Pin assignment, 9-13Technical specifications, 9-14

Terminal modules, 5-10, 5-13, 9-1, 9-4Wired with Fast Connect, 5-10

Wiring for digital, analog, and technologymodules, 5-13Wiring for power modules,5-13

Terminal modules and electronic modules, 3-12, 9-1Terminal modules and power modules, 3-11, 9-1Terminal modules TM-E15S23-01, TM-E15C23-01,and TM-E15N23-01,9-22


Terminal modules TM-E15S24-A1, TM-E15C24-A1,and TM-E15N24-A1,9-18

Features, 9-18, 9-19Pin assignment, 9-18Technical specifications, 9-19

Terminal modules TM-E15S26-A1, TM-E15C26-A1,and TM-E15N26-A1,9-15

Block diagram, 9-17Features, 9-15Technical specifications, 9-17

Terminal modules TM-P15S22-01, TM-P15C22-01,and TM-P15N22-01,9-8

Block diagram,9-9Features, 9-8

Pin assignment, 9-8Technical specifications, 9-9Terminal modules TM-P15S23-A0, TM-P15C23-A0,and TM-P15N23-A0,9-6

Block diagram,9-7Features, 9-6Technical specifications, 9-7

Terminal modules TM-P15S23-A1, TM-P15C23-A1,and TM-P15N23-A1,9-4


Terminal modules TM-P30S44-A0 andTM-P30C44-A0,9-10Terminating module, 1-6Test voltage, 7-11Thermocouples, 12-18 TM-E30S44-01 and TM-E30C44-01 terminalmodules, 9-27

Block diagram,9-12, 9-28, 9-31Features, 9-27Pin assignment, 9-27Technical specifications, 9-12, 9-28, 9-31

Transport conditions, 7-8

Type-coded, 5-25

UUniversal terminal modules TM-E15S26-A1,TM-E15C26-A1, and TM-E15N26-A1,9-15Use in industrial environment, 7-4Use in residential areas, 7-5

VVibrations, 7-10 Voltage group, 3-4Voltage ratios

For ET 200S with IM151-1,5-6



Index


WWiring,5-17, 5-20

IM151-1 BASIC interface module,5-17IM151-1 FO STANDARD interface module,5-20IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE interface module,5-17IM151-1 STANDARD interface module,5-17

Wiring and assembling, 5-1Wiring rules,5-7Wiring terminal modules,5-12

YY switching,3-41



Index




s

Copyright Siemens AG 2005Siemens Aktiengesellschaft A5E00352937-02

SIMATIC

Product Information01/2005

Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area

Language Titel Page

Deutsch Einsatz der Baugruppen/Module im explosionsgeschützten Bereich Zone 2 3

English Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area 5

Français Utilisation des modules / coupleurs dans la zone à risque d'explosion 2 7

Español Aplicación de los módulos / tarjetas en áreas con peligro de explosión, zona 2 9

Italiano Impiego delle unità/moduli nell'area a pericolo di esplosione zona 2 11

Nederlands Gebruik van de componenten/modulen in het explosief gebied zone 2 13

Dansk Brug af komponenter/moduler i det eksplosionsfarlige område zone 2 15

Suomi Rakenneryhmien/moduulien käyttö räjähdysvaarannetuilla alueilla, vyöhyke 2 17

Svenska Användning av komponentgrupperna/modulerna i explosionsriskområde zon 2 19

Português Uso de grupos construtivos/módulos em área exposta ao perigo de explosão 2 21

µ µ /µ , 2 23

esky Použití konstruk ních skupin / modul v prost edí s nebezpe ím výbuchu Zóna 2 25

Estnisch Sõlmede/moodulite kasutamine plahvatusohtliku piirkonna tsoonis 2 27

Latviski Ier u/moduu pielietojums spr dzienb stamas teritorijas zon 2 29

Lietuviška Konstrukcini grupi /moduli panaudojimas sprogioje 2 zonos aplinkoje 31

Magya A f egységek/modulok alkalmazása a 2. zóna robbanásveszélyes környezetben 33

Malti Tqeg id tal-Komponenti /Modules fi - ona 2, fejn hemm Riskju ta' Splu joni 35

Polski Zastosowanie grup konstrukcyjnych / moduów w 2 strefie zagro enia wybuchem 37

Slovensky Použitie konštruk ných skupín / modulov v prostredí s nebezpe enstvom výbuchu zóny 2 39

Slovensko Uporaba sklopov/modulov v eksplozivno ogroženem obmo ju cone 2 41

Türkçe Patlama tehlikesi olan Alan 2 bölgesinde ünite gruplarının/modüllerin kullanılması 43



Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area2 A5E00352937-02



Deutsch

Einsatz der Baugruppen/Module im explosions-gefährdeten Bereich Zone 2

Zone 2

Explosionsgefährdete Bereiche werden in Zonen eingeteilt. Die Zonen werdennach der Wahrscheinlichkeit des Vorhandenseins einer explosionsfähigen Atmosphäre unterschieden.

Zone Explosionsgefahr Beispiel2 explosive Gasatmosphäre tritt

nur selten und kurzzeitig aufBereiche um Flanschverbindungen mitFlachdichtungen bei Rohrleitungen ingeschlossenen Räumen

sicherer Bereich

nein außerhalb der Zone 2Standardanwendungen von dezentraler Peripherie

Nachfolgend finden Sie wichtige Hinweise für die Installation der Baugruppen/Module im explosionsgefährdeten Bereich.

Weitere Informationen

Weitere Informationen zu den Baugruppen/Modulen finden Sie im dazugehörigenHandbuch.

Fertigungsort / Zulassung

II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 nach EN 50021 : 1999Prüfnummer: siehe Tabelle

Fertigungsort Baugruppen/Module Prüfnummer ET 200SET 200S Fehlersichere Module

KEMA 01 ATEX 1238X

Siemens AG, Bereich A&DWerner-von-Siemens-Straße 5092224 AmbergGermany S7-300

ET 200MBuskopplung DP/PADiagnoserepeater S7-300 Fehlersichere Baugruppen

KEMA 02 ATEX 1096X

S7-400 KEMA 03 ATEX 1125XS7-300 CPTS Adapter II

KEMA 03 ATEX 1228X

Siemens AG, Bereich A&DÖstliche Rheinbrückenstr. 5076187 KarlsruheGermany

SIMATIC NET KEMA 03 ATEX 1226X

Hinweis

Baugruppen/Module mit der Zulassung II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 dürfen nur inSIMATIC-Systemen der Gerätekategorie 3 eingesetzt werden.

Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area 3 A5E00352937-02



Deutsch

Instandhaltung

Für eine Reparatur müssen die betroffene Baugruppen/Module an denFertigungsort geschickt werden. Nur dort darf die Reparatur durchgeführt werden.

Besondere Bedingungen

1. Baugruppen/Module müssen in einen Schaltschrank oder ein metallischesGehäuse eingebaut werden. Diese müssen mindestens die Schutzart IP 54(nach EN 60529) gewährleisten. Dabei sind die Umgebungsbedingungen zuberücksichtigen, in denen das Gerät installiert wird. Für das Gehäuse musseine Herstellererklärung für Zone 2 vorliegen (gemäß EN 50021).

2. Wenn am Kabel bzw. an der Kabeleinführung dieses Gehäuses unter Betriebs-bedingungen eine Temperatur > 70 °C erreicht wird oder wenn unter Betriebs-bedingungen die Temperatur an der Aderverzweigung > 80 °C sein kann,müssen die Temperatureigenschaften der Kabel mit den tatsächlichgemessenen Temperaturen übereinstimmen.

3. Die eingesetzten Kabeleinführungen müssen der geforderten IP-Schutzart unddem Abschnitt 7.2 (gemäß EN 50021) entsprechen.

4. Alle Geräte, einschließlich Schalter etc., die an den Ein- und Ausgängen vonSIMATIC-Systemen angeschlossen werden, müssen für den ExplosionsschutzTyp EEx nA oder EEx nC genehmigt sein.

5. Es müssen Maßnahmen getroffen werden, dass die Nennspannung durchTransienten um nicht mehr als 40 % überschritten werden kann.

6. Umgebungstemperaturbereich: 0° C bis 60° C7. Innerhalb des Gehäuses ist an einem nach dem Öffnen gut sichtbaren Platz ein

Schild mit folgender Warnung anzubringen:

! WarnungDas Gehäuse darf nur kurze Zeit geöffnet werden, z. B. für visuelle Diagnose.Betätigen Sie dabei keine Schalter, ziehen oder stecken keine Baugruppen undtrennen keine elektrischen Leitungen (Steckverbindungen).Diese Warnung kann unberücksichtigt bleiben, wenn bekannt ist, dass keineexplosionsgefährdete Atmosphäre herrscht.

Liste der zugelassenen Baugruppen/ModuleDie Liste mit den zugelassenen Baugruppen/Module finden Sie im Internet:

http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/

unter der Beitrags-ID 13702947.

4 Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area A5E00352937-02

http://www4.ad.siemens.de/WW/view/de/13702947

http://www4.ad.siemens.de/WW/view/de/13702947



English

Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 HazardousArea

Zone 2

Hazardous areas are divided up into zones. The zones are distinguished accordingto the probability of the existence of an explosive atmosphere.

Zone Explosion Hazard Example2 Explosive gas atmosphere

occurs only seldom and for ashort time

Areas around flange joints with flatgaskets in pipes in enclosed spaces

Safe area No Outside zone 2Standard distributed I/O applications

Below you will find important information on the installation of thesubassemblies/modules in a hazardous area.

Further Information

You will find further information on the subassemblies/modules in thecorresponding manual.

Production Location / Certification

II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 to EN 50021 : 1999

Test number : see table below

Production Location Subassemblies/Modules Test Number ET-200SET 200S fault-tolerant modules

KEMA 01 ATEX 1238X

Siemens AG, Bereich A&DWerner-von-Siemens-Straße 5092224 AmbergGermany

S7-300ET-200MDP/PA bus interfaceDiagnostics repeater S7-300 fault-tolerant modules

KEMA 02 ATEX 1096X

S7-400 KEMA 03 ATEX 1125X

S7-300 CPTS Adapter II

KEMA 03 ATEX 1228X



Note

Subassemblies/modules with II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 certification can only beused in SIMATIC systems rated as category 3 equipment.




English

Maintenance

If repair is necessary, the affected subassemblies/modules must be sent to theproduction location. Repairs can only be carried out there.

Special Conditions

1. Subassemblies/modules must be installed in a cabinet or metal housing. Thesemust comply with the IP 54 degree of protection as a minimum. Theenvironmental conditions under which the equipment is installed must be takeninto account. There must be a manufacturer's declaration for zone 2 availablefor the housing (in accordance with EN 50021).

2. If a temperature of > 70 °C is reached in the cable or at the cable entry of thishousing under operating conditions, or if a temperature of > 80 °C can bereached at the junction of the conductors under operating conditions, thetemperature-related properties of the cables must correspond to thetemperatures actually measured.

3. The cable entries used must comply with the required IP degree of protectionand Section 7.2 (in accordance with EN 50021).

4. All devices (including switches, etc.) that are connected to the inputs andoutputs of SIMATIC systems must be approved for EEx nA or EEx nC explosionprotection.

5. Steps must be taken to ensure that the rated voltage through transients cannotbe exceeded by more than 40 %.

6. Ambient temperature range: 0° C to 60° C7. A sign containing the following warning must be put up inside the housing in an

easily visible position when the housing is opened:

!WarningThe housing can only be opened for a short time (e.g. for visual diagnostics). Ifyou do this, do not operate any switches, remove or install any modules or disconnect any electrical cables (plug-in connections).You can disregard this warning if you know that the atmosphere is not hazardous(i.e. there is no risk of explosion).

List of Approved Subassemblies/Modules

You will find the list of approved subassemblies/modules under the ID 13702947

on the Internet:http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/.


http://www4.ad.siemens.de/WW/view/en/13702947





Français

Utilisation des modules / coupleurs dans la zone àrisque d'explosion 2

Zone 2

Les environnements à risque d'explosion sont répartis en zones. Les zones sedistinguent par la probabilité de présence d'une atmosphère explosive.

Zone Risque d'explosion Exemple2 Formation rare et brève d'une

atmosphère gazeuse explosiveEnvironnement de raccords à joints platsdans le cas de conduites dans des locauxfermés

Zone sûre Non A l'extérieur de la zone 2Utilisation standard de périphériedécentralisée

Vous trouverez ci-après des remarques importantes pour l'installation de la stationde périphérie décentralisée des modules / coupleurs dans la zone à risqued'explosion.

Informations complémentaires

Des informations complémentaires sur les modules / cartouches se trouvent dansle manuel correspondant.

Lieu de fabrication / Homologation

II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 selon EN 50021 : 1999Numéro de contrôle : voir tableau

Lieu de fabrication Modules / coupleurs Numéro decontrôle

ET 200SModules à sécurité intrinsèqueET 200S

KEMA 01 ATEX 1238X


ET 200MCouplage de bus DP/PARépéteur de diagnosticModules à sécurité intrinsèqueS7-300

KEMA 02 ATEX 1096X



KEMA 03 ATEX 1228X



7Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area A5E00352937-02



Français

Nota

Les modules / coupleurs homologués II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 ne peuventêtre utilisés que dans des systèmes SIMATIC de catégorie 3.

EntretienSi une réparation est nécessaire, le module / coupleur concerné doit être expédiéau lieu de production. La réparation ne doit être effectuée qu'en ce lieu.

Conditions particulières

1. Les modules / coupleurs doivent être installés dans une armoire ou un boîtiermétallique. Ceux-ci doivent assurer au moins l'indice de protection IP 54. Il fautalors tenir compte des conditions d'environnement dans lesquelles l'appareil estinstallé. Le boîtier doit faire l’objet d’une déclaration de conformité du fabricantpour la zone 2 (selon EN 50021).

2. Si dans les conditions d’exploitation, une température > 70 °C est atteinte auniveau du câble ou de l’entrée du câble dans ce boîtier, ou bien si latempérature au niveau de la dérivation des conducteurs peut être > 80 °C, lescapacités de résistance thermique des câbles doivent corespondre auxtempératures effectivement mesurées.

3. Les entrées de câbles utilisées doivent avoir le niveau de protection IP exigé etêtre conformes au paragraphe 7.2 (selon EN 50021).

4. Tous les appareillages (y compris les interrupteurs, etc.) raccordés aux entréeset sorties de systèmes SIMATIC doivent être homologués pour la protectionantidéflagrante type EEx nA ou EEx nC.

5. Il faut prendre des mesures pour que la tension nominale ne puisse pas êtredépassée de plus de 40% sous l’influence de transitoires.

6. Plage de température ambiante : 0° C à 60° C7. A l’intérieur du boîtier, il faut placer, à un endroit bien visible après ouverture,

une plaquette comportant l’avertissement suivant :

!AvertissementOuvir le boîtier le moins longtemps possible, par exemple pour effectuer undiagnostic visuel. Ce faisant, n’actionnez aucun commutateur, ne déconnectezaucun module et ne débanchez pas de câbles électriques (connexions).Le respect de cet avertissement n’est pas impératif s’il est certain quel’environnement ne présente pas de risque d’explosion.

Liste des modules / coupleurs homologués

Vous trouverez sur Internet la liste des modules / coupleurs homologués :http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/référence ID 13702947.


http://www4.ad.siemens.de/WW/view/fr/13702947

http://www4.ad.siemens.de/WW/view/fr/13702947



Español

Aplicación de los módulos / tarjetas en áreas conpeligro de explosión, zona 2

Zona 2

Las áreas con peligro de explosión se clasifican en zonas. Las zonas sediferencian según la probabilidad de la existencia de una atmósfera capaz de sufriruna explosión.

Zona Peligro de explosión Ejemplo2 La atmósfera explosiva de gas

sólo se presenta rara vez y muybrevemente

Áreas alrededor de uniones abridadas con juntasplanas en tuberías en locales cerrados

Área segura no fuera de la zona 2 Aplicaciones estándar de la periferiadescentralizada

A continuación encontrará importantes informaciones para la instalación de losmódulos / tarjetas en áreas con peligro de explosión.

Otras informaciones

Encontrará otras informaciones relativas a los módulos / tarjetas en el Manualcorrespondiente.

Lugar de fabricación / Homologación

II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 según norma EN 50021 : 1999Número de comprobación: véase tabla

Lugar de fabricación Módulos / tarjetas Número decomprobación

ET 200SGrupos ET 200S a prueba de fallos

KEMA 01 ATEX 1238 X


S7-300ET 200M Acoplamiento de bus DP/PA

Repetidor de diagnósticoGrupos S7-300 a prueba de fallos

KEMA 02 ATEX 1096 X

S7-400 KEMA 03 ATEX 1125 X

S7-300 CPTS Adapter

KEMA 03 ATEX 1228 X

Siemens AG, Bereich A&DÖstliche Rheinbrückenstr.50 76187 KarlsruheGermany

SIMATIC NET KEMA 03 ATEX 1226 X




Español

Nota

Los módulos / tarjetas con la homologación II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 puedenutilizarse únicamente en los sistemas SIMATIC de la categoría de equipo 3.

MantenimientoPara una reparación se ha de remitir el módulo / tarjeta afectado al lugar defabricación. Sólo allí se puede realizar la reparación.

Condiciones especiales

1. Los módulos / tarjetas se han de montar en un armario eléctrico de distribucióno en una carcasa metálica. Éstos deben garantizar como mínimo el grado deprotección IP 54 (conforme a EN 60529). Para ello se han de tener en cuentalas condiciones ambientales, en las cuales se instala el equipo. La caja deberácontar con una declaración del fabricante para la zona 2 (conforme aEN 50021).

2. Si durante la operación se alcanzara una temperatura > 70° C en el cable o laentrada de cables de esta caja o bien una temperatura > 80° C en labifurcación de hilos, deberán adaptarse las propiedades térmicas de los cablesa las temperaturas medidas efectivamente.

3. Las entradas de cable utilizadas deben cumplir el grado de protección IPexigido y lo expuesto en el apartado 7.2 (conforme a EN 50021).

4. Todos los dispositivos –inclusive interruptores, etc.– conectados a las entradasy salidas de sistemas SIMATIC deben estar homologados para la proteccióncontra explosiones del tipo EEx nA o EEx nC.

5. Es necesario adoptar las medidas necesarias para evitar que la tensiónnominal pueda rebasar en más del 40 % debido a efectos transitorios.

6. Margen de temperatura ambiente: 0° C hasta 60° C7. Dentro de la caja deberá colocarse en un lugar perfectamente visible tras su

apertura un rótulo con la siguiente advertencia:

! Precaución Abrir la caja sólo brevemente, p.ej. para el diagnóstico visual. Durante estetiempo Ud. no deberá activar ningún interruptor, desenchufar o enchufar módulosni separar conductores eléctricos (conexiones enchufables).Esta advertencia puede ignorarse si Ud. sabe que en la atmósfera existente no

hay peligro de explosión.

Lista de los módulos / tarjetas homologados

En la internet hallará Ud. una lista con los módulos / tarjetas homologados:http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/bajo el ID de asignación 13702947.


http://www4.ad.siemens.de/WW/view/es/13702947

http://www4.ad.siemens.de/WW/view/es/13702947



I taliano

Impiego delle unità/moduli nell'area a pericolo diesplosione zona 2

Zona 2

Le aree a pericolo di esplosione vengono suddivise in zone. Le zone vengonodistinte secondo la probabilità della presenza di un'atmosfera esplosiva.

Zona Pericolo di esplosione Esempio2 L'atmosfera esplosiva si

presente solo raramente ebrevemente

Aree intorno a collegamenti a flange conguarnizioni piatte nelle condotte in ambientichiusi

Area sicura No Al di fuori della zona 2 Applicazioni standard di periferiadecentrata

Qui di seguito sono riportate delle avvertenze importanti per l'installazione delleunità/moduli nell'area a pericolo di esplosione.

Ulteriori informazioni

Ulteriori informazioni sulle unità/moduli si trovano nel corrispondente manuale.

Luogo di produzione / Omologazione

II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 secondo EN 50021 : 1999

Numero di controllo : v e di tabella

Luogo di produzione Unità/moduli Numero di controllo

ET 200SUnità ad elevata sicurezzaET 200S

KEMA 01 ATEX 1238X


S7-300ET 200M Accoppiamento di bus DP/PARepeater di diagnosticaUnità ad elevata sicurezzaS7-300

KEMA 02 ATEX 1096X



KEMA 03 ATEX 1228X






I taliano

Avvertenza

Le unità/moduli con l'omologazione II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 possono essereimpiegati solo nei sistemi SIMATIC della categoria di apparecchiature 3.

ManutenzionePer una riparazione, le unità/i moduli interessati devono essere inviati al luogo diproduzione. La riparazione può essere effettuata solo lì.

Condizioni particolari

1. Le unità/i moduli devono essere montati in un armadio elettrico o in uncontenitore metallico. Questi devono assicurare almeno il tipo di protezioneIP 54. In questo caso bisogna tenere conto delle condizioni ambientali nellequali l'apparecchiatura viene installata. Per il contenitore deve essere presenteuna dichiarazione del costruttore per la zona 2 (secondo EN 50021).

2. Se nei cavi o nel loro punto di ingresso in questo contenitore viene raggiunta incondizioni di esercizio una temperatura > 70 °C o se in condizioni di esercizio latemperatura nella derivazione dei fili può essere > 80 °C, le caratteristiche ditemperatura dei cavi devono essere conformi alla temperatura effettivamentemisurata.

3. Gli ingressi dei cavi usati devono essere conformi al tipo di protezione richiestoe alla sezione 7.2 (secondo EN 50021).

4. Tutte le apparecchiature, inclusi interruttori, ecc. che vengono collegati agliingressi/uscite di sistemi SIMATIC, devono essere stati omologati per laprotezione da esplosione tipo EEx nA o EEx nC.

5. Devono essere prese delle misure per evitare che la tensione nominale possaessere superata per più del 40% da parte di transienti.

6. Campo termico ambientale: da 0° C a 60° C7. All’interno del contenitore va apportata, in un luogo ben visibile dopo l’apertura,

una targhetta con il seguente avvertimento:

! AttenzioneIl contenitore può rimanere aperto solo per breve tempo, ad esempio per unadiagnostica a vista. In tal caso non azionare alcun interruttore, non disinnestare oinnestare unità e non staccare connessioni elettriche (connettori).Non è necessario tenere conto di questo avvertimento se è noto che non c’è

un’atmosfera a rischio di esplosione

Elenco delle unità/moduli omologati

L'elenco con le unità/moduli omologati si trova in Internet al sito:

http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/all’ID di voce 13702947.


http://www4.ad.siemens.de/WW/view/it/13702947

http://www4.ad.siemens.de/WW/view/it/13702947



Nederlands

Gebruik van de componenten/modulen in het explosiefgebied zone 2

Zone 2

Explosieve gebieden worden ingedeeld in zones. Bij de zones wordtonderscheiden volgens de waarschijnlijkheid van de aanwezigheid van eenexplosieve atmosfeer.

Zone Explosiegevaar Voorbeeld2 Een explosieve gasatmosfeer

treedt maar zelden op en voor korte duur

Gebieden rond flensverbindingen metpakkingen bij buisleidingen in geslotenvertrekken

Veiliggebied

neen Buiten de zone 2Standaardtoepassingen van decentraleperiferie

Hierna vindt u belangrijke aanwijzingen voor de installatie van decomponenten/modulen in het explosief gebied.

Verdere informatie

In het bijhorende handboek vindt u verdere informatie over decomponenten/modulen

Productieplaats / Vergunning

II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 conform EN 50021 : 1999

Keuringsnummer: zie tabel

Productieplaats Componenten/modulen Keuringsnummer

ET 200SET 200S tegen foutenbeveiligde componenten

KEMA 01 ATEX 1238X

Siemens AG, Bereich A&DWerner-von-Siemens-Strasse 5092224 AmbergGermany S7-300

ET 200 MBuskoppeling DP/PADiagnoserepeater

S7-300 tegen fouten beveiligdecomponenten

KEMA 02 ATEX 1096X



KEMA 03 ATEX 1228X






Nederlands

Opmerking

Componenten/modulen met de vergunning II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 mogenslechts worden gebruikt in SIMATIC-systemen van de apparaatcategorie 3.

InstandhoudingVoor een reparatie moeten de betreffende componenten/modulen naar de plaatsvan vervaardiging worden gestuurd. Alleen daar mag de reparatie wordenuitgevoerd.

Speciale voorwaarden

1. Componenten/modulen moeten worden ingebouwd in een schakelkast of in eenbehuizing van metaal. Deze moeten minstens de veiligheidsgraad IP 54waarborgen. Hierbij dient rekening te worden gehouden met deomgevingsvoorwaarden waarin het apparaat wordt geïnstalleerd. Voor debehuizing dient een verklaring van de fabrikant voor zone 2 te wordeningediend (volgens EN 50021).

2. Als aan de kabel of aan de kabelinvoering van deze behuizing onder bedrijfsomstandigheden een temperatuur wordt bereikt > 70 °C of als onder bedrijfsomstandigheden de temperatuur aan de adervertakking > 80 °C kanzijn, moeten de temperatuureigenschappen van de kabel overeenstemmen metde werkelijk gemeten temperaturen.

3. De aangebrachte kabelinvoeringen moeten de vereiste IP-veiligheidsgraadhebben en in overeenstemming zijn met alinea 7.2 (volgens EN 50021).

4. Alle apparaten, schakelaars enz. inbegrepen, die worden aangesloten op de in-en uitgangen van SIMATIC-systemen, moeten zijn goedgekeurd voor deexplosiebeveiliging type EEx nA of EEx nC.

5. Er dienen maatregelen te worden getroffen, zodat de nominale spanning door transiënten met niet meer dan 40 % kan worden overschreden.

6. Omgevingstemperatuurbereik: 0° C tot 60° C7. Binnen de behuizing dient op een na het openen goed zichtbare plaats een

bord te worden aangebracht met de volgende waarschuwing:

! WaarschuwingDe behuizing mag slechts voor korte tijd worden geopend, bijv. voor een visuelediagnose. Bedien hierbij geen schakelaar, trek of steek geen modulen en

ontkoppel geen elektrische leidingen (steekverbindingen).Deze waarschuwing kan buiten beschouwing blijven, indien bekend is dat ergeen explosieve atmosfeer heerst.

Lijst van de toegelaten componenten/modulen

De lijst met de toegelaten componenten/modulen vindt u in het internet:http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/onder de bijdrage-ID 13702947.






Dansk

Brug af komponenter/moduler i det eksplosionsfarligeområde zone 2

Zone 2

Eksplosionsfarlige områder inddeles i zoner. Zonerne adskiller sig indbyrdes efterhvor sandsynligt det er, at der er en eksplosiv atmosfære.

Zone Eksplosionsfare Eksempel2 Eksplosiv gasatmosfære

optræder kun sjældent og varer kort

Områder rundt om flangeforbindelser medflade pakninger ved rørledninger i lukkederum

Sikkertområde

Nej Uden for zone 2Standardanvendelser decentral periferi

I det følgende findes vigtige henvisninger vedr. installation af komponenter/moduler i det eksplosionsfarlige område.

Yderligere informationer

Yderligere informationer om komponenterne/modulerne findes i den pågældendemanual.

Produktionssted / Godkendelse

II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 efter EN 50021 : 1999

Kontrolnummer: se tabel Produktionssted Komponenter/moduler Kontrolnummer

ET 200SET 200S fejlsikrekomponenter

KEMA 01 ATEX 1238X


ET 200MBuskobling DP/PADiagnoserepeater S7-300 fejlsikre komponenter

KEMA 02 ATEX 1096X

S7-400 KEMA 03

ATEX 1125XS7-300 CPTS Adapter II

KEMA 03 ATEX 1228X

Siemens AG, Bereich A&D

Östliche Rheinbrückenstr. 5076187 KarlsruheGermany


Bemærk

Komponenter/moduler med godkendelsen II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 må kunmonteres i SIMATIC-systemer for udstyrskategori 3.




Dansk

Vedligeholdelse

Hvis de pågældende komponenter/moduler skal repareres, bedes De sende demtil produktionsstedet. Reparation må kun udføres der.

Særlige betingelser

1. Komponenterne/modulerne skal monteres i et kontrolskab eller et metalkabinet.Disse skal mindst kunne sikre beskyttelsesklasse IP 54. I denne forbindelseskal der tages højde for de omgivelsestemperaturer, i hvilke udstyret erinstalleret. Der skal være udarbejdet en erklæring fra fabrikanten for kabinettetfor zone 2 (iht. EN 50021).

2. Hvis kablet eller kabelindføringen på dette hus når op på en temperatur på> 70 °C under driftsbetingelser eller hvis temperaturen på åreforegreningen kanvære > 80 °C under driftsbetingelser, skal kablernes temperaturegenskaber stemme overens med de temperaturer, der rent faktisk måles.

3. De benyttede kabelindføringer skal være i overensstemmelse med denkrævede IP-beskyttelsestype og afsnittet 7.2 (iht. EN 50021).

4. Alle apparater, inkl. kontakter osv., der forbindes med ind- og udgangene tilSIMATIC-systemerne, skal være godkendt til eksplosionsbeskyttelse aftype EEx nA eller EEx nC.

5. Der skal træffes foranstaltninger, der sørger for, at den nominelle spænding viatransienter ikke kan overskrides mere end 40 %.

6. Omgivelsestemperaturområde: 0° C til 60° C7. I kabinettet skal der anbringes et skilt, der skal kunne ses, når kabinettet åbnes.

Dette skilt skal have følgende advarsel:

! AdvarselKabinettet må kun åbnes i kort tid, f.eks. til visuel diagnose. Tryk i denneforbindelse ikke på kontakter, træk eller isæt ikke komponenter og afbryd ikkeelektriske ledninger (stikforbindelser).Der skal ikke tages højde for denne advarsel, hvis man ved, at der ikke er nogeneksplosionsfarlig atmosfære.

Liste over godkendte komponenter/moduler

Listen med de godkendte komponenter/moduler findes på internettet:

http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/under bidrags-ID 13702947.






Suomi

Rakenneryhmien/moduulien käyttöräjähdysvaarannetuilla alueilla, vyöhyke 2

Vyöhyke 2

Räjähdysvaarannetut alueet jaetaan vyöhykkeisiin. Vyöhykkeet erotellaanräjähdyskelpoisen ilmakehän olemassa olon todennäköisyyden mukaan.

Vyöhyke Räjähdysvaara Esimerkki2 Räjähtävä kaasuilmakehä

ilmaantuu vain harvoin jalyhytaikaisesti

Alueet putkistojen lattatiivisteillä varustuillalaippaliitoksilla suljetuissa tiloissa

turvallinenalue

ei vyöhykkeen 2 ulkopuolellaHajautetun ulkopiirin vakiosovellukset

Seuraavasta löydätte tärkeitä ohjeita rakenneryhmien/moduulien asennukseenräjähdysvaarannetuilla alueilla.

Lisätietoja

Lisätietoja rakenneryhmiin/moduuleihin löydätte niihin kuuluvista ohjekirjasta.

Valmistuspaikka / Hyväksyntä

II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 EN 50021 mukaan: 1999

Tarkastusnumero: katso taulukkoValmistuspaikka Rakenneryhmät/moduulit Tarkastusnumero

ET 200SET 200S läpi-iskuvarmatrakenneryhmät

KEMA 01 ATEX 1238X


ET 200MVäyläkytkin DP/PADignoositoistinS7-300 läpi-iskuvarmatrakenneryhmät

KEMA 02 ATEX 1096X



KEMA 03 ATEX 1228X



Ohje

Rakenneryhmät/moduulit hyväksynnän II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 kanssasaadaan käyttää ainoastaan laitekategorian 3 SIMATIC-järjestelmissä.

Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area A5E00352937-02

17



Suomi

Kunnossapito

Korjausta varten täytyy kyseinen rakenneryhmä/moduuli lähettäävalmistuspaikkaan. Korjaus voidaan suorittaa ainoastaan siellä.

Erityiset vaatimukset

1. Rakenneryhmät/moduulit täytyy asentaa kytkentäkaappiin tai metalliseenkoteloon. Näiden täytyy olla vähintään kotelointiluokan IP 54 mukaisia. Tällöinon huomioitava ympäristöolosuhteet, johon laite asennetaan. Kotelolle täytyyolla valmistajaselvitys vyöhykettä 2 varten (EN 50021 mukaan).

2. Kun johdolla tai tämän kotelon johdon sisäänviennillä saavutetaan > 70 °Clämpötila tai kun käyttöolosuhteissa lämpötila voi piuhajaotuksella olla > 80 °C,täytyy johdon lämpötilaominaisuuksien vastata todellisesti mitattuja lämpötiloja.

3. Käytettyjen johtojen sisäänohjauksien täytyy olla vaaditun IP-kotelointiluokan jakohdan 7.2 (EN 50021 mukaan) mukaisia.

4. Kaikkien laitteiden, kytkimet jne. mukaan lukien, jotka liitetään SIMATIC-

järjestelmien tuloille ja lähdöille, täytyy olla hyväksyttyjä tyypin EEx nA taiEEx nC räjähdyssuojausta varten.5. Toimenpiteet täytyy suorittaa, ettei nimellisjännite voi transienttien kautta ylittyä

enemmän kuin 40 %.6. Ympäristölämpötila-alue: 0° C ... 60° C

7. Kotelon sisälle, avauksen jälkeen näkyvälle paikalle, on kiinnitettävä kilpi, jossaon seuraava varoitus:

! VaroitusKotelo saadaan avata ainoastaan lyhyeksi ajaksi, esim. visuaalista diagnoosiavarten. Älä tällöin käytä mitään kytkimiä, vedä tai liitä mitään rakenneryhmiä,äläkä erota mitään sähköjohtoja (pistoliittimiä).Tätä varoitusta ei tarvitse huomioida, kun on tiedossa, että minkäänlaistaräjähdysvaarannettua ilmakehää ei ole olemassa.

Hyväksyttyjen rakenneryhmien/moduulien lista

Lista hyväksytyistä rakennesarjoista/moduuleista löytyy internetistä osoitteesta:http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/

käyttäjätunnuksella 13702947.






Svenska

Användning av komponentgrupperna/modulerna iexplosionsriskområde zon 2

Zon 2

Explosionsriskområden delas in i zoner. Zonerna delas in enligt sannolikheten atten atmosfär med explosionsfara föreligger.

Zon Explosionsfara Exempel2 Explosiv gasatmosfär uppstår

endast sällan eller kortvarigtOmråden kring flänsförbindelser medpackningar vid rörledningar i slutnautrymmen

Säkertområde

Nej Utanför zon 2Standardanvändning av decentralperiferi

Nedan följer viktiga anvisningar om installationen avkomponentgrupperna/modulerna i ett explosionsriskområde.

Ytterligare information

Ytterligare information om komponentgrupperna/modulerna finner du i tillhörandehandbok.

Tillverkningsort / Godkännande

II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 enligt EN 50021 : 1999

Kontrollnummer: se tabell

Tillverkningsort Komponentgrupper/moduler

Kontrollnummer

ET 200SET 200S Felsäkrakomponentgrupper

KEMA 01 ATEX 1238X


S7-300ET 200MBusskoppling DP/PADiagnosrepeater S7-300 Felsäkrakomponentgrupper

KEMA 02 ATEX 1096X



KEMA 03 ATEX 1228X






Svenska

Anvisning

Komponentgrupper/moduler med godkännande II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 fårendast användas i SIMATIC-system i apparatgrupp 3.

UnderhållVid reparation måste den aktuella komponentgrupperna/modulerna insändas tilltillverkaren. Reparationer får endast genomföras där.

Särskilda villkor

1. Komponentgrupperna/modulerna måste monteras i ett kopplingsskåp ellermetallhus. Dessa måste minst vara av skyddsklass IP 54. Därvid skaomgivningsvillkoren där enheten installeras beaktas. För kåpan måste entillverkardeklaration för zon 2 föreligga (enligt EN 50021).

2. Om en temperatur på > 70°C uppnås vid husets kabel resp kabelinföring under

driftvillkor eller om temperaturen vid trådförgreningen kan vara > 80°C under driftvillkor, måste kabelns temperaturegenskaper överensstämma med denverkligen uppmätta temperaturen.

3. De använda kabelinföringarna måste uppfylla kraven i det krävda IP-skyddsutförandet och i avsnitt 7.2 (enligt EN 50021).

4. Alla apparater, inklusive brytare osv, som ansluts till in- och utgångarna påSIMATIC-system, måste vara godkända för explosionsskydd av typ EEx nAeller EEx nC.

5. Åtgärder måste vidtas så, att märkspänningen ej kan överskridas med mer än40 % genom transienter.

6. Omgivningstemperatur: 0° C till 60° C7. När huset öppnats ska en skylt med följande varning monteras på ett tydligt

synligt ställe huset:

! VarningHuset får endast öppnas under kort tid, t ex för visuell diagnos. Använd därvidinga brytare, lossa eller anslut inga enheter och frånskilj inga elektriska ledningar (insticksanslutningar).Ingen hänsyn måste tas till denna varning om det är säkert att det inte råder någon explosionsfarlig atmosfär.

Lista över godkända komponentgrupper/moduler

Lista över godkända komponentgrupper/moduler finns på Internetadressen:http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/under bidrags-ID 13702947.






Português

Uso de grupos construtivos/módulos em área expostaao perigo de explosão 2

Zona 2

As áreas expostas ao perigo de explosão são divididas em zonas. As zonas sãodiferenciadas de acordo com a probabilidade da existência de uma atmosferaexplosiva.

Zona Perigo de explosão Exemplo2 Só raramente e por um breve

período de tempo surgematmosferas explosivas

Áreas em torno de ligações flangeadascom vedações chatas em tubulações emrecintos fechados

Área segura não fora da zona 2 Aplicações descentralizadas deperiferia descentralizada

A seguir, o encontrará avisos importantes para a instalação de gruposconstrutivos/ módulos em área exposta ao perigo de explosão.

Mais informações

Para obter mais informações sobre grupos construtivos/módulos, consulte orespectivo manual.

Local de produção / Licença

II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 seg. EN 50021 : 1999Número de ensaio : veja a tabela

Local de produção Gruposconstrutivos/módulos

N° de ensaio

ET 200SET 200S Grupos construtivosprotegidos contra erro

KEMA 01 ATEX 1238X

Siemens AG, Bereich A&DWerner-von-Siemens-Straße 5092224 Amberg Alemanha S7-300

ET 200M Acoplador bus DP/PARepetidor de diagnósticoS7-300 Grupos construtivosprotegidos contra erro

KEMA 02 ATEX 1096X



KEMA 03 ATEX 1228X

Siemens AG, Bereich A&DÖstliche Rheinbrückenstr. 5076187 Karlsruhe Alemanha





Português

Aviso

Os grupos construtivos/módulos com a licença II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 sópodem ser aplicados em sistemas SIMATIC da categoria de aparelho 3.

ReparoOs grupos construtivos/módulos em questão devem ser remetidos para o local deprodução a fim de que seja realizado o reparo. Apenas lá deve ser efetuado oreparo.

Condições especiais

1. Os grupos construtivos/módulos devem ser montados em um armário dedistribuição ou em uma caixa metálica. Estes devem garantir no mínimo o tipode protecção IP 54. Durante este trabalho deverão ser levados emconsideração as condições locais, nas quais o aparelho será instalado. Para acaixa deverá ser apresentada uma declaração do fabricante para a zona 2 (deacordo com EN 50021).

2. Caso no cabo ou na entrada do cabo desta carcaça sob as condiçõesoperacionais seja atingida uma temperatura de > 70 °C, ou caso sob condiçõesoperacionais a temperatura na ramificação do fio poderá atingir > 80 °C, ascaraterísticas de temperatura deverão corresponder às temperaturas realmentemedidas.

3. As entradas de cabo utilizadas devem corresponder ao tipo exigido deprotecção IP e à seção 7.2 (de acordo com o EN 50021).

4. Todos os aparelhos, inclusive as chaves, etc., que estejam conectadas ementradas e saídas dos sistemas SIMATIC devem possuir a licença para aprotecção de explosão do tipo EEx nA ou EEx nC.

5. Precisam ser tomadas medidas para que a tensão nominal através detransitórios não possa ser ultrapassada em mais que 40 %.

6. Área de temperatura ambiente: 0° C até 60° C7. No âmbito da carcaça deve ser colocada, após a abertura, em um ponto bem

visível uma placa com a seguinte advertência:

! Advertência A carcaça deve ser aberta apenas por um breve período de tempo, por ex. paradiagnóstico visual. Não acione nenhum interruptor, não retire ou conecte nenhum

módulo e não separe nenhum fio elétrico (ligações de tomada).Esta advertência poderá ser ignorada caso se saiba que não há nenhumaatmosfera sujeita ao perigo de explosão.

Lista dos grupos construtivos/módulos autorizados

A lista com os grupos construtivos/módulos autorizados encontram-se na Internet:http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/

sob o número de ID 13702947.






µ µ /µ , 2

2

. µ µ .

µ2

µ µ µ

µ µ

2

µ µ

µ µµ /µ .

µ µ /µ .

/

II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 µ µ

EN 50021 : 1999µ :

µ µ /µ µ.

ET 200SET 200S

µ µ

KEMA 01 ATEX 1238X


S7-300ET 200M

DP/PA S7-300

µ µ

KEMA 02 ATEX 1096X



KEMA 03 ATEX 1228X






µ µ / µ µ II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6

µ µ µ µ SIMATIC 3.

µ µ µ /µ . .

1. µ µ /µ µ µ µ µ .

µ IP 54 ( EN 60529).

, . µ 2 ( µ µ EN 50021).

2. µ µ 70 °C µ µ

µ µ 80 °C, µ µ µ µ µ µ .

3. µ µ µµ µ µ IP 54 7.2 ( µ µ

EN 50021).

4. , µ µ µ . ., µ SIMATIC, µ EEx nA EEx nC.

5. µ , µ µ µ µ µ 40 %.

6. µ : 0° C 60° C7. µ µ µ µ

µ µ µ :

! µ µ µ µ , . .

. , µ µ µ µ µ µ ( µ µ µ ).

’ , µ .

µ µ µ /µ

µ µ µ µ /µ :http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/µ µ 13702947.






esky

Použití konstruk ních skupin / modul v prost edí snebezpe ím výbuchu Zóna 2

Zóna 2

Oblasti s nebezpe ím výbuchu jsou rozd leny do zón. Zóny jsou rozlišeny podlepravd podobnosti výskytu explosivní atmosféry.

Zóna Nebezpe í exploze P íklad2 Explosivní plynová atmosféra

se vyskytuje pouze z ídka akrátkodob

Oblasti kolem p írubových spoj splochým t sn ním u potrubí v uzav enýchprostorech

Bezpe náoblast

není Mimo zónu 2Standardní aplikace necentrálníchperiferií

Dále naleznete d ležité pokyny pro instalaci konstrukních skupin/modul voblastech s nebezpe ím výbuchu.

Další informace

Další informace ke konstrukním skupinám/modul m naleznete v p íslušnép íru ce.

Místo výroby / Registrace

II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 dle EN 50021 : 1999

Zkušební íslo: viz tabulka

Místo výroby Konstruk ní skupiny/Moduly Kontrolní ísloET 200SET 200S Konstruk ní skupinyodolné proti chybám

KEMA 01 ATEX 1238X


ET 200MSpojka sb rnice DP/PADiagnostické transla ní reléS7-300 Konstruk ní skupiny odolnéproti chybám

KEMA 02 ATEX 1096X



KEMA 03 ATEX 1228X






esky

Upozorn ní

Konstruk ní skupiny/Moduly s osvd ením II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 sm jí býtpoužity pouze v systémech SIMATIC, p ístrojové kategorie 3.

ÚdržbaK oprav musí být p íslušné konstruk ní skupiny/moduly zaslány do výrobníhomísta. Oprava smí být provedena pouze zde.

Zvláštní podmínky

1. Konstruk ní skupiny/moduly musí být zabudovány v rozvad i nebo kovovémkrytu. Ty musí minimáln zajiš ovat druh ochrany IP 54 (dle EN 60529). P itom je nutno respektovat okolní podmínky, v nichž je p ístroj instalován. Pro krytmusí být k dispozici prohlášení výrobce pro zónu 2 (dle EN 50021).

2. Pokud je na kabelu pop . kabelovém vedení tohoto krytu dosaženo zaprovozních podmínek teploty > 70 °C, nebo když za provozních podmínekm že být na kabelových v tvích teplota > 80 °C, musí teplotní vlastnosti kabelusouhlasit se skute n nam enými teplotami.

3. Použité kabelové p ívody musí odpovídat požadovanému druhu ochrany IP aodstavci 7.2 (dle EN 50021).

4. Všechny p ístroje, v etn spína atd. napojených na vstupy a výstupy systémSIMATIC, musí mít osvd ení v i výbuchu typu EEx nA nebo EEx nC.

5. Musí být provedena opat ení k zamezení p echodného p ekro ení jmenovitéhonap tí, nep esahující více než 40 %.

6. Rozsah teploty okolí: 0° C do 60° C

7. Uvnit krytu je nutno na dob e viditelném míst po otev ení p ipevnit štítek snásledujícím varováním:

! VarováníKryt smí být otev en pouze krátce, nap . pro vizuální diagnostiku. Nepoužívejtep itom žádný spína , nevytahujte ani nezasunujte žádné konstruk ní skupiny aneodd lujte žádná elektrická vedení (konektorové spoje).Toto varování nemusíte respektovat, pokud je známo, že se na míst nevyskytujeexplozivní atmosféra.

Seznam konstruk ních skupin/modul s osv d ením

Seznam konstruk ních skupin/modul s osv d ením naleznete na Internetu:http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/

pod identifikací p ísp vku ID 13702947.






Estnisch

Sõlmede/moodulite kasutamine plahvatusohtlikupiirkonna tsoonis 2

Tsoon 2

Plahvatusohtlikud piirkonnad jagatakse tsoonideks. Tsoone eristatakse vastavaltplahvatusohtliku keskkonna esinemise tõenäosusele.

Tsoon Plahvatusoht Näide2 üldine plahvatav keskkond

esineb ainult harva jalühiajaliselt

Piirkonnad lamedate rõngastihenditegatorustike äärikliidete ümbruses suletudruumides

ohutupiirkond

ei väljaspool tsooni 2Mittstsentraalse välisseadmestandardsed rakendused

Järgnevalt leaite Te olulisi juhiseid sõlmede/moodulite paigaldamiseksplahvatusohtlikus piirkonnas.

Täiendav info

Üksikasjalik info sõlmede/moodulite kohta on toodud seadme juurde kuuluvaskäsiraamatus.

Valmistamiskoht / Kasutusluba

II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 vastavalt standardile EN 50021 : 1999

Katsetusnumber: vaadake tabelit

Valmistamiskoht Sõlmed/moodulid Katsetusnumber ET 200SET 200S Rikkekindlad sõlmed

KEMA 01 ATEX 1238X


ET 200MSiinühendus DP/PADiagnostikarepiiter S7-300 Rikkekindlad sõlmed

KEMA 02 ATEX 1096X



KEMA 03 ATEX 1228X



Juhis

Sõlmi/mooduleid kasutusloaga II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 tohib kasutada ainultSIMATIC-süsteemides, mille seadmeklass on 3.




Estnisch

Korrashoid

Parandamiseks tuleb sõlmed/moodulid saata valmistamiskohta. Parandustöid tohibteha ainult seal.

Eritingimused

1. Sõlmed/moodulid tuleb monteerida jaotuskarpi või metallkorpusesse. Needpeavad tagama kaitseastme vähemalt IP 54 (vastavalt standardile EN 60529).Seejuures peab arvesse võtma seadme paigaldamise keskkonna tingimusi.Korpuse jaoks peab tsooni 2 jaoks olema tootja juhis (vastavalt standardileEN 50021).

2. Kui selle korpuse kaabli juures või kaabelvaheliku (kaabelsisestuse) juurestöötingimustes saavutatakse temperatuur > 70 °C või, kui töötingimustestemperatuur soone hargnemiskoha juures võib olla > 80 °C, peavad kaablitermilised omadusd olema vastavuses tegelikult mõõdetud temperatuuridega.

3. Kasutatavad kaabelvahelikud (kaabelsisestused) peavad vastama nõutud IP-kaitseastmele ja osas 7.2 toodud nõuetele (vastavalt standardile EN 50021).

4. Kõik seadmed, kaasa arvatud lülitid, jt., mis SIMATIC-süsteemide sisendite javäljundite külge ühendatakse, peavad võimaldama plahvatuskaitsetüüpi EEx nA või EEx nC.

5. Peab rakendama abinõusid, et nimipinget üleminekute tõttu ei saaks ületatadaüle 40 %.

6. Ümbritseva keskkona temperatuurivahemik: 0° C kuni 60° C7. Korpuse sisse tuleb sellisesse kohta, mis pärast avamist on hästi nähtav, panna

silt järgmise hoiatusega:

! EttevaatustKorpust tohib avada ainult lühikeseks ajals, näiteks visuaalse diagnostika jaoks.Seejuures ärge kasutage ühtegi lülitit ega võtke välja ega pange sisse ühtegisõlme ega lahutage ühtegi elektrijuhet (pistikühendused).Seda hoiatust võib mitte arvesse võtta, kui on teada, et ei esine mingitplahvatusohtlikku keskkonda.

Lubatud sõlmede/moodulite loetelu

Lubatud sõlmede/modulite loetelu leiate Te internetist:


lisas-ID 13702947.






Latviski

Ier u/modu u pielietojums spr dzienb stamasteritorijas zon 2

Zona 2

Spr dzienb stam s teritorijas ir sadal tas zon s. Š s zonas atš ir p cspr dzienb stamas atmosf ras past v šanas iesp jam bas.

Zona Spr dzienb stam ba Piem rs2 eksploz va g zes atmosf ra

izveidojas reti un uz su laikuTeritorijas ap atloku savienojumiem arplakaniem bl v jumiem uz cauruvadiemsl gt s telp s

drošateritorija

n rpus zonas 2Decentraliz tas perif rijas ier cesstandartlietojumi

Turpm k atrodamas svar gas nor des par ier u/moduu uzst d šanuspr dzienb stamaj zon .

Turpm ka inform cija

Turpm ka inform cija par ier c m/moduiem ir atrodama attiec gaj rokasgr mat .

Izgatavošanas vieta / At auja

II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 saska ar EN 50021 : 1999

P rbaudes numurs: skat t tabulu

Izgatavošanas vieta Ier ces/modu i P rbaudesnumurs

ET 200S KEMA 01 ATEX 1238X


ET 200MKopnes savienot js DP/PADiagnostikas atk rtot jsS7-300 Pret k d m aizsarg tasier ces

KEMA 02 ATEX 1096X



KEMA 03 ATEX 1228X






Latviski

Nor de

Ier ces/modu i ar at auju II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 var tikt pielietotas tikai3.kategorijas SIMATIC sistm s.

Tehnisk apkope Attiec gu ier u/moduu remontam tie ir j nos ta ražot jam. Remontu dr kst veikttikai tur.

paši apst k i

1. Ier ces/modu i j ieb v sadales skap vai met la korpus . Tiem j nodrošinaaizsardz bas l menis ne maz ks k IP 54 (saska ar EN 60529). Turklt,ier ces uzst d šan j iev ro apk rt jas vides apst k i. Korpusam irnepieciešams izgatavot ja apliecin jums zonai 2 (saska ar EN 50021).

2. Ja uz kabe a vai š korpusa kabe u ievades ekspluat cijas apst k os tieksasniegta temperat ra > 70 °C vai ja ekspluat cijas apst k os uz kabe aatzariem var b t temperat ra > 80 °C, kabeu temperat ras paš b m j atbilstfaktiski nom r t m temperat r m.

3. Pielietojam m kabe u ievad m j atbilst nepieciešamajam aizsardz bas veidamIP un sada ai 7.2 (saska ar EN 50021).

4. Vis m ier c m, ieskaitot p rsl gus utt., kas tiek piesl gti pie SIMATIC sistmuievad m un izvad m, j b t at auj m EEx nA vai EEx nC tipaspr dzienaizsardz bai.

5. Nepieciešams veikt pas kumus, lai p rejas spriegums nep rsniegtu nomin lospriegumu vair k k par 40 %.

6. Apk rt jas temperat ras diapazons: 0° C l dz 60° C7. Korpusa iekšpus , viet , kas ir labi redzama, atverot to, ir j izvieto pl ksne ar

sekojošo br din jumu:

! Br din jumsKorpusu var atv rt tikai slaic gi, piem ram, vizu lai diagnostikai. Pie tamnenospiediet nek dus sl džus, neievietojiet un neiz emiet nek das ier ces unnep rtrauciet elektrisk s l nijas (spraudsavienojumus).Šis br din jums var tikt ne emts v r , ja ir zin ms, ka nepast v spr dzienb stamaatmosf ra.

Pie aujamo ier u/modu u saraksts

Pie aujamo ier u/moduu saraksts ir atrodams Internet :http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/zem datu ID 13702947.






Lietuviška

Konstrukcini grupi /moduli panaudojimassprogioje 2 zonos aplinkoje

Zona 2

Sprogi aplinka yra apib dinama keliomis zonomis. Zonos skirstomos pagal galimossprogios terp s atsiradimo tikimyb .

Zona Sprogimo pavojus Pavyzdys2 sprogi atmosfera b na retai ir

trumpaiUždar patalp vamzdynuose - flanšo sutarpikliais sujungim vietose

saugiojisritis

n ra ne zonoje 2Standartin periferin sistema

Toliau pateikiamas informacija apie konstrukcini grupi ir moduli montavim sprogioje aplinkoje.

Papildoma informacija

Papildomos informacijos apie konstrukcines grupes/modulius rasite eksploatacijosvadove.

Pagaminimo vieta / Saugos reikalavimai

II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 pagal EN 50021 : 1999

Patikros numeris: ži r. lentel je

Pagaminimo vieta Konstrukcin s grup s/moduliai Patikrosnumeris

ET 200SET 200S nuo trukdži apsaugotoskonstrukcin s grup s

KEMA 01 ATEX 1238X

Siemens AG, Bereich A&DWerner-von-Siemens-Straße 5092224 AmbergasVokietija S7-300

ET 200MMagistralin jungtis DP/PADiagnoz s retransliatoriusS7-300 nuo trukdži apsaugotoskonstrukcin s grup s

KEMA 02 ATEX 1096X


S7-300 CP KEMA 03 ATEX 1228X

Siemens AG, Bereich A&DÖstliche Rheinbrückenstr. 5076187 KarlsruheVokietija





Lietuviška

Nuoroda

Konstrukcines grupes/modulius, kuri leidimas eksploatuoti yra II 3 GEEx nA II T3 .. T6 galima naudoti tik 3 kategorijos sistemose "SIMATIC".

Prieži raEsant gedimams, konstrukcin grup /modul išsi skite gamintojui. Tik jis galikvalifikuotai suremontuoti tais .

Specialiosios s lygos

1. Konstrukcines grupes/modulius montuokite jungimo spintoje arba metaliniamekorpuse. Korpuso ar jungimo spintos saugos klas turi b ti mažiausiai "IP 54"(pagal EN 60529). B tina atsižvelgti kitas aplinkos s lygas. Norint korpus eksploatuoti zonoje 2, b tinas gamintojo pažym jimas (pagal EN 50021).

2. Jei korpuso kabelio arba kabelio prijungimo temperatra pakyla daugiau nei70 °C arba laid atšakoje temperat ra padid ja daugiau nei 80 °C, reikianaudoti kabelius, kuri termin s savyb s atitinka išmatuotas temperat rosvertes.

3. Kabeli sujungimai turi b ti saugos klas s IP ir atitikti 7.2 skyriaus (pagalEN 50021) reikalavimus.

4. Visi prietaisai, skaitant ir jungiklius, jungiami sistem "SIMATIC" eigose irišeigose, turi b ti tipo "EEx nA" arba "EEx nC" - apsaugoti nuo sprogimo.

5. B tina imtis priemoni , kad pereinam j grandži vardin tampa neviršyt 40 %.

6. Leistina aplinkos temperat ra: 0° C iki 60° C

7. Atidar korpus , jo viduje gerai matomoje vietoje, taisykite lentel su sp jimu:

! sp jimas

Korpus atidaryti tik trumpam laikui, pvz., patikrai. Neliesti jungikli ,konstrukcini grupi neištraukti ir nekišti, neatjungti elektrini sujungim (kištukini sujungim ).Šio sp jimo galima nepaisyti, kai yra žinoma, jog darbin aplinka yra nesprogi.

Leistin konstrukcini grupi /moduli s rašas

Leistin konstrukcini grupi /moduli s raš rasite interneto puslapyje:http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/

ved kod 13702947.






Magya

A f egységek/modulok alkalmazása a 2. zónarobbanásveszélyes környezetben

2. zóna

A robbanásveszélyes környezeteket zónákba sorolják be. A robbanásveszélyeslégkör el fordulásának valószín sége alapján különböztetik meg a zónákat.

Zóna Robbanásveszély Példa2 robbanásveszélyes gázat

tartalmazó légkör csak ritkán ésrövid ideig lép fel

zárt helységekben elhelyezettcs vezetékeknél a lapos tömítésselrendelkez karimás kötésekkörnyezetében

biztonságoskörnyezet

nem a 2. zónán kívüla decentrális periféria készülékekstandard alkalmazásai

A következ kben fontos utasításokat talál a f egységek/modulok telepítéséhez arobbanásveszélyes környezetbe.

További információk

A további információkat a f egységekhez/modulokhoz megtalálja a hozzátartozókézikönyvben.

Gyártási hely / Engedélyezés

II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 az EN 50021 : 1999 szerint Ellen rz szám: lásd a táblázatot

Gyártási hely F egységek/modulok Ellen rz számET 200SET 200S hibabiztos f egységek

KEMA 01 ATEX 1238X


ET 200MDP/PA buszcsatolóDiagnózisrepeater S7-300 hibabiztos f egységek

KEMA 02 ATEX 1096X



KEMA 03 ATEX 1228X






Magya

Utasítás

Az II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 engedélyezéssel rendelkezf egységeket/modulokat alkalmazhatja csak a 3. felszerelés-kategóriába tartozóSIMATIC rendszerekbe.

Karbantartás

Javítás esetén küldje az érintett f egységeket/modulokat a gyártási helyre. Csak itthajthatják végre a javítást.

Különleges feltételek

1. A f egységeket/modulokat egy kapcsolószekrénybe vagy egy fém házba kellbeszerelni. Ezeknek kell biztosítaniuk legalább az IP 54 védettségi fokozatot(EN 60529 szerint). Itt figyelembe kell venni azokat a környezeti feltételeket,amelyek fellépnek a készülék telepítésekor. A házhoz meg kell legyen a gyártóinyilatkozat a 2. zónához (az EN 50021 szerint).

2. Ha a jelen ház kábelén ill. kábelvezetésen üzemi feltételek mellett ah mérséklet > 70 °C, vagy ha az üzemi feltételek mellett a hmérséklet > 80 °Caz érelágazásokon, akkor meg kell egyezzenek a kábel h mérsékletitulajdonságai a ténylegesen mért h mérsékletekkel.

3. Az alkalmazott kábelvezetések meg kell feleljenek a követelt IP védettségifokozatnak és a 7.2. bekezdésnek (EN 50021 szerint).

4. Minden készülék, kapcsolót stb. beleértve, amelyeket a SIMATIC rendszerekbe- és kimeneteire csatlakoztattak, engedélyezve kell legyen az EEx nA vagyEEx nC típusú robbanásvédelemhez.

5. Intézkedéseket kell hozni, hogy a tranziensek ne lépjék túl a névlegesfeszültséget több mint 40 %-al.

6. Környezeti h mérséklet tartomány: 0° C ... 60° C

7. A házon belül -a nyitáskor jól látható helyen- helyezzen el egy táblát akövetkez figyelmeztetéssel:

!Figyelmeztetés A házat csak rövid ideig szabad nyitani, pl. optikai diagnózishoz. Eközben nem ködtessen egy kapcsolót sem, ne húzzon ki vagy dugjon be egy f egységetsem és ne válasszon le villamos vezetékeket (dugós csatlakozók).Ez a figyelmeztetés mell zhet , ha tudott, hogy nem áll fenn robbanásveszélyeslégkör.

A megengedett f egységek/modulok listája

A megengedett f egységek/modulok listáját megtalálja az interneten:


a 13702947 cikk azonosító szám alatt.






Malti

Tqeg id tal-Komponenti / Modules fi - ona 2, fejnhemm Riskju ta' Splu joni

ona 2

Sezzjonijiet fejn hemm riskju ta' splu joni jitqassmu f'oni. Tag mel distinzjoni bejnona u o ra skond il-probabbiltà li jkun hemm ambjent li jista' jwassal gal

splu joni.ona Periklu ta' Splu joni E empju

2 ambjent gassu li jista' jisplodi jfe rarament u g al mienqasir

oni madwar flan ojnts b'gaskits attif'kanni ewwa spazji mag luqin

ona -gura

le barra mi - ona 2u u normali ta' devices periferalide entralizzati

Issib hawn ta t indikazzjonijiet importanti gall-installazzjoni ta' komponenti /modules fi - ona fejn hemm riskju ta' splu joni.

Aktar Tag rif

Aktar tag rif fuq il-komponenti /modules jinstab fil-manwal ikkonernat.

Post ta' Manifattura / Approvazzjoni

II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 skond EN 50021 : 1999

Numru ta - ertifikat: ara t-tabella

Post ta' Manifattura Komponenti / Modules Numru ta -ertifikat

ET 200SET 200S modules ma jistg ux ifallu

KEMA 01 ATEX 1238X


ET 200Mbus coupling DP/PARipetitur ta' dijanjosiS7-300 modules ma jistg ux ifallu

KEMA 02 ATEX 1096X


S7-300 CPTS Adapter

KEMA 03 ATEX 1228X



Nota

Komponenti /modules bl-approvazzjoni II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 jistgu jintu aw biss ewwa sistemi SIMATIC tal-kategorija 3.




Malti

Manutenzjoni

Fil-ka li jkun hemm b onn ta' tiswija, il-komponenti /modules ikkon ernatig andhom jintbag tu fil-post ta' manifattura. It-tiswijiet jistgu jsiru biss f'dan il-post.

Kundizzjonijiet Spe jali

1. Komponenti / modules g andhom ji u mmontati ewwa swi kabinett jewkaxxa tal-metall. Dawn iridu jiggarantixxu protezzjoni mill-inqas tat-tip IP 54(skond EN 60529). Inti u tagmel hekk, trid ta seb g all-kundizzjonijietambjentali ta' waqt l-installazzjoni tad-device . Irid ikun hemm dikjarazzjoni tal-manifatturier g all-kaxxa g a - ona 2 (skond EN 50021).

2. Jekk fil-kejbil, jew fil-kaxxa mad-dala g all-kejbil, tintlaaq temperatura ta'aktar minn 70 °C ta t kundizzjonijiet ta' idma, jew jekk fil-post fejn jinfirdu l-wajers jista' jkun li hemm temperatura ta' aktar minn 80 °C, il-kejbil irid ikolluproprjetajiet ta' temperatura xierqa g at-temperaturi tabil aqq imkejlin.

3. Id-da liet g all-kejbil li jintuaw iridu jikkonformaw mat-tip ta' protezzjoni IPmitlub u t-taqsima 7.2 (skond EN 50021).

4. Id-devices kollha, swi ijiet etc. inklui, li jitqabbdu ma' l-inputs u l-outputs ta'sistemi SIMATIC, iridu jkunu approvati gal protezzjoni kontra splu joni tat-tipEEx nA jew EEx nC.

5. Iridu jittiedu mi uri biex il-vulta nominali ma jitqabbix b'aktar minn 40%min abba transitorji.

6. Varjazzjoni tat-temperatura ambjentali: 0° C sa 60° C7. G andha titqieg ed tabella bit-twissija li ejja ewwa l-kaxxa, f'post li jidher sew

wara li tinfeta il-kaxxa:

! TwissijaIl-kaxxa tista' tinfeta biss g al mien qasir, per e empju g al dijanjosi viwali. Intiu tag mel hekk, ma tista' tmiss l-ebda swi , dda al jew tne i l-ebda module utne i l-ebda kejbil elettriku (konnessjonijiet li tipplaggjahom).Tista' ma tag tix ka ta' din it-twissija meta taf li m'hemmx riskju ta' splu joni fl-ambjent.

Lista ta' Komponenti / Modules Approvati

Issib il-lista ta' komponenti /modules approvati fl-internet:http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/

bin-numru ta' identifikazzjoni 13702947.






Polski

Zastosowanie grup konstrukcyjnych / modu ów w 2strefie zagro enia wybuchem

Strefa 2

Otoczenie zagro one wybuchem dzielone jest na strefy. Strefy dziel si zewzgl du na stopie prawdopodobie stwa powstania atmosfery stwarzaj cejmo liwo powstania wybuchu.

Strefa Niebezpiecze stwo eksplozji Przyk ad2 atmosfera gazowa z

zagro eniem wybuchemwyst puje rzadko i na krótkiokres czasu

miejsca wokó cz w kana achtechnicznych z opaskami przyprzewodach instalacyjnych wpomieszczeniach zamkni tych

obszar bezpieczny

nie poza 2 stref standardowe zastosowaniedecentralnych urz dze peryferyjnych

Dalej znajd Pa stwo informacje dotycz ce instalacji grup konstrukcyjnych /modu ów w otoczeniu zagro onym wybuchem.

Pozosta e informacje

Dalsze informacje dotycz ce grup konstrukcyjnych / moduów znajd pa stwo wodpowiedniej instrukcji.

Miejsce produkcji / Rejestracja

II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 stosownie do EN 50021 : 1999

Nr testu: zobacz tabela

Miejsce produkcji Grupy konstrukcyjne / modu y Nr testuET 200SET 200S grupy konstrukcyjneodporne na uszkodzenia

KEMA 01 ATEX 1238X

Siemens AG, Bereich A&DWerner-von-Siemens-Straße 5092224 AmbergNiemcy S7-300

ET 200MZbieraj ce cze sprz aj ceDP/PApowtarzacz diagnozyS7-300 grupy konstrukcyjneodporne na uszkodzenia

KEMA 02 ATEX 1096X



KEMA 03 ATEX 1228X

Siemens AG, Bereich A&DÖstliche Rheinbrückenstr. 5076187 KarlsruheNiemcy


Product Information on the Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area A5E00352937-02

37



Polski

Uwaga

Grupy konstrukcyjne / moduy zarejestrowane jako II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6wolno stosowa jedynie w systemach SIMATIC o 3 kategorii urz dzenia.

KonserwacjaW celu naprawy nale y odpowiednie grupy konstrukcyjne / moduy przes a domiejsca produkcji. Jedynie serwis producenta jest upowa niony do dokonywanianapraw.

Warunki szczególne

1. Grupy konstrukcyjne / moduy musz zosta zamontowane do skrzynkiochronnej lub metalowej puszki ochronnej. Musz one spe nia wymagania conajmniej stopnia IP 54 (stosownie do EN 60529). Naley bra pod uwagwarunki otoczenia, w którym urz dzenie b dzie instalowane. Nale y posiadao wiadczenie producenta dopuszczaj ce puszk do u ytku w strefie 2(stosownie do EN 50021).

2. W przypadku, gdyby na przewodzie tej puszki podczas pracy temperaturamog a przekroczy > 70 °C, lub y a przewodu mogaby osi gn temperatur > 80 °C, wa ciwo ci cieplne przewodu musz zosta dobrane do takichwarto ci.

3. Wszystkie stosowane przewody musz odpowiada wa ciwemu stopniowiochrony IP oraz warunkom okre lonym w punkcie 7.2 (stosownie do EN50021).

4. Wszystkie urz dzenia w czaj c w to prze czniki itp., które pod czane s dowej lub wyj systemów SIMATIC musz by dopuszczone do ochrony

przeciw wybuchom typu EEx nA lub EEx nC.5. Musz zosta spe nione takie warunki, aby napicie miana w przej ciach nie

mog o przekroczy wi cej ni 40 %.6. Temperatura otoczenia: od 0° C do 60° C7. W puszce w dobrze widocznym po otwarciu miejscu naley umie ci

ostrze enie nast puj cej tre ci:

!UwagaPuszk wolno otworzy jedynie na krótki okres czasu na przykad w celu kontrolioptycznej. Nie wolno przy tym naciska na aden z prze czników, nie wolnowyci ga ani montowa adnej grupy konstrukcyjnej ani te od cza adnychprzewodów elektrycznych ( cza wsuwkowe).

Powy szego ostrze enia nie trzeba przestrzega je li wiadomo jest, i na miejscunie ma zagro enia wybuchem.

Lista dopuszczonych grup konstrukcyjnych / modu ów

Wykaz dopuszczonych grup konstrukcyjnych / moduów znajduje si na stronieinternetowej:


w cz ci ID 13702947.






Slovensky

Použitie konštruk ných skupín / modulov v prostredí snebezpe enstvom výbuchu zóny 2

Zóna 2

Prostredia s nebezpe enstvom výbuchu sa rozde ujú do zón. Zóny sa rozlišujúpod a pravdepodobnosti prítomnosti atmosféry so schopnos ou výbuchu.

Zóna Nebezpe enstvo explózie Príklad2 plynová atmosféra s

nebezpe enstvom výbuchu savyskytuje len zriedka akrátkodobo

priestory okolo prírubových spojov splochými tesneniami pri potrubnýchvedeniach v uzavretých priestoroch

bezpe náoblas

nie mino zóny 2štandardné použitia decentrálnejperiférie

alej nájdete dôležité pokyny pre inštaláciu konštrukných skupín / modulov vprostredí s nebezpe enstvom výbuchu.

alšie informácie

alšie informácie ku konštrukným skupinám / modulom nájdete v príslušnejpríru ke.

Miesto vyhotovenia / Osved enie

II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 pod a EN 50021 : 1999íslo skúšky : pozri tabu ka

Miesto vyhotovenia Konštruk né skupiny / moduly íslo skúškyET 200SET 200S konštruk né skupinyodolné vo i poruchám

KEMA 01 ATEX 1238X

Siemens AG, divízia A&DWerner-von-Siemens-Straße 5092224 AmbergNemecko S7-300

ET 200MZbernicový väzbový len DP/PAopakova diagnózyS7-300 konštruk né skupinyodolné vo i poruchám

KEMA 02 ATEX 1096X



KEMA 03 ATEX 1228X

Siemens AG, divízia A&DÖstliche Rheinbrückenstr. 5076187 KarlsruheNemecko





Slovensky

Upozornenie

Konštruk né skupiny / moduly s osved ením II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 sa smúpoužíva len v systémoch SIMATIC kategórie zariadenia 3.

ÚdržbaZa ú elom opravy sa musia príslušné konštruk né skupiny / moduly zasla namiesto vyhotovenia. Oprava sa smie vykonáva len na tomto mieste !

Špeciálne podmienky

1. Konštruk né skupiny / moduly sa musia vmontova do spínacej skrine alebo dokovového puzdra schránky. Tie musia zabezpe ova druh ochrany minimálneIP 54 (pod a EN 60529). Pritom je potrebné zohadni podmienky prostredia, doktorého sa bude zariadenie inštalova . V prípade puzdra musí existovavyhlásenie výrobcu pre zónu 2 (poda EN 50021).

2. V prípade, že na kábli, prípadne na káblovom prívode tohto puzdra presiahneteplota pri prevádzkových podmienkach hodnotu > 70 °C, alebo ak na vetve žilymôže by pri prevádzkových podmienkach teplota > 80 °C, musia tepelnévlastnosti kábla vyhovova skuto ne nameraným hodnotám.

3. Všetky použité káblové prívody musia zodpoveda požadovanému druhuochrany IP a odseku 7.2 (pod a EN 50021).

4. Všetky zariadenia, vrátane prepína a, at ., ktoré sa pripoja na vstupy a výstupysystémov SIMATIC, musia by schválené pre ochranu vo i výbuchutypu EEx nA alebo EEx nC.

5. Musia sa splni také opatrenia, aby sa menovité napätie cez prechody nemohloprekro i o viac ako 40 %.

6. Rozsah okolitých teplôt: 0° C až 60° C

7. V puzdre je na dobre viditené miesto po otvorení potrebné umiestni štítok snasledovnou výstrahou:

!VýstrahaPuzdro sa môže otvori len po as krátkej doby, napríklad pre vizuálnu diagnózu.Nestla te pritom žiadny prepína , nevytiahnite alebo nezasu te žiadnukonštruk nú skupinu a neodde te žiadne elektrické vedenia (zástr kovéspojenia).Túto výstrahu si nemusíte všíma v takom prípade, ak je známe, že sa na miestenevyskytuje atmosféra s nebezpe enstvom výbuchu.

Zoznam dovolených konštruk ných skupín / modulov

Zoznam dovolených konštrukných skupín / modulov sa nachádza na internete :http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/

v lánku ID 13702947.






Slovensko

Uporaba sklopov/modulov v eksplozivno ogroženemobmo ju cone 2

Cona 2

Eksplozivno ogrožena obmo ja se delijo na cone. Cone se lo ijo po verjetnostiprisotnosti eksplozivne atmosfere.

Cona Nevarnost eksplozije Primer 2 eksplozivna zmes plinov v

atmosferi je redka in traja lekratko.

Obmo ja okoli prirobnih spojev z ploskimitesnili pri cevnih napeljavah v zaprtihprostorih.

sigurnoobmo je

ne izven cone 2Standardna uporaba decentralneperiferije.

Sledijo pomembni napotki o inštalaciji sklopov/modulov v eksplozivno ogroženemobmo ju.

Nadaljnje informacije

Nadaljnje informacije o sklopih/modulih najdete v priloženem prironiku.

Mesto izdelave / Dovoljenje - Atest

II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 po EN 50021 : 1999

kontrolna številka: glej tabelo

Mesto izdelave Sklopi/moduli kontrolnaštevilka:

ET 200SET 200S Sklopi varovani protiokvari

KEMA 01 ATEX 1238X


ET 200Mbus vezava DP/PADiagnozni repeater S7-300 Sklopi varovani proti okvari

KEMA 02 ATEX 1096X



KEMA 03 ATEX 1228X



Opozorilo

Sklopi/moduli z dovoljenjem II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 se lahko uporabijo samov SIMATIC-Sistemih kategorije 3 .




Slovensko

Vzdrževanje

V primeru popravila pošljete sklope/module na kraj izdelave. Popravila lahkoizvajajo samo na tem naslovu!

Posebni pogoji

1. Sklopi/moduli se morajo vgraditi v elektro omaro ali metalno ohišje.Omara/ohišje mora zadostiti varovanju IP 54 (po EN 60529). Pri tem jepotrebno upoštevati tudi pogoje okolice, v kateri se naprava nahaja. Ohišjemora imeti izjavo (atest) proizvajalca za uporabo v coni 2 (po EN 50021).

2. e na kablu oz. uvodnici tega ohišja v režimu obratovanja temperatura doseževrednost > 70 °C ali e doseže na razcepih vodnikov v obratovanju temperaturavrednost > 80 °C, se morajo temperaturne lastnosti kablov skladati z dejanskonamerjenimi.

3. Uporabljene uvodnice morajo ustrezati predpisani IP zašiti in poglavju 7.2 (poEN 50021).

4. Vse naprave, vklju no s stikali itd., ki so priklopljene na vhodih oz. izhodihsistemov SIMATIC, morajo biti odobrene za zašito proti eksplozijam tipaEEx nA ali EEx nC.

5. Zagotoviti se mora, da nazivna napetost ne prekora i ve kot 40% pritranzienci (preklopih, vklopih,...).

6. Temperaturno obmo je okolice: 0° C do 60° C7. V notranjosti ohišja, na odprtem dobro vidljivem mestu, se pritrdi napis z

naslednjim opozorilom:

!Opozorilo

Ohišje se lahko odpre samo za kratek as, npr. za vizualno diagnozo. Pri tem nevklapljajte/izklaplajte stikal, sklopov ali elektrinih vodnikov (vtinih spojev).Opozorilo ne velja, kadar je znano, da ni eksplozivne atmosfere.

Seznam dovoljenih sklopov/modulov

Seznam dovoljenih sklopov/modulov najdete na internetu na spletni strani:http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/

pod ID prispevka 13702947.






Türkçe

Patlama tehlikesi olan Alan 2 bölgesinde ünitegruplarının/modüllerin kullanılması

Alan 2

Patlama tehlikesi olan bölgeler alanlara ayrılır. Alanlar, patlayabilecek atmosferesahip ortam ihtimaline göre farklı derecelere ayrılır.

Alan Patlama tehlikesi Örnek2 Patlayıcı gaz atmosferi sadece

nadir ve kısa bir süre için sözkonusu

Kapalı alanlardaki boru ba lantılarındayassı contalı flan ba lantıları civarındakibölgeler

Güvenlibölge

hayır Alan 2 haricindeMerkezi olmayan periferi standartuygulamaları

A a ıda, ünite gruplarının/modüllerin patlama tehlikesi olan bölgelerde kurulmasıiçin önemli bilgiler bulacaksınız.

Daha ba ka bilgiler

Ünite grupları/modüller hakkında daha fazla bilgi için ilgili kılavuza bakınız.

malat yeri / Lisans

II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 EN 50021 standartına göre: 1999

Test numarası: bkz. Tablo

malat yeri Ünite grupları/Modüller Kontrolnumarası

ET 200SET 200S Hataya kar ı emniyetliünite grupları

KEMA 01 ATEX 1238X


ET 200MBus kuplajı DP/PADiyagnoz repeater ünitesiS7-300 Hataya kar ı emniyetli

ünite grupları

KEMA 02 ATEX 1096X



KEMA 03 ATEX 1228X






Türkçe

Bilgi

II 3 G EEx nA II T3 .. T6 lisanslı ünite grupları/modüller sadece 3 numaralıcihaz kategorisine ait SIMATIC sistemlerine kullanılabilir.

Bakım ve korumaBir onarım gerekli olması halinde, ilgili ünite grupları/modüller imalat yerinegönderilmelidir. Onarım sadece orada yapılabilir ve yapılmalıdır.

Özel ko ullar

1. Ünite grupları/modüller biralter dolabı içine veya metal kasa içine monteedilmelidir. Bu kasalar en az IP 54 (EN 60529 standartına göre) koruma türüneait olmalıdır. Burada, cihazın kurulduu çevre ko ulları dikkate alınmalıdır.Kullanılacak kasa için, alan 2 için geçerli bir üretici beyanı mevcut olmalıdır (EN 50021 standartına istinaden).

2. Kabloda ya da bu kasanın kablo giri indeki i letme ko ullarında sıcaklık > 70 °Coluyorsa veya i letme ko ullarında kablo telleri (damarları) ayrılma noktasındasıcaklık > 80 °C olma ihtimali varsa, kablonun sıcaklık ile ilgili özellikleri,gerçekten ölçülmü sıcaklıklara uygun olmalıdır.

3. Kullanılmı olan kablo giri leri, talep edilen IP koruma türüne ve bölüm 7.2(EN 50021 standartına göre) dahilindeki taleplere uygun olmalıdır.

4. SIMATIC sistemlerinin giri ve çıkı larına ba lanan tüm cihazlar ( alterler vs.dahil) için, EEx nA veya EEx nC patlamaya kar ı koruma tipine istinaden izinalınmı olmalıdır.

5. Nominal gerilimin transiyentlerden (hatlardaki dalgalanmalardan dolayı anigerilim ve akım de i iklikleri) dolayı azami %40 aılması için gerekli önlemler alınmalıdır.

6. Çevre sıcaklı ı aralı ı: 0° C ile 60° C arasında

7. Kasa dahilinde, açıldıktan sonra iyi görülebilen bir yere aa ıdaki uyarıtakılmalıdır:

! kazKasa sadece kısa bir süre açılmalıdır, örn. görsel diyagnoz için. Herhangi bir altere basmayınız, herhangi bir ünite grubunu çekip çıkarmayınız veya

takmayınız, elektrik hatlarını (soket balantıları) ayırmayınız.E er patlama tehlikesi söz konusu olan bir atmosfer olmadıı biliniyorsa, ibuikaz göz ardı edilebilir.

zin verilmi olan ünite gruplarının/modüllerin listesi

zin verilmi olan ünite gruplarının/modüllerin listesi için internete bakınız:http://www4.ad.siemens.de/view/cs/

Doküman ID 13702947.






SIMATIC Product information to the ET 200S manual ______________ ______________

Introduction 1

Product information 2

SIMATIC

Product information to theET 200S manual

Product Information

Edition 07/2005A5E00583609-01



afety Guidelines

This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to preventdamage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alertsymbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below aregraded according to the degree of danger.

Danger

indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

Warning

indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

Caution

with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

Caution

without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.

Noticeindicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken intoaccount.

If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger willbe used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating toproperty damage.

Qualified PersonnelThe device/system may only be set up and used in conjunction with this documentation. Commissioning andoperation of a device/system may only be performed by qualified personnel . Within the context of the safety notesin this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, ground andlabel devices, systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards.

Prescribed UsageNote the following:

Warning

This device may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical description and only inconnection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have been approved or recommendedby Siemens. Correct, reliable operation of the product requires proper transport, storage, positioning andassembly as well as careful operation and maintenance.

TrademarksAll names identified by ® are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in thispublication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the

owner.Disclaimer of Liability

We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and softwaredescribed. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, theinformation in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequenteditions.

Siemens AGAutomation and DrivesPostfach 48 4890437 NÜRNBERGGERMANY

Order No.: A5E00583609-0107/2005

Copyright © Siemens AG 2005.Technical data subject to change



Product information to the ET 200S manualProduct Information, Edition 07/2005, A5E00583609-01 iii

Table of contents1 Introduction............................................................................................................................................. 1-1

1.1 Contents..................................................................................................................................... 1-1

2 Product information................................. ........... ................... .................... .................... ..... ..................... 2-1

2.1 Startup and diagnostics on the PROFINET IO .......................................................................... 2-12.2 Interface module IM151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0) .........................................................2-10

2.3 Digital Electronic Modules........................................................................................................ 2-112.4 Power modules ........................................................................................................................ 2-11

Index................................................................................................................................................ Index-1

Tables

Table 2-1 Status and error displays of the IM151-3 PN............................................................................. 2-2Table 2-2 Terminal assignment of the PM-E 24 VDC power module ...................................................... 2-11Table 2-3 Terminal assignment of the PM-E 24-48 VDC power module................................................. 2-13



Table of contents

Product information to the ET 200S manualiv Product Information, Edition 07/2005, A5E00583609-01



Product information to the ET 200S manualProduct Information, Edition 07/2005, A5E00583609-01 1-1

Introduction 11.1 11Contents

Introduction

This product information describes corrections and additions to the manual DistributedPeripheral Device ET 200S (EWA-4NEB 780602401-13), release 07/2005.



Introduction1.1 Contents

Product information to the ET 200S manual1-2 Product Information, Edition 07/2005, A5E00583609-01




Product information 22.1 21Startup and diagnostics on the PROFINET IO

6.3.1.3 Integrating modules for the configuration

Asymmetry for insert/remove interrupt from DO modules

Figure 2-1 Asymmetry for insert/remove interrupt from DO modules

Asymmetry for insert/remove interrupt from DI modules

Figure 2-2 Asymmetry for insert/remove interrupt from DI modules



Product information2.1 Startup and diagnostics on the PROFINET IO


6.3.3 LED display diagnostics

Status and error displays through LEDs on IM151-3 PN

Table 2-1 Status and error displays of the IM151-3 PN

LEDs

SF BF ON

Meaning Remedy

* Flashing2 Hz

on Incorrect or no connect telegram – no dataexchange between the IO controller and theinterface module (IO device) takes place butthe IO device is physically linked to the switch.Causes:• Device name is incorrect• Configuration error• Parameter assignment error• The IO controller is switched off, defective

or the bus cable to the IO controller ismissing.


assignment.• Check the device name.• Assign a valid device name to the interface

module.• Check the IO controller

on on on • A factory new SIMATIC Micro MemoryCard is being formatted.

• Wait until the formatting procedure iscompleted. This can take a number of minutesto complete. When the SF LED goes out, theformatting procedure is complete.

on off on • There is no S7 program located on theSIMATIC Micro Memory Card

• No SIMATIC Micro Memory Card is

inserted.• The inserted SIMATIC Micro Memory Cardis full or does not have enough storagespace for the device name.

• No suitable SIMATIC Micro Memory Cardis inserted (i.e. no SIMATIC Micro MemoryCard from Siemens).

The IO device cannot be reached in this state.

• Format the die SIMATIC Micro Memory Card.• Before switching on the power supply voltage,

insert an empty SIMATIC Micro Memory Card

in the IM151-3 PN.





6.3.5 Evaluate interrupts from ET 200S

Diagnostic Process interrupt lostFor the components• 2DI DC24V HF (6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0),• 4DI DC24V HF (6ES7131-4BD01-0AB0) and• 4DI UC24..48V HF (6ES7131-4CD00-0AB0)the diagnostic "Process interrupt lost" is not available at present.

Note

Process interrupts should not be used for technological purposes (e.g. cyclical creation ofprocess interrupts).If more than 90 process interrupts are generated per second, process interrupts can be lost.





6.3.7.2 Channel diagnostics

DefinitionThe channel diagnostics provide information on channel faults of modules.Channel faults are mapped as channel diagnostics in IO diagnostic data records. A datarecord contains 10 Bytes in each case.Diagnostics can be read for a submodule slot, for a slot, for the IO controller assigned slot inan IO device or for an IO device. The determination is reached via the data record number:

800AH Channel diagnostics for a submodule slot800BH Manufacturer-specific channel diagnostics for a submodule slot (coming)800CH Manufacturer-specific diagnostics for a submodule slot (coming and going)C00AH Channel diagnostics for a slotC00BH Manufacturer-specific channel diagnostics for a slot (coming)C00CH Manufacturer-specific channel diagnostics for a slot (coming and going)E002H Deviation of the set configuration by the actual configuration of an IO

controller assigned IO deviceE00AH Channel diagnostics for the IO controller-assigned channel in an IO deviceE00BH Manufacturer-specific channel diagnostics for an IO controller assigned

channel in an IO device (coming)E00CH Manufacturer-specific channel diagnostics for the IO controller assigned

channels in an IO device (coming and going)

F00AH Channel diagnostics for an IO deviceF00BH Manufacturer-specific channel diagnostics for an IO device (coming)F00CH Manufacturer-specific channel diagnostics for an IO device (coming and

going)AFF0H toAFFFH

Manufacturer, order number, creation state, version, etc.

The data record is read with the SFB 52 RDREC (read data record).

Structure of diagnostic data recordsYou can find the diagnostic data records structure and examples for programming in theprogramming manual From PROFIBUS DP to PROFINET IO. The data record that the ET 200S supports, based on the PROFINET IO - Application LayerService Definition V2.0 standard.You can download the standard at http://www.profibus.com at no cost.







Channel diagnosticsThe channel diagnostics for ET 200S is structured as follows with the IM151-3 PN interface

module:

Figure 2-3 Structure of the channel diagnostics for ET 200S with IM151-3 PN





Figure 2-4 Structure of the channel diagnostic record for ET 200S with IM151-3 PN

The bytes 16 to 21 repeat themselves for every further error that is reported in this diagnosticmessage.

Error types of the other modulesThe error types of the power modules, digital electronic modules, analog electronic modules,and the technology modules are the same as for ET 200S with PROFIBUS DP.





6.3.7.4 Interruption of the ET 200S backplane bus

Diagnostics for the bus interruptionIf the ET 200S does not startup, it can have the following causes:• one or multiple missing modules• Terminating module missing• Number of modules exceeds the maximum configuration• Faulty backplane bus (e.g. defective terminal module)If the ET 200S does not startup, it can have the following causes:• At least two missing modules (that is in contrast to a missing module no more gap rather

a separated backplane bus)• Terminating module missing• Faulty backplane bus (for example, terminal module is defective)An interrupt is not generated in the event of an interruption of the ET 200S backplane bus.The information must be read out explicitly by the user. The data record with index F00BH isavailable for this purpose. You can read out this data record with STEP 7 in SIMATICManager via reachable nodes in the component status window. The PG must be located inthe PROFINET subnet.





Composition of the diagnostics for the bus interruptContents of the diagnostics for the bus interrupt:

Figure 2-5 Structure of the diagnostics for the bus interrupt for ET 200S with IM151-3 PN on the

PROFINET IO





6.3.7.5 Failure of the load voltageThe electronic modules behave as follows for a failure of the load voltage (generally analog

and technology modules):• If such a module is removed during the failure of the load voltage, a remove interrupt is

generated.• If such a module is inserted during the failure of the load voltage, an insert interrupt is

generated.

Note

If an electronic module was unparametrized with an IO controller via the applicationprogram, then these unparametrized data are not available after restoration of the loadvoltage.



Product information2.2 Interface module IM151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0)


2.2 22Interface module IM151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0)

8.7.1 Features of the interface module IM151-3 PN

Compatibility of the interface module IM 151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0)

NoteFirmware version of the controller used

In order for you to be able to operate the interface module IM151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0) on a controller, this must be operated with one of the firmware versions listed in thetables below. You can utilize the interface module IM151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA00-0AB0)independently of the controller firmware version.

The following firmware versions are compatible to the interface module IM 151-3 PN(6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0):

CPU CP SOFTNET PNIO

Controller 315-2 PN/DP317-2 PN/DP

317F-2 PN/DP 443-1 343-1 SIMATIC NET-CD

Firmware version ≥ V2.3.2 ≥ V2.3.3 ≥ V2.2 ≥2.0 V 6.3 Hotfix 1

8.7.2 SNMPThe IM151-3 PN supports the Ethernet service SNMP. MIB-2 (RFC1213) is supported R/Wobjects are changeable using SNMP tools and are stored in the device.Remanent stored SNMP parameters are reset to default settings (STEP 7 V5.3 SP 3 andhigher) in HW config dialog "Target system > Ethernet > Edit Ethernet nodes" "Reset" buttonunder "Reset to default settings". Provided that the component has a station name (saved ona SIMATIC Micro Memory Card), this is not deleted. The SIMATIC Micro Memory Card is nota part of a factory-new component. Likewise, the IP address, that is only present when thecomponent is in a switched on state, is not deleted.

After an exchange with a factory-new component the R/W objects in the IM151-3 PN are setto default settings.



Product information2.3 Digital Electronic Modules


2.3 23Digital Electronic Modules

11.13 Digital Electronic module 4DO DC24V/0,5A ST (6ES7132-4BD01-0AA0)

Features• Digital electronic module with four outputs• Output current 0.5 A per output• Rated load voltage 24 VDC• Suitable for solenoids, direct current switches and warning lights• Supports isochronous operation

2.4 24Power modules

10.2 Power module PM-E DC24V (6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0)

Terminal assignmentThe following table illustrates the terminal assignment of the PM-E 24 VDC power module forthe different terminal modules:

Table 2-2 Terminal assignment of the PM-E 24 VDC power module

View Terminal assignment Remarks

24 VDC: Rated load voltageM: Chassis groundAUX1: Ground terminal or usableas any voltage bus up to the levelof the load voltage.



Product information2.4 Power modules



24 VDC: Rated load voltage

M: Chassis groundAUX1: Ground terminal or usableas any voltage bus up to the levelof the load voltage.AUX1 is used as PE.

24 VDC: Rated load voltageM: Chassis ground





10.3 Power module PM-E DC24..48V (6ES7138-4CA50-0AA0)

Terminal assignmentThe following table shows you the terminal assignment of the PM-E 24-48 VDC powermodule for the different terminal modules:

Table 2-3 Terminal assignment of the PM-E 24-48 VDC power module



M: Chassis ground



M: Chassis ground

AUX1: Ground terminal or usableas any voltage bus up to the levelof the load voltage.AUX1 is used as PE.


M: Chassis ground





Documents

Systems Manual Simatic ET200S.pdf